Home

SurvCE v. 2 Manual

1. 0 Backup B cscs Compass Rule Example rw5 SUrvlE Dermc rws Select Compass from the adjustment options dialog box as shown in this figure p504 Process Raw File Cancel No Adjust Crandall Angle Balance Direct Reverse Report Transit Draw Traverse Lines Compass i Review RBRVS File Reference Closing Point Key in the initial occupied point number for the Reference Closing Point and toggle on the Apply Angle Balance option followed by the OK button as shown in the next figure below Process Raw Data Options Cancel Reference Closing Point 1 East 2000n if Yertical Error Adjustment Elv f 100 M Report Point Adjustments M Report Unadjusted Points M Report Sideshots Closed Traverse In a closed traverse scenario the reference closing point will always be your initial p505 occupied point name Note that you will need two known points or one point and a known azimuth for a closed traverse The angle balance point will be the same location as the original backsight and will not be adjusted Open Traverse In an open traverse scenario the reference closing point will be a stored point name or coordinates that represents the known values for the last occupied point in the traverse Note that you will need two known points or one point and a known azimuth at the beginning and at the end of an open traverse one point at the end will be used to close on and
2. Projection list defined in Job Settings under GPS GPS Projection Tab This tab critical for GPS calculation only applies for total station work when Reduce to Grid Coordinates is set on within the Total Station Tab To change the active projection go to the GPS tab under Job Settings Process Raw File Cancel Total Station Proj Dass Other Multiple Measurement Settings Method Average Type Backsight Recip None Hz Distance Tolerance 0 50 Yt Distance Tolerance 0 50 Redundancies Tab This screen covers the handling of multiple p70 measurements to the same point known as redundancies There are three options for Method Use First Use Last or Average For example if you shot point 10 a total of four times you could choose to use the first reading the last reading or average them all If you select Average then the Average Type option becomes available Here you can choose from coordinate or distance measurement If you shot point 10 four times twice from two different setups and then chose coordinate under the Average Options drop down then the 4 northings and eastings computed would be averaged If you chose instead Distance Measurement then the two measurements would first be averaged and then the two distinct coordinates calculated for point 10 using the averaged measurements would themselves be averaged The Backsight Reciprocal option provides special treatment for reciprocal
3. Bsc EE Hot Keys amp Hot List The ALT key commands take the form ALT C Configure Reading or ALT N Next Point The ALT key and the subsequent Hot Key C or N as mentioned here can be entered at nearly the same time or with any delay desired If you press ALT and delay the entry of the hot key you will see a text instruction Waiting for HotKey Press Alt again to return A second ALT returns to the previous position in the program without executing any command ALT lt and ALT gt will brighten or darken screens on At Work brand CE data collectors List of Hot Key Commands Activated by ALT Many of the hot keys work only within related data gathering commands as opposed to working from the main menus Hot Keys vary by command For example in the Store Points screen the hot keys are as follows ALT R Read ALT S Store or Shot Store ALT O Offset ALT C Configure Reading ALT B Backsight p31 Here is a list of other common hot keys e ALT E Target Elevation From the stakeout screen in any Stakeout Line Arc command Offset Stakeout Elevation Difference and virtually all stakeout commands except Stakeout Points ALT E will allow the user to enter an alternate design elevation different from the computed current design elevation e ALT F Foresight Only Toggle When in the Store Points graphic screen and taking new shots ALT F will freeze all but the setup point number backsight
4. Configure GEEN view pt Sets 7 Store Fixed Only GPS Prompt for Total Station Setup Prompt for Height amp Description Prompt for Point Notes 220 Mod No of Readings to Avg TS GPS Enter Store Icon TS Read amp Store M Enter Store Icon RTSAGPS Read amp Store M Configure GEEN view pt Sets Q Use Virtual Keyboard F Wse Graphic Icons Muse Audible Alerts 4 Use Alphnumeric Format Q Show Continous Total Station Angles No of Readings to Avg TS GPS l Enter Store Icon TS Read amp Store M Enter Store Icon RTS GPS Read amp Store M e e Store Fixed Only When enabled only data gathered in the fixed locked status will be stored to the point file If you attempt to store data when the receiver is not fixed a message will appear stating Position is not fix ed Continue storing The program will prompt to store the point anyway This allows for overwriting the Store Fixed Only option without having to go back to the Configure menu p154 e Prompt for Total Station Setup This option determines whether or not the software will display the current setup and orientation values each time the user enters a survey routine e Prompt for Height and Description When this option is enabled you will be prompted after each shot to enter the target height and description Though this adds an extra prompt screen to each shot it can reduce errors as you no
5. Oo0000 Prediction Settings The Leica 1200 has several prediction modes for when the instrument has lost lock The following are the recommended settings while using SurvCE O Select 3 for Manage O Select 5 for Configuration Sets O Pick New or Edit Recommend New for First Time New Input Name Desc and Creator Initials then F1 Store Cont O Select F1 for CONT 8 times until the Automatic Prism Search screen appears p562 O Select the down arrow one time and set After Prediction Search With to No Search by tapping the right arrow key one time O Select F1 for CONT O Select F1 for CONT 2 more times until the Interfaces screen appears O Select the down arrow key to highlight GeoCOM mode and press F5 for Use Make sure no other mode is set To toggle off any other mode highlight and press F5 for Use to toggle off O Select F1 for CONT 5 times to save and exit to the Main Menu Troubleshooting If your Leica robotic total station has any communication issues it is typically a matter of verifying firmware and configuration settings Investigate and note down the firmware version of the various components on your instrument Total Station Leica Wild Older Models e Data Collector Model Many of the older instrument could be set to operate as different models These include T1000 T1600 and T2000 modes Set SurvCE to match your instrument Two different models a
6. If you Read from GPS too early you may find a position but one that is not fully resolved and ends up slowing down the speed at which the rover fixes e Enter Lat Lon Requires you to enter the latitude and longitude for the position of the base antenna This is useful if you are setting up over a monument whose latitude and longitude is known It can also be used over a control point whose position is known from GPS post processing This will put you on the NAD83 NAD27 UTM or other coordinate system specified in Job Settings GPS Tab You can still do a rover based alignment to transform to a local system Rover based localizations are always improved by more accurate base positioning Ifthe GPS detects that your entered Lat Long is not near the current GPS readings the program will warn the user Warning Entered position is more the 5 seconds fram GPS position Do you wish to continue This method should be used if you are reasonably sure of the accuracy of the latitude and longitude it should be at least as accurate as the Read from GPS option or otherwise you will have difficulty getting a fix on the rover If it is a very accurate latitude and longitude you will get the best results Pressing OK leads to the option of store the base position as a reference file similar to Read from GPS p135 Enter Lat Lon Use dd mmssss format Latitude 42 214176909 f North C South Longitude f West l
7. Next the icon has been toggled to non tracking mode which can be energy saving No distances are taken in this mode STORE PNTS BLO E e Tracking and Reflectorless Ifyou switch to reflectorless mode while the instrument is tracking the instrument will be put in standby mode to allow use p560 of the tangent screws For all Leica robotic total stations and for the Leica 1200 Direct TPS Series the timeout for reflectorless mode is 30 seconds You always have the option to Cancel from a reflectorless reading and if you do the measurement will not be automatically re initialized Leica 1200 Robotic The new Leica robotic total station requires the activation of the Extended GeoCOM option before it will allow the use of third party data collection software i e SurvCE or Carlson Field e Activation Information The following information was provided by Leica in document Sul 1 05G TPS1200 Instruments TCA TCP TCRA TCRP require a special key code to operate in Robotic mode when using an AllegroCE RCS running SurvCE Version 1 5 The following table lists the part number for the code Product Part Number Description TPS1200 734754 e0oCOM Robotics License Important Note When ordering a TPS1200 Robotic Instrument AllegroCE RCS and SurvCE you must order part number 734754 this is a no charge item e Procedures for Checking Activation Status A simple way to determine whether the Extended GeoCOM op
8. UTM AWwGS 84 UTM zone 16H USA MADES AY North USA NAD KY North SVWIITZERL4ANDACH1903 4 95 WK EDSO TM O N E f Delete _ Add Predefined o t add User Defined System LISA NADSS MA Mainland Projection mbert Conformal Tonic Datum FADES Edit view Datum New Datum N Parallel 4 693333333 False Northing S Parallel 41 7 156866666 750000 m C Meridian pis False Easting Lat of Origin m 200000 m From this screen you can select the Projection calculation method as well as calculation parameters Projections include Lambert Conformal Conic 2SP Transverse Mercator Oblique _Sterographic Double Lambert Conformal Conic_1SP p539 Oblique Mercator 83 Stereographic Oblique Mercator 27 Transverse Mercator OSTNO2 Oblique _Stereographic RD2000 Oblique Mercator Cassini_ Soldner Transverse Mercator 27 Lambert Conformal Conic 27 Transverse Mercator Alaska 27 Transverse Mercator 34 You may also use the buttons on this screen to edit the ex isting datum or create a new datum definition Define Coordinate System Cancel Mame ISSA Ellipsoid WGSB4 1 a Jaa7aia7 OOOO m Scale ppm L f 298 257223562776 o dx Booo o m rotX mooo oY los m roy lo ss i dz lo m rotz lo M GSF File is relative to WGS84 The Datum definition screen is where you select the ellipsoid and Helmert parameters to apply
9. e Turn to BS With robotic total stations you have the option to automatically turn to the backsight This button will turn the instrument to the previously set backsight angle so that a Check Angle or Set Angle can be performed Once you press OK to go back to the foresight screen the instrument will automatically prompt if you want to return to the previous foresight position Whether in a conventional or Manual Total Station configuration pressing Set Angle and Read or pressing Enter will cause a backsight to be taken In Manual Total Station configuration a dialog will appear for you to manually input the angle and distance measurements Pressing Enter or OK completes the backsight setup and leads to the foresight screen where shots are taken readings are presented and points are plotted graphically Types of Total Station Backsights Handling Missing Information The SurvCE backsight procedure will allow last minute entry of the backsight coordinate values if none are found or will calculate the backsight coordinates using the azimuth and distance of the measurement If both the Station and p200 Backsight have coordinates non zero northings eastings and elevations the backsight azimuth is computed and the coordinate values are not altered Known Station and Backsight Azimuth to Backsight Point of Unknown Coordinates In the case that the coordinates of the station are known and you shoot a backsight point of unkno
10. If you select Add User Defined within the Coordinate Projection List screen you proceed to the screen below p540 New System Cancel System My New Systern Projection Transverse_Mercator bd Datum Load File Hew Datum Scale Factor False Northing 1 C Meridian o ja m zone Width 6 False Easting Lat of Origin o ja m Here you enter the name of the new system and select the projection type and parameters or you can Load File to load a pre defined system stored earlier in the form sys or csl Coordinate Projection g Cancel Type 575 Files es SC EMULATORW32 curwce pelease data AGDASHIGCINS sys AGDS4HIGGINS2 sys AGDE4HIGGINS3 sys alaskalsys AlaskaNADB3_i sys If you select Add Predefined to create a new stored projection system you will be presented with this screen p541 Coordinate Projection Cancel Country USA NADES USA NADES USA MADS AUSTRALIA AUSTRIA BELGIUM CANADA Here you can select the country and then the corresponding system for your area There is a very extensive list of European and Asian systems including in the list The quick access short list of most used projections enhances job efficiency p542 Instrument Setup by Manufacturer Total Station Geodimeter Trimble The following information describes the various options available for the Geodimeter 600 and Trimble 5600 total stations It s i
11. Install ActiveSync You may also choose to download the latest version from Microsoft After the ActiveSync installation starts follow the prompts If you need more assistance to install ActiveSync visit Microsoft s web site for the latest install details Auto Connection If the default settings are correct ActiveSync should automatically connect to the mobile device When you see a dialog on the mobile device that asks you if you want to connect press Yes Manual Connection pll If nothing happens when you connect the cable check to see if you have the ActiveSync icon in your system tray If you see this icon right click on it and choose Connection Settings You should see the following dialog Connection Settings Be sure that you have selected the appropriate COM port or USB options Assuming that you are using a COM port connection you will choose the COM port usually this will be COM1 Click Connect at the top right You will now see the Get Connected dialog p12 Get Connected Get Connected To connect your device to this PC 1 Connect the cable to the PC 2 Tum on the device 3 Place the device in its crade ActiveSync should sulomatcaly detect your device F your device is not automaticaly detected click Next F you are using infrared H or Bluetooth chock Heip te conc Heo _ You now need to manually link to the remote device Focus on the mobile device while still observ
12. MAP VIEW He Hinged gt 28281 01945 F 0 6492ACRES Cmd 24000 Layer 0 FILE WIEvY DRAW COGO gt Cmd Layer CY Note how the hinged side occurred on the clockwise side of the polygon perimeter side 57 to 43 If we erase the new polyline reverse the original polyline RV and repeat the command this time answering No to Keep existing and again targeting 24000 s f area we get the following p481 MAP VIEW E x FevPline Select polyline Layer D tke HE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Layer D SS Sliding Area SA This command adjusts one side of a polyline to meet a specified area Y ou must specify the new area in the same units as specified under Job Settings The area to adjust must be a closed polyline After executing the command select the polyline SurvCE will then ask you if you want to keep the existing polyline If you answer Yes a new polyline with the desired area is created if you answer No the polyline you pick is modified Next the current area of the polyline is shown At this point p482 enter the new area in the units specified under Job Settings If your units are set to feet the area will be specified in square feet Let s choose to divide our new parcel into two equal areas of 12 000 square feet each MAP VIEW Sliding4 gt 24000 00005 F 0 55104CRES i 12000 Layer p483 MAP VIEW Slope Report SR This command reports the horizonta
13. Station Address 5 hi Remote Address 6 7 Channel Specifices the channel of the GeoRadio Station Address Specifies the station address of the GeoRadio Remote Address Specifies the remote address of the instrument s radio Putting the 600 in the Remote Mode Se et ee ee st i tl tC d O akwONM O Power the 600 on Answer the initial questions If you have not selected the Radio Channels and Address do the following Press lt Menu gt lt 1 gt for Set lt 5 gt for Radio Select Channel 1 8 Select Station Address 1 99 Select Radio Address 1 99 Press lt RPU gt Press lt 3 gt for Remote Press lt 1 gt for OK Press lt No gt for Sector Press lt No gt for Measure Ref Object Press any key when prompted You do not have to remove the keyboard as prompted unless you are using the Direct Robotic option instead of GeoRadio SurvCE will control the total station p548 Total Station Leica TPS Series This series covers most of the current Leica total stations such as TPS 100 TPS 300 TPS 700 TPS 700 auto Builder TPS 400 TPS 800 TPS 1000 including TC1010 and TC1610 TPS 1100 and TPS 1200 For the older 600 and 900 turn off ATR and use the TPS 100 300 configuration Many of these units include the motorized option Some settings may vary by model Comm Setup Default settings for these instruments are a baud rate 19200 n
14. e Procedures for Checking Activation Status A simple way to determine whether the Extended GeoCOM option is activated is to enter the Robotics dialog of SurvCE and attempt a power search If the instrument communicates but the power search feature fails the Ex tended GeoCOM option is not activated If you suspect that this is the case you can verify that the feature is on in the instrument using the following steps Power on the instrument p552 O OOO O Select the User button on the keyboard Select the F3 button for STAT Select list item number 3 for System Information Use the down arrow key to scroll to the bottom of the Instrument page Verify that Extended GeoCOM is on e Defining the Port The Leica 1200 needs to know that you intend to use the GeoCOM interface through the external port The following steps will set the Leica to communicate with SurvCE O O0000 O Power on the instrument Select Config Select menu item 4 for Interfaces Arrow down to GeoCOM Mode and select F3 for Edit Select F5 for DEVCE Select RS232 Geocom Select F3 for Edit and verify the communication settings Baud Rate 19 200 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bit 1 Select F1 for STORE Select F1 for CONT and verify the following option on the GeoCOM Mode page Use Interface Yes Port Port 1 Device RS232 GeoCOM
15. Connecting a GPS Rover to a Modem or Base Network GPS Utilities p150 Every GPS manufacturer and model has a different set of GPS Utilities The primary purpose of the Receiver Utilities 1s reset and or troubleshoot the GPS receiver GPS Utilities Configure RTE Device Check RTE Reset Receiver Factory Reset Magellan Setup Set Factory Defaults Send Command to Receiver Beep Off Bluetooth Settings save Settings to Receiver Reset RTK Engine Update Clock from GPS Power Off Receiver Common GPS Utilities Reset Receiver This command performs a soft reset of the GPS receiver Soft p151 resets will reinitialize the receiver like a power cycle Soft reset does not delete the memory Factory Reset or Hard Reset This command will erase the memory of the receiver and restore the setting to a factory settings Power Off Receiver This will power down the receiver Save Settings to Receiver Stores receiver settings to internal memory Beep Off Turns off the receiver alarms Radio Channel Change the channel radio channel of the GPS Configure RTK Device Use this page to change your RTK data port settings This can also be done during base or rover configuration Check RTK This tells the user why they aren t in RTK fixed Send Command to Receiver You can send what are known as pash commands internal Thales Ashtech codes to the receiver This should
16. Normal 0 Reverse l D 000 Start Command Aliases AL Brings up a list of commands in the MAP mode for which the user can substitute an alias If you would prefer to type A for Area rather than AR you can substitute A as an alias for AR Three commands will not accept substitutes Inverse Traverse and Sideshot I T and S In addition to commands you can toggle over to the Linework special code option and substitute aliases codes for the default special codes such as PC PT and END used to control linework using feature codes As an example you could choose the X or to End a line or use CS for curve start instead of PC p449 Command Aliases IE J v x MAP Commands C Linework codes DIPLINE S0IST SDIPLINE ALIASES APERTURE AREA CHAINXMIL CHAINXMIL 4 jili 2D Pline Road Alias Accept p450 k MYO SY OY GY AY GI GJ G amp Ww DO TTET Command name D D Polyline D Polyline Aperture Circle 2D dit Entity GIS Attributes dit Polyline rase Polylines kri az AHS S o o o a a a o F FlFleleS eS 3 2 Fle e le 3 s 4 a siz s ols ole ls PETE lel eles sIFR iS EIS T po Hh s Me a amp Si Tel Si sis u a Elz ha ad n B ai ie j ho 2 it B 2 mi zl port Points from CRD to Land XML xport Folylnes to DXF Files xport Folylnes to Land ML File H HRHARHRARRARARRRAHA SS SASSI A z 3 pay O
17. Reference Station To obtain corrections from a reference station to a single rover you typically must set to cell phone or modem linkage depending on what is required by the reference station Set Radio Channel This is normally set to channel 0 or channel 1 SurvCE allows up to 16 radio channels 0 to 15 The procedure is to pick the channel then tap Set Radio Channel Radios on base and rover must be set to the same channel p612 Pacific Crest Channel Channel to Set Set Radio Cancel e Radio Ports The Leica GPS receiver has 2 commonly used radio ports ports 1 and 3 Port 2 may be used in rare occasions e Radio Stop Bits Typically set to 1 e Message Type Standard setting is Leica Proprietary Other message string options are RTCM an industry standard and CMR Trimble message string RTCM and CMR are used when it is necessary to communicate with non Leica GPS e Radio Parity Typically set to None GPS Utilities Navcom p613 GPS Utilities Configure RTE Device Check RTE Reset Receiver Factory Reset Configure RTK Device Use this page to change your RTK data port settings This can also be done during base or rover configuration Check RTK This tells the user why they aren t in RTK fixed QuickStart Starfire Only Starfire corrections often take some time to acquire high levels of accuracy If you re returning to a previously surveyed area you can save time b
18. The Total Station routine allows the user to configure their total station communication and operation settings The tabs shown are configured based on the selected instrument see specific instrument for details Current The routine also provides an instrument recall feature that allows the user to store and recall all instrument related settings as a user named configuration Configure all of the settings as desired and select the save button to name and store the custom configuration Settings that will be retained are as follows Instrument Settings Communication Settings Configure Settings Stakeout Reference Settings Instrument Setup a Comms Settings Search Manufacturer Leica Robotic Total Station E E Model TS1200 Load sae Rename Delete Load This button will load all settings defined by the selected icon Save This button will save the current settings and allows the user to pll6 enter the name of new icons that will be created to represent the instrument settings Rename This button will allow the user to rename the selected icon Delete This button will remove the selected icon Comms The Comms tab allows you to specify communication parameters for the data collector For certain equipment a Bluetooth wireless serial connection is possible The user can detect if there is any Bluetooth emulated serial COM port available on the CE device by using the
19. located at the lower left of the Draw Profile screen All the zooming commands Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Window Zoom Previous and Pan are available to you in the Draw Profile command p356 PRO VIEW Profile Sc 20 00 C Sur emo Data DEMO pro If you want to change the display scale click the icon in the lower left corner The dialog shown below will appear Change the scale and tap OK Option vertical Scale 20 00 Template Editor Templates for roads levees ditches and other earthwork can be created in Carlson Software products such as Carlson Civil or Carlson Roads or alternately they can be entered in the field using Input Edit Template These templates can then be used in Carlson SurvCE in the Stake Slope command where the template is one of the design files for slope staking along with the centerline and the profile Templates are also used in Stake Road for staking those portions of the road p357 from left shoulder to right shoulder and for Elevation Difference by Road Design Files Templates can be reviewed graphically using the command Draw Template Templates are not necessary for the command Stake Offset found on the SURVEY tab In Offset Stakeout road or other cross slopes from centerline are entered within the command itself Currently SurvCE uses only templates created in Carlson Civil and Carlson Roads or entered directly within SurvCE using the command Template Editor Every
20. 3 UP_NO Yes HGT CONDITION COMMENTS p517 Add Code Layer name Code UP UTILITY Full Text Utility Pole Polyline On No Mew Attributes Save Feature Code List File With two field codes EP and UP with GIS information input and stored using option 5 Feature Code List in the File main menu let s collect some Survey data in Store Points with GIS information First Save As these two codes into a Feature Code List file as shown below Code List YA Beach Full Tex Edge of 3D UTILITY tility Pr p518 Feature Code List Type FCL Files A SystemnCF Data VA Beach fel Name va _Beach fel The Add and Edit buttons create or revise Line Layer drawing properties and GIS prompting Remove deletes field codes highlighted Load unloads the current FCL file and loads another existing FCL Field Code List Collecting amp Storing GIS information in SurvCE To demonstrate collecting Survey data with GIS information SurvCE is set to either Manual Total Station or GPS Simulation For Manual Total Station go to the menu Survey Store Points see the next two figures Follow the figures for Manual Total Station It is important in the main menu that File Configure Reading HGT Desc Prompt on Save is toggled ON p519 JOB VA_Beach L O I MAP Instument Instrument Manual Total Station 4 Receiver Utilities 9 Peripherals 5 Localization 0 About Sur
21. 30 0 Distance Tolerance o 2 e Other Tab for D amp R Measurements This tab contains settings for how to use direct and reverse D amp R measurements For the vertical angles you can balance the direct and reverse measurements or use Direct Only When you have Foresight measurements and Backsight measurements e g slope distance zenith angles between the same points e g reciprocals in Direct and Reverse surveys you can Balance Foresight Backsight measurements apply reciprocals or use the Foresight data only For purposes of warning screens you can also set the Angle Tolerance and Distance Tolerance for Direct and Reverse measurement processing Process No Adjust This command processes the RWS file and computes coordinate values for the surveyed data No angle balance or traverse adjustment is applied The Process Raw Data Options dialog shown below appears after selecting Process No Adjust p72 Process Raw Data Options Cancel mM Report Sideshots Mw Report Closure Reference Closing Point ID 2 North East S000 0000 oom re Ely 100 00000 You can report the traverse only or compute all measurements by clicking on Report Sideshots If you click on Report Closure then you need to specify a Reference Closing Point ID which is the point that the last traverse point is closing to or trying to match The Reference Closing Point ID is not a point in the traverse it is the point the traverse is tryin
22. C CL Offset Delta Distance from Catch Pt Press OK and then you are in a standard stakeout screen The offset point is a fixed location and the stakeout procedure is similar to point stakeout This leads to a report of information that can be written on the Slope Stake Finally you will be prompted for staking out a second Slope Stake to establish line After the first offset stake is set and before the prompt for the optional second offset stake a summary screen will appear If you have used the Road Design File or Section File methods you will be presented with every break point into centerline Offset Point i 17 00 ID to E 6 00 00 FILL 50 0 2 EP to CENTER 12 00 FILL 0 0 99 p408 Offset Point Report Progressive Total Offset PT Sta Offset Elevation 6 49 994 R39 976 954 987 OFFSET to CATCH 4 97 FILI OFFSET to BD 21 98 CUT 38 6 OFFSET to EP 27 98 CUT 19 6 OFFSET to CENTER 39 98 CUT 13 7 wj Finally you will be prompted for staking out a second Slope Stake a more rarely used option whose purpose is to establish line the direction from the first offset stake to the slope stake itself This permits accurate replacement of the slope stake when it is knocked out by construction activity Note When using Road Design or Section Files in Slope Staking setting the first offset point is the recommended procedure as it produces the full report referenced to cross section and template ID
23. CeE JOB VA_Beach Ei MAP gt File Equip E coco 1 Sideshot Traverse 6 Building Face Survey 2 Stakeout Points 7 Remote Elevation panne Lindon 2 takeout Ponts 7 Remote eevaton 3 Stakeout Line Arc 8 Resection ie eee ae eee 4 Offset Stakeout 9 Set Collection 5 Elevation Difference O Set Review For GPS Simulation go to the menu Survey Store Point see the next two figures and follow figures for GPS Simulation p520 JOB VA_Beach t i MAP Instrument f Instrument GPs Simulation 4 Receiver Utilities 9 Peripherals 5 Localization 0 About Sur yCE JOB VA _Beach Fill i MAP gt File Equip ETE coco 1 store Points n 6 Auto by Interval 2 Stakeout Points Log Static Data 4 Offset Stakeout 5 Elevation Difference 3 Stakeout Linef Arc See these Manual Total Station example screen captures shown here in the next four figures p521 Store Point Point Number Target Height ra 0 000 AR 15 00 00 74 929900 00 SO 64 5000 M5052 2643 E 5016 6837 2 497 7490 Point Description UP LIP Cancel AddID 43 gt Utility Pole Char UTILITY POLE NUMBER 1014 char HEIGHT 355 Char cond Good Char Comments JSC Survey Manual Total Station Next Previous Delete iE p522 _IMENU gt Ly Fe Polline to CL CL to Polylme Convert Polylines to 2D Input E dit GIS Data Offset Settings 7 T
24. Current Comms Piati E Search EDM Mode Rapid Target Offset 30 Guide Lights Off Target Type Prism Instrument Setup Current Comms Settings Turn to point in stakeout _ E Search On Read gt Lise EC Unit I Run Remotely Search Range Sight Joystick Speed Joystick speeds are 1 to 6 for arrow key response turning gun For reference 6 is approximately 6 degrees per arrow press Search types are Sight field of view of gun or degree 30 minutes or 10 meters at 100 meters H Wide V Wide and HV Wide The wide views are 6 times field of view Auto Search before Read finds the prism center exactly before taking a measurement useful in Set Collection for example and in Stakeout Run Remotely sets the left and right p570 turning of the gun referenced from the pole and not from the instrument This is distinct from left and right referencing for stakeout which refers to movement of the rod For the Sokkia instruments with RMC search device there are 2 buttons in the joystick screen for RC Search RC Left and RC Right Left and right will be determined by the Run Remotely setting Total Station Sokkia Robotic The following information describes the various options available for the Sokkia Robotic total stations The instrument Measure screen should be shown on the total station in orde
25. DDD MMSS representing 350 degrees 25 minutes and 31 seconds But that same direction could be entered as N9 3429W or alternately as NW9 3429 SurvCE will accept both formats Additional directional entry options which might apply to commands such as Intersection under Cogo are outlined below If options in Job Settings are set to Bearing and Degrees 360 circle the user can enter the quadrant number before the angle value Example 120 1234 The result is N20 12 34 E Quadrants l NE 2 SE 3 SW 4 NW In the case where Job Settings have been set for Bearing and the user would like to enter an Azimuth the letter A can be placed before the azimuth value and the program will convert it to a Bearing Example A20 1234 The result is N20 12 34 E p37 In the case where Job Settings is set to Azimuth and the user would like to enter a bearing the quadrant letters can be used before the bearing value Example NW45 0000 The result is 315 00 00 Formatted Angle Entries Interior Angle The user can compute an angle defined by three points by entering the point IDs as lt Point ID gt lt Point ID gt Point ID gt The program will return the interior angle created by the three points using the AT FROM TO logic Such entries might apply to the Angle Right input box in Store Points when configured to Manual Total Station Example 1 2 3 Using the coordinates below the result is 90 00 00 Poi
26. In summary when configured to GPS the scale factor typically lt 1 can be used to go grid to ground through division and when configured to total stations the scale factor typically lt 1 can be used to go ground to grid through multiplication It can also be used for any other scaling purpose desired but be advised that any scale factor used for G PS is used as a divisor Because there are two potential uses of the scale factor to adjust GPS measurements and to adjust total station measurements two distinct scale factors are stored and recalled for any job one for total stations located on the TS tab and one for GPS located on the GPS tab Geoid Separation File This option will incorporate the geoid undulation in determining the orthometric elevation of the measurement The definition of the geoid model as currently adopted by the National Geodetic Survey is the equipotential surface of the Earth s gravity field which best fits in a least p171 squares sense global mean sea level Orthometric elevation measurements are used in survey calculations In order to convert ellipsoid heights He as measured by GPS into orthometric elevations Eo you must provide for a correction between the GPS measured ellipsoid reference ellipsoid and a constant level gravitational surface the geoid This correction is the geoid undulation Ug Use XPort or SurvCOM to download the Geoid Separation File This option only has signifi
27. N 3602 1689 E 5258 5586 839 4938 HRMS 0 041 VRMS 0 076 SMO Use this code to smooth the line through all of the points This code must occur on the first point of the line STORE PTS he i without smoothing T Nm smoothing N 3572 9849 E 5734 8150 HRMS 0 051 VRMS 0 092 JPN Use this code followed by a point ID to create a new line segment between the current point and the entered point ID END or Use this code to end the line You can also set any code for p95 Begin Line but keep in mind with SurvCE you only need to end a line and the next point with the same description will begin a new line RECT This special code can be used in 2 different ways You can take measurements to 3 sides of a building and on the third side add the special code RECT and the program will create a 4 sided building Or you can measure two sides of a building and enter the distance right RECT30 or distance left RECT 20 to create the other parallel sides Both methods are illustrated below MAP VIEW FILE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Cmd Layer BUILDING OH and OV You can also create horizontal offset lines and you can offset these same lines vertically as well by combining OH and OV as in EP OHO0 5 OV0 5 which might create a 6 over 6 up back of curb parallel 3D polyline You can even do multiple offset lines as shown below p96 Job Control EE SCAOLC oh 12 5 oh 17 5 109 629 h 5 109 673 109 733
28. This option is for base networks that support NTRIP protocol Pressing the Configure button shows the NTRIP Broadcasters Also called Casters that have been previously connected to p144 TRIP Broadcasters p Name NtripinfoCaster Delete IP Address rtcrn ntrip arg Port 2101 Default User Password Broadcaster Information Identifier NtripInftoCaster Operator BKG Position 50 12N 8 69 NtripInfoCaster DEIJ Misc htp Aww rtom ntrip org nome AMES Rover position not needed The default is for rtem ntrip org which if connected to will download information about many Broadcasters casters all over the world They will be shown the nex t time NTRIP Configure is selected Select an existing caster or select lt New gt in the Name combo box and replace with a different name and fill out the other information If the Default User and Password fields are filled out they will be used as the default user name and password for all the bases at that caster When the green checkbox is selected SurvCE will have the modem connect to the address of the Broadcaster and establish a connection The Broadcaster then supplies a table of bases also known as mountpoints available at that Broadcaster SurvCE puts the table of bases into the next window that comes up p145 x pases for WADOT wi Name PRSNVRSCMR Delete User Name Password Base Information Identifier PRSAWVERSCMR Short
29. To edit highlight the desired line Edit Rawftile asbury rw5 save As CicPt FsPt Horz4nqle SlopeDist Zenith a BD 25 on AF 0 0000 0 000 F7E90 0 Mote Calculated 4R0 00 00 Measured 4R0 00 O0 Delta 4R0 00 0O InstHt PodHt LS 5 100 4 200 i CicPt FsPt Horz ngle SlopeDist Zenit 2 AR 90 2358 1000 200 ZE I Pato Northing Easting Elevation Desci ss mm m l d l al lt 4 Tap the Edit button and the line will appear in a specially formatted Edit dialog tailored to the type of data selected p85 Edit Traverse Reading Type 55 ia Occupied Point 25 Foresight Point 26 Horizontal Angle 90 2358 AR Slope Distance 1000 200000 zenith Angle 30 2300 ZE Description Setup Fod Height 5 200 For example to change the foresight point to 101 click into the Foresight Point dialog box enter 101 then press OK The data will be changed and a note added showing the original data and indicating when it was edited Edit Rawfile asbury rw5 Save As CicPt FsPt Horz4ngle SlopeDist Zenit BO 25 oo AR 00000 0 000 zE 00 Mote Calculated 4R0 O0 O0 Measured 4AR0 O0 00 Delta 4AR0 O0 0O0O InstHt PodHt LS 5 100 m 200 i OcPt FsPt Horz ngle SlopeDist Zenit SS 25 E AR 90 2358 1000 200 ZE Gl Edited on DTO8 02 2004 at TM14 49 21 55 0F 4 Add Edit Remove Find If you click Add you may then
30. _ MENU ac Es AR 25502500 zA 88934 51 SD 33 9800 ota 04 062 705 L35 35 p420 If a shot is taken that doesn t round to a station in the list of approved cross section stations X SCT Settings then a warning screen appears In the warning dialog shown below the tolerance has been exceeded on two accounts We round to 0 80 which is not in the list and our offset is 186 891 left which exceeds our anticipated maximum offsets of 100 left and right Station Offset report Station Tolerance is Exceeded Current Tolerance 000 Edit Current Station 0 077 913 Round Station to the Nearest fio F Use Closest Sta 0 100 000 Intvl Offset is beyond the limits Current Offset Left 186 891 Offset Left 100 000 Offset Right 100 000 Points Store with Station Offset Descriptions as shown below 29 0 125 L23 58 30 0 150 L33 24 31 0 150 L19 39 32 0 150 R1 98 33 0 150 R18 12 The comma separated file would appear as follows if presented in a tab delimited form Point Station Offset Elevation Description ID p421 29 30 31 32 33 When you exit the routine by clicking Menu from the data gathering screen and have Store SCT file turned on you will be asked if you want to process or add the last shots you collected to the named SCT file You have the choice to Process use the data or Discard The program will even keep the section data on f
31. best to set Alphanumeric as the point ID type under New Job in Job Settings prior to importing Geodimeter For importing Geodimeter OBS files Trimble POS For importing Trimble POS files CRD File Allows you to import a SurvCE CRD file into the current active CRD file and set the range of points to import Note that this method can be used to move a subset of points from one CRD file over to another file as shown below p108 Import Ascii File Type CRD Files M Select File Sur EDemoSpecial Data MoDoOT crd Details Add to Pt ID s E Pt s to Import ALL Pt Protect SDR File For importing point data within Sokkia SDR files File You may type in the file name to import Select Choose this button to browse for the file name Common Formats If your Source File Format is set to User Defined choosing one of these settings copies the contents into the Choice field which will be used to import the file Choice If you are importing an ASCII file with a special form e g A Survey 1254552 123 498135 12 1109 23 iron pin 54 then you want a format that skips the first two columns A and Survey and does Easting X Northing Y Elevation Z Description D and Point ID P so your format will be S S X Y Z D P If there is no point ID in the ASCII file you s imply omit the P in the entered format and the program will prompt for a starting point number or ID and will number each subsequent point sequentially
32. or electronic documentation SOFTWARE PRODUCT of SOFTWIARE By exercising F you accept the terms of the agreement select the first option below You must accept the agreement to install SureCE 1 61 01 Glick Install to start the installation ce 5 The next dialog asks you to confirm the installation directory Press Y es Installing Applications install Carlson Software SurvCE using the default appkcation install directory we omen 6 At this point the necessary files will be copied to the mobile device A dialog will appear to show installation progress p17 Installing Applications p18 7 You are given a final chance to check your mobile device Click OK when you are ready Apples tien Downed Cosmpboto La 8 After this has completed the next figure will appear on the mobile device showing the installation progress When this dialog disappears the installation is complete Installing Carlson Software Sur CE Copying files SystemCrF SurvStar SurvcCe exe LTT TT Documents How To Update Carlson SurvCE Using a Memory Card This process requires that you have a memory card with sufficient free space and WinZip installed on the desktop computer 1 Download the appropriate Carlson SurvCE executable to your desktop PC There are several executables therefore it 1s important to get the right one based on the type of hardware you own Make sure that y
33. screen or you may see a list of points to select from to see Point Details Point Details Unless you are in the middle of a MAP screen command you can click on a point and see a Point Details dialog If you tap near several points a list of nearby points will appear from which you can select the target point Otherwise you will go straight to Point Details and see a screen such as this Point Details Point ID 1209 Northing 9896 1671 ft Easting 19990 6229 ft Elevation 97 3863 ft Description CP Edit Delete If you are in total station mode and actively surveying with a setup and backsight specified clicking on the setup or backsight point will lead to a special graphic as shown here Point Details Point ID 66 Northing 9954 8820 ft Easting 20098 6350 ft Elevation 101 0810 ft Description CPACHIS X view Attributes If you have assigned attributes to the points e g Description Pole Type Metal p441 Wires 4 etc by use of the Feature Code capabilities these attributes can be reviewed The Point Details option works both within the MAP screen when you are not being prompted for entering points or selecting objects and in all graphic screens within the Menu options It is not as transparent and available as the dynamic pan option but nearly so Notes All polyline vertices and all points contain x y and z coordinates Also the user can move the drawing display PAN anytime To u
34. such as Stake Station Staked Offset Design Station and Design Offset The Design Point ID 1s one of the configurable items to report and since commands such as Offset Stakeout Point Projection and Stake Road do not stake out Point IDs the program uses either the command name CL for Stake Centerline PP for Point Projection offset reference or template ID as the design point name RCurb for example would be the name given to the design point in Offset Stakeout for top of curb right side This might lead to a variety of ID names for the design point Slope Stakes Toggling this option on enables writing to the selected p60 cutsheet file The buttons allow the user to select the file customize the Slope Stake Cutsheet report format as well as edit and view the current slope stake cutsheet file This applies only to the commands Stake Slope and Stake Road available within Roading Slope Stake Cutsheets have an extra option to Include progressive offsets report and also have different options such as Pivot Offset Slope Ratio and Elevation PP CP Elevation of Pivot Point and or Offset Point Note that columns can serve a dual purpose in the slope stake report If progressive offsets are enabled the header lines such as Design Station are ignored for the additional information and you obtain the incremental delta distance and elevation from each point on the section or template from the offset sta
35. telephone or send an e mail to the address above Support hours are Monday through Friday 7 00 A M to 9 00 P M EST GMT 5 hours p24 User Interface This chapter describes the general user interface features of SurvCE Stake Road E E z 995 Interval z cL Of 18 01 Design Off aa E C Left Right Stake Off fo H o V4 Slope Stake SH P1o1 08 cPichhs a Graphic Mode p25 Icons SurvCE 2 0 can be configured to show either the traditional letter icons or new graphical icons for several functions To set this option go to the EQUIP tab select Configure and toggle the Use Graphic Icons check box RI This icon will Read a measurement ALT R D Total Station Only This icon will Traverse to the measured point by advancing your setup ALT T jS S This icon will Store a point This function is also performed via the Enter key ALT S This icon will lead to a dialog where the user can Average up to 999 epochs of GPS readings ALT A O This icon leads to Offset reading screens with options for keyed in offsets as well as offsets taken by laser devices that measure distance only or distance and azimuth ALT O This icon will take you to the Configure dialog also found on the EQUIP tab Here you set many preferences in SurvCE such as the number of readings to average function of the Store icon and whether to display the Hgt Desc prompt on Save ALT C gt This ico
36. the Demo pro file that is typically provided with the software has the following four lines which can be viewed in Notepad 0 0000 997 0000 0 0000 p371 200 0000 1005 0000 200 0000 308 0000 1003 9200 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 this is an end profile line Profile files can be created from within SurvCE but are simple enough to be hand entered using a text editor as well Other ASCII file types such as centerlines can be deciphered but are generally of a more complicated design and are best created using the editors provided within SurvCE Profile Transformation Like Centerline Transformation this routine is primarily used to scale a profile up or down to go from Survey Feet to Metric or from Metric to Survey Feet PRO Transformation Current PRO File C SurvCEDemo Data MainRoad pro Select File Scale Factor M Apply scale factor for start station Metric to Survey Feet Translate C Survey Feet to Metric Custom Scale Factor Apply Scale Factor Unlike Centerline Transformation Profile Transformation can directly translate the profile up or down You can also scale the profile stationing and elevations If you want to apply a translation to selected stations tap the Translate button The Translate option leads to its own dialog of entries which allows you to translate both the stationing and the elevations as shown below In this way you can make the starting station 1000 or raise the
37. 000 Reading Count 1 Review Readings EF F re Level Reading Mode This icon switches the interface between taking plus or minus readings At any time during the loop you can edit a reading using the Edit Levels icon to the left of the red X Cancel button p282 Edit Levels i x Project SurvleE 0Op Jason Loop i Date 127 01 2006 Time 07 59 56 Press 30 Temp 0 Rod 5 000 BM Pt 6 2 101 970 Desc CPYeCHIS X BS Pt 2E 91 50290 SD 7 685 Desc CP CHIS X FS Ptr 6 91 50149 SD 7 685 Desc TP BS Ptr E 91 50157 SD 7 684 Desc TP Edit Del Andel Process Once the minus reading on a benchmark has been recorded you can then process the loop using the Process icon which 1s to the left of the Edit Levels icon Once you ve processed the loop a Review File dialog will be displayed At this point you can choose to save the report or proceed to the Processing Options screen File COSURYVCEDEMOSPECIALSDATATrigLevRep A Level Loop Report File C SURP YCEDEMOSPECIAL DATASSURYCE TL Processed 12 01 2006 08 30 26 jLengthi 15 361 Lengthi 15 361 Loop Length 30 722 Closure 0 000 Error 1 99841 iiil The Processing Options screen allows you to update all existing points in the coordinate file with the leveled elevations It also allows you to overwrite the point p283 descriptions using what was entered during the level loop and will compute coordinates for any poin
38. 107 Input Box Controls 36 Installing SurvCE 16 Instrument Selection 36 Intersections 317 Inverse 313 Job 43 Job Settings Format 52 Job Settings New Job 44 Job Settings Options 47 Job Settings Stake 53 Job Settings System 46 Keyboard Input 312 Keyboard Operation 40 ie Leveling 276 List Points 63 Localization 162 Log Raw GPS 292 _M Manual Traverse 339 Memory 22 Microsoft ActiveSync 11 Miscellaneous Instrument Configuration 630 Monitor SkyPlot GPS 180 Orientation Backsight 199 Orientation Instrument Setup 195 Orientation Remote Benchmark 201 p640 Orientation Robotics 203 Peripherals 187 Point Projection 323 Profile Editor 353 Q Quick Calculator 29 R Raw Data 67 Receiver GPS Remote Elevation 290 Resection 262 mee Save System 24 Set Collection 266 Setup GPS 128 Setup Total Station 123 Stake Line Arc 228 Stake Offset 245 Stake Points 222 Stake Road 427 Stake Slope 386 Station Store 327 Store Points GPS Offsets 216 Store Points GPS 213 Store Points TS Offsets 210 Store Points TS 205 Store Sections 412 Supported File Formats 630 System Requirements 10 ae Template Editor 357 p641 Tolerances 185 TOOLS 487 Total Station Geodimeter Trimble 543 Total Station Leica Robotic 554 Total Station Leica TPS Series 549 Total Station Leica Wild Older Models 563 Total Station Nikon 564 Total Station Pentax Total Station
39. 109 808 109 819 109 837 109 780 103 966 104 159 This example here leads to a series of 4 parallel lines for railroad tracks in this case all offset to the left negative of the direction of the points 120 through 126 MAP VIEW FILE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS The OH and companion OV commands are flexible in that they can be entered after the first point measured such as on point 121 or 122 p97 Using Short Cut Icons to Append Special Codes With the Prompt for Height and Description turned on within Configure you have the opportunity to choose from your ex isting descriptions saved in your Feature Code List whenever you store points You also have the ability to select icons for the special codes as shown here Store Point Pt ID 61 HT fo N 3909 8004 HRMS 0 049 E 66279 9041 VRMS 0 102 639 4965 PDOP 3 200 Desc 201 Anchor in Ground 2 Power Pole _ N 20 Buried Power Centerline Bit Pavement Li Li L E These codes going from top to bottom starting at the left represent start line end line close line select active line when multiple lines are being drawn with the same code start curve end curve rectangle more and in the next screen you obtain Offset Horizontal and Offset V ertical Pre Formatted Special Codes SurvCE has several pre made files of codes used by certain highway departments and others These can be selected from the drop list by selecting Spec
40. 15 degrees Satellites low to the horizon can actually degrade the resolving of the GPS position Log Baseline Data This option stores raw vector data and Cartesian coordinate data for both the base and the rover and stores to the SurvCE data collector in the Data directory The file will be Jobname_ SKI ASC depending on the name of the coordinate file This vector file can be further p584 processed in the Leica SKI Pro program e Use Glonass This option will only apply for System 1200 instruments that support Glonass e Rover Antenna This option allows the user to specify the antenna in use The most common setting for the rover antenna is AT502 Pole type e Base Antenna For best results specify here the type of antenna used at the base GPS Leica GIS System 50 The Leica System 50 gets its corrections from the Corps of Engineer s beacons free or you can sign up for an annual subscription and pick up corrections from the Racal satellite at a rate of approximately 800 per year You would need to order a special part with your GS50 system to read the satellite corrections Though the Corps beacons are free they are not available everywhere and coverage is typically up to about 100 miles from each beacon There are also line of sight issues and you can lose the Corps beacons when in deep valleys for example Typical accuracies are 0 3 to 1 meter horizontal and 1 to 2 meters vertical Configure Base Configure
41. 6 Angle Left degrees or gons 7 Angle Right degrees or gons Details Angle Bearing Code Codes used for N T Codes used for BEARINGS AZIMUTHS Ds Codes used for Angles LEFT amp RIGHT LEFT RIGHT Note that at the Angle Bearing prompt you can transition back to inverse from your occupied point or to traverse which would move you up to the next traversed point Within Sideshot you stay on your current point holding the backsight and foresighting calculating as many points as desired X returns to the MAP screen as does Esc The remaining prompts are the angle itself as in 85 3522 DDD MMSS zenith angle slope distance description and point number Exit with Esc anytime In gons grads angles are also in decimal form and angles such as 397 9871 are valid p474 MAP VIEW HE Polyline arc Close Undo lt End gt cmd AAAH Interpolate Points Polyline to Points P2P This command converts any selected polylines into points It is useful in capturing points for stakeout from polylines created as offsets or brought in from DXF files This allows you to react to circumstances in the field by creating points from polylines when and where needed For example if you wanted to make point numbers out of the lot corners below on the SW lot Select Cogo Interpolate Points Polyline to Points or more simply enter P2P at the command line Then pick each desired polyline The program will avoid making dup
42. 7 Note that if you wanted to interpolate a point 12 midway between 6 and 7 you can use all 3 edit boxes to accomplish this The azimuth or bearing could be entered as 6 7 The slope would be entered as 6 7 and the distance would be entered as 6 7 2 So if point 6 is elevation 100 and point 7 is elevation 101 point 12 will have elevation 100 5 s MAP VIEW E x FILE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Cmd Layer 10 T 0 00 101 00 12 100 50 6 100 00 Enter Elevation If Enter Elevation is enabled a check screen is activated to display the calculated elevation From here you can override the calculated elevation with a new elevation This option is useful in combination with Horizontal Distance for calculating points at a known distance and fix ed elevation TR Mode Enabling Traverse Mode will cause the routine to traverse up p341 to the target point number so that the new occupied point number will automatically change to the last target point number and the new backsight will change to the last occupied point You can always manually change the fields for occupied point and backsight point and force a traverse but enabling Traverse Mode will update these fields automatically so that you immediately move up and are awaiting the next angle and distance entries With TR Mode disabled Manual Traverse defaults to sideshot mode When you are entering in the horizontal angle distance or elevation vertical
43. Antenna Height This is entered as a Vertical or slant height in the current job units The slant height is the distance from the base of the pole or from the hub and tack up to a mark or defined slant measurement point on the edge of the antenna See NGS for more details The vertical height is measured plumb straight down from the base of the antenna where it screws into the antenna Receiver tab Elevation Mask This specifies the cutoff vertical angle above p595 the horizon Any satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations e Receiver tab Log OBEN Data for Averaged RTK Readings This setting specifies that the software will log the standard Thales OBEN file as specified by Thales during averaged readings GPS Base Current Comms Receiver Device i Network Jone tst is s YS RTK Port le Baud 3600 Parity ane Stop Bits p z Message Type RTEM Base ID 0 1023 e Ports tab RTK Port You must select the data port on the GPS receiver that is connected to the radio modem The default setting is A Changing this setting will change the internal setting of the receiver e Ports tab Radio Type This allows the user to specify the various supported radios e Ports tab Message Type You must specify the message type For high precision centimeter RTK GPS set this to Ashtech CPD For USCG RTCM DGPS sub meter accuracy set this to RTCM e Ports tab
44. Auto Save By Job Elev 100 Desc Start Grid Face This command enables points on both vertical and non vertical planes to be coordinated by angle only observations This feature is most often used to pick up details of a building where the prism cannot be placed You first establish the plane then take angle only observations for features such as windows The building face is defined by observing three accessible points on the building or by entering their known coordinates After angle only observations are made SurvCE then calculates and stores coordinates of the angle intersection observation with the plane You can use SurvCE to survey the vertical face of a building or other vertical planes Vertical Plane Survey The Define Plane dialog can be accessed by selecting the Grid Face option from the SURVEY tab of the main menu p258 Define Plane y x Point 1 Mone Get Coords Point 2 Hone Get Coords Point 3 Mone Get Coords Type No Solution Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 These fields indicate the points that define the building face plane Both Point 1 and Point 2 must have horizontal coordinates to properly define the building face For a vertical plane survey point 3 is not required and can be left blank Get Coords This function allows for three methods to define the coordinates of a point The coordinates of the points can be manually entered into the Northing Easting and Elevation fields Manuall
45. Base Configure Rover or Receiver Utilities for Allen Osbourne SurvCE reads the NEMA string characters and all of the setup is done on the instrument itself GPS CSI DGPS Max This GPS system is typically used for GIS type surveys with to 3 meter accuracy Corrections are obtained from Omnistar WAAS U S Corps of Engineers beacons or by RTCM message string from an RTK unit The rover setup offers p580 the ability to set elevation mask and the DGPS Max Age GPS DataGrid Using DataGrid with SurvCE DataGrid GPS can be connected using either a bluetooth or cable connection The GPS switches to bluetooth communications when the cable is disconnected and the receiver is powered on DataGrid receivers communicate at a baud rate of 115200 DataGrid uses AR West UHF radios for RTK corrections Connecting with Bluetooth To use DataGrid GPS in bluetooth mode remove data cables prior to powering on the receiver The GPS will automatically switch over to bluetooth No PIN is required for bluetooth communications Radio Configuration DataGrid uses ARWest UHF radios for RTK corrections The base G PS has an external radio connected to a radio port on the receiver and the rover uses a built in radio DataGrid uses one message type for RTK corrections RTK message selection in SurvCE will show the default message selection and be greyed out Radio channel selection displayed on the GPS unit and is selectable on the unit Setting the radio
46. Baud This setting allows you to change Pacific Crest radio baud settings through the receiver The default baud rate is 9600 Note If there are communication problems with either port A or B on the Ashtech ZSurveyor receiver turn off receiver and turn it back on with both keys depressed to reset receiver to factory defaults For more information on this tab see Connecting G PS Configure Rover Parameters p596 Magellan Setup Parameters Multipath Type Ambiguity Fixing Parameter 99 0 M Fast CPD Turn Beep Off e Multipath Type You must specify this setting in order to filter out interference in the satellite signals caused by nearby objects e Dynamics This setting is applied to all Thales equipment types with the exception of the Z Max Here you may specify the dynamics setting Static is selected only when the Rover receiver is stationary The default is Walking When set to Static the HRMS and VRMS values measurements of accuracy will fall to very low numbers high accuracy but lock will not hold unless the antenna is motionless Static is recommended when the antenna and pole are secured by a tripod or bipod e Ambiguity Fixing Parameter This controls the confidence level of fixed positions The default is 99 0 At a lower confidence interval the system solves much faster If the system incorrectly solves the position then the position error will be much greater than the reported RMS value
47. Continn Delete Baud Rate Protect Remote Files Archive RWS Files Com Port You must select which com port on the PC to use File Mask You must select a file filtering syntax Directory Sort You must select how to sort the list of files Display Special Files Toggle whether or not you should see special files Confirm Overwrite Check this to confirm before overwriting files Baud Rate You must choose the baud rate for transferring data Protect Remote Files Check this to protect files on the mobile device Archive RW5 Files Toggle YES or NO Geoid This command will carve out a portion of the Geoid 99 EGM96 Canadian CGG2000 Canadian HT2 0 Canadian HT1 01 Australian GDA94 and Great Britain OSG MO2 grid files and send it to SurvCE Since thes e geoid grids are very large the program carves out a precise portion of it and avoids overloading the memory on the remote device running SurvCE You p105 will be prompted for the directory on the PC of the source Geoid grid file and the approximate latitude and longitude of the job and the size of the area desired in miles kilometers or degrees of latitude and longitude aH Gwecd Arma Geoid Grd Files Dii Omen Sotware 2006 CATA Geoid lype Seoid 99 Enter Lat Lon near center of job Lattude dd mens Longetude dd mms Gnd sire e F2F Conversion This converts the more thorough and detailed Carlson Survey field code file for field
48. E ft The points can also be selected from the point list or directly from the map screen by pressing either the list or map icons You will also be prompted for the Instrument Height and a Target Height On reading 1 you will be asked if you want to Set Zero on the first resection point optional If you press Configure you can set standard errors for the measurements as shown below These settings allow you to take advantage of network least squares and weighting in the calculation performed by SurvCE The default values are shown You can also enable Direct amp Reverse measurements here in addition to using EQUIP Configure p263 Configure Resection Distance Standard Errors Angle Standard Errors Cnsint 0 005 Pointing E E Reading E Setup Standard Errors Resect Pt ID 0 005 Direct amp Reverse Foresight Pt ID 0 005 Defaults Press Read when you are ready to take a measurement The angle right zenith angle and slope distance are recorded Repeat this process for all measurements of the resection After the second measurement there is enough information to conduct the resection calculation so the Calculate button at the top of the dialog becomes active and can be selected If you select Calculate you can review the data then return to taking more shots by hitting Cancel rather than OK which would prompt to store the point Any time Calculate is selected the Review Resection screen appe
49. Face can be toggled on for faster Face 2 readings Auto Turn available for all observation orders but Robotic Set will turn the gun automatically to all known points An hourglass will appear when Robotic Sets is selected during which time SurvCE initiates constantly streaming data When in robotic Set Collection an option to obtain the Robotic screen search and joystick features is available After all sets are collected the user is prompted whether to move to a new setup station collect still more sets or review the set data Close this dialog and Set Collection is complete for that backsight and foresight Topcon APL1 This is an older Topcon robotic total station with ex cellent tracking It s a larger instrument often used in construction and machine control applications It communicates only by radio with the 2ASx type radios You must set the Com parameters on APL1 You only have to do this once Turn the APLI on Press lt Menu gt Press lt F1 gt for Parameters Press lt F3 gt for COM Press lt F3 gt for Terminate Select ETX ONLY and press lt Ent gt to accept Select F2 for Transfer Speed Select 9600 and press lt Ent gt to accept Select F1 for Bit Format 0 Set to BS S1 and NONE Press lt ENT gt to accept ay ee a Oe ie ee aA Putting the APL in the Remote Mode Turn the APLI on Press lt Menu gt Press lt F3 gt for Remote Press lt F1 gt for Remote er ee ee
50. Find Store GPS Accuracy in Raw File This option is available when configured p48 to any GPS equipment If enabled the horizontal and vertical quality as reported by the GPS will be stored to the raw file with each point RMS or CEP SEP typically Auto Load Map and Auto Save Map Maps can be viewed in the MAP and Graphic views within Carlson SurvCE These maps can be created by using the command IDXF which imports a DXF drawing file AutoCad DXF formats 12 through 2000 are fully compatible and will import Micros tation DXF files and DXF files from other CAD programs will also work Linework referred to as polylines can be produced within the MAP view by using the PL polyline command or other commands such as Offset O2 and O3 In addition use of Feature Codes where linework is associated with field codes such as EP for edge of pavement will lead to the drawing of polylines in the Map view These maps can then be auto saved whenever you exit a coordinate file and auto loaded whenever you load a particular coordinate file The maps are saved in DXF format It is typical to enable both Auto Load Map and Auto Save Map if you want to auto recall your latest map If Auto Load Map is on and Auto Save Map is turned off you will recall the map that was saved previously when Auto Save Map was on If you want to start your map from a clean slate from the point plot only which always appears in map view
51. Find Receiver and p119 you can add the connected receiver to the list Find Receiver will ghost 1f bluetooth is not an active Bluetooth connection to a receiver Find Receiver will only work on ARM processor devices which includes the Allegro and Symbol 8100 Find Receiver When you click Find Receiver to add another receiver to the list a dialog pops up The dialog below is for a Socket Bluetooth driver Bluetooth Device Search foxes Looking For Bluetooth devicetsi Time remaining EERRRERRRRREE Bluetooth Devices y e Please select from these available devices DataGrid DataCollector 02100039 TonconrsS p120 EMaxPROTO 1020 Delete Receiver Highlight a Bluetooth Receiver and click Delete Receiver button to remove the device You will be prompted before removing the device Set Receiver PIN You can enter the receiver PIN by clicking Set Receiver PIN and you can change the receiver name by clicking Set Receiver Name p121 EMaxPROTO 1020 The default PIN is different for each manufacturer and ex amples for PINs are below Please see your equipment manuals for your equipment PINS Topcon 11111 Leica 00000 Thales 12345 Bluetooth Manager The Bluetooth Manager will appear in many places entry into the program clicking OK from Comm Setup Configure Base and Configure Rover it works the same from all of them After making a successful connection the software will let the user
52. Fine 1mm the shot will take 2 3 seconds Here we have taken a foresight to point 3 and have moved in tracking mode to a new position ready for a configured reading on point 4 Configured Reading shots are taken with Enter or R for Read The S button will take a fast read or Tracking Read no matter what the Configured Reading mode If using RC Select QuickLock button Otherwise use arrow keys to turn the instrument look for the 2 blinking lights if track lights are turned on and then tap Search Above we set the vertical and horizontal search ranges to 10 degrees When you obtain lock you will get 3 beeps from the RC and in all cases SurvCE will say Tracking meaning you are locked on Pressing the Search icon does an RC quick lock search if you are configured for RC Standby let s the instrument hold its position and stop tracking allowing you for example to place the rod on the ground and drive a stake then get on line again and use Search icon to regain the link With robotic total stations commands such as Turn to Angle Set Collection choose robotic sets and Check Backsight will turn robotically Set Collection Notes p578 Set Collection works best with radio linkage radio alone or radio with RC but has limited functionality in RC only mode Robotic sets use BD FD FR BR observation order Note non robotic sets can be done with a robotic total station The Angle Only in Reverse
53. Gt e A aa ra aS et 2 ef BE mit el naaa i ia ji tee SD sie poll L400 ae 71 we ee ji 97 48 i wes RIIS 50 REIS TS FIGS 3 7i 4 vane 1900 Bie Pee i o Les Tay Here below we see the 3D view of this area p413 The command begins with a screen where you select the method for defining a centerline Define Line Define Alignment Define Arc 3 Points Define Arc PC PT Value None p414 The next screen allows you to choose whether or not to store a file summarizing cross section data Because the SCT method requires that you choose an alignment the option for no alignment None only applies to the Raw Geodimeter method in which case a named file is required Except for this case of option None the Section output file is optional because the information will be stored with the points When you click Select File you have two file type options when using a horizontal alignment C RAW Geodimeter The Raw file format is a design that is compatible with the old Geodimeter section file format and includes special prompting for job type It is discussed in detail below see the discussion of None as centerline option It leads to a different set of screen options than the SCT format Unless you are looking for Geodimeter file format compatibility you should consider storing a section output file in the SCT format since it can be converted using Road Utilities to LandXML form and then impo
54. H Launches the interactive Help screen describing various MAP screen commands Scroll up and down to review VIEW The View menu is found next to the File menu in MAP view Below you will find each feature described p454 MAP VIE HISU DRAW COGO TOOLS zoan ver PNTELEW Layer view Options Isolate Points Isolate Layer Aperture UCS Find Point Scale Bar List Zoom 2 Increase or decrease the apparent size of polylines and distances between points in drawing area The Zoom command options can also be accessed using the first 5 buttons from left toolbar menu The order of buttons starting with the first top button is Extents In Out Window Previous The menu also has Num which lets you enter in a point number and zoom to it Layer LA This command manages layers and layer properties p455 i Layer Manager X ON Pe Te TTR a rah Current Layer 0 New Layer bit On all Off all Delete On fot Current To add a new layer Type in a new name into the New Layer edit box The New button will appear at the bottom Tap this button If you type in a new layer name and the New button does not appear then the layer name you entered contains invalid characters To set a layer current Highlight the layer name in the list and then tap the Set button You cannot set a layer current if that layer is turned Off Turn the layer On first and then set it current To delete a layer Highlight the lay
55. Id PRSNVRS Type GPS LiL Trimble GPSNet W SRM Format CMR 1 15 3 105 18 15 19 13 Position 4 68N 237 67E USA MMEA Needs Rover position Misc WSRM Subnet for the Puget Sound pases for WADOT ROB YRC IR Mame PRSHVESCMRE Identifier PANTRIP SkMis Short Id CPUD 23 Wenatchee Type Format Position 47 68N 237 67E USA MMEA Needs Rover position Misc WSRM Subnet for the Puget Sound If you don t like the name of the base supplied by the Broadcaster you can change it to something else you prefer and SurvCE will remember your preference but still ask the Broadcaster for the correct base Select the base you want to use and press the green check box You are brought back to the RTK tab with the base you selected as the current Base ID You can change the Base ID in the RTK tab without going back to the NTRIP Configure p146 button Current Comms Receiver Device AirLink Configure Network NTRP o ji i RTE Port com 2 Baud Parity None Stop Bits p Message Type cmR Base ID PRSNVRSCMR M Send Rover Position to Network Note that with NTRIP SurvCE already knows if the base wants the rover position sent and what type of corrections are being sent Those settings are shown in the RTK tab and are grayed out to guarantee that they stay on the correct setting SpiderNet Networks that require that a GPUID message be sent to the networ
56. List pop up box is displayed See the figure below Code List YA _ Beach FCL Feature Code List files can be created edited or reviewed on a PC using Carlson X Port or any Carlson Surveying office software SurvCE s FCL file is equivalent to Carlson s Field to Finish FLD Table used in their PC office software Transfer all PC Field to finish FLD table files using SurveyCOM or Carlson p510 Export Select the Field Code Table option to upload the FLD file to SurvCE as a FLC file Defining Field Code Line Layer Properties To define codes with line layer drawn features and optionally GIS prompting select in the Code List pop up box Add as shown in the previous figure The following Add Code pop up box allows the operator to define Field Code Line Layer drawing properties Add Code Layer name Code Full Text Polyline On Polyline is SD es COs New Attributes Code Input one word Field Code Layer Name Defines the layer the linework 2D amp 3D will draw in using Store Points Full Text User defined full text description for code Polyline On Yes or No defines to draw or not to draw between similar codes e g EP EP 1 Polyline is 3D Yes or No Yes draws in 3D No in 2D New Attributes This highlights after inputting all the Line Layer drawing properties p511 The following EP code has been input in the FCL file When Surveying using Store Points in the Su
57. Pit Referring to the graphic below which illustrates a stockpile the Final point range could be defined as ALL points and the Original point range could be defined as the base points of the stockpile or points 1 15 MAP VIEW FILE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Cmd Layer PERIMETER So using the settings above in the Volume routine you would verify your two point ranges then click OK For example the Original surface point range would be set as follows within the Define button for Original p494 Select Entities PERIMETER PNTNO Clicking OK moves forward to a shrink and swell factor screen Only if you are set to English units do you get the option for tons based on a density factor In metric units the volume is presented in cubic meters Cut Swell Factor Fill Shrink Factor l Report Tons Bensityilbs ts 80 000 Save Merged Surface to File Clicking OK continues on to the Volume Report p495 Volume Report Area in Cut 0 0 5 F 0 00 acres Area in Fill 58 791 6 5 F 1 35 acres Area exactly in daylight 761 6 5 F 0 02 acres Average fill depth 21 22 ft Total inclusion area 59 553 2 5 F 1 37 acres Cut volume 0 0 C F 0 00 C Y Fill volume 1 247 273 4 C F 46 195 31 C Y Cut to Fill ratio 0 00 Cut C Area acres 0 00 Fill C Area acres 33789 43 The report can be saved to a text file using the Save to Disk
58. Protocol RS232 GeoCOM Select F1 for CONT Verify that the only device active is RS232 GeoCOM and select F1 for CONT e Prediction Settings The Leica 1200 has several prediction modes for when the instrument has lost lock The following are the recommended settings while using SurvCE O O Select 3 for Manage Select 5 for Configuration Sets p553 O Pick New or Edit Recommend New for First Time New Input Name Desc and Creator Initials then F1 Store Cont O Select F1 for CONT 8 times until the Automatic Prism Search screen appears O Select the down arrow one time and set After Prediction Search With to No Search by tapping the right arrow key one time O Select F1 for CONT O Select Fl for CONT 2 more times until the Interfaces screen appears O Select the down arrow key to highlight GeoCOM mode and press F5 for Use Make sure no other mode is set To toggle off any other mode highlight and press F5 for Use to toggle off O Select F1 for CONT 5 times to save and exit to the Main Menu TC1010 1610 For the Leica TC1010 1610 series instruments it s important that the following settings are true e Communications Settings SurvCE amp Instrument 9600 7 even 1 e Communication Mode Make sure you set the instrument to communicate RS232 mode not module SurvCE Settings e Instrument Leica TPS Series e Instrument Series TPS 1000 1100 Mak
59. Rover and Receiver Utilities do not apply but the Localization command can be used to translate 1 point or transform multi point from the configured coordinate system to local coordinates It is still important under Job Settings GPS tab to set the correct Transformation eg NAD83 and Zone eg KY North so that the Lat Longs are converted to coordinates on the local system GPS Navcom Using Navcom with SurvCE Always connect the data collector to COM1 on the Navcom receiver The baud rates are searched after selecting Navcom in the Instrument dialog The receiver model is automatically detected Models that start with SF are capable of Starfire but that does not mean that the Starfire license is active Models that are capable of RTK have RTK put after the model name Configure Base p585 TJIES E RTK GPS Base Current Comms Antenna Type ee aca T List Antenna Height 6 562 Yertical Slant Use Internal Antenna Elevation Mask 10 GPS Base f Current Comms Receiver Configure Device acific Crest PO Network None RTK Port COM 2 Baud 19200 7 Parity None r Stop Bits fi Message Type NavCom 7 Base ID GPS Rover p586 GPS Rover Current Comms RTK Antenna Type NAVRTS0108 RTI List Antenna Height 6 562 vertical Slant Use Internal Antenna Elevation Mask 10 Position Rate fa
60. Se bk FilL 0 00 acy eS NL p A TTS a45 af Ss 3 Fraa Paia Feat Pert did C 40000 mp ens wa as mann Far pnh 4 Pale Cut 74 16 Ane hy Fi aw Fila J0 Patil F 55 535 G 200 Shown are stations 0 20 and 0 40 with the pivot points for slope staking identified on station 0 40 For the section approach to work the left most point in the cross section must be the left pivot and similarly the right most point in the cross section must be the right pivot point The section should only be entered from pivot left to pivot right the designed catch points should be dropped But since the interior section points have no bearing on the slope staking they can be om itted too So in the case of station 0 40 a 2 point cross section could be entered consisting of pivot left and pivot right That 2 point section is also shown in the graphic above Itis just as effective for slope staking as a section containing all the break points between pivots The one exception is if you have entered descriptions for your section points you can obtain a progressive slope stake report just as with the templates Note that if descriptions do not exist the report leaves them out Section based slope staking requires selection of a centerline file and field entry of the cut and fill slopes Section based slope staking is useful when the pivot points for stakeout vary unpredictably and don t conform to a fixed template Section based slope sta
61. Sokkia GPSO1 The Sokkia GPSO1 Toughbook for example has an integrate L1 GPS receiver using WAAS for corrections and has accuracies of 1 to 2 meters That same unit can be connected to real time GPS or total stations and therefore functions as a dual use device locating on the ground positions Lat Long state plane UTM and permitting standard precision surveying The GPS receiver is powered on whenever the Toughbook 01 is on and uses COM3 as the GPS port Note the stabilizer bar which effectively secures the com port connection for use in the field p591 Pog a Qo EEE 100o 0086 L Some low accuracy 10 to 50 meter GPS outputs NMEA Lat Long data by default and has no accurate setting or method Alternately certain accurate RTK brands of GPS if setup with their proprietary equipment to run RTK will transmit the NMEA string and allow GIS CE to pick up the message from the rover receiver For this reason NMEA has no Configure Base Configure Rover or Receiver Utilities option It is a plug and play method which will pull from the receiver whatever position it is outputting That Lat Long position will respond to the transformation defined in Job Settings GPS and will also respond to any localization file to transform it further to local coordinates GPS Novatel p592 This is the driver for the original Sokkia Radian real time GPS with centimeter accuracy Sokkia Radian GPS like all real
62. Sokkia Robotic 571 Total Station Sokkia Set 567 Total Station Topcon 800 8000 APL1 572 Total Station Topcon GTS 580 Transformation 328 Tutorial 1 Calculating a Traverse By Hand with SurvCE 500 Tutorial 2 Performing Math Functions in Carlson SurvCE Input Boxes 502 Tutorial 3 Performing a Compass Rule Adjustment 503 Tutorial 4 Defining Field Codes Line Layer Properties amp GIS Prompting 509 Tutorial 5 Standard Procedures for Conducting GPS Localizations 531 Using the Manual 10 Utilities 364 VIEW 454 View Options 28 p642 Carlson Software 2007 Works Simply Simply Works w w w carlsonsw com p643
63. Stakeout command is a three screen routine The first screen identifies and loads in the alignment files The second screen identifies the offset points to stake slopes and distances and the intervals or lists of stations offsets to stake The final screen goes to the standard graphics shows the target points and guides you to the destination with N for Next continuing onto the next station in the interval or list Identifying the Alignments The first screen has tabs for selecting both the horizontal and vertical alignments See Stake Line Arc for more detail Settings va Use this button in the upper part of the screen to select predefined station lists and critical stopping points along the alignments p246 Job Settings Stake Road Stake Start and End Stations _ Stake CL Alignment Points _ Stake Profile Points C Stake High and Low Points Limit Sta Range 0 00 000 to 4 36 777 Edit File Within this option you can click the Stake tab and edit your default Stake Offset Descriptions shown below See Job Settings Stake for more details Default Descriptions Je scription LCurb LDitch LDitch LEOP LEOP l CL RDitch RCurb etry Update Item Entering the Offset Points as Slopes and Distances The Offset Stakeout screen allows you to enter one or two offsets from the centerline The first offset requires a presentage slope and a distance The second p247 offset 1s for
64. The total station is now in the Remote Mode p579 Total Station Topcon GTS Most standard Topcon total stations will work configured to Topcon GTS Series This includes the Topcon 200 300 600 700 2000 and 3000 series instruments and newer models such as the Topcon 230 which uses Bluetooth wireless communication This driver does support the reflectorless capability of the thousand series instruments Topcon 2000 and 3000 for ex ample Typical baud rates for instruments in this group are 1200 E 7 1 Topcon 200 Series This is another option that can be tried when the GTS Series or other configuration does not communicate It uses a different speed and mode of linkage Topcon 300 600 700 2000 Similar to the Topcon GTS Series these drivers offer the reflectorless option Typical baud rates for instruments such as the Topcon 303 and Topcon 313 for example are 1200 E 7 1 Topcon GTS 3 3B Series This driver supports the older Topcon GTS 3 and GTS 3B standard total stations Some of the GTS Series Topcon instruments offer Reflectorless and in stakeout routines and Store Points both graphics and text modes there is a convenient reflectorless icon at the top of the screen to turn on off reflectorless and show current status See discussion of Leica TPS above GPS Allen Osbourne The first time into this selection as with most other setup procedures the program shows the Comms Setup screen There is no Configure
65. This specifies the horizontal observation tolerance as an angle field A tolerance of zero is not allowed e V Obs This specifies the vertical observation tolerance as an angle field A tolerance of zero is not allowed e Edm tol mm EDM fixed tolerance in millimeters specifies the EDM error that is independent of the length of the line measured e Stakeout Tol This specifies the maximum difference between the target location and actual staked point When the staked point is beyond the tolerance SurvCE displays a warning dialog The Stakeout Tolerance is systematically applied to all stakeout commands The program will respond with a warning screen such as Stakeout is beyond the Tolerance Setting Do you wish to continue storing The angle and distance tolerances are applied to multiple distance measurements when Configure Reading specifies multiple Num Dist Readings and when multiple angle measurements are taken in Set Collection or processed in Process Raw File GPS Tolerances p186 Tolerances HRMS Tal 1 64 ft VEMS Tol 1 64 ft Stakeout Tol 0 328 fi e CEP HRMS Tol A measurement of accuracy defined by the radius of the circle containing 50 percent of the individual measurements being made or the radius of the circle within which there is a 50 percent probability of being located e SEP VRMS Tol A measurement of accuracy defined by a sphere within which there is a 50 percent probability of locating a
66. Type Fillet This allows the user to define the offset gap type used when defining offsets within Stakeout Line Arc routine at a straight corners as radius fillet or radius zero fillet e Limit Station Range When selected the program will not automatically advance beyond the natural start and end of a given centerline e Use Station and Offset List Use this option to load a predefined list of stations and offsets This allows the Stake Offset routine to use a pre defined list of station offset and elevation information as defined by the user This is sometimes referred to as Cutsheet list An ASCII file with a CUT file extension is required The file format is shown below Station Offset Elevation Description as in 20100 11 5 102 34 20109 23 11 5 102 35 PC Settings Alignment Road Next icon advances to i Stake Section File Stations W Sections Include Catch Points W Always Zoom All zoom In Out 10 E vertical Scale 5 00 Road Tab e Next icon advances to This defines how the Next icon will behave It can advance to the next station or the next offset location p58 e Stake Section File Locations This instructs the software to stop at these critical locations even when they do not fall on the even station e Sections Include Catch Points This instructs the software whether or not the design sections were extracted to the shoulder or the design catch location If the design cat
67. USA MADE Ae North Projection list defined in Job Settings under GPS Projection e Projection Tab Displays selectable GPS grid system projections This projection list is created on the GPS tab under Job Settings p83 Process Raw File Cancel GPS Proj Dasa Multiple Measurement Settings Method Use Last Lise Last Average Redundancies Tab For multiple GPS measurements on the same point ID you can Use First Use Last or Average all Readings When all settings are correct select OK The results appear in the Review File dialog errr Review File Save Alignment Azimuth gt State Plane Grid Geoid File gt Point Latitude Longitude GFS Elev No Northing Easting Elevation C 31 42022 09 16748 71 08 00 21732 49 4 al Bb 9406 7509 143115259536 123 a2 42922 10 60748 F1 0R 09 829352 49 a2 BEJME 7383 1430415 9502 124 wt 4 Edit Raw RWS Survey File ps4 The Raw Survey Notes can be reviewed and edited by selecting Edit Rw5 File A typical application of this feature is to edit or add rod height records This is useful in the event that changes in rod heights were not recorded at the tim e that they were changed The editor allows changes to virtually all measured data but will record the original data as a note that cannot be deleted Entries can be Added Edited or Removed but even if removed original data is retained in a note
68. W 71 09 53 44382 SD 0 23811612 ft Lat Avg N 42 21 41 80071 SD 0 31654330 ft Elv Avg 9 6357 SD 0 9526 ft Latitude N 42d21 28 35882 Longitude W 71d08 12 87540 Elevation 116 376 Continue with Base Setup Yes No If you like the result press Yes and continue on You will then be prompted for the Reference Station Number This is an ID that will store to the raw file and permit post processing of the raw GPS data A typical entry is 0001 The final prompt will say Base Configuration Successful Save Settings to File Yes No Answering Yes will bring up an entry screen for the reference file name Reference files are stored with a ref extension It is important to save a reference file if you plan to return to the job at another date Without re localizing to control points you can set up over the same base position recall the reference file and enter the new antenna height for the base position and start working The Read from GPS option is sometimes referred to as Find Me This option is accurate to about 10 to 50 meters typically and it enables the corrections to broadcast with enough accuracy to permit localization and sub centimeter real time p134 work Be sure that your GPS zone in Job Settings is set correctly before using this option Also give the base enough time to find itself When first set up the base receiver has to collect satellites and resolve ambiguities
69. What firmware version is required Firmware version 696 03 xx or later is required for SurvCE to operate with this instrument To check the firmware on the instrument follow the key strokes Menu 5 4 1 The Geodimeter 640 for example does not take measurements in reverse face Therefore when doing D amp R set reverse face to angle only Sokkia GSR 2700 IS What do I do when I get the Bluetooth pass key prompt This receiver does not require a pass key If you are prompted for one do a factory reset on the receiver by holding the power key down until the message displayed is Factory Reset Then turn the device off and back on again In Carlson SurvCE clear the receiver from the Bluetooth connections list and add it back in Supported File Formats p630 What file types does SurvCE use or convert ee ISPOL Centerline File Spain ALN TerraModel Road Alignment File ALZ Form of CLIP Vertical Alignment File Spain gt RSC ASCII text file for point Lmpoerts or Inroads Centerline File Ch Carlson Horizontal Road Alignment File ORE TDS Binary Coordinate File CRD Carlson coordinate file in binary form 2 SAT Carlson Localization File gt DI Drawing file format that can be used for exchanging drawings EGM Carlson EGM Geoid File BCL Carlson Field Code Library file FFF Older form of Caice Cross Section File 38 Carlson Triangulation Mesh File G99 Carlson Geoid99 File GRD Carlson Grid File
70. a curb or ditch and is prompted in the form of distance over and elevation change up or down Stake Offset Station Interval pe 2 00 Stake Curb Ditch Height 0 5 Offset e Settings The Settings button returns to the Settings dialog allowing you to load another cutsheet list or specify more or less special stations Note that in Settings if you called for a Station and Offset List then most of the options in the Offset Stakeout dialog are fixed and your only choice is to stake the particular offsets named in the list Also note that Offset Stakeout when not using a List allows for the staking of three points on the Left or Right Side Center Curb or Ditch and EOP On the left it becomes LEOP LCurb or LDitch On the right it becomes REOP RCurb or RDitch You must enter data for the right as well as the left if you are staking both sides of a road So there are five points total that can be staked when you use the dialog entry since the centerline is covered in both the Left and Right scenarios Back The Back button returns to the first screen e Station This is where you enter the station you wish to stakeout gt Station You can advance to the next station as defined by the alignment points or station interval using the right green arrow icons Station You can go back to the previous station as defined by the alignment points or station interval using
71. a single centerline and single profile or from a picked 3D polyline Points can be selected by number or picked directly off the screen SLOPE STK Hl Polyline Arc Close Undo lt End gt cmd AAA 7 15 ape 440ft When a new horizontal alignment is selected by 3D polyline or point method the program will ask if you wish to overwrite any existing vertical alignment p397 selection The typical answer is yes you want it for both and you are ready to stake any station at any interval based on user entered slopes Think of points 6 to 7 as the flow line of a ditch with steep side slopes and the goal 1s to lay the slopes back at 2 1 a perfect application for Point Defined Slope Staking Design File Dialog If you select Design Files a dialog appears Design Files Centerline C Sur o Data MODOT Road LINN cl Centerline 0 00 000 to 9 96 092 Profile C Sur o Data MODOT Road LINN pro Profile 0 00 000 to 9 34 020 Template C Sur Data MODOT Road ROAD1 tpl Optional Files Superelevation None Tpl Transition None Load Roading Files Save Roading Files Centerlines profiles and templates can be made using SurvCE In fact centerlines and profiles can be imported from a variety of file formats using the commands within Road Utilities Note that templates can be either single template tpl files or multiple templates with transitions in a Template Series tsf file If th
72. also change the type of transformation or zone system used If you don t want NAD 83 primarily used in the U S you can go to Job Settings GPS and change the Transformation type For example you could change the Transformation to UTM or NTF France Then back in Calculator your coordinate to Lat Long calculation would be based on the configured transformation Note that when converting Grid System Coordinates to WGS84 coordinates and going WGS 84 to Grid the geoid separate file if any is applied to the calculation Az Br This does a straight simple calculation converting azimuths to bearings A prime example shown below would be converting an azimuth of 119 2547 p335 Calculator x Standard Scientific Conversion C MFt C SDZAHDAD C Lat Lon SP Az Br Morth Azimuth Bearin 119 25 47 560 34 13 E S60 34 13 E Bearing Code C 1 North East 2 South East C 3 South West C 4 North West Salve Other Calculations There are two types of calculations that can be performed from the OTHER tab Click the large square icons to go to the Triangle or Curve calculator Calculator x Standard Scientific Conversion Triangle Calculator p336 The figure below shows the Triangle calculator The top of the dialog box indicates the mode of calculation To change the mode simply use the pull down and to selec the desired mode Side Side Side Angle Side Angle Si
73. be done only in consultation with your Thales dealer Reset RTK Engine This resets the carrier phase ambiguities This is a useful command if you are having difficulty obtaining lock and want to start the process of fixing over again Receiver settings are retained so you can think of it as a soft reset Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth settings in SurvCE s Bluetooth Manager discussed in Comm Setup do not actually change anything in the receiver itself In order to make changes to the receiver s internal Bluetooth settings it is necessary to go into Receiver Utilities and click on Bluetooth Settings GPS Utility for GPS Simulation If running GPS simulation the starting point can be reset using the special GPS utility Enter the new Lat Lon for the position p152 GPS Simulation Utilities Use dd mmssss format N S Starting Latitude 42 000000000000 E Starting Longitude 87 000000000000 GPS Utilites by Manufacturer Setup Manufacturer specific information is available in the GPS Utilities by Manufacturer section Configure General This tab allows you to select settings and preferences that apply to observations taken in the field These options remain set from job to job If an option is not applicable it is grayed out Configure is accessible from within any routine where the C or Configure Icon is present These options can also be accessed by pressing ALT C on the keyboard p153
74. by clicking the Close p307 File button Start Processing Stop Processing These buttons pause and resume recording to the file If the file is recording Stop Processing will pause the recording If the file is not recording Start Processing will resume the file When the file first starts it is recording File Manager Go to the SURVEY tab and click the Log Static Data button You will see a screen with six buttons or an error message stating that the data collector could not connect to the receiver If there is an error message check connections on the data card Click on the File Manager button to see what files are on the receiver s card The next screen contains a list of files and their respective sizes Files on Receiver 4392 kBytes 3 23 2003 16 42 GMT 18 kbytes 3 26 2003 15 20 GMT 25 kBytes 3 26 2005 20 41 GMT 4kBytes 3 26 2003 20 43 GMT 4 files __ Format Card Free memory 27489 kBytes Delete At the bottom of the dialog free memory is shown along with a Delete button If you are running low on memory you can delete files using this dialog box To delete a file click on the file from the list and select the Delete button You will then be asked to confirm that you wish to delete the file You can also format the card here using the Format Card button This will destroy all the data on the card Make sure you don t need any of the data on the card before formatting it To ex it this dialog choose E
75. choose In this case we will send that value exactly unmodified to the instrument e 23 1 360 Leica Model e 4 4 Mini 360 p556 e 34 4 0mm e 0 0 circle Standard Leica round prism e 17 5 mini Leica mini prism e 34 4 ReflTape Equates to zero offset wall surface e 4 4 30mm Other manufactures Sokkia Seco e 5 6 40mm Other manufacturers Guide Lights This setting causes the instrument to show flashing lights This makes it easy to tell when the instrument has turned towards you in tracking mode Can be set to Off On or Auto Laser Pointer Ideal for indoor or dark evening surveying this feature causes the instrument to emit a red beam It is often used when doing reflectorless work and makes a red mark on the wall floor or object being surveyed This is usefule for confirming the position prior to the shot The beam should not be directed into someone s vision or eye Instrument Setup Current Comms Settings W Power Search Work Area iw Use ATR Work Area Settings Power Search Enabled The Power Search option can be purchased with all motorized Leica total stations This option activates the PowerSearch button in the banner line at the top of the survey and stakeout screens When Power Search is pressed the total station will typically find the prism in 10 seconds regardless of the direction it is initially pointed If it has found one prism and you hit Powe
76. cl Ending Station 3 08 327 Cutsheet None Centerline File Select a centerline file defined in the Roads Menu or uploaded and converted to cl format Select Polyline Select a polyline on the screen to define the alignment Define Point List Enter a sequence of points to define the alignment Use Ref CL Toggle this on to enable the use of a reference alignment This will be the alignment from which the stationing is reported The offsets and critical locations will remain relative to the main centerline alignment Select Use this option to select the reference alignment file Preview Displays the alignment graphically Edit Use this to edit the selected alignment Save As If an alignment was defined by points or a polyline you can optionally save it as a centerline file Start Station Enter the starting station unless it was pre determined by a centerline file End Station This shows the ending station of the selected alignm ent Defining Alignment Vertical This is optional in this command If your goal is to ignore elevations and you are auto recalling roading files the Vertical Alignment will be used and cut fill will appear unless you turn off Apply Vertical Alignment p231 Define Alignments Horizontal 1 Profile File 2 Select Polyline 5 Preview 6 Edit 3 Define Point List Profile C Sur EDemoSpecial Data DEMO pro a Ending Station 3 08 000 W Apple Yertical
77. coverage and your fixed or float status You always want the best possible fixed status when conducting a rover based localization e Save Allows you to save the control points in a file e 2 pt Rotate Only Allows you to use the second point in the localization file for direction but not for scaling In this case any scale factor set on the UNITS tab in Job Settings would be active e OK Pressing OK will temporarily recall the current Localization as you work If you change the Localization file Save then Cancel the original Localization file will still be active Pressing OK is what makes it active and current In this case you would need to Load the new Localization file and press OK to make it active You can choose to Add localization points midway on a job and not actually use them by pressing Save then Cancel Then when the job is complete you can recall the Localization file with all the old and added localization points go to Process Raw File and re calculate all surveying points according to the new Localization Discussion of Localization Techniques If you do a base localization by entering Latitude and Longitude or known coordinates on the designated coordinate system then you do not need to add localization points A base localization would put you on grid north and grid scale and would work for any new job where you are not trying to match ex isting coordinates However any time you are working on a project that has
78. depending on your configuration of the target from ground elevation to the center of the lens for example Even if working in English units you can enter a 2 meter target height using 2m This converts to 6 5617 feet automatically after you press Enter Note The backsight target height will default to the previous backsight target height on future setups The foresight target height is kept distinct and will default to previous foresight target heights but will not automatically match the backsight target height If you prefer to survey by setting the prism pole to a fixed height for both backsights and foresights be aware that you will have to put in 2 initial target heights one for the first backsight in the backsight screen and one for the first foresight in the foresight screen in order to get both remembered values established Use Backsight Ht for Foresights This option will link the backsight height and the foresight height to accommodate the use of a single prism for both the backsight and foresight readings rather than a fixed tripod at the backsight and roving pole scenario Confirm NEZ This option will display the full coordinates and description of both the setup and backsight points By default the Setup coordinates will be displayed You can tab to the backsight coordinates Press Enter or tap OK to exit this dialog Configure This accesses the Configure screen for a variety of condition or settings changes e
79. e ALT V Shortcut to View the Raw Data Point Data Feature Codes and Cutsheets e ALT W Write a Note anytime with this command Notes store to the Raw File e ALT X Shortcut to Exit most commands Similar to Esc escape key e The character can be used in any field that requires a numerical entry to p32 access the Calculator The Sokkia SDR8100 is an exception This device uses the symbol In most measurement screens you can also select the SurvCE icon at the top left to access the hot list of shortcuts to other routines Help ALT H m l View Data ALT 5 180 ft Points ALT P Szi Inverse ALT I J Write Note ALT W l Li Codes ALT L Map ALT M Oh Calculator ALT K 0 Freeze Points ALT F Text ALT a Minimize 67 Z 97 3929 HRMS 0 044 RMS 0 065 While in any Topo or Stakeout routine a number of features are accessible by pressing ALT followed by the corresponding Hot Key Below is a list of Hot Keys arranged by routine and equipment type Action in Topo Mode Summary Key GPS Conventional TS Robotic TS A Take Read and Store All Read and Store All Average Reading ss Total Station Setup Total Station Setup C Configure Configure Reading Configure Reading Reading a Read Leica Toggle EDM Others GPS Manual Read EJ T S p33 F Freeze Freeze Points Freeze Points Points Interval Recording Recording Inverse Inverse rverse far Motorized
80. e Fast CPD This option specifies whether or not the program will allow approximating the rover s position if your position is lost briefly Off is the default Fast CPD is generally toggled on when Dynamics is set to Automobile GPS Sokkia Sokkia GSR 2700 IS What do I do when I get the Bluetooth pass key prompt p597 This receiver does not require a pass key If you are prompted for one do a factory reset on the receiver by holding the power key down until the message displayed is Factory Reset Then turn the device off and back on again In Carlson SurvCE clear the receiver from the Bluetooth connections list and add it back in Sokkia Radian This is the driver for the original Sokkia Radian real time GPS with centimeter accuracy Sokkia Radian GPS like all real time high accuracy GPS requires a base receiver sending corrections to a rover receiver Most commonly used GPS antenna types include the SK600 and SK502 All Sokkia GPS receivers will accept and transmit RTCM RTCA and CMR message strings Sokkia Radian IS The Radian IS is an integrated GPS receiver with a fixed antenna type the SK600 Antenna height on the integrated Radian IS with built in SK600 antenna is measured to the base of the rubber bumper around the antenna Sokkia provides a measuring tape that connects to the rectangular indentations for precise height measurement A diagram of the phase center offset antenna height is included on the rece
81. entire profile 15 feet or meters p372 Translate PRO y C Range of Stations 10078 6900 14007 1900 List of Stations 10078 6900 Change station 10600 0000 0 0000 11429 2500 12252 2500 Change elevation 14007 1900 By default the entire range of stations is selected If you wish to only translate a range highlight the beginning station then click End Station and highlight the end station Next enter the amount to translate in the Change Station box You may also translate the elevation using the Change Elevation box Tap OK when you are finished Section File Conversion This command converts section files to and from the Carlson section file format SCT Supported file types include Caice FFF CLIP TRV Geopak XRS XSR SOE amp TXT IGRDS LIS RDS amp TXT ISPOL SC1 amp RAS LandXML XML Columnar Text TXT CSV amp ASC Terramodel Geodimeter XSC The SurvCE format is SCT Section files are used for Stake Slope Stake Road and Elevation Difference Cross Section Survey also has the ability to output section files TDS will store cross sections in an RD5 format that behave as p373 a series of templates following rules for slopes coming from the design profile grade You can import TDS style cross sections using Input Edit Template Series within Road Utilities and for Files of Type select TDS Import Export Section File EJ x LandxML File xm
82. file For this reason it is a good idea to re convert older GPS measurements to the same compatible coordinate system by going to Process Raw Data option Process GPS within the COGO tab Geoid Files The Geoid file is loaded onto SurvCE using Carlson X Port You first select the area of interest then X Port carves out the geoid for that area and downloads it to SurvCE You set the Geoid file to use in the GPS tab of Job Settings The Geoid should be used principally with one point localizations Starting with a known position for the base or using a one point rover localization and approximate base position the program will add or deduct the geoidal separation p178 from the computed Z value on all measurements and will match more closely to geoid based surface elevations The Geoid can also be used with multiple point rover localizations since the added accuracy provided by the geoidal calculation can reduce vertical residuals This is true however only if the points being matched had Z values that themselves considered the geoid Since you will get a best fit plane that minimizes vertical residuals with or without use of the geoid it is often not used with rover based localizations Changing or Updating the Localization File There are two ways to change a localization file One method is to edit an ex isting file by deleting elements and the second is to add additional localization points In either case whenever a chang
83. file There are seven different formats to choose from Each can either be space or comma delimited giving you a total of fourteen choices Two of the options include quotes around the description field so that your descriptions can include spaces and or commas e Type of Delimiter You must specify the character used for delimiting the fields in the output ASCII file You may choose either a space or a comma e Range You must specify the range of points to output Ranges can be separated with commas as in 1 40 101 199 A1 A44 e Export Notes When this option is enabled any point notes associated with the current job will be exported to a NOT file These files are used with SurvCADD and other Carlson office software products p110 Export Attributes GIS attributes can be assigned to points that are stored based on settings in the Feature Code List If a point that is shot is a manhole e g MH and attributes such as concrete 5 rungs 2 inlets are entered for this point these attributes will be exported to an ASCII file for use by external programs when this option is enabled Decimals You must specify the output precision for northings eastings and elevations This setting does not affect point IDs or descriptions After choosing the settings in this dialog box press OK A standard file dialog will appear In this dialog choose a name for your ASCII file and then press OK After the file is written a dialog will appear to let
84. for convenience With cross sections the profile is not required but including the profile will lead to more accurate slope staking between known cross sections such as at high and low points in the road Setting the Station and Interval for Stakeout The next screen sets the station to stakeout and the interval and will appear in some form in all cases except section and design files slope staking with interval turned off In effect there are 8 ways of going into Slope Staking 4 methods times 2 interval options on fixed station off fluid real time You also have 3 more methods if you include the Stake Road routine which offers Slope Staking by Section Template or Sections Cut from DTM all fixed station Station for Slope Staking Station Next Interval Read Instrument Use Point The station to stake can also be read from the GPS or total station measurement allowing you to slope stake Where you are You can also get the station by entering a point number in which case it projects the point onto the centerline to determine the station In the non interval method the above screen does not appear You slope stake wherever you are all the time and are freed of the constraints of staking a specified station The User Defined and Point Defined Alignment methods have their own pair of follow up screens for the location to stake p400 Station for Slope Staking Station 0 00 000 Next Interv
85. have the option to specify the default in Percent Degrees or Ratio however some commands such as 3D Inverse will automatically report both slope and ratio and are unaffected e Station Display This option impacts the display of centerline stationing sometimes referred to as chainage In the U S for example roads designed in feet are stationed by every 100 feet so that a road at linear position 14280 5 is given a station of 142 80 50 Metric roads in the U S are often stationed by kilometers where the same road position has a station of 14 280 500 You can configure the placement of the as desired independent of your configuration for metric vs feet units You can also configure for a purely decimal display of stationing chainage as in 14280 500 This display form shows up in such commands as Input Edit Centerline within the Start Station dialog box Please note that you should still input the stationing in purely numeric form without the convention Only the display is impacted by this option J ob Settings Stake This tab allows you to set configuration options for the stakeout routines p53 Job Settings kal New Job System Format Options Stake Precision 0 000 W Store Data to Note File W Control File Points have Priority for Stakeout Stake Offset Desc Alignment Settings Auto Descriptions Cutsheets Precision Use this to control the decimal precision reported
86. icon at the top of the screen within Volume Report Click the Return arrow to continue back to the Map screen If you draw a 3D polyline perimeter connecting points with elevation representing the outer limits of the volume calculation using Draw Polyline 3D then you can click on Inclusion and use the polyline as an inclusion perimeter You can also use drawn elements on different layers as part of the volume calculation if they are 3D by moving them over to the right colume using the Define button Volumes can also be conducted between File surfaces TIN files made with Triangulate amp Contour or within the Volume command itself using the option Save Surface to File p496 MAP VIEW 3DPline Pick point or point ID cmd EA AAAA Finally if you are doing a stockpile and make the effort to put this outer perimeter in the Perimeter layer then you can select the Stockpile option within V olume and it goes directly to the shrink swell factor screen and then to the report without any other selections by the user This is because the Perimeter layer will define both the inclusion perimeter and the original surface in this case MAP VIEW p497 List Elevation LELV This command allows the user to pick on an entity and retrieve the elevation of that point MAP VIEW HE ListElev Pick polyline cmd Layer INCLUSION es AR CTR ie wasn AS SY 4 GOS LAA Maura A VAVAY
87. is the only GPS LED blinking the receiver has a Starfire position If the receiver does not have Starfire the single green LED indicates RTK Fixed mode If the receiver has both Starfire and RTK ability then a single green LED indicates either Starfire or RTK Fixed mode Base LED Lights The Base LED lights blink at the rate RTK corrections are being sent If the receiver 1s configured as a rover all Base LED lights will be off Which color of LED is blinking depends on the RTK correction format being sent Green indicates Navcom proprietary format amber indicates CMR and red indicates RTCM Link LED Lights Carlson Software programs the behavior of the Link LED lights to depend on whether the receiver is configured as a base or rover and whether using an internal or external radio for RTK corrections The following table summarizes the possible configurations Rover Internal Radio LED s off Signal Strength When using an internal radio on a rover the LED s show radio signal strength Full strength is shown by all Link LED s being on and not blinking As signal strength fades The green LED will start blinking then turn off then the amber LED will start blinking and turn off then the red LED will blink when signal is lost Every time a correction is sent or received when using an external radio a Link LED blinks The color of the Link LED that blinks depends on the RTK correction format Green indicates Navcom pro
88. it by selecting Settings For more information on laser setup see the Peripherals section of this manual Intersection Results Method N 9870 6196 HRMS 2 543 Read Point 1 E 20101 5862 VRMS 2 896 7 97 408 AUTONOMOUS Dist 1 0 000 tt M HEMS Fead Point 2 E VREME Dist 2 ft Settings RET e Offset Under the OFFSET tab press Read Point 1 to read the first point from GPS Now enter the distance of the point to be stored or press Read Dist 1 to read this distance from a laser Repeat this process for the second point Switch to the RESULTS tab to see your solution If your distances and GPS can t be triangulated you may have to return to this tab to adjust the values e Results After you have two GPS positions and two distances that form a valid triangle click on the RESULTS tab to view the resulting point If valid data has been entered in the OFFSET tab the result will appear as shown below In this window you can adjust the GPS antenna height or specify a p220 vertical difference for your target point You can also specify the point ID and description for the point that will be stored The intersection method generates two solutions so you will have to select which one you want by clicking the appropriate radio button Offset by Two Point Use Offset by Two Point to calculate a point based on two GPS positions and a distance from the second point If Straight is selected the distance
89. know If the connection fails there will be a warning p122 Connection established to receiver 7 Max 1020 Sue Receiver Not Found Check Power and Cabling Trouble shooting Note Be sure the GPS receiver is turned on before trying to connect and that you are within 30 feet of the receiver If the user can t see the device from the Bluetooth Devices program it is not going to work in SurvCE The Bluetooth Manager works somewhat better with a passkey but it is not strictly necessary Sometimes the Bluetooth registry settings don t work correctly with an empty passkey A pass key is the name the Bluetooth driver uses for a password This is always used on Thales Ashtech and can be used on Topcon It makes the Bluetooth connection more reliable Setup Total Station Settings Search p123 EDM Mode Instrument Setup Current Comms EEGs Search EDM Made Fat Target Offset 231660 l BS Prism Offset 0 0 Circe Guide Lights Auto a Laser Pointer Instrument Setup Current Comms Settings EEs W Power Search Work Area iw Use ATR Work Area Settings p124 Available methods are Standard 1 5 to 2 seconds Fast and Reflectorless In all modes of data collection you are in Rapid Tracking mode Clicking that icon goes to the No Distance or Tracking Only Mode no distance measurements Avoiding taking distance measurements will save battery
90. longer have to anticipate the shot and get the correct information entered ahead of time This prompt screen is shown in the figure below When it appears you will have the option to enter a point description and change the point number and the target height Note that all the field codes identified in the Feature Code List under File are available for touch or arrow key selection provided this option is activated in Job Settings Use Code Table for Descriptions Also if you enter the first character of a code for ex ample I for IP the first field code starting with that character will be highlighted allowing you to arrow key to the one you want or accept the highlighted option This entry is not case sensitive Disable the Prompt For Height and Description option to save time while taking points or if you are certain that your height and description will not change from shot to shot If the option is disabled you must be sure that the correct target height and description have already been entered Store Point ff x Pt ID 81 HT 46 N 3366 3608 ZA 91024 44 E 4972 8977 AR 310 23 41 845 70608 HD 103 6185 Desc Guard Rail Guard Cable OG PEE Note In the Height Description Prompt screen you will see pre defined Feature Code points indicated with a large dot 2D polylines will show as a simple line 3D polylines will show as a line with a Z indicator and descriptions entered p155 that are not found in t
91. offset is derived from either design files the template interacting with the profile and centerline or from cross sections or from sections that are cut from alignments At any specific station you will be guided to the desired offset and will get a cut or fill By contrast if the goal were to simply set random cut and fill stakes along an alignment at no particular station or offset then the command Elevation Difference would be used If the goal is to stake out the catch in cut and fill where cut slopes and fill slopes meet ex isting ground then Stake Slope would be used However you can also Slope Stake within Stake Road The fourth major highway oriented feature is Store Sections which is used to gather as built information on a road In this command you take cross sections of data points along the road at random or specific stations In summary Stake Slope starts the cut and fill work Stake Road directs the precise roadbed work and fine grading Hevation Difference acts as a quick grade check and Store Sections produces the final confirmation of the as built road for payment and certification It is highly recommended for all road stakeout that you set on Use CL for Reference Object within Configure View Point tab Defining the Road The first dialog that comes up when you select Stake Road is where you define the road by selecting one of the following options p427 Design Files In Carlson SurvCE design fil
92. only radio option available for non ZMAX Thales Ashtech receivers is a PDL radio The Base Rover radio setup options will assume the radio is a PDL radio on these receivers and try to configure them accordingly All the same settings channel digisquelch over air link rate should still be available however e Hard Reset Shuts down the receiver and brings it up again with default settings Resets all port baud rates to 9600 and resets the internal memory e Set Factory Defaults Resets the receiver and changes all parameters to the factory defaults It is useful in troubleshooting problems Save Settings to Receiver Use this command is issued as part of the Configure Base and Configure Rover operations However you can run this command at any time as an extra confirmation of your settings changes including settings changes within Receiver Utilities This sends the PASHS SAV Y command to the receiver p623 Beep Off This disables the Beep sound that emanates from the Receiver when it is turned on Send Command to Receiver You can send what are known as pash commands internal Thales Ashtech codes to the receiver This should be done only in consultation with your Thales dealer Reset RTK Engine This resets the carrier phase ambiguities This is a useful command if you are having difficulty obtaining lock and want to start the process of fixing over again Receiver settings are retained so you can think of it a
93. or firmware support these features If these options do not work you might be able to update the firm ware or manually adjust the settings using the instrument p566 Total Station Sokkia Set The following information describes the various options available for the Sokkia Set total stations e 1 Way vs 2 Way The 1 Way option mimics the operation of most total station instruments using SurvCE The 2 Way option has the one big advantage of sending the angle to turn into the instrum ent during stakeout so that looking at the instrument panel you turn to zero to aim at the target point It is recommended that Nikon instruments be run in Sokkia Set emulation mode enabling the 2 Way communication Instrument Setup Current Comms Edn EDM Mode Rapid Target Offset 30 Zero Hz Angle to Target e EDM Mode Available methods are rapid and fine e Target Offset Enter the prism offset here e Zero Hz Angle to Target This option specifies whether or not SurvCE will set the horizontal angle of the total station to zero in the direction towards the stakeout point When stakeout is completed the horizontal angle is set back to the original value This option only applies to Sokkia total stations or to total stations such as Nikon which have a Sokkia emulation mode The driver applies to all current Sokkia total stations including the 110M when p567 used in manual mode It also applies to many non Sokkia
94. other will be used for angle balance when Angle Balance is applied The angle balance point will be the same as the last foresight point in the traverse and will not be adjusted Traverse Points You ll notice in the Angle Balance Measurement figure below since you keyed in the data yourself that the number of traverse points in this survey is 7 Since point 7 was only measured to avoid and record the closing angle balance measurement by hand in this example the traverse is only from points 1 through 6 Replace the 7 in the Ending Point Number input box with a 6 as shown in this next figure immediately below followed by the OK button Note that point 6 should be the same location as point number 1 in a closed traverse p506 Traverse Points Cancel Starting Point Number I Ending Point Number gl Angle Balance Select the foresight shot from the last occupied point to the original backsight location In this example we would select the leg measured from point 6 to point 7 since point 7 was our foresight angle balance shot to point 2 Press the OK button In an open traverse this would be the measured leg that represents the known azimuth or bearing at the end of the traverse p507 Angle Balance EEE OK Cancel Select the Angle Balance Shot Foresight Pt Reference Closing Angle Finally we need to provide the reference closing angle record This is the original backsight azimuth Key
95. point You can also specify the point ID and description for the point that will be stored Stake Points This command allows you to stakeout a selected point by guiding you to the point with a series of commands and directions Various options can be set in EQUIP Configure View Point to adjust how the directions are provided to best suit your needs You should also review the Job Settings under FILE before staking The dialogs are varied slightly with respect to total station or GPS equipment Both types are documented here illustrating the differences between the dialogs Stake Points a Point by POATE MLA be z Direction Source Current Job Azimuth Add To List Pick From List Slope Northing 9954 8820 pa Easting 20095 6330 H Distance Elevation 101 0810 Description CP CHIS X Note While in graphics mode stakeout if you press the down arrow key you can increase the plan view size and eliminate some of the text information Pressing the up arrow key again reveals the cut and fill After selecting OK the main stakeout window appears in MAP view In manual total station mode the angle to turn to and the distance to the stake point will be displayed at the bottom of the screen Shown below are the graphic icons set under EQUIP Configure using a robotic total station in prism mode not reflectorless p222 STK PT Bic ot E Pt 1193 Desc AR fey P 1001 2 91 408 CP NAIL Turn to A
96. point number and current foresight shot This is helpful when points are densely located Alt F again returns to the full point plot Linework remains e ALT H Help Takes you to the Help menu e ALT I Inverse Does a quick inverse and upon exit returns you to the command you were in e ALT J Joystick Applies only to robotic total station Takes you to the Settings option ALT J typically only functions if you are configured for a robotic total station ALT J will work from within data gathering commands and from the main menus e ALT L List as in Feature Code List When entered in any Description field this will recall the Feature Code List which displays the characteristics layer linework of the feature code This serves not only as a way to select the code and apply it to the description but it also serves as a handy rem inder of the code s properties e ALT M Menu Returns you to the dialog of the local command keeping all current inputs For example in Intersection you are returned to the entry dialog with all entered point numbers distances and azimuths intact allowing you to alter one or more and re calculate Except when used as a local menu return ALT M will switch to the map screen e ALT N Next Moves you to the Next point or station in the Stakeout commands e ALT T Traverse Takes a reading and advances the setup to the measured point The instrument setup dialog is presented for verification
97. point on a template has an ID such as EP and SH or CB1 Templates in SurvCE have only one surface the surface you are staking To stake out a subgrade you could enter the surface grade information then use a vertical offset in Stake Road or enter the subgrade surface directly as a template After selecting Template Editor you are presented immediately with the input dialog shown in the figure below If an existing template is loaded based on the last template used you can clear the screen by clicking the clear icon eraser in the upper right Input Edit tpl File None GRADES tight Side Same as Left Left SURFACE Distance Slope Cut Fill Load Save Template grades are entered top to bottom and extend out from the middle position of the template If you are dealing with a symmetrical template keep the Right Side Same as Left option enabled This will reduce entries by half Otherwise you must select the appropriate side and use Add to add entries or Edit to revise One trick if you have non symmetrical grades is to keep Right Side Same as Left on and enter the symmetrical portion perhaps the pavement p358 lanes and first shoulder lane then when you get to the outside shoulder or other lane where one side is different than the other disable Right Side Same as Left and complete the non symmetrical portion of the template With the Right Side Same as Left turned off you can click
98. points This feature enables the From List option found throughout SurvCE to access Control Points The number of points and highest point number in the control file will now appear in the Details option Raw Data Carlson SurvCE creates a raw file RW5 that contains various lines of survey data similar to a surveyors field book The data contained in the RWS file will vary depending upon whether a total station robotic total station or GPS is used during the survey The name of the RWS file will default to the specified job name jobname RWS This command enables viewing and editing of the raw survey data as well as traverse closure and adjustment computations for the survey for both total station and GPS raw data If total station shots are involved a graphical representation of the traverse can also be viewed using this command p67 Total Station and GPS Use Total station adjustments are conducted differently from GPS adjustments Process GPS If you wish to adjust your GPS first for control and then calculate your total station traverse first select Process GPS Then use Process No Adjust or Compass as desired Process Raw File survce rw5 Process No Adjust Crandall Angle Balance DirectReverse Report Transit Draw Traverse Lines Compass Edit RvvS File Process GPS Process Raw File Operations Total Station GPS Reporting Editing SurvCE has made available four different types of raw file pro
99. refers to the Russian satellite constellation Global Navigation Satellite System There are approximately 24 U S satellites active more will launch over time and there are approximately 10 Glonass satellites currently active A full 24 satellite constellation is anticipated by 2006 for the Glonass satellites With a minimum of 2 Glonass satellites available or seen by the base and rover receivers satellite coverage is improved and work is sometimes possible in canopy urban or deep pit environments where non Glonass receivers do not have coverage All Topcon GPS receivers have a stat light on the front panel that flashes green indicating number of U S satellites and orange indicating the number of Russian satellites Comm Setup Port Number This drop list allows the user to select the communications port of the data collector e This is a Bluetooth Port This toggle allows the user to specify that the selected port number is in fact the communications port that the Bluetooth p599 device in the data collector is assigned to e Find Bluetooth Port This button will auto detect the Bluetooth port number in most devices e Bluetooth Type Select the manufacturer of the Bluetooth device if known Typically Socket will be the preferred brand and often the installed brand but if the brand is not known select Other e Baud Rate Set this value to match the data baud rate of the GPS serial port Typically this will be 1
100. right The Ref Object box allows you to choose a stationary point by which the directions will be referenced This point can be either the instrument or a known point If Ref Object is set as instrument then left 1s defined as left of the line between the instrument and the rod Likewise if Ref Object is point then left is defined as left of the line between the point and the rod The second option Directions From allows you to decide whether the directions are relative to the stationary point selected in Ref Object or to the moving Rod e Direction to Point Azimuth Distance This directs you to the point for stakeout by the total distance and the azimuth in either the 360 degree circle or a 400 degree circle if configured to grads The Use Horizontal Clock system option converts the 360 or 400 circle into a 12 hour circle with 60 minutes per hour and is used in certain military applications North is 12 0 clock e CL In Out Forward Back if Alignment available This option overrides the settings above and if the stakeout involves a centerline the program will direct the user by distance in to or out from the centerline and forward or back along the centerline Configure Sets This tab allows the user to define how the software will handle angle sets reciprocals and direct and reverse p159 Configure General View Pt Q Backsight Read DER Traverse Read DER DJ Resection Read DAR CJ Topo
101. save a configuration from the instrument icon at the top of the screen when you say OK to Configure Rover Configure Base or Equip Settings for TS when you change jobs and when you enter Equip Comm Settings Prior to release p629 1 50 007 in November 2004 even Configure Rover did not save the height information to disk Therefore if you re boot perform a hard reset or otherwise exit the program by any method other than the normal File Exit method recent changes to the prism height or antenna height may not be saved On re entering the program the X Y position for GPS work for example will very likely be correct but elevations may have been lost When using GPS it is recommended after a re boot that you do the command Configure Rover to re establish the correct elevations and in all cases GPS and Total Station it is recommended that you double check your antenna or prism heights before proceeding Miscellaneous Instrument Configuration Leica Robotic Do I need to be in RCS Remote Control mode You must verify that you are NOT in RCS mode when using SurvCE with Leica robotic equipment It will appear as though you are not communicating with the instrument if this mode is active Refer to the Leica documentation for how to ex it RCS mode Leica GPS What firmware will allow radio channel changing Firmware version 3 52 or later is required for SurvCE to have radio channel changing functionality Geodimeter 600
102. second pulse means good satellite reception and fast pulsing means insufficient satellites The LCD to the left is steady on amber if static data is being logged to the receiver When you configure the base with the Trimble data loggers you can set it to do RTK with PPInfill which will do both RTK and static logging SurvCE can be used to configure the base or will drive the rover when the base has been configured by the Trimble data logger A typical antenna usage would be the Zephyr Geodetic for the base mitigates multi path and the Zephyr for the 5800 rover Consult your Trimble reference manuals for more detailed information p609 Trimble Pathfinder This is another GIS level receiver which typically gets corrections from either a Beacon or a dedicated satellite in space Racal and has an approx imate accuracy of I meter An option to read OmniStar has been added There is no Configure Base or Receiver Utilities option but there is a Configure Rover option Trimble Pathfinder Setup Elv Mask fio Rod Height 1 DGPS Correction Source p610 GPS Utilities by Manufacturer GPS Utilities Leica 500 1200 This command is used to configure the GPS radios and set the message type to use This command is used to set radio configurations for both base and rover receivers If SurvCE is used in conjunction with the Red Controller from Leica a serial port to radio baud rate of 38400 is often pre set SurvCE should be
103. set to conform to that baud rate A useful feature of the Receiver Utilities is to verify the status of the receiver as either a Base or a Rover bottom status line Leica GPS Rover Setup Receiver ihe Power On Off Receiver Set Radio Channel Radio Type L Pacific Crest Serial Port to Radio Baud Rate 33400 Radio Port fi Type leia Radio Stop Bits fi Radio Parity None Current Configuration is Rover e Power On Off Receiver The receiver can be turned off and on in the command Receiver Utilities option Power On Off Receiver The Configure Base and Configure Rover commands will typically turn on the receiver automatically Sometimes turning off and turning on the receiver can be used as a troubleshooting technique to clear conditions and start from a clean slate e Radio Type The Pacific Crest PDL radio type is the default setting operating at 38400 baud rate Older Pacific Crest radios are often type RFM96W defaulting to 9600 baud rate Other options include Satel radios Modems poll RS232 and User Defined Modem Phone numbers for cell modems will accept up to 49 characters When using Freewave or Tait spread spectrum radios the radio type doesn t matter but can be set to User Defined Modem Baud rate for Freewave is often 19200 baud Connections With Freewave and other spread spectrum radio linkages communication must occur within a line of sight distance
104. setting out points along a line including the cut or fill or for staking out points relative to the line One application for ex ample would be staking a pipe between two known points inlet and outlet where offset stakes can be set with cut fill noted Station Store might even be used to calculate in p228 advance the inlet and outlet points based on a known station offset and elevation For all staking there are configuration settings that govern the type of instructions you receive in stakeout You should review the settings in the Stake tab under Job Settings as well as the Configure option within Equip before staking The dialogs are varied slightly with respect to total station or GPS equipment Both types are documented here illustrating the differences between the dialogs Stakeout by Define Line also has a Point On Line tab that enables in total station mode staking of the intersect with the specified line on the current line of sight This is often used to set stakes or flagging along a property line that is obscured by trees The surveyor finds a gap in the line takes a reading to the prism and is advised how far to Move In or Move Out to stake the line at the current line of sight The Point on Line tab also includes the standard perpendicular method where any measurement is used to compute the direction and distance to move to go to the point on the line perpendicular to the measured point For GPS configurations Point On
105. slope to override what is in the template e Pivot Point This option allows the user to perform on the fly offsets relative to the stakeout position Stakeout Views Stake Road now allows you to navigate to the point in either plan view or cross section view Select the helmet icon and choose Section to see a section view and choose Plan to return to plan view p436 N 3376 1530 E 4645 7971 839 4846 COTf 31 443 HRMS 0 043 VRMS 0 088 tai3 05 051 116 144 Out 4 75 Right 12 42 Design Cut 2 000 1 from 635 763 Cut 3 722 1 574 1 for 5 656 Cutsheets Stake Road will produce Alignment style cutsheets that include the option to report station and offset as well as the cut and fill to any point These are fully described in Stake Line Arc Elevation Difference and in Job Settings Stake Tab If using Slope Stake within Stake Road a slope stake report including progressive and total distances to all template or section points can be output p437 MAP This chapter describes the use of the MAP screen The MAP screen commands are available in the pull down menus or at the command prompt The MAP screen is useful for drawing COGO creating points for stakeout and for the import and export of DXF and shape files No measurements are taken from the MAP screen MAP VIEW HE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS a Layer O a Basics The basic operations of the MAP screen are described here Map View Icons The commands associa
106. stake will either be Right Left Distance Azimuth and Distance or North South East West Distances The cut or fill is the elevation difference between the point read and the point being staked Normally you take a shot simply by pressing Enter After a total station shot is taken you will see your In Out distance to the target point For total station stakeout the direction of the reference is shown by a little arrow in the lower right of the screen p225 Configure General Sets Settings Search Ref Object Instrument M Point ID Ei Method In Out amp Left Right Directions From A Use CL for Ref Object when applicable B i Store Point Dialog Selecting S to Store will display the Stakeout Report You can turn off the Store Point option and just reference the Stakeout Report screen for information If the tolerance distance is exceeded for staking out you will be notified and asked if you want to continue storing Stakeout Tolerances are set under Tolerances in the EQUIP menu Stakeout Report i i Northing Easting Elevation Staked 9919 747 20112 541 102 023 Design 9920 1862 20113 5653 106 704 Morth 0 435 ft Move East 1 324 ft Fill 4 681 vof 1 Ely vofa El PAsoi so 28 AR 359059 58 Sp 7 6850 if Store Point Foint ID 1193 Point Description The coordinates for the Stake Point and the Target Point are displayed The delta North E
107. static data files on the receiver Logging post proc site POINT Desc NN 2955650 45 E 734301 6572 Z 24 9967 HRMS 0 062 VAMS 0 082 FIXED Remember the file must be recording in order to log static data from Store Points If a point is stored and no site is logged to log one go to the Log Static Data Menu select Start Processing and return to Store Points It is now possible to log a point from Store Points p309 Note In one reported instance a damaged PC card caused the equipment to display a Card Full message Use the File Manager within Log Static Data to review data on the PCMCIA card in the receiver and use File Manager to re format the PCMCIA card on the receiver if the card appears to be causing errors Be sure to copy any useful information from the PC card before re formatting or install a new PC card Logging Static Data with Navcom Receiver The Navcom Receiver supports logging of static data to a file The files generated with this option can be post processed to increase the accuracy of your Survey using software produced by third parties such as Way Point SurvCE allows you to turn Navcom static data logging on and off and manipulate files on the receiver but you will still need third party software to post process the resulting files To begin logging static data go to the SURVEY tab and click the Log Static Data Button If an error message appears stating that the data collector could not conn
108. such as three or four centerlines or profiles may appear in the same LandXML file As more and more software companies offer LandXML file output this file type may become the preferred form of data exchange Be aware that each company tends to implement the LandXML format in slightly different ways much like DXF files for drawing data exchange were sometimes slightly different in format between Autodesk and Microstation or from release to release Therefore if a LandXML file containing centerlines profiles or cross section files fails to convert it 1s recommended that the file be emailed to Carlson Software so changes can be made in SurvCE to enable conversion LandXML is an evolving format that is likely to solidify in the near future Centerline Conversion This command converts horizontal alignment files to and from the Carlson centerline format CL Supported file types include p365 ASCII Inroads ASC ASCII LDD TXT CLIP PLA Geopak OSD ISPOL ALI LandXML XML Leica GSI MOSS INP SDMS ALIT SDR SDR TDS RD5 Terramodel Geodimeter RLN ALN and ARE formats The SurvCE format has a CL extension These source files can be loaded into SurvCE using Data Transfer located in the File menu options When performing the conversion and selecting a particular format SurvCE automatically looks for the corresponding file extension Import Export Centerline E LandXML File xml
109. the ENTER key 9 Key in the slope distance followed by the ENTER key 10 Key in the point description followed by the ENTER key 11 Press the ENTER key to accept the next available point number or key in a new point number followed by the ENTER key 12 If you traversed then you are now occupying the new point and are backsighting the previous point of occupation If you sideshot the new point then you are still at the previous setup and ready to compute the next point 13 Options at the command prompt when presented with the messages listed in step 5 are as follows X Exit I Inverse S Sideshot T Traverse Note in order to establish new occupied and backsight point information you must use the T Inverse command and define the backsight point first and the occupied point second Tutorial 2 Performing Math Functions in Carlson SurvCE Input Boxes Many input boxes in SurvCE allow the user to calculate math functions on the fly To enter rod heights while in a GPS setup screen that is not in your current units e g you re using a 2 meter pole but working in U S feet key in the following The Rod Height followed by m for Meters ft for Feet and ift for International Feet followed by the ENTER key will convert the measurement into your current units e g 2m 6 5617 To compute the azimuth from one point to another to automatically enter in the azimuth while using the Point
110. the Compaq Ipaq and Com5 is typical for the Topcon FC1000 though it may use any of Com 4 5 or 6 On the Allegro the Bluetooth port is typically Com 4 5 8 or 9 The Bluetooth serial com port settings can be found in the My Bluetooth Device menu selection Bluetooth connection is available for ex ample with Thales ZMax For Thales Ashtech set the baud rate in Comms Setup to match the baud rate set for Port C on the ZMax receiver which is typically used for Bluetooth communication For Topcon set the baud rate in Comm Setup to match the baud rate for Port B on the Hiper receiver which is typically used for Bluetooth If Bluetooth is available and the Bluetooth option is clicked on when you OK the Comm Setup screen the Bluetooth port will be searched for and if found a confirmation screen is presented p118 Communications Port si OK Bluetooth COM Port Loh has been successfully set Defaults The program then proceeds to the Bluetooth Manager screen This screen gives you the option to choose which GPS receiver you would like to connect to via Bluetooth If you click Cancel no Bluetooth connection will be established Select a receiver and click Connect Bluetooth Devices Select Rover BT Device Receiver Name DataGrid DataCollector TopconrS TopconrsS Find Receiver Delete Receiver Set Receiver PIN Set Receiver Name First time into this routine no receivers will be listed Select
111. the computer resets Why can t I load the software The computer may disconnect from ActiveSync when there is not enough memory allocated to Storage Memory In the control panel select the System icon followed by the Memory tab Position the slider so that there is 5mb 5120 kb allocated and not in use i e if the In Use value says 1024 kb then add 1024 amp 5120 to determine what the Allocated value should be How do I clear the RAM backup and why Clearing the RAM backup seems to improve performance on the Ranger platform p627 after new programs have been installed or removed Make sure that all software applications are closed and select the RAM Backup icon from the control panel Select the Delete button and answer Yes to the three resulting message boxes Why can t I communicate through the COM port If you cannot communicate with the instrument verify all COM settings in SurvCE and make sure that they match the COM settings on the instrument If communication has previously been working and the COM settings have not been altered try one of the following to clear up the COM port Exit SurvCE turn off the computer Restart the computer and re enter SurvCE Exit SurvCE and perform a soft reset on the device V erify that all applications have been closed Exit SurvCE and perform a hard reset on the device Verify that all applications have been closed How do I set the CAP
112. the effects of this key These different functions of the Enter key apply not only to Store Points but also to Hevation Difference The function of the Enter key is set separately for Total Stations and GPS The different options are described below Note Most users choose Read then Store Store Then Read This option similar to the effects of the Read key on the original SDR data collectors After a backsight the first time Enter is used it will take the shot and display the results Then when you foresight the next point Enter will Store Last Read Next This procedure is best used with the above Hgt Desc Prompt on Save disabled If that option is on then when you turn to the new shot and press Enter the new shot doesn t take right away but instead you are prompted for the target height and description of the previous shot That could cause some confusion But with Hgt Desc Prompt turned off this method can be very efficient You press Enter and take your first shot You see the results displayed and can alter descriptions or target heights or point numbers for that shot You sight your next foresight and press Enter and the previous shot is correctly stored and the next is taken The information is displayed You can review and alter it You sight your next foresight press Enter and store the last shot and shoot the nex t etc Read then Store With this option the Enter key takes the shot and stores the point This option w
113. the left green arrow icon 1 e i Station List Select a specific station using the station list icon p248 Station List Description 1 50 000 1 5 000 00 000 gt 2 25 000 2 50 000 4 2 75 000 34 00 000 3408 000 PROG End 3 08 327 Road End Ll gt i Interval This is where you enter the distance by which the stations should be incremented ES B Calculate Interval This is used to divide the entire line into equal parts which results in a calculated non rounded incremental station gt Next Offset The green arrow found to the right of the offset entry box will switch from RCurb to REOP to CL and back and the large solid circle will move and highlight the correct location These abbreviations are defined in the Settings dialog or the Stakeout tab of Job Settings Left Right You can specify whether to stake the left or right side of the road The offsets are applied symmetrically If you have a special case on a specific side of the road do the right and left separately with separate slope and distance entries Offset This is the first offset from centerline Units are as configured in Job Settings feet or meters X Slope This is the first offset slope Negative represents downhill Stake Curb Ditch This will allow the user to input and activate a second offset defined by offset distance and height from the first offset Stake Curb Ditch Height This is the ve
114. the vertical angle as computed to the stakeout location specified This option is not typically used unless a true elevation is known for the stakeout location specified Settings Search Remote Direct Robotic This mode works exactly as the GeoRadio mode except a cable must be used in lieu of the radio For this mode the instrument must be robotic and be operating in the Remote mode with the faceplate removed Instrument Setup Current Comms Search EDM Mode Standard Guidelights Off ad Diode Backsight Allow Weak Signal Always Initialize Compensator e EDM Mode This selection allows the user to specify the EDM measurement setting as one of the following types Standard Standard EDM mode Fast Fast Standard EDM mode Reflectorless Reflectorless EDM mode DR Models e Guide Lights This sets the track lights to one of the following options Off Turns off the track lights p545 Low Turns on the track lights on low power High Turns of the track lights on high power Allow Weak Signal This will allow the instrument to return a distance when the signal is weak Always Initialize Compensator This will reset the compensator every time the instrument is restarted Instrument Setup Current Comms JE tags ESTEN W Search On Read Search When Lost Lock Horizontal Range 000 Vertical Range a5 Minimum Distance 0 0000 Maximum Distance 5000 000 Search on Read This setting wi
115. the words Left SURFACE or Right SURFACE and the left or right columns become active for editing Alternatively you may simply click into the items in the columns and edit or add In the curb and gutter template shown below the Add option is used to enter the grade breaks from centerline out to the back of shoulder a 00 i000 S7 L 4 0 00 Bo Fi Since templates used in Slope Staking help define all grades into the centerline from the slope stake it makes sense to focus on the subgrades that are built by the dozer motor grader or trimmer Thus despite all the surface grades involved there are only three distinct grades in this example curb and gutter template between centerline and the pivot point of the cut and fill slopes 12 00 at 2 subgrade at back of curb 0 01 horizontal and 1 vertical and 8 00 at 4 For the Vertical method some positive horizontal distances must be entered such as 0 01 or 0 001 By pressing Add in the dialog we can enter the first two grades p359 Grade Dimensions Percent l Ratio Vertical Slope Distance ID Grade Dimensions C Percent l Ratio Vertical Delta Z Distance ID Downhill slopes going out from the middle of the template are entered as negatives Note that it is necessary to enter an ID for each break point in the template This helps identify the description of the grade on the progressive slope stake report e g f
116. time high accuracy GPS requires a base receiver sending corrections to a rover receiver Most commonly used GPS antenna types include the SK600 and SK502 All Sokkia GPS receivers will accept and transmit RTCM RTCA and CMR message strings GPS Septentrio Using Septentrio with SurvCE Septentrio PolarRx2 GPS is a 48 channel dual frequency GNSS receiver There are several variants for this GPS line supporting different features including SBAS DGPS and GLONASS SurvCE supports the general GPS functions of this unit GPS Magellan Ashtech The following information describes the various options available for Magellan Ashtech GPS SurvCE works with the following high precision centimeter accurate RTK GPS equipment produced by Thales Ashtech Z12 Sensor ZSurveyor GG 24 Z Xtreme and Z Max SurvCE also works with the Ashtech Reliance USCG DGPS RTCM sub meter RTK GPS receivers Shown below is the front panel view of the Ashtech Z Xtreme as it appears in the top of the backpack p593 i Configure Base or Rover e Current tab Model You must specify the model of Magellan Ashtech equipment to be used p594 GPS Base Antenna Type Antenna Height o ft vert Slant Elevation Mask g M Log OBEN Data for Averaged RTK Readings Receiver tab Antenna Type A pull down list that includes approx imately 50 different antenna types Shown in the below photo is the Geodetic 4 antenna Receiver tab
117. to ensure that the software will try to connect to the radio on the correct port Thales Ashtech Radio Setup PDL If the radio is an American PDL radio it will appear as shown below p621 Magellan PDL Radio Setup Current Channel is 1 Channel to Set Curment Frequency 4al mrau Digisquelch High Radio Air Link BaudR ate a600 Set Radio Cancel The user can change the channel the digisquelch sensitivity and the over air radio link baud rate If it is a European radio channels are not available Instead the user will be able to set the frequency the digisquelch and the over air radio link baud rate The digisquelch is best high on rovers and low on bases To set changes click on the Set Radio button and the following screen appears ThalesfAshtech PDL Radio Setup Current Channel is 3 Channel to Set 4 Re 462 5000 Tx 462 5000 Current Reprogramming Radio Radio Air Link BaudRate 600 Magellan Ashtech Radio Setup Thales UHF p622 Select the appropriate button see above The following screen will appear ThalesfAshtech Thales Radio Setup Current Frequency 464 5000 Frequency to Set 464 5 Cancel Change the frequency to the desired frequency and click Set Radio Magellan Ashtech Radio Setup Cable No configuration options are available when the software is configured to cable Magellan Ashtech Radio Setup Older Receivers Currently the
118. to map an underwater surface When the depth sounder is enabled SurvCE will alternate between reading from GPS and reading from the depth sounder so if you aren t using a depth sounder you must be sure this feature has been deactivated or you may experience slow GPS readings When active incoming Depth readings are viewable in Monitor Skyplot Elevation values in the Store Point screen are automatically depth adjusted p191 Peripherals Laser PS gel ight Bar Ww Active Model Horizon Unit Mode f Centimeters C Decimeters Feet Serial Port cOM1 M Baudrate 4800 Default To activate the Depth Sounder follow these steps 1 Plug in your Depth Sounder to any of your device s unused COM ports and turn it on 2 Enter the Peripherals menu and select the DEPTH SOUNDER tab as shown above 3 Check Active 4 Select the Type of Depth Sounder you are using 5 Ifthe Unit Mode radios are not grayed you will have to set the units to correspond to those output by the depth sounder 6 Specify the Port the Depth Sounder is plugged in to Light Bars Currently supported light bars are Mikrofyn and Apache Light bars can be used with either GPS or total stations to provide prominently displayed direction arrows when staking out a polyline centerline or in the Elevation Difference routine when trying to cut or fill toward a target elevation p192 Peripherals Laser Depth Sounder EP pe F
119. to select from a variety of record types p86 Pick Record Type Cancel Standard Network Least Squares New Point Backsight Occupy Point TS Reading GPS Point The Network Least Squares tab is a special option that allows you to designate measurements for eventual processing in the Carlson SurvNet program office network least squares software Pick Record Type Cancel Standard Network Least Squares Measure Standard Error Control Standard Error Setup Standard Error Azimuth Elevation If for example you pick Measure Standard Error you can enter errors appropriate for your instrument This will reduce the entries required to process the network least squares adjustment when back in the office p87 Add Measure Standard Error Cancel HA Pt sec 10 HA Rid sec 10 WA Pt sec 20 VA Rd sec 20 Distance 0 01 Dist PPMI 20 The Find option lets you globally change any set of characters in the raw file It is useful for changing a series of descriptions to a new description for purposes of field to finish drawing It is also useful for finding a particular shot that you recall by number or description For example assume that you learned that the rod height you noted as 4 700 was actually 4 833 due to an extra attachment measuring 0 133 in length This feature would allow you to easily change all 4 700 rod heights to 4 833 Direction Up would replace all occurrences of
120. to stop it manually using the Stop Point Logging button Recording site site Sit Duration 00 00 03 Time Remaining 00 00 57 Antenna Height 2 0000 ft Antenna Type Reg nt onitor Satellite View Stop Point Logging p298 After you exit this screen automatically or manually you will be returned to the main post processing screen From here you may tag more sites close the file or manage your files When you are ready to close the file hit the Close File button Post Processing Logging Static Data for Leica System 500 GPS Setting Up Post Processing as a Base In order to do post processing as a base you must start when you configure the base From the EQUIP tab select Configure Base and enable the Log Static Data to PC Card check box gt Leica GPS Static Survey Job Jobi __ Start Point Logging Close Job Job Manager Job files are stored on the PC Card in the GPS Receiver p299 Start New Job Job Name New C Existing Antenna Height 5 0000 t Change Antenna Antenna Type AT502 Pole Interval Tag New Site Free Mem on PC Card 3688 kBytes Jobi Sanit 1 Type AT502 Pole Antenna Height 5 0000 ft Change Antenna Interval 0 5000 second Stop Logging Manually After 10 0000 minutes Proceed through the Configure Base screens as normal until reaching a dialog asking for a job name and interval A
121. to store the name and the type of the attributes from the SHP file SHP File Quick Import SHP QISHP This command allows you to import entities from SHP files used by most programs produced by ESRI The routine displays the Import from SHP dialog shown below POINT or POINTZ type entities will be stored in a CRD file ARC ARCZ POLYGON or POLYGONZ entities will be stored in the current drawing as POLYLINES y s Import from SHP ex Current SHP Select SHP Type oa m y Current SHP Displays the name of the SHP file that will be imported when this command is completed Read only you must use the Select SHP button to specify the file name Select SHP Tap this button to select a SHP file name Current Job Available when importing coordinate data Specify whether to Overwrite Exiting Point Numbers or Use New Point Numbers Attribute used to fill Description Available when importing coordinate data Lists the attributes in the currently selected SHP file Select which attribute to use to fill out the Description field in the CRD file p444 Layer used to store new entities Available when importing geometry Select the layer to store the new entities Process Tap this button to begin the import process If you are importing a large file a progress bar at the bottom of the dialog will indicate the progress of the import SHP File Export SHP File ESHP This command allows you to export entities
122. toggle will allow the motorized instrument to automatically advance to the next position if it was previously measured The software will pause at the next location and wait for the user to initiate the reading Review Individual Reading Data This toggle will pause the software after every reading and display the measured data Backsight This button is required to initiate the first reading and backsight orientation for the set collection process The following dialog will be displayed The user must measure either an angle only or an angle and distance to the backsight in order to proceed with the OK button It is recommended that the Set Angle or Set Angle and Read buttons be used to record the initial backsight reading Backsight Set to ero Setup Results OC Point 1197 BS Point 1195 BS AZI 270 00 00 BS Bearing Noo oo Oo Inst Hgt 3 000 Target Hgt 3 000 AR OOO 00 24 90 O0 00 SD 1000 000 Set Angle Check Angle Check Set Angle and Read Define Foresight Points After the Backsight dialog is accepted the next step in the process is to enter in the point IDs for all of the foresight points that you intend to sight The dialog shown below is intended to receive predefined point IDs To enter points begin in the top left input box and work your way down to the bottom of the left column then start at the top of the right column and work down to the end p269 Set Collection Point Order
123. turned off the STA tab will not be shown After the loop has been opened or created select the Green Check button OK to advance to the measuring screens The first reading of the loop must be a benchmark plus reading to establish the instrument height Enter the point ID or known benchmark elevation the prism height trig levels and a description Then press the Read icon or Enter to measure Once the reading has been taken select the Store icon to keep it You can take as many readings on a single point in any face that you like You can also review the readings and disable any that you don t like prior to storing Leveling PtID 6 4 HT E BM Elev 101 97 Desc Serials SD 7 685 24 91 950 29 1 YDift 0 247 Avg Elev 107 217 Eley Spread 0 000 Reading Count 1 Review Readings Robotics Trig Leveling p278 Leveling BMI Elev 100 fed Desc Bench YDI 5 000 HO 200 000 Elev 105 000 Reading Count 1 Review Readings Conventional Leveling Some of the fields below only apply to one of the Leveling types See screen shots above to see which apply e Pt ID Use this field to retrieve the elevation from an existing point in the coordinate file e HT Use this to enter the prism height If using a digital level this field will be gray and will be populated with the rod reading from the level e BM Elev Enter a known elevation for the benchmark This field will au
124. typically no more than 2 to 5 kilometers except in very flat terrain With PacCrest radios the signal can bend somewhat and achieve maximum distances of 10 kilometers typically Cell phone linkage allows corrections to be transmitted within the coverage of the cell phones themselves and maintains accuracy up to as much as 50 kilometers Contact your Leica GPS vendor for appropriate cables for connectivity details When you select a modem configuration the Set Radio Channel button becomes Connect Modem and when tapped you are prompted for a Phone Number or IP address and port for the rover to call the base The base must also be hooked to a cell phone or modem The base can actually be set to both cell phone and radio linkage with the rover set to either cell or radio as preferred The rover will go from autonomous to float cell phones are communicating to fixed with cell phones just like with radio linkage Note Base and rover GPS receivers must have matching radio configurations If cell phones are used for the rover then the base must be configured for cell phone use If PacCrest PDL radios are used on the rover than PacCrest PDL radios must be used on the base Also note that cell phone switching is made possible through the C icon or Alt C on the fly from commands such as Store Points or Stakeout Points This is because of the availability of a Utilities Tab in Configure Reading when configured Leica GPS
125. view In total station mode it will be waiting for a shot or reading You should see your points in the map with an icon showing the location of your target the circle with the X inside Note If the points defining the line are at zero elevation the program will still report a cut and fill in this case a cut from the GPS elevation of 839 52 all the way to zero Ifthe points defining the line are at a known elevation the elevation will be interpolated to determine the design and target elevation of the point to stake and will be applied to a zero offset or non zero offset stakeout position p243 Store a reading and the coordinates for the Stake Point and the Target Point are displayed Store by pressing Enter or S to Store The delta North East and the elevation difference Cut Fill are also displayed The Vert Offset 1 and Vert Offset 2 allow for elevation calculations based on the input vertical offset values In English units a vertical offset of 10 can be entered for ex ample in that form and the program will auto calculate 0 833 as the offset If Vertical Offsets are detected and a point is stored you are prompted for additional descriptions for the vertical offsets If Alignment Cutsheet storage is on as set in Job Settings Stake tab an additional cutsheet row will be created for each vertical offset Shown below is a stakeout of station 125 Right 12 and the resulting Report screen N 3274 4460 E 4517 6257 27 839
126. you know that the process is finished This next figure shows the result of ex porting a job to an ASCII file EEFT ELTE HO 3121264 55 562161 92 126 00 102 312127 7 99 86226 609 127 30 103 3121275 55 5623 5 25 126 50 104 31212 72 52 882462 8 126 40 105 3121262 56 562580 85 126 40 106 3121233 11 883133 60 126 80 107 3l2i224 47 903240 47 127 20 105 3121238 46 882990 66 127 10 109 3121249 21 882930 37 127 20 110 3121254 09 582796 14 126 20 111 3121260 03 862694 09 125 60 Delete File This command allows you to remove any existing file from any directory to free up memory This figure below shows the standard file selection dialog where you can choose the file name to delete Note It is always a good idea to back up your data by transferring it to a PC before deleting files Carlson SurvCE does not require you to back up your data before deleting plll File to Delete EE aC SurvCEDemoSpecia Backup MoDOT crd La 9 cesars NewdJob crd InterGSeo crd Pentax crd inverse crd RemoteElevation crd MoDOT cl crd SurvCE cra 4 nm gt Select the file you wish to delete from the standard file selection dialog box and pick OK SurvCE will ask if you want to delete all files associated with the job eg the dxf file the rw5 file etc P3 Do you want to delete all the files tf associated with this jab CSUR LYDATASREMOTEELEVATION CRD Press Yes if you wis
127. your Stake Description settings Similarly if centerline based stakeout is being conducted then the lower line would apply The description CL in this case is the only aspect entered by the user in the field during stakeout All the rest is reported based on your Stake Description settings If you turn off an item note how it will not appear in the reported sample description The in the station can also be configured to appear or not appear but this is set globally within the Units Tab of Job Settings The behavior of the On Off Up Down and Update buttons is identical to that discussed above in the Cutsheet discussion Other routines particularly Cross Section Survey and Slope Staking part of the Roading features have their own settings for descriptions When any automatic description for stakeout is turned on the program will no longer default to the last entered description it will use the automatic description instead If you type a new description you will turn off the automatic stakeout description If you delete the default new description the program will return to p56 using the automatic stakeout description To delete you can simply place the cursor in the description field and hit the delete key there is no need to first highlight the description Alignment Settings This dialog allows the user to define how all alignments and roads are staked Settings wx ei Road Q
128. 0 000 105 000 Pt 1 Edit Reading ON OFF Results Avg Elev 105 000 Sel Error Vert Spread 0 000 Min Elev 105 000 Std Dev 0 000 Max Elev 105 000 Conventional Leveling The Status field shows if the measurement is turned on or off Measurements that are off will not be used in any calculations Elev shows the calculated elevation which will be the elevation at the total station or level on a plus shot BM or TP or the elevation at the rod on a minus shot BM TP SS or STA p281 Any measurement can be highlighted by clicking on the measurement A measurement must be selected before using Edit Reading or the ON OFF button All the values in the Results section are about the elevation calculations The Sel Error field shows how different the calculated elevation of the currently selected measurement is from the mean of all the measurements that are on Once a benchmark plus reading has been taken and stored the Minus Reading dialog will be shown This dialog allows you to read the minus reading to a turning point TP benchmark BM sideshot SS or a sideshot on an alignment STA Turning points advance the setup while sideshots do not A reading to the benchmark in the minus screen will end the loop Leveling TP SS STA PtID 6 4 ni 107 217 HT E BM Elev o Ta Desc CPYCHIS SD 7 6685 24 91 SO 21 YDI 0 247 Avg Elev 101 970 Elev Spread 0
129. 0 0016 75 0101 0 0004 0 0018 Distance Residual Diff 211 2155 0 0002 0 0010 211 2160 0 0002 0 0020 Means HorzAngle SD Distance SD Vertical SD 336 1615 0 0004 211 2158 0 0002 75 0103 0 0001 Process GPS If GPS measurements are detected in the RWS file then the Process GPS button becomes available within Process Raw The main dialog appears Process Raw File Cancel GPS Proj Redundancies Scale 1 00000000 Localization File Geoid Separation File Localization File Market12 dat Geoid File None Transformation Plane Similarity One Point Localization Azimuth State Plane Grid M e GPS Tab This tab displays the scale factor which can be modified If you process the GPS coordinates with a scale factor other than 1 then the coordinates will be calculated at a scaled distance from the first point in the localization file The Localization File and Geoid Files are shown above Market12 dat but can be changed by tapping the appropriate buttons leading to a file selection screen p82 Localization File Type DAT Files aE E Diski Datas boston dat Mame boston dat The Transformation Types are Plane Similarity recommended default and Rigid Body or No Scale For One Point Localizations north can be defined by State Plane Grid or Geodetic North Process Raw File Redundancies USA NADS3 KY North USAJHADES PA South UTM AGS 84 A4utomatic Zone Selec
130. 0 1023 Device This list contains the supported devices that deliver or receive RTK messages such as a radio or IP modem If an External Radio is selected the user will need to specify the Port Baud Parity and Stop Bits that the radio manufacturer requires For internal radios SurvCE will detect the proper settings e Network This list allows you to configure and connect to various networks e g NTRIP e Message Type You must select the RTK message type that you wish to broadcast and receive This is the format of the RTK message that is either sent from the base and received by the rover e Base ID This is typically used to isolate paired devices The user specifies that the base is ID 1 then the rover should be set to only listen for ID 1 so that other base stations that might be in the area do not interfere e Send Rover Position to Network This will output a NMEA GGA message for networks that require it Manufacturer Setup Instructions For manufacturer specific information please consult with the Instrument Setup by Manufacturer section p130 GPS Base GPS Base For GPS equipment it is necessary to set up the base antenna and record the correct antenna height the antenna type for certain equipment and the methods used for localizing obtaining the desired coordinates Much of GPS Base is common to most instruments For example the Base Ant Height would be entered in feet or meters depending on the
131. 0 11 05 01 10 08 54 09 14 01 13 04 20 hgr tc_r 09 13 01 15 18 16 m20020318_1 03 18 02 15 06 20 11 jobs Free memory 7560 kBytes Delete At the bottom of the dialog free memory is shown along with a Delete button If you are running low on memory you can delete files using this dialog box To delete a file click on the file from the list and select the Delete button You will then be asked to confirm that you wish to delete the file You can also format the card here using the Format Card button This will destroy all the data on the card Make sure you don t need any of the data on the card before formatting it To exit this dialog choose Exit Changing the Antenna for Post Processing Clicking on Change Antenna from various SurvCE Post Processing dialogs leads you to this dialog Here you can change the antenna height by choosing either Vertical Height or Slant Height p304 Antenna Height OK Cancel Antenna Type Manual For Vertical Height click on the radio button for Vertical Height enter a height and choose OK For Slant Height click on the radio button for Slant Height and enter the slant height Then click on Load From List Choose the antenna and click OK The radius should be filled in for the antenna If your antenna is not listed choose Manual click OK and enter the radius in the edit box on the main Antenna Height dialog When you are finished click OK The program will calculate an antenna heig
132. 00 South 11 66 West 47 56 Stake Line Arc Point on Arc Both the Stake Arc 3 Points and the Stake Arc PC PT Value routines have a Point On Arc option similar to the Point On Line option In the dialog below we have chosen to calculate a left 25 offset from the arc Any measured point will then be translated radially onto the arc that is 25 units left of the specified arc Stake Arc Station Offset Taste This feature will stake out to the nearest point on the line or offset to that line Offset to Line 25 p242 When a measurement or GPS reading is taken the target point will be radial to the curve at 25 units offset from the curve as shown below N 3403 9279 E 4894 9227 839 5165 HRMS 0 040 VRMS 0 094 L25 000 Sta 0 10 769 L69 38 IN 44 38 FWD 0 00 The above example might be useful for setting stakes at a 25 building setback from the right of way line For GPS information is provided real time As you move you see the instructions to contact the nearest point on the arc or offset to the arc For total stations you are first instructed to measure to the nearest point on the arc or arc offset from the instrument setup Then after you take any shot the instruction refers to that measurement Note The Turn to AR advice refers to the angle to turn to contact the centerline at 90 degrees right angles to the instrument setup After selecting OK the main stakeout window appears in map
133. 03 4371 84 Desc ae ae ee Enter saves the measurement immediately If you do a Read you can review the data within the Text view If you re enter the rod height it re calculates the Z elevation of the measured point As you enter the description a pulldown appears of your Feature Code List or previously entered descriptions As each letter is entered such as e for edge of pavement every description beginning with e or E appears ai ae quick selections Some users prefer the text screen to take readings because of the larger buttons and text size The program remains in the Text mode until Graphic mode is chosen again p206 Store Point Point ID Target Height 1193 47 AR S5S9 SO S7 2 4 91 50 05 SU 6634 N 9919 7433 Seu PA 7102 0240 Point Description BUILDIM s OVERHANG BACK OF WALK Unless the rod hgt description prompt is enabled the Store Points screen is designed to quick store points where the user is expected to enter ahead of time the correct description and rod heights in the edit boxes shown at the bottom of the dialog Note SurvCE is designed to produce a 1 keystroke point store by pressing Enter If you experience more prompts storing a point it is because you have certain p207 settings active that cause additional prompts These settings include 2 options within Configure Prompt for Height and Description Prompt for Point Notes Store FCL Only within Feature
134. 1 3D Polyline The GIS prompting appeared for EP1 not p525 shown and entered The last sequence above was to ex it Store Points and select MAP Editing GIS Information on Arcs and Polygons Input Edit GIS Data To edit existing GIS information stored on Arcs 2D 3D Polylines or Polygons closed 2D 3D Polylines in the MAP pop up box select Tools Edit Input Edit GIS Data and pick any polyline or polygon There are two figures below The top figure shows how the closed 3D Polyline between points 5 6 and 7 was selected using this command GIS data for the closed 3D Polygon is shown in the second figure The above figure displays the next EP code EP2 stored using GPS Simulation When ended with a END or CLO description after EP2 SurvCE will prompt for EP GIS data to attach to the polyline as defined above p526 EF Close Edit D 1036452395 gt Edge of pavement 115 BOND STREET Char Condition Good Char Measured Width is Next j The figure above displays the ease of reviewing creating or editing GIS data using Input Edit GIS Data From the MAP screen Input Edit GIS Data was selected and the closed 3D Polyline picked on the screen The GIS data stored prior was displayed for review or editing Any data point polyline or closed polyline could be selected using the Input Edit GIS Data command in MAP and new GIS attached to this entity or existing GIS data reviewed and edited E
135. 10 28 V 20 56 H on the stake In cases of fill where there are obstructions walk into centerline so when you drive the stake you can mark where the fill intersects the stake Note that this same level of reporting occurs with non interval staking where you get real time cut and fill at any point also allowing you to drive the stake to avoid obstructions When Enter or OK is pressed you are prompted for whether to stake the first offset stake Slope Staking Store x Station C offset Elevation Pivot Pt 0 00 000 RO 000 997 230 Catch Pt 0 00 000 R126 6 0 955 007 Stake Pt 0 00 049 R126 726 955 007 Stk CP IN 0 055 BACK 0 049 Stk PP F42 223 3 001 1 HD 126 72 33 319 W Store Data to Report File voff o El 955 007 F Stk PP 42 22 Point ID 15 W Store Point to CRD File Desc STA0 00 049 CATCH R126 73 If you are doing User Defined or Point Defined Alignment methods you are shown the horizontal distance and vertical fill or cut difference to the pivot point which can be written on the Slope Stake Additional break point information appears if you are using the Design File or Section File method If you trust that the Slope Stake will not be knocked out then you are done no need to set an offset stake Pressing OK leads to the prompt to set the first offset stake If you choose to set the first offset stake then you can set the offset distance p407 First Offset Station 6 50 000
136. 15200 but may also be 9600 or 38400 e Character Length Set this value to match the data Character Length of the GPS serial port Typically this will be 8 e Parity Set this value to match the data Parity of the GPS serial port Typically this will be None e Stop Bits Set this value to match the data Stop Bits of the GPS serial port Typically this will be 1 Bluetooth In addition to the discussion of Bluetooth wireless connection found under the help subject Equip Comm Setup there are additional trouble shooting considerations with Topcon Bluetooth Note that the PIN for all Topcon devices is 11111 If the OAF file is not current the Bluetooth will not work An OAF file is used by Topcon for the firmware of their receivers With an ex pired OAF file many features including Bluetooth will not work Normally the Bluetooth port usually B must be enabled in the OAF file for the Bluetooth to work It is possible to set the Bluetooth port baud rate Normally it is 9600 38400 or 115200 This can be checked from the A com port using GRIL command manual for Topcon receivers commands The baud rate in the Com Setup should be the same Configure Base Station Receiver Type You must select the receiver type e g Hiper Lite Antenna Type You must select the Antenna Type e g Hiper Lite See the figure below p600 thm p601 Antenna Height This is entered as a vertical or slant height in the j
137. 3 300 000 jLength 300 000 Loop Length 600 000 Closure 0 050 Error 1 12000 Loop Short 1 wire Operator Ken Project Example Created 06 05 2007 11 11 18 be Scrolling to the end shows the adjustments that will be applied to the last two measurements p286 Review File TP PtS Desc VD 7 000 HO 100 000 dz 7 000 HI 108 000 4dj 0 042 AdjHI 107 958 EM I PtG Desc EBM YO 10 950 HD 100 000 dz 10 950 Meas 97 050 Ad 0 050 BM g7 O00 97 000 F 102 983 100 967 0 000 lt gt iW Use Adjusted Elevations Use Level Descriptions M Store STA as Points EMRE Save Report Update Job Save Report will put the information shown in the Update Points in Job dialog into a text file for your records Update Job saves the new elevations to the points in the job Skip Existing will not replace a point s elevation if it already exists but Replace Existing will p287 Auto By Interval Auto by Interval allows you to acquire and store data at a set interval value of either distance or time This function is available with all GPS or certain robotic total stations only When the routine is selected using a robotic total station with Prompt for Setup within Configure on you will be directed to a Confirm Orientation dialog in which you will be asked to confirm your orientation The opening or main dialog appears as shown below Sidesh
138. 31 70459252 0 24641 59005 TS 17267 56502100 25351 845925 OUNKISDRSS Wo 24 Juk29 99 14 49 122211 ok IDIOT 1 1 ENMI QUOD ONMIO0 6 6900 313 108056 LO000 0000 SONMI0579 9406 9380 4366 32NM1S17 2300 11459 1600 30NM11767 2070 fof 9045 SUNMISe42 B412 0254 1479 32NM1445 1116 11459 1600 SUNMTS562 04 a004 130 SONMI 25 7 S650 7331 7546 HE Hehhh H H H H HL 77 0204 151 834 HC 1 0 300 0 114 4360 L HL 1 0 128 592 H 1 0 800 0 846 144 R VRAEAEEEEEEFFEFEFEFEEEFEFFFEFEEEEE T VWO 4 02 0 000000 VWO 215 45 5 000000 VC 3 0 5 000000 5 000000 V 25 0 6 000000 VC 75 0 2 000000 9 430000 Centerline Transformation This routine is designed primarily to convert centerline data from Metric to Survey Feet or from Survey Feet to Metric The image below shows the dialog and scale factor when converting from Metric to Survey Feet gt CL Transformation Current CL File None Scale Factor 3 280833333 Metric to Survey Feet Apply scale factor C Survey Feet to Metric for start station Custom Scale Factor npl Scale Factor Apply scale factor for start station If this option is enabled then the starting station will be converted using the scale factor For example a start station of 1000 would become 3280 833 If disabled the start station would remain at 1000 If the goal is to change the starting station by a certain amount unrelated to the scale factor then you
139. 5 you go as a Series of 37 N 38 E and 39 Z record types Geodimeter format with header line records as shown below S50 XSEC1 54 104 North 0 As Builts 240 300 53 VF 90 2 97 0 5 1 3 28 2004 56 65 0 74 30 10 55 3 96 2 6 2 100 80 280 000 91 1 37 5105 857 38 5069 091 39 99 1 905 37 5104 091 38 5074 93 39 990 724 Starting left to right the data points begin with a 91 1 record A right to left section would begin with 91 2 When you cross 0 or are on the centerline or baseline you click the CL BL button which sets a 92 1 record for centerline and 92 2 for baseline and the next shot is the centerline baseline shot If you select the 0 00 button this indicates whether the next shot is a tie in catch or extension beyond the tie in This sets a 93 1 record for the catch and 93 2 for the extension prior to the subsequent coordinate record In effect you tell the program where the centerline or baseline is by shooting that point Then the station and offsets of the shots for that cross section are determined relative to that center of alignment shot It does not use a horizontal alignment combined with rounding to determine the station and offset of the shots like the SCT method does You tell it the station the direction of measurement left to right or vice versa and you tell it which one is the center shot This is why the Raw Geodimeter method is the only method that works with no centerline the
140. 5 468 Confirm MEZ With the two points method you simply enter two point numbers or choose them from the point list or MAP The azimuth and slope between the two points is calculated along with the ending station based on the entered start station With the Azimuth method you define the line by entering a first point and then entering p325 an azimuth and slope You can confirm the coordinate values of the points by choosing Confirm NEZ When the line is defined choose Continue You must now define or designate the point that is offset from the line in the Point Definition dialog Point Projection Point ID 1001 Ee Northing 9908 6459 Read Easting 20026 3177 Intersect Elevation 91 4084 HT O f Desc CP NAIL Store Centerline By Points 6 683 Station 0 29 091 Offset L64 256 Elev at PRO 101 4012 Vert Diff C9 99286 HUH You can enter a point ID select one from the list or select one from the map Y ou can also enter coordinates to define a new point or read values from the instrument As soon as enough information is entered the station offset and vertical difference is displayed or the message OFF CENTERLINE is displayed This message lets you know that a station offset cannot be com puted for the coordinates entered Read This command reads the instrument to gather coordinates for point projection e Intersect This command will project the coordinates entered perpendicular back to th
141. 5112 HRMS 0 043 VRMS 0 091 R12 000 Sta 1 43 085 R12 12 Dsg 14 25 000 Cut 0 78 IN 0 12 BACK 18 09 p244 Stakeout Report Show North East Show Station Offset Northing Easting Elevation Staked 3268 242 4500 291 839 487 Design 3268 222 4500 298 838 735 South 0 02 ft Move cact 0 01ft Cut 75 voff 1 0 82 Elv 837 902 Cut 1 58 voff 2 Ely HRMS 0 050 VRMS 0 095 PDOP 3 200 IY Store Point Point ID 16 Point Description STA1 25 000 R11 98 CUT 0 75 Note that you have the option to store a point in stakeout If the point being stored is the same as one in the current job file the Point Protect dialog box appears stating that the point you chose has already been used The nex t available point number is listed with the option to overwrite the current point or use the new number If you Show Station Offset you will see the Station and Offset of the design 1 25 000 R12 000 and staked point 1 25 000 R11 979 for example All cut and fill data including vertical offsets will be stored in the Alignment Cutsheet File if named and turned on within Job Settings Stake tab Cutsheets Finally the data is always stored to the raw rw5 file as cut fill cutsheet information Ifyou forgot to create a cutsheet file you can make a new one and when formatting the cutsheet select Cutsheets from Raw as one of the options You can review the cutsheet with the shortcut Alt V from the active stakeout screen T
142. 59 The result is 7 09 59 Formulas Formulas can be entered for working with angles The format must have the operator after the angle value Example 90 0000 0 5 The result would be 45 00 00 DISTANCE The distance control will display the value using the current Job Settings unit Y ou can enter a formula using the mathematical operators as described above Inverse You can compute a distance from a point to point inverse by entering lt Point ID gt lt Point ID gt Example 1 2 Using the coordinates listed below the result is 500 Pt North East p39 l 5500 5000 2 5000 5000 STATION The station control will display the value using the current Job Settings format The same options described above for distance input box es apply SLOPE The slope control will display the value using the current Job Settings format Keyboard Operation Carlson SurvCE allows the user to operate the interface entirely from keyboard navigation as well as touch screen navigation The rules for keyboard navigation are outlined below Controls Button Radio Buttons Check Boxes and Standard Buttons O Enter Select the button O Right Left Arrows Move to the next tab stop Right Tab Left Shift Tab O Up Down Arrows Move to the next tab stop Down Tab Up Shift Tab Tab Move to the next tab stop Drop List Enter Move to the next tab stop O Right Left Arrows Move to the next tab stop R
143. ACE from DXF Ra OTM tir iit None Draw 3DFace entities Select New DTM Eile Select layer Pa Layer name TRI_FACE DTM Import DTM from Land XML TXML Allows you to import 3DFACE entities from an XML File and save them as a triangulation FLT file and also draw them as 3D faces p447 Import Surface from Land MIL X DTM tin flt None Draw 3DFace entities Salect New DTM Eile Select layer Pa Layer name TRI_FACE The DTM file is stored in SurvCE as an FLT file and can be used for commands such as Elevation Difference obtaining cut fill by comparing field measurements to the DTM MAP VIEW HE FILE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS TU Y WC Vee XAOS AONE FE peep MZ He OWN Ni Vee ie al aie The 3DFaces are placed on a layer TRI FACE by default and that layer can be turned off and removed from view If you choose E for Erase you can pick the 3D Face entities and erase them on command There is no particular value to seeing p448 the 3D Faces so it is not recommended that they be drawn The main value is to capture the FLT triangulation file for use in Elevation Difference Preferences SETT This allows the user to turn on off the pull down MAP menus The graphic screen style of normal or reverse solid dark background is set here Preferences Command Bar style w Menus ON C Menus OFF n FILEVIEWDT DRAW COGOTOOLS cmap Jerr Graphic Screen style
144. Alignment Profile File Select a profile file defined in the Roads Menu or uploaded and converted to pro format Select Polyline Select a 3D polyline on the screen to define the profile Define Point List Enter a sequence of points that have elevations to define the profile Preview Displays the profile graphically Edit Use this to quickly edit the selected profile Save As If the profile was defined by points or a polyline you can optionally save it as a profile file Start Station Enter the starting station unless it was pre determined by a profile file End Station This shows the ending station of the selected alignm ent Apply Vertical Alignment Toggles on off the vertical alignment for 2D or 3D staking Note For file names to be recalled Recall Job Road Files needs to be enabled within Job Settings Options Shown below is an example of what will you see when you tap Preview in either tab Notice that the centerline is shown along with any existing point numbers in the vicinity p232 As with all options the alignment selection screen continues into the Station Offset screen where you select your station and offset to stake out Using Define Alignments the Point on Line option becomes Point on CL in the screen that follows With both horizontal and vertical alignments defined the final stakeout screen eg station 375 includes cut and fill values Shown below is an ex ample in GPS mode The c
145. BS Pt 1193 Take Readings Once the foresight points have been specified the next dialog will be determined by the set order If the next reading was to be FD since the BD was already recorded then the dialog will prompt as shown below Pay attention to the prompts in these dialogs as they inform you as to which point and which face is expected based on your configured set order Press the Enter button or select the OK button to record the reading p270 Set Collection Station 1197 Backsight 1195 Turn to Foresight Direct Set 1 Press Enter to Read Point 1198 Target Hot Reading Review Unless robotic sets are involved after each measurement an optional Reading Review dialog appears where the measurement can be accepted or rejected This option is set in Configure Reading Review Point 1198 TargetHat 3 000 H Obs 90 O0 00 v Obs 90 00 00 Dist 100 000 Accept Data p271 Set Collection Turn Face Over to Point 1198 Press Enter to Continue The sequence of shots continues Cancel Set Collection Station 1197 Backsight 1195 Turn to Foresight Reverse Set 1 Press Enter to Read Point 1198 Target Hot 5 p272 Set Collection Station 1197 Backsight 1195 Turn to Backsight Reverse Set 1 Press Enter to Read Point 1195 Target Hot Completed Set At the end of the set collection process the Set Report dialog will be presented Set R
146. By Hand with SurvCE To do a hand traverse with SurvCE go to the MAP screen To get there click the icon in the upper right corner of your screen labeled MAP Once there you will set your defaults for traversing Tutorial 2 Performing Math Functions in SurvCE Input Boxes Various input boxes in SurvCE allow the user to calculate math functions on the fly The basic steps for getting started are shown here Tutorial 3 Performing a Compass Rule Adjustment This tutorial shows a compass rule adjustment with various SurvCE screen captures to guide you Tutorial 4 Defining Field Codes Line Layer Properties amp GIS Prompting This tutorial will assist users in defining Field Codes in SurvCE SurvCE can have one pre defined FCL Feature Code List file loaded with the job coordinate CRD file The Feature Code List file stores pre defined field codes that define Line Layer drawing properties and optionally GIS prompting More than one FCL file can exist but only one can be loaded at a time per job coordinate CRD file The operator builds this FCL file using option 5 Feature Code List in the File main menu Tutorial 5 Standard Procedures for Conducting GPS Localizations This tutorial 1s intended to assist users with the recommended localization method for SurvCE Other methods can be used and it is up to the individual users to determine which is best for them Tutorial 1 Calculating a Traverse By Hand with SurvCE In order t
147. C SURVCEDEMO DATA LINN XML New File Existing File CL File cl C SURVCEDEMO DATA LINN CL Existing File XML Import to CL Export to Landi Report Icon for LandXML Files If you are importing a LandXML file specifically you can click the Report icon left of the Return icon in the upper right of the dialog and review the source of the data as shown p366 LandxXML Info 1 Version 1 0 Project Linn 2 Created using GEOPAK Bentley Systems Inc 3 Units Imperial area squareFoot linear foot volume cubicFeet temperature fahrenheit pressure inchHG angular radians direction radians Conversion Clicking Existing File in the upper right in the Land XML section will load the file and clicking Select New under the CL File section will save the centerline file in the correct format for use in SurvCE To convert in the opposite direction select Existing File under the CL section to recall a SurvCE centerline file and then click New File in the upper left under LandXML file to save it back to a LandXML file for use in other software For file types in which both Import and Export options are available the conversion procedure forms a criss cross Y ou bring the files into SurvCE by going upper right Existing to lower left Select New You send the files back to the non SurvCE format by going lower right Select Existing to upper left New When the files have been
148. Carlson SurvCE T Reference Manual Revised 6 07 2007 http www carlsonsw com http survce com Carlson Software 2007 pl Table of Contents End User License Agreement Installation Using the Manual system Requirements Microsoft ActiveSync Installing SurvCE Authorizing SurvCE Hardware Notes Color Screens Memory Battery Status Save System Carlson Technical Support User Interface Graphic Mode View Options Quick Calculator Hot Keys amp Hot List Instrument Selection Input Box Controls Keyboard Operation Abbreviations FILE Job Job Seitings New Job Job Settings System Job Settings Options Job Settings Format Job Settings Stake List Points Raw Data p2 Feature Code List Data Transfer Import Export Delete File Add Job Notes Exit EQUIP Instrument Setup setup Total Station setup GPS GPS Base GPS Rover GPS Utilities Configure General Configure View Pt Configure Sets Localization Monitor SkyPlot GPS Check Level Total Station Tolerances Peripherals About SurvCE SURV Orientation Instrument Setup Orientation Backsight Orientation Remote Benchmark Orientation Robotics Store Points TS Store Points TS Offsets Store Points GPS Store Points GPS Offsets Stake Points Stake Line Arc Stake Offset Elevation Difference p3 Grid Face Resection Set Collection Leveling Auto By Interval Remote Elevation Log Raw GP
149. Check Battery Trimble GPS General 4700 5700 and 5800 This configuration is used for most current brands of Trimble GPS including the Trimble 5700 and Trimble 5800 The Trimble 5700 is often used as a base in conjunction with the Trimble 5800 which has the wireless Bluetooth communication feature To use the Bluetooth feature the Trimble TSCe is outfitted with an adapter on one of its serial ports which includes the internal radio For use with SurvCE the standard serial cable is recommended To use the cable disable Bluetooth p606 The Trimble 5800 with Zephyr antenna has a panel that includes an On Off button at right p607 There are three LCD lights From left the first round light is yellow and flashes or pulses at 1 per second when sufficient satellites have been acquired for RTK and flashes quickly when insufficient satellites are available The second round light is a pulsing green light indicating radio linkage When the pulse is intermittent radio connection is being interrupted The third rectangular light is green and indicates battery status It 1s steady on when there is sufficient battery power p608 Note on the Trimble 5700 that the power on off button is on the right the nex t two buttons to the left show the usage of battery 1 and an optional battery 2 Three LCD lights appear along the bottom left of the 5700 panel The middle button pulses red and is a satellite indicator steady 1
150. Codes Special Codes Settings will prompt if description does not match a feature code the use of GIS attributes as set in Feature Codes or the use of Read or Store rather than Read and Store within Configure Read or Store will turn the first Enter into Read to review the shot and the second Enter into Store Set to Read and Store with no Prompt for Height Description points are typically stored as fast as you press Enter e Sokkia Style The SDR33 and earlier SDR data collectors have a convenient concept for Store Last Read Next In this method you get your descriptions set up and take a shot The reading 1s displayed at the bottom line of the screen You examine it satisfy yourself it is correct move to the nex t point and take another shot This was done on the SDR collectors with the Read key but with SurvCE can be accomplished with Enter e Normal Foresight Style The most typical method is the Read and Store procedure as set in Configure This takes a one keystroke measurement But you must remember to enter the height and description ahead of time before pressing Enter If you want an after shot chance to change the height and description turn on Prompt for Height Description Prompt within Configure The Enter key can also be used for Read First Store Later This is the Read or Store version Your first Enter is a read only like pressing R or entering ALT R Your second Enter is a store which can b
151. Coordinates At this point all of the coordinates in the CRD file that represent the measured positions need to be updated to reflect the newly created localization To do this select COGO gt Process Raw File and process the raw file through the localization file This will update the previously measured GPS points Verify that the positions look valid by viewing the points in File gt List Points You should be able to compare the known and measured positions to see if they look right Depending on the localization method the measured values may not be exactly the same as the original known positions due to error that may have existed in the original positions Additional GPS Measurements Once the localization is defined all of the GPS points measured after its creation will be recorded to the CRD file based on this localization Changing the Localization If the user determines that they want to redefine the current localization during a job they must reprocess the entire raw file after making any changes to the localization file It may be prudent to simply define a new localization file from scratch leaving the original intact and reprocess the raw file through this new localization file Just remember that the last localization loaded will be the current localization Selecting Projections for use in Localization Whenever you select a projection or coordinate system you can place it in a most used list of coordinate syst
152. Display settings as well as confirm PC and PT coordinates For ex ample this allows you to verify computed Tangent Out bearings against paper plans before continuing entry of new elements p347 Curve Element PC Sta 4 08 3272 Left f Fj nt i Radius gt RPtID FA local Eas PT Pt ID f FA Nor Tang to Previous Element PT Sta 4 RR Review Length Chord Length Tangent Tangent External External Mid Ordinate i i Mid Ordinate Degree of Arc gt Length F Length Chord Tangent External Mid Ordinate e Add Spiral Curve Spiral The Spiral Curve Spiral element is really just two implementations of Spiral Only line spiral curve and curve spiral line The advantage of Spiral Curve Spiral is that it completes three elements at p348 once and is a fairly common application on high speed highways This routine also allows the user to define the spiral curve spiral using known points as long as the spiral in and spiral out lengths are entered first Data for le Curve Left C Right Radius Arc Len N90 OO 00 E End ST Sta Central PI Station From Points Review From Points Spiral In Length None Spiral Qut Length None TS Mone Get Coords SC None Get Coords PI None Get Coords Cs None Get Coords ST None Get Coords e Add Spiral Only The Spiral Only element will handle a spiral between any line and a
153. Down value 3 100 Point 1193 Desc Wall HT 4 70 Measured AF 359 59 49 ZE 91 49 55 SD 7 684 store Before the shot tap Read After the shot when the raw data is displayed in the lower left tap Store You will remain in the command until you tap Close Repeat Shots Using Offsets When taking multiple measurements in traffic or other conditions where you must move away quickly one technique is to use the Offset button in Store Points and then the Point method You do a Read and enter 0 for all offsets then Store Then change the description and tap Store again no additional Read is necessary and a second point with a different description or rod height or offset is stored Some office software programs require distinct readings on the same point to process multiple descriptions in which case the use of Offsets to store multiple readings with one field measurement is recommended p212 Offset x Distance Angle Point ERII settings Create Vector offset i Read Inst Ny l Point 1193 Fead Point 1 i H Wh Desc Wall T 470 z Read Point 2 p HT 4 70 E Read Angle wal store i e 2 Point Offset This creates a 2 point 3D vector where the offset direction distance and vertical offset are computed from the delta N delta E and Delta Z of the two points that are measured or entered If Read Inst is enabled then the two points are measure
154. East Height 33 000 ft Ellipsoid x e Enter Grid System Coordinates Requires you to enter the grid system northing and easting for the point that the base is occupying This applies to any projection that you have configured including U S state plane worldwide UTM or any individual country or user defined grid system This 1s useful if you are setting up over a monument whose coordinates you know An accurate base position either by entry of Lat Long or Grid System Coordinates will enable immediate data collection without rover based localization but also will improve rover based localization The Coordinate method is similar to the Lat Lon method since Lat Longs convert to Grid Coordinates based on the current coordinate system set in Job Settings GPS option The Grid Coordinates will convert back to the Lat Long coordinates needed by SurvCE to configure the base p136 Grid Coordinate Point From File B i Current Zone is MA Mainland Northing 2957456 307632 ft Easting 752940 944011 ft Elevation 323 095472 ft G Ellipsoid i Ei Hormetri Base Configuration From New Position Paan I L eL Previously Surveyed Point Use Local Coordinates Read From File From Known Position Options e Previously Surveyed Point This requires you to enter the coordinates on the configured coordinate system of a known surveyed point This will transform and localize to the local coordinate system and optionall
155. Edge of Concrete Surface 102 Concrete Curb Flowline po sia 1 2 ile Symbols are shown as circles and polyline features as lines Polylines that are 3D include the Z As a short cut to entering the special codes to start and stop lines you can use the icons that appear at right Of the 8 icons shown going left to right starting at the top they represent start polyline start curve end polyline end curve close polyline close rectangle designate specific unfinished active line and more options leading to icons for Offset Horizontal and Offset V ertical TT me ee Robotic Features The status of the robot is displayed in the upper left center next to TEXT and above the Map Status modes include e Tracking Locked onto the prism and following it shows a lock symbol e Standby Stopped in the last position it was in and ready to resume Tracking e Searching Looking for the prism shows a binoculars symbol No Data Brief mode between losing the prism and beginning an automatic search The search s tandby and lock icons let you initiate a Search after a lost lock condition or go to Standby if currently locked to drive a hub and stop the gun from moving or go back to Lock from Standby after driving the hub In the graphic shown above you are in Prism Mode as opposed to reflectorless which would show a line through the prism You are locked and tracking real time meaning distance measurements a
156. Elevation 321 5502 GEOID Mo Geoid file loaded Orthometric Elevation No Geoid file loaded Localization File SurvCe Local Northing 11276 3521 Local Easthing 20562 9041 Local Elevation 97 4070 e SATView Under the SATView tab the spatial orientation of the satellite constellation is shown Click on any satellite number to see details You can also toggle satellites on and off if supported by the GPS Monitor Skyplot Quality Position AS SATInfo Ref Sat S N Ratio mn 3 6 7wu e SATInfo This tab shows information on Satellites e PRN is the satellite reference numbers indicates satallite in use for position p182 calculation AZI is the satellite azimuth ELV is the satellite elevation above the horizon S N is the signal to noise ratio indicating quality of satellite signal Monitor Skyplot E Quality Position SATView EXITS Ref Ref The REF tab to the right of SAT Info appears with most G PS configurations not with GPS Simulation The REF tab will show the base station information stored to the reference file which is created during base configuration The Magellan Ashtech GPS for example will show the distance from rover to base The base coordinates can also be stored by pressing the Store button You simply enter a point number and description and the precise base coordinates are stored in north east and elevation according to the localization file setti
157. Enter Points can be Stored by selecting this icon ALT S verage With GPS since shots tend to cluster around the true point location it may add to accuracy to Average 10 or more GPS readings when taking measurements You will be prompted for how many readings to take up to 999 Taking 100 readings is also a way to gauge how fast your GPS equipment takes measurements If 100 readings are taken in 10 seconds you are reading at 10 per second or 10 hertz hz After the readings are taken a display appears showing the range and standard deviation of the readings p215 gt Average Results 10 valid Readings out of 10 Readings Nor Min 9870 9596 Max 9871 6256 Eas Min 20101 7256 Max 20102 5057 Ely Min 97 4762 Max 97 7046 Nor Avg 9871 2672 SD 0 2032 Eas Avg 20102 2121 SD 0 30853 Ely Avg 97 6032 SD 0 0736 O Offsets This icon leads to Offset reading screens with options for keyed in offsets as well as offsets taken by laser devices These devices can measure distance only or distance and azimuth ALT O See Store Points GPS Offsets for more details Configure This icon will take you to the Configure dialog also found on the EQUIP tab From this dialog you can set the number of readings to average specify to only store fixed readings and turn on or off the Hgt Desc prompt on Save ALT C Monitor SkyPlot This icon will take you to the Monitor SkyPlot screen for GPS status coordinates and Lat Long d
158. For File If you have no groups or wish to see change the groups you already have you will need to click Edit Groups and add a group as shown below Select a Group And Enter A File Name Edit Groups Cancel File Name fileooo1 Next is the Tagging Site dialog To start tagging a site enter the information requested including site name site code and antenna height changing is optional see Changing the Antenna You will also decide here whether you want the site to stop automatically after a duration of your choice or when End Site is selected Tap Start Site and all the information entered will be grayed out until the site is ended Stop the site at any time by clicking End Site Before ending the site you will have the option to change the antenna information in case you made a mistake View the satellite status at any time using the View Status button This will not affect the tagging of the site p293 Site Duration 00 00 01 T Ina Height 0 0000 ft File fieO001 hange Antenna Ht File Duration 00 00 58 0 Mant y D l jo i GDOF 3 3 POOP 3 0 HDOFP 1 7 TOOP 1 86 S5AI5 5 You can tag as many sites as you wish When you are done click the Exit button SurvCE will ask you if you want to continue logging the file If you do click Yes and the next time you select Log Raw Data you will go directly to the dialog box shown above The file name will appear in the main post process screen 1f it
159. GSI Leica file extension for Raw files Roading files etc INF Carlson User Preferences Settings File TNP MOSS Roading Files Horizontal and Vertical Alignment LIS Form of IGRDS Cross Section File NOT Carlson Note File OBS Geodimeter Coordinate File OSD A form of Geopak Centerline File o PEt Horizontal Alignment Report file from CLIP Spain p631 POS FRO RAS RD RDS REF RLN RW5 SCL SCT SDR Sokkia or Trimble Coordinate File Carlson Vertical Road Alignment File ISPOL Vertical Road Alignment File Spain TDS Road Alignment File IGRDS Cross Section File Carlson Base Station Reference File TerraModel Road Alignment File Carlson Raw Data File TDS Raw Data File ISPOL Cross Section File Spain Carlson Cross Section File Sokkia file extension for Raw Files Roading files etc SHE SUP TRL TPT TRV for XML types ARS ESRI Shape File Carlson Road Superelevation File Carlson Road Template File Carlson Road Template Transition File Traverse PC Coordinate File and CLIP Format Sections Spain LandxXML File may contain a variety of file eg Roading DTM Form of Geopak Cross Section File p632 Raw Data This section outlines the Carlson SurvCE RWS format File Format Carlson SurvCE RW5 Format This document outlines the Carlson SurvCE RW5 format in detail The format is a comma delimited ASCII file containing record types headers recorded data and comme
160. HASE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THESE MATERIALS THIS INCLUDES WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS IN ALL INSTANCES THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IS SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE JURISDICTION IF THIS SOFTWARE WAS ACQUIRED IN THE UNITED STATES THIS EULA IS GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE COMMONW EALTH OF KENTUCKY IF THIS PRODUCT WAS ACQUIRED OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES THIS EULA IS GOVERNED BY THE LAWS IN ANY APPLICABLE JURISDICTION p9 Installation This chapter describes the system requirements and installation instructions for Carlson SurvCE Using the Manual This manual is designed as a reference guide It contains a complete description of all commands in the Carlson SurvCE product The chapters are organized by program menus and they are arranged in the order that the menus typically appear in Carlson SurvCE Some commands are only applicable to either GPS or total station use and may not appear in your menu Look for the icons for either GPS mode and or total station mode found at the start of certain chapters These icons will be located at the top header of these pages or at the start of a chapter Available in GPS Mode E Available in Total Station Mode For some commands both icons will be shown indicating that the SurvCE command can be used in both GPS and total station modes System Requireme
161. HR4 700 prior to the currently highlighted line in the raw file You can limit the search by use of the In Field option by selecting only Descriptions Notes or Points or search All records 88 se Find Replace Find HR4 700 Replace HR4 833 Replace In Field All Replace All Options Direction M Match case Up C Down Match whole word Found in line 36 of 96 L5 HI5 LOO000 HR4 00000 Feature Code List This command allows you to define default ready to use descriptions You can create multiple feature code lists and each list can contain an unlimited number of codes Each feature code consists of a short code a longer description a polyline toggle and a polyline type setting The initial dialog is shown below Code List SurvCE Code Linework Line Type Layer Name __ AC Mo 2D SURFACE AT No 2L CONTROL B YES cE BIJILDIMNG BO Yes 30 BUILDING Bui ves cE CONCRETE C es 30 CONCRETE CD Mo 2D gt TORM DRAIN CP No 2O CONTROL w jili gt Edit Remove Load Save As Special Codes p89 Add a Feature Code e Add To add a code to the list select this button The Add Code dialog will appear Select a Feature Code File e Load The Load button allows you to select a file to open or edit Choose an existing file or enter a new file name to create a new Feature Code List Feature Code List files have a FCL file extension Edit an Exi
162. Hz GPS Rover Configure Network None o RTK Port coma Baud juis200 Parity Mone Stop Bits 1 7 Message Type Navcom sts Base ID l Use Any Base ID Send Rover Position to Network RTK Tab e Device This list contains the supported devices that deliver or receive RTK messages such as a radio or IP modem If an External Radio 1s selected the user will need to specify the Port Baud Parity and Stop Bits that the radio p587 manufacturer requires For internal radios SurvCE will detect the proper settings e Network This list allows you to configure and connect to various networks e g NTRIP e Message Type You must select the RTK message type that you wish to broadcast and receive This is the format of the RTK message string that 1s either sent from the base or received at the rover e Base ID This is typically used to isolate paired devices The user specifies that the base it ID 1 then the rover should be set to only listen to ID 1 so that other base station that might be in the area do not interfere e Send Rover Position to Network This will output a NMEA GGA message for networks that require it Navcom GPS handles QuickStart When QuickStart is used RMS values in Monitor and elsewhere will be displayed as 0 0 as valid numbers will not be reported from the receiver in this mode When configuring the rover even if the message Failed to clear Navcom base position
163. In many cases the user can start a command while using another command The newly started command is called a transparent command Each command from the left toolbar menu is a transparent command Usually a command does not immediately execute Carlson MAP either displays a dialog box or displays prompts at the command line requesting more information from the user Typically the user can select objects on the screen or enter data on the command line Many commands consist of a series of options structured as follows Cmd Command name Option1 oPtion2 opTion3 lt default option gt To select one of the options the user can enter the entire option name or only the capitalized letters and then press ENTER If available the default option always appears in angle brackets lt gt To select the default option just press ENTER If no command is active the user can repeat the previous command by pressing ENTER Panning the Screen The user can move the drawing display PAN anytime To use this command the user must hold down and slide a finger or the proper pointing device on the screen The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the pointing device p440 When you release the pointing device the panning stops Only the display moves and all objects retain their correct coordinates Be careful to start the pan by picking in empty space If you hold down on a point you may obtain the Point Details
164. Increment from Starting Station A Extend Alignments Stake Start and End Stations Stake CL Alignment Points O Stake Profile Points sal Limit Sta Range Use Station and Offset List Alignments Tab Increment from Starting Station For centerlines that start on an odd station such as 1020 10 20 in U S stationing format this option would conduct stakeout by interval measured from station 1020 So a 50 interval stakeout instead of being 1050 1100 1150 would be 1020 1070 1120 etc Extend Alignments This projects a tangent line off of the first and last segments of the alignment for extending them beyond their defined limits Stake Start and End Stations This instructs the software to stop at these critical locations even when they do not fall on the even station Stake CL Alignment Points This instructs the software to stop at these critical locations even when they do not fall on the even station Stake Profile Points This instructs the software to stop at these critical locations even when they do not fall on the even station Stake High and Low Points This instructs the software to stop at these critical locations even when they do not fall on the even station p57 e Combine Station Equations This allows the user to overlap the station equations e Apply Station Equations This allows the user to ignore the station equations so that the station reflects the length of the alignment e Offset Gap
165. Job Settings If you enter a point number that is not in the control file but is in the current job s p223 coordinate file then that point will be used You can also select the points to stakeout from a list by selecting the List icon If you select the List option you can select the points for stakeout from the active job file or the control file To do this you must toggle between the files using the Job and Control toggles at the top of the dialog You can select a range of points by selecting the first point to stake then pressing the shift key and selecting the last point to stake All points between the two selected points will be staked in sequential order You can also add to the selection of points to be staked by pressing and holding the CTRL button and individually selecting the points to be staked The final way to select an individual point to be staked is by selecting the Map icon and tapping on the point to be staked Add to List Pick from List When you select or enter multiple points they appear in the Point ID dialog window You can then pick Add to List and create a list of these points in the order they were selected When you Add to List the Point ID dialog is cleared and you can select more points place them in the dialog and click Add to List again Then you can stake any of them using Pick from List where the points appear as shown below Stakeout Point List PtIO Job Used 1001 Current be Current R
166. Joystick Joystick Calculator Calculator Calculator ioe lima Code List Feature Code List Code List View Map View Map Offset Offset Point Collection Offset Point Collection Point Collection List PointsiList Points List Points Toggle Prompt for Toggle Prompt for Hgt Desc Read Read and Store Sore Store fiore View Raw File File Notes xX Exit to Exit to Main Menu Exit to Main Menu Menu Y Toggle Graphics Text Toggle Graphics Text Mode Graphics Mode A to Point Zoom to Point Point p34 Action in Stakeout Mode Summary E GPS Conventional TS Robotic TS Total Station Setup Total Station Setup e oe Reading Configure Reading Reading Monitor GPS Pp Leica Toggle EDM a Target Set Target Elevation Set Target Elevation Elevation Go F fivers finere inves J a Motorized Joystick Joystick K Calculator Calculator Calculator o Code Feature Code List Feature Code List List N Next Next Point Station to Next Point Station to Point Station to Stake Stake Stake P List Points List Points List Points Read Feadan Store a a A U V View Raw File View Raw File View Raw File W Mrite Job Notes Write Job Notes Write Job Notes a to Main Exit to Main Menu Exit to Main Menu Menu p35 Z Zoomto Point Zoom to Point Zoom to Point Instrument Selection The user can switch between current instruments using the Instrum ent Selection flyout on the top bar of the SurvCE amp Tot
167. LIe oD 395000 CP GPS Record type GPS Field headers PN Point Name LA Latitude WGS84 LN Longitude WGS84 negative for West EL Ellipsoid elevation in meters SS Note GPS heights may be recorded to phase center or ARP depending on GPS make Sample s GPS PN701 LA42 214630920 LN 71 081409184 EL 21 8459 C P Brass Disk Alphabetical listing of Record Types BD Backsight Direct BK Backsight BR Backsight Reverse FD Foresight Direct FR Foresight Reverse GPS GPS Position in Lat dd mmss Lon dd mmss Negative for West and WGS84 Ellipsoid Elevation in meters JB Job Li Line of Sight MO Mode Setup OC QSCupy OF Off Center Shot SP SLOre POLN 59 Side Shot TR Traverse Note Record p636 Alphabetical listing of Field Headers AD Azimuth Direction 0 for North 1 for South AL Angle Left AR Angle Right AZ Azimuth BC Back Circle BP Back Point BR Bearing this field will be recorded as N123 4500W BS Backsight when back point is not defined CE Change Elevation DL Deflection Left DR Deflection Right DT Local Date MM DD YYYY E Easting the header is E space EG BRarin Curvatuce 0 TOr OLC Jl FOr On EL Elevation GPS value is ellipsoid elevation in meters EO EDM Offset FE Foresight Elevation FP Foresight Point HD Horizontal Distance HI Height of Instrument HR Height of Rod LA Latitude LN Longitude N Northing the header is N space OC Occupy Point Coo
168. Line offers only the Perpendicular method Define Line First Point ID aati dl S d Point ID Current ob 58 North Azimuth Method f 2 Point C Azimuth Slope Start Sta 0 00 000 O04 45 468 Confirm MEZ The Define Line dialog gives you the following options e First Point ID This is the starting point of the line You can enter the point here by point ID The first button brings up the list points dialog where you can select the starting point of the line from a list The button directly to the right allows you to choose your point from the map instead If you pick a point from the map in a crowded area of points you will be directed to the list p229 points dialog to select the desired point among those near to your chosen position e Second Point ID Pressing Enter from the first point moves the curser to the second point This is the ending point on the line that is only available for entry if Method is set as two Point for defining the line The procedure for selecting this point is the same as for the first point Azimuth This option will be available for input only if Method is set to Azimuth If Method is set to Two Point then the Azimuth is inactive but still displays the azimuth or bearing between the two points of the line The Azimuth method will prompt for bearing if Angle Type is set to bearing in the Format section of Job Settings e Slope Just like the Azimuth this option wil
169. Localization File dat Geoid Model File gsf Coordinate File crd Raw Data File rw5 Projections It is essential that the proper plane coordinate projection is selected prior to creating a localization file This should be the first step performed during the creation of the job file and be performed easily through File gt Job Settings gt GPS Geoid Model An important item to note is if the user intends to use a geoid model typical for localizations that contain less that 3 control points the geoid model must be applied prior to the creation of the localization file A local portion of the geoid grid must be extracted from the Carlson Geoid Model using Carlson X Port SurvCOM Survey or Civil SurvCADD and the geoid model file must be installed prior to the creation of the local geoid file It is also highly recommended that the local geoid file grid size does not exceed 100 miles Web Link to the Geoid Files http update carlsonsw com public CarlsonGeoidGnids exe Transfer or Enter the Known local Points It s a good idea to simplify the process by transferring the known local points to the data collector prior to going to the field Conversely the user can keyboard p531 enter the known coordinates for these points into the CRD file one at a time using File gt List Points gt Add It is not recommended that the user keys in the local coordinates from within the localization process as transpositions can occ
170. None option For each section you tell it the station and center shot and all other measurements are used to determine the left and right offsets relative to the center shot If the L to R method was used shots before the center shot are on the left for example and their offset is determined by the inversed distance to the p426 center shot The centerline file or other form of horizontal alignment if selected is academic and only used to advise you on your current station and offset The CHK button will allow checking into known points to be sure that tight coordinate control is maintained N moves onto the next station as defined by the interval set using the Sta button Note The SCT file method is the standard Store Sections method The RAW Geodimeter method is a flexible routine designed to adapt to customers who have built their cross section processing systems around the G eodimeter raw file format Stake Road Stake Road is one of four major commands used in highway work This command is designed to stakeout specific stations and offsets along a centerline For example if your goal is to stakeout the break points at station 87 80 on a given road centerline you would use Stake Road Stake Road therefore is used primarily to lay out road surfaces for construction Stake Road is typically used to set cut and fill stakes or blue tops at specific stations and offsets The elevation used to determine the cut or fill at each
171. OM drive letter and setup For example enter d setup where d is your CD ROM drive letter 3 On the desktop PC a Welcome dialog will appear Click Next SunvCE 1 61 01 Setup Welcome to the SurvCE 1 61 01 Setup Wizard This wizard will guide you through the inatellation of Surele 1 61 01 E is recommenced Guat jeu chose afl other epphcsierrs before Seting Setup This will make A possible bo update rima sem files without Peavey bo reboni pH TEHTY E you werd SureCE installed to another redor besides th delma dieci clack H when the CE Applicaton Manager Four Chi hed to comin 4 On the next dialog you must read and accept the Carlson SurvCE End User License Agreement EULA If you agree with the EULA click I accept pl6 and then select Install If you do not agree with the EULA click I do not accept and the installation program will quit SurvCE 1 61 01 Setup m Fa License Agreement a Please review the license terms before installing SurvCE 1 61 01 oT Press Page Bown to see the rest of the agreement Surele END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT POR CARLSON SOFTVVARE PMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This Cartson Software End User License Agreement EULA is 5 legal Soreqmen bitvban you eaher an indnidual or 6 Bnght entity and Cartson Software Inc for the SurvCE softwere accompanying this EULA which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online
172. OO 0 AU0 Occupy Record Record type OC Field headers OP Point Name N Northing the header is N space E Easting the header is E space EL Elevation e Note Sample s OG OPie N SO004 000004 30 00 00 000 iil Oe 00 sG p634 Off Center Shot Record Record type OF Field headers AR ZE SD Sample s Angle right Zenith actual Slope Distance Ob ARIO 3533 2090 00007 SD25 550000 OF ZE90 3333 Vert Angle Offset Store Point Record Record type SP Field headers PN N E EL Sample s Point Name Northing Easting Elevation Note oP PNEOO N 3002300007 E 30000000 ETL L00 0000 PP Traverse Sideshot Record Backsight Direct Backsight Reverse Foresight Direct Foresight Reverse Record type Field headers OP FP one of the following AZ BR AR AL DR DL one of the following ZE VA CE one of the following SD HD Sample s TR 7 Se BDZ BR 7 FD ER Occupy Point Foresight Point Azimuth Bearing Angle Right Angle Left Deflection Right Deflection Left Zenith Vertical angle Change Elevation Slope Distance Horizontal Distance Note p635 TRAPP Lh Pao ARO 6335 Sy AOS SOS y 02 sow OUD ae Pe So Or ly PPZ7ARO 0044 7H06 0133 0010 3137 50 SCP BD7OPL FPZ ARO U00 Sy ZE00 01Z 6 SDI s3Z0000 CP BR OPL EP PZ ARTS 0 40087 4n2 5 002070 1L0 3150007 S EP PD OPL EPS JARS Ta O50 ANOO V4 3007 00 393000 CP PROP Ly VP oy ARZ3 1 LOlZy ae2 0s
173. ORK MainRoad pro PVI Station PWI El Slope 100 76 69 KORINI 114 29 25 520 0075 1 oo 122 52 25 541 38235 2 5 Di Check Sta 107 25 5 P a zeroes El 527 4642 Circular Curve PVI Station PVI stands for Point of Vertical Intersection similar to a PI Point of Intersection for the horizontal alignment In some locations the term VPI is used Vertical Point of Intersection You can start immediately by typing in the starting station under the PVI column For our highway example the starting station is 10078 69 KS PVI Elevation The starting elevation is 526 49 So simply press Enter and move from the PVI column to the PVI Elev column and enter 526 49 Pressing Enter again moves onto the next PVI field where you can enter 10600 for the next station then 529 10 for the next PVI elevation Slope Once a second station and elevation are entered the program will calculate the percent slope Alternately if you enter under the Slope before entering the PVI elevation then the program will calculate the PV I elevation The slope column is a nice check against bad entries in the PVI elevation column In other words you often expect even slopes and you can check the computed slopes against the plans Slopes can be entered as ratios when that option is clicked and if you click Show Zeroes the dialog will show a consistent number of decimals typically 4 in all columns causing the data and decimal places to l
174. PL VIEW Template Sc 5 00 C Sur ta L619_R619 tpl The Template Series approach can even be used to transition from normal crown to superelevation avoiding the need to use superelevation files The Template Series approach is commonly used to expand the width of a lane to accommodate for example a passing lane Since template IDs must match if a special slope lane appears for a certain station range then the Template Series approach can still be used as long as you add the extra ID point e g EP2 to the normal template perhaps making that point 0 001 units in dimension initially In the second transitional template the EP2 lane can have the full width of 3 5 meters or 12 feet or whatever applies If the transition starts at station 500 and ends at station 600 EP2 will be 1 75 meters or 6 feet or exactly half the full dimension at station 550 Starting with the demo tpl file with a 10 lane to ID EP followed by a 6 shoulder lane to ID SH you can make another template called Road tpl with a 12 lane to EP and an 8 shoulder to SH Note how we have made sure to use the same ID for the road lane EP and the shoulder lane SH p383 Input Edit tpl File 12 000 2 000 EP 12 000 2 000 EP 6 000 ee eee 5 000 4 000 SH If the demo tpl is used from station 0 to 500 and the Road tpl is used from 600 to the end of the project at station 1000 then the entry proce
175. Preview Shows you a preview of the first line of the ASCII file This 1s helpful in determining the correct coordinate order format Header Lines Specifies the number of header lines to skip in the ASCII file Add to Pt ID s Specifies a value to be added to each point ID during the import process Pt Protect Specifies whether or not to check each point ID to see if it already exists in the current CRD file If this is toggled ON and you attempt to import point ID s that already exist you will then be prompted to overwrite each p109 existing point or to cancel the operation Export ASCII File This command converts SurvCE point data to an ASCII tex t file The next figure shows the Export ASCII dialog box Choose a coordinate order type of delimiter range of points and precision After choosing the settings in this dialog box press OK A standard file dialog will appear In this dialog choose a name for your ASCII file and then press OK After the file is written a dialog will appear telling you that the conversion if finished Export Ascii Coordinate Order f PtID North East Eley Desc C PtID North East Eley Desc C PtID East North Eley Desc North East Eley Desc Eley North East C East North Eley Desc East North Eley Desc Type of Delimiter Comma C Space Range 1 1191 Export Point Notes Decimale a M Export Attributes e Coordinate Order You must specify the output format for the ASCII
176. R 269 0O2 52 Move Out 89 138 A read function is required to update the directional display information You should see your points in the map with an icon showing your target location the circle with the X inside Shots are taken typically by pressing Enter Enter also transitions automatically from the Stake Points entry screen to the Stk Pt shot screens above Point Stakeout can be conducted without touching the screen Both screens are ex plained below starting with the graphic Stk Pt screen e Total Station Only After reading and taking the shot the display will be updated with a distance and direction to the stakeout point Buttons on the right from top to bottom are Read Store Next Menu Configure and Setup e GPS or Robotic Total Station with Tracking On Your current position is read immediately no Read button needed e Point ID This is the point which you are staking You can enter it in here and hit the enter key to view the elevation northing and easting before selecting OK If you want to stake out a range of points you can enter in the points in the following format 3 10 2 15 20 This would stake out the points from 3 10 sequentially then point 2 then 15 through 20 sequentially If you are using a control file in total station mode and you enter a point number which also is present in the current job file it will choose the control file point if Control File Has Priority is enabled in the stakeout section of
177. RD file will change as a result of the closure adjustment Draw Traverse Lines This command employs the same four tab screen as Process No Adjust and the other adjustment routines It displays a preview of the traverse configuration by drawing lines between the traverse points To start the command select Draw Traverse Lines from the Process Raw Menu Inside the dialog enter the beginning and ending points to be drawn and press enter The figure below shows p80 an example of the results To exit the preview screen select the MENU button at the top right of the screen Direct Reverse Report This command creates a report of direct and reverse shots along with the resulting averaged shots The residuals are the difference between the measurement and the final average Shown below is a direct and reverse report for a shot taken from point 1 backsighting point 4 and foresighting point 100 Direct Reverse Report Observations Type Setup FSight HorzAngle Distance Vertical BD BR FD FR BD BR FD FR l 4 4 i 100 i 100 4 4 100 l l l l 100 Reduced Sets HorzAngle Residual FS Diff BK Diff 359 5958 279 8760 89 4827 179 5945 279 9490 270 1114 336 1603 211 2160 75 0056 156 1601 211 2150 284 5848 359 5948 279 9500 89 4824 179 5942 279 9500 270 1111 336 1608 211 2150 75 0052 156 1601 211 2170 284 5850 psl 336 1610 0 0004 0 0002 0 0013 336 1619 0 0005 0 0007 0 0006 Vertical Residual Diff 75 0104 0 0004
178. Rule Carlson SurvCE will always look for the defined point in the current working file first and then the control file If the point is not found in either file a warning that the point does not ex ist will be displayed You can force a point to come from the control file or the current file regardless of settings by using the List icon to the right of the point ID input box While in the point list selection window select the Control file radio button prior to selecting the desired point Stakeout Option Control files work similarly in stakeout However you can go to the STAKEOUT tab in Job Settings and set the program to give priority to the control file points when duplicate points exist If this pol option is turned on and the selected point is found in both files you will actually be staking out the point from the control file Coordinate File Rule At no time will a point be automatically copied from the control file into the current file This allows users to avoid large gaps in coordinate files and eliminates the potential for conflicting points Raw Data File Rule Any time a point is occupied the occupation record OC is written to the raw file for processing purposes There will not be an SP record written for control file points only an OC record Note that if the raw file is reprocessed the point will be written to the current coordinate file J ob Settings Format This tab allows you to select the viewing format of t
179. S COGO Keyboard Input Inverse Areas Intersections Point Projection Station Store Transformation Calculator Manual Traverse ROAD Centerline Editor Draw Centerline Profile Editor Draw Profile Template Editor Draw Template Utilities stake Slope Store Sections Stake Road MAP Basics FILE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS p4 Tutorials Tutorial 1 Calculating a Traverse By Hand with SurvCE Tutorial 2 Performing Math Functions in Carlson SurvCE Input Boxes Tutorial 3 Performing a Compass Rule Adjustment Tutorial 4 Defining Field Codes Line Layer Properties amp GIS Prompting Tutorial 5 Standard Procedures for Conducting GPS Localizations Instrument Setup by Manufacturer Total Station Geodimeter Trimble Total Station Leica TPS Series Total Station Leica Robotic Total Station Leica Wild Older Models Total Station Nikon Total Station Pentax Total Station Sokkia Set Total Station Sokkia Robotic Total Station Topcon 800 8000 APL1 Total Station Topcon GTS GPS Allen Osbourne GPS CSI DGPS Max GPS DataGrid GPS Leica 500 1200 GPS Leica GIS System 50 GPS Navcom GPS NMEA GPS Novatel GPS Septentrio GPS Magellan Ashtech GPS Sokkia GPS Topcon GPS Trimble GPS Utilities by Manufacturer p5 500 500 502 503 509 531 GPS Utilities Leica 500 1200 GPS Utilities Navcom GPS Utilities Sokkia and Novatel GPS Utilities Magellan Ashtech GPS Ut
180. S LOCK status Ranger 1 Hold down the yellow shift button and the ALT buttons then press and release the power button 2 A small keyboard should be showing On the small keyboard press the CAPS button then repeat step 1 to dismiss the keyboard Allegro Press and release the blue function button followed by the CapLk Shift button located at the lower left side of the keyboard How frequently should I charge the device We recommend starting every day with a fully charged battery Refer to your hardware manual for specifics on charging your battery How do I calibrate the touch screen In the control panel of the CE device select the Stylus icon to configure the Double Tab and Calibration of the touch screen How do I turn on off the back light Ranger Hold down the shift button and then press and release the power button p628 Allegro Press and release the yellow function button followed by the F3 F8 button located at the top center of the keyboard How can I speed up the Allegro performance In the control panel of the Allegro select the System icon and then the Memory tab Set your Storage Memory allocation to 8000 KB or 8 MB This should provide more RAM to the system for operating the programs and increase performance How can I Recover the SurvCE Icon if it Disappears It may be possible to lose the SurvCE Icon off the desktop 1f for ex ample the power d
181. Set Port to Bluetooth button SurvCE can use Bluetooth to communicate only with instruments that have Bluetooth incorporated on it Also the user can change the name and the password for the Bluetooth present on the instrument end by using the Bluetooth Settings button The dialog shown below will allow the user to change the existing name and password for the Bluetooth on the remote device Instrument Setup Current Settings Search Type Cable i Port com 1 Defaults Baud 115200 Parity None l Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 l Port Number You must select the COM port to use This is the comm port of the data collector p117 This is a Bluetooth Port For some of the newer equipment a Bluetooth wireless serial connection is possible SurvCE can use Bluetooth to communicate only with instruments that have Bluetooth incorporated on them Do not use this toggle unless you are certain that you have Bluetooth Baud Rate You must select the baud rate for data transfer Parity You must select the parity setting Char Length You must select the character length setting Stop Bits You must select the stop bits setting Defaults Clicking Defaults will utilize the standard default settings for the configured instrument Bluetooth Wireless Bluetooth is automatically detected The com port settings to use Bluetooth vary from unit to unit For example Com3 is typical for
182. Sta Offset Elevation 6 49 987 R126 906 997 219 0 00 CUT 0 0 CATCH to R651_5 TES 3 02 CUT 50 0 R6S1_3 to R651_4 10 66 a i CUT 350 0 R651_4 to Ros1_3 0 2 FILL 33 3 R631_3 to R651_2 4 0 0 1 CUT 4 3 R651_2toR651_1 3 9 1 CUT 4 3 R651_1 to CENTER 0 4 CUT 4 3 Progressive or Total The above report is sometimes referred to as a progressive report since it lists the incremental information from each break point to the next going in toward the centerline In some areas the stake is referred to as a story stake or progressive story stake because it tells the whole story of the gradework The program is able to identify the names of the break points eg SHLDR and EOP because the templates used by the program must have pre defined IDs for all break points Specifically with office defined templates where cut conditions can have downslopes for ditches followed by upslopes the program will auto detect whether to pivot into fill or to create a cut condition and pivot from the ditch line You can also click the Total option and get offset distances to all break points as totals measured from the offset stake In either case the report is issued only if you stake the p391 offset point to the catch e Section Files Section files can be used to identify the pivot points left and right and minimize fieldwork Consider the sections shown below apa a rey ze Cit oe 1 g eno
183. Standard 1 5 to 2 seconds Fast and Reflectorless In all modes of data collection you are in Rapid Tracking mode Clicking that icon goes to the No Distance or Tracking Only Mode no distance measurements Avoiding taking distance measurements will save battery usage So the Dist button refers to the selectable mode you will go to not the mode you are currently in In Rapid Tracking mode the store icon will always take a Rapid Tracking shot and pressing enter will take a Rapid Tracking shot if Enter is configured to Store only to mimic the store icon Pressing the read icon will always cause configured reading to be taken as will Enter when set to Read and Store The next figure shows the Rapid Tracking mode which follows the movement of the prism by taking rapid distance measurements much like RTK GPS Foresight Backsight Prism Offset This drop down menu provides a list of standard prism offsets Note that Leica prisms default zero to equate to 34 4 mm So a prism offset of 34 4 equals a zero net offset Whenever a prism constant is changed a note is written to the raw RWS file When you select one of the prisms from the list Circle Mini etc the value that is shown in parenthesis is the actual value sent to the instrument i e 0 0 for Circular 17 5 for Mini If you select 30mm or 40mm we send 4 4 and 5 6 respectively 30 34 4 and 40 34 4 The user may also type in any value they
184. SurvCE to the ESRI world just as the DXF output of linework links to the CAD world Point ID 1187 Edit Notes Northing Ses eaaielele Easting 20115 3680 fi Elevation 97 3945 ft Description STK6 CP CHIS X FILL 4 575 Input Edit Attributes Note If only the description value is edited the raw data file will be updated without writing a store point record If any other value that would change the point position is edited the raw data file will record a store point record with the new position of the point Add To add a point press the Add button The Add Point dialog appears and you must enter the point ID northing and easting A store point record will be written to the raw data file Find To find a point ID tap the Find button You can search for a point by Point ID or description but not both at the same time When searching by description any part of the description can be used to find the point and the search gs has the same effect as gs to find points beginning with gs Both would find the description gs Sta 1 00 L25 p66 Find Point in List SEARCH based on Paint ID Point Description Delete To delete a point highlight a point ID and tap the Delete button You will be asked to confirm this choice before the point is actually deleted e Control File When a control file is specified List Points offers the option to select the control file and to list the control file
185. SurvCEDemo Data Simo2 rmnf Stake Station Interval When clicked on your slope stake target is always a fixed point It is the slope stake at the specified station in the input dialog in all 4 methods But if clicked off the slope stake target point moves p393 forward back station as you move In User Defined the pivot offset and elevation is used regardless of station position In the other methods the pivot elevation is recalculated dynamically as you move based on the known information 3D points profile sections Round Station This option applies only if you turn off Stake Station Interval and move to fluid slope staking If you round to an interval such as 5 then the elevation to stake from is calculated to the rounded station value as is the up down station position for the offset Rounding only applies to the stored report the target still moves fluidly as you walk forward or back parallel to the alignment Load Road Net File Select Road Element Carlson Civil 2008 and Carlson Roads 2008 have the option to output an RNE file or Road Net File from the RoadNet feature This file contains every centerline cul de sac and road intersection curve return treatment for an entire road network For ex ample a complete subdivision road system can be output as a single RNF file and then SurvCE can stakeout any element of the RoadNet file that 1s loaded Since the RNF file contains both templates and fina
186. TITUDE B LONGITUDE RAW ELEY ROD HEIGHT Selected code NOR THING p92 Now when you are collecting the points with an FL code and the program detects that you have shot a point only feature or if you are shooting a line that you have ended the line e g FL END then you will be prompted for the attributes If there are several attributes associated with the fence eg height condition etc then the Next and Previous buttons will be active If you have just taken three points along a fence line with GPS the raw data file will appear within FILE gt Raw Data gt Edit RWS File You also have the option not to save the attribute information in which case it will not appear in the raw file or be convertible to shape files using the command Export SHP File found under File in the Map screen Special Code Suffixes Special Codes In addition to the codes that you add to the Feature Code List there are some predefined code suffixes that you may use to end lines or start curves For example FL END could end the fence line with END being a predefined special code The need to append codes is one reason that the END button on your data collector is useful to move to the END of the existing description so you can append a special code Y ou can substitute new codes for default codes such that can be substituted for END to end a line The special code suffixes can also be entered as p
187. The dialog that displays will have the following options Quick Export to SHP Current SHF SUrvCE Select New SHP m Do not export points Export entities from selected Layers 0 Select All BUILDING E CONC wi Clear All Remove Arcs offset cutott mi Include Z Coordinates Current SHP Displays the name of the SHP file that will be created when this command is completed Read only you must use the Select new SHP button to specify the file name Select new SHP Tap this button to select a SHP file name Do not export points When this option is checked only polylines are exported to the SHP file Export entities from selected Layers Lists the layers in the current map You may select certain layers for ex port Select All Selects all layers in the list p446 Clear All Clears all selected layers in the list Remove Arcs offset cutoff Specifies the maximum distance that a vertex on a polyline segment will deviate from the original arc Include Z Coordinates When this option is checked elevation data or Z coordinates will be included in the SHP file Process Tap this button to begin the export process If you are exporting a large file a progress bar at the bottom of the dialog will indicate the progress of the export DTM Import DTM from DXF TDXF Allows you to import 3DFACE entities from a DXF File and save them as a triangulation FLT file and also draw them as 3D faces s Import 3DF
188. The Topcon GPS has a special feature to Initialize to a Known Point which can greatly speed up move ups from one base position to another GPS Utilities Trimble Reset Receiver This will reset the receiver Select Rover Input If you choose Select Rover Input you can identify the station 1d of the base to avoid picking up inappropriate base corrections from the wrong base receiver e Check Battery This will display the condition of the receiver s battery Power On Off Receiver This will turn on and off the receiver p626 Troubleshooting This chapter contains troubleshooting tips for Carlson SurvCE and the various hardware devices supported by SurvCE GPS Heights SurvCE records GPS heights as the ellipsoid height ex pressed in meters at either the phase center or the ARP of the antenna depending on the GPS manufacturer If the position is recorded to the ARP then the LS record antenna height will only reflect the user entered value If the position is recorded to the phase center then the LS record antenna height will reflect the user entered value plus the phase center offset SurvCE records the ARP position for the following GPS manufacturers Leica Geodetics Handheld Hardware How do I reset the computer after a lock up Ranger Hold down the power button until the computer resets or instructs you to hold it for 5 more seconds to reset Allegro Hold down the power button until
189. V4 ANN IEK Field to Finish F2F This command will redraw the linework created with Feature Codes based on the current coordinates of the points So ifa GPS file was processed using a new localization or a total station survey was adjusted the ex isting linework made by use of Feature Codes will erase and redraw by connecting to the adjusted coordinates In this way polylines on the MAP screen created by field surveying will be redrawn to recapture their association with the adjusted point coordinates Place World Image This command will attach an image database to the SurvCE drawing Image databases are georefenced aerial photography or image maps These image databases can contain mulitple large images that have been processed for quick display in SurvCE The boundary for the image set is shown by a dashed line Images are inserted in coordinate system and units of the image Image databases are processed with the Image X Port utility of Carlson X Port p498 MAP VIEW Centerline Convert Polylines to 2D Edit Offset Settings Traverse Defaults Surface Field to Finish oy Place World Image ae E z oe s Current Image Database C Chicago Test Chicago Shore imd Run Carlson Image X Port Save Image Boundary Points W Use Image Database p499 Tutorials This chapter contains five tutorials designed to assist you in learning Carlson SurvCE Tutorial 1 Calculating a Traverse
190. a Height 5 000000 Change Antenna Interval 15 0 seconds After starting a file the software returns to the main screen From there you can leave the file recording exit manage files or start tagging sites To tag a site click the Tag Site button p306 Tag New Site Free Mem on PC Card 27493 kbytes Site Name SITE Site Atr THE CIRB Antenna Height 13 0000 ft Change Antenna Interval in Seconds i5 Stop Logging Manually After m minutes The Tag New Site dialog shows the available space on the receiver and allows you to enter the site name which must be four characters and site attribute You may also change the interval and the antenna height here Y ou can choose to have SurvCE stop logging the site automatically after a specified time period or manually If you choose to stop the logging automatically you will still have the ability to stop it manually using the Stop Point Logging button Recording site SITE Sit Duration 00 00 01 Time Remaining 00 00 59 Antenna Height 0 0000 ft Antenna Type Geoditic IN Stop Point Logging Exit Continue Logging The Recording Site screen can be exited by clicking the Stop Point Logging button or the Exit Continue Logging button which leaves the site running but exits the dialog You will return to the main post processing screen From here you may exit tag more sites manage files or close the file
191. abled when you press Read Laser a dialog will appear asking you to trigger the laser as shown below Each time you trigger the laser a new shot will be collected and if there was a previous shot it will be automatically stored Between shots the laser reading and the offset adjusted position to be stored are displayed If Auto GPS Update is enabled during peripheral setup a new GPS position will be read for each shot If a bad reading is taken you can prevent it from being stored by pressing Reject Last Shot When finished click Exit Shot Sequence i Distance Angle Offset Results Method Hz Offset p Offset Azimuth AZ Reference Vertical Offset e North Point Offset Distance zenith Angle Settings Read CPS M 9870 6196 E 20101 5662 Z 97 408 HRMS 2 643 VRMIS 2 696 AUTONOMOUS p219 e Results Before storing you can preview the data by selecting the RESULTS tab If valid data has been entered in the LASER or OFFSET tab the result will appear as shown below In this window you can also change the GPS antenna height or specify a vertical difference for your target point You can also specify the point ID and description for the point that will be stored Offset by Intersection Use Offset by Intersection to calculate a point based on two GPS positions and two distance offsets The distance values can either be manually entered or input with a laser To use a laser you must first activate
192. aced in the Map screen at your current position with continuously updating instructions to the stakeout point ARS FAS HD Dsg 04 273 000 0 000 LO 000 Turn to AR 342 35 16 Move Out 65 96 Stake Line Arc Station Offset Selecting OK on the Define Line Define Alignments or Define Arc dialogs presents the Stake Line dialog for defining the stake location parameters e g offset or elevation p236 Stake Line Sree Point On Line Starting Sta 0 00 000 Ending Sta 0 45 468 Station e Interval 50 B Offset Override Design Of Inc E C Left Right Segment Hi Tangent Wo Grade Cutsheet None IFUL UUL Station This is where you enter the station to stakeout Station You can advance to the next station as defined by the alignment points or station interval using the right green arrow icon Station You can go back to the previous station as defined by the alignment points or station interval using the left green arrow icon i Station List Select a specific station using the station list icon Interval This is where you choose the distance by which to increment the stations B Calculate Interval This is used to divide the entire line into equal parts which results in a calculated non rounded incremental station Offset Skew List This is where you enter in the offset distance from the line Select one of the left right radio buttons to determine th
193. ake Road dialog Any point in the template or section can be used for running in a slope stake You are asked to specify the desired cut and fill slope ratios The slope can be auto defined or user defined as follows Slope Staking Slopes by Template TEMPLATE E Pivot Point User Selection gt Y Elev From Files Pivot Pt Z O D 835 763 R24 User L305_4 L24 LO N A Stake Off V H Ref Off V Z Define Slope by Next Section Point This option allows you to select the edge of the road and use the proposed design catch point for auto determining the slope rate Define Slope by Previous Section Point This option allows you to select the proposed design catch point and then use the nex t point toward CL for auto determining the slope rate Extend Current Slope This option will allow you to pick the edge of p435 the road or catch point and use the next point toward CL to end the slope between then away from CL User Defined Slope Allows you to enter the slope ratio by hand for on the fly slope changes Slopes by Template This option extracts the slope definitions from the template file itself Stake Road EE y x I Z E 835 763 Sta 3 05 000 Interval 50 CL off Design Off 24 Left A Right Stake Off N vo Slope Stake L305_4 SoA TTN If you click Slope Stake you can stake by the template slope for the ditch shown on the left side or you can enter a user defined
194. ake is designed for simplicity and robustness Carlson Software products use the same native file formats as SurvCE so no file conversion occurs only transfer Kermit Transfer This command leads to a send and receive screen that works with the Kermit program on the PC This is a readily available data transfer program SDR Transfer This command is designed to work with existing programs that communicate with the SDR For example if you have LDD Intergraph SurvCADD Carlson Civil SelectCAD or other software that contains an SDR33 transfer routine then this option is designed to mimic that protocol When an RWS file is selected it is automatically converted to a Sokkia RAW file and downloaded to the PC When a CRD file is selected it is automatically converted to a Sokkia RAW file with 08 records for points This allows you to use and process the data in SurvCE similarly to the data in the SDR33 You can also upload into the SurvCE field computer Sokkia RAW files that contain point records All the points will be stored in a CRD file on SurvCE TDS Transfer This command is used to transfer data from SurvCE to TDS Foresight or other programs that have a TDS Link routine Sending data to a computer using the Carlson Transfer Option 1 Connect your serial cable to your PC Select Data Transfer from the File menu Choose Carlson C amp G Transfer This leads to a File Transfer screen on SurvCE which prompts Awaiting Connecti
195. al 20 Pivot Off 1 000 Read Instrument Use Point ID EA W Display As Ratio For flow line or V ditch staking a 0 pivot offset would be entered from the point defined alignment If the ditch were a trapezoidal ditch with a 2 meter bottom width and the alignment was the centerline each side of the ditch could be slope staked using a pivot offset of 1 1 2 of the ditch width from center to pivot point Both the Road Design Files and Section Files methods go straight to the navigation stakeout screens if no interval is selected Stake Station Interval turned off The pivot offset is built into these methods based on the rules outlined earlier you stake from the pivot to cut or fill in templates and from the ex treme left and right points of cross sections With interval turned off slope staking by User Entered method simply asks for the pivot offset and elevation at the current location and slope staking by point defined alignment asks only for pivot offset obtaining the elevation from the vertical alignment Slope staking cannot occur outside the station range of the horizontal alignment If your horizontal alignment runs from station 0 to 308 you can t stake station 10 either by interval method naming the station or by the non interval fluid where you are method p401 Failed to find station offset on centerline In live stakeout mode you will get Off Centerline when beyond
196. al Station 2 GPS Base crs rover amp Manual Total Station LT GPS Simulation Input Box Controls When point IDs are used to determine a value the program will search for the point IDs in the current job If not found it will then search in the control job if active Formatted Distance Height Entries Entries for distances or heights that include certain special or commonly understood measurement extensions are automatically interpreted as a unit of measurement and converted to the working units as chosen in job setup For example a target height entry of 2m is converted to 6 5617 feet if units are configured for feet The extension can appear after the number separated by a space 2 m or can be directly appended to the number 2m For feet and inch conversion the second decimal point informs the software that the user is entering fractions See Below Recognized text and their corresponding units are shown below e f or ft US Feet p36 i or ift International Feet in Inches cm Centimeters m Meters 4 Feet and Inches e g 1 5 3 8 1 5 3 8 either entry format is supported These extensions are automatically recognized for target heights and instrument heights and within certain distance entry dialogs Entries are not case sensitive Formatted Bearing Azimuth Entries Most directional commands within SurvCE allow for the entry of both azimuths and bearings Azimuth entries are in the form 350 2531
197. alog You can survey as many cross sections as desired within the command Unlike in Slope Staking Store Sections will respond to the setting for Hgt Description prompt on save found in Configure Reading allowing you to arrow key to desired descriptions or change your rod height after taking the shot Option C goes to the Configure Reading directly from the data gathering screen When done simply select the Menu button and you are returned to the Road menu When exiting by pressing Menu if you have opted to store to an SCT file you will be prompted to store the cross section information in SCT form Storing Points using Total Stations After confirming the occupied station and backsight as with all total station work proceed through the same options above until you reach the store point dialog In the ex ample below our centerline is metric starting at station 0 000 p419 X SCT SURV sIMENU gt AR 25592500 ZA 88934 51 S035 9800 ota 04 062 05 L35 35 Here your options are R for read followed by S for Store or simply Enter to Read and Store The backsight icon can be pressed to set a new occupied point or backsight point Note that we have a very busy screen of points If you just want to see your setup backsight and last point that was measured press Alt F This produces the screen below You will stay in this mode until you press Alt F again and toggle back to the presentation of all points X SCT SURV
198. als Finals x Sec Job Task 4 Typicals Cross Sections Roadway Bridge Survey Borrow Setout Dey Offtake Cross Sections Extensions Profile Topsoil Topography Subrcut Fly Levels Bench Cut There are pre set job categories and tasks which save into defined number categories in the old Geodimeter raw file format Whereas the SCT method recognizes the station you are on and automatically rounds to it when you are within tolerance the Raw Geodimeter method requires that you click the Station button and set your target station for collection of cross section data p424 K SCT SURV IMIENU gt 5000 6051 E 3075 B16 Fa 991 9023 HRMS 0 043 YRMS 0 074 A Dsg 0 000 000 R0 000 Sta 0 142 549 L21 685 IE STA CL BL 0 00 CHK Station Cancel Station 0 280 000 Prey ext Chainage Direction fLtoR ff RL CL Or 0 000 Inc Sta 20 000 Then you proceed from the current location to the target station In fact although the points that are stored may contain station and offset descriptions the data stored to the raw file pays no attention to the centerline information The station and offset on the screen act only as a check on your current location The direction of taking the sections L to R or R to L is important and is set by specifying Chainage Direction Unlike with the SCT format method pressing Menu to exit does not store the data but instead the data is automatically stored as p42
199. also found on the EQUIP tab e Instrument Icon This takes you to the standard Instrument Setup dialog Log Raw GPS This command allows you to log static data to the receiver or a data card depending on instrument type for use with post processing software Post Processing Logging Static Data for NovAtel Sokkia Radian Sokkia Radian IS Go to the SURVEY tab and select the Log Static Data button You will see a screen with three buttons see the figure below or an error message stating that the data collector could not connect to the receiver If you receive an error message check connections and the data card Radian Setup File Log Raw Data File Manager If you want to change the groups you already have on the device select Group Editor It will take up to five seconds for a dialog with group information to p292 appear This dialog box will be covered later as it is only necessary for post processing if you have no groups Tap on the Log Raw Data button to start logging raw data From this point you can choose the File Manager button to see what files are on the receiver s card You can delete files here if memory is low More information on the File Manager dialog will be covered later The Log Raw Data dialog contains a list of groups or a message that no groups were found three buttons and a place to enter a file name In order to continue select a group enter a file name and tap Use Selected Group
200. ame location change only the base antenna height in Configure Base if applicable then continue to work You must have at least 1 point in the file which initiates the RW5 raw file for the GPS localization to be auto recalled With this option disabled you would have to go to Localization within the Equip menu and Load the stored localization dat file Even with the option turned on you can always move to a new job and create or load another localization file The localization file dat file is recalled as long as there is at least one coordinate point in the job p50 Use Code Table for Descriptions This feature will cause the codes in the feature code list to appear as selectable options when storing points When enabled Configure Reading is set to Ht Desc Prompt on Save If the code table includes FL EP IP and LP for example these appear within the Store Point routine Store Point Point ID Rod Height 1187 6 562 Ne S960 0526 E 20060 5055 g A083 HRMS 0 039 VRMS 0 064 POOP 3 200 Point Description Use Control File The control file is used for selecting and using points that don t exist in your current working file Select File You need to select a file for the control file The chosen file appears and will remain as the default control file even when the control file option is disabled in which case it is grayed out Control files remain associated with active coordinate files General
201. amed Predefl csl in the SurvStar directory on the data collector If this file is not found please re install SurvCE NTF France This system requires that you have the file named Predefl csl in the SurvStar directory on the data collector If this file is not found please re install SurvCE NTF is an approx imation of the NTF GR3DF97A grid transformation NTF GR3DF97A This system is a grid transformation that requires the files Predefl csl and gr3df97a bin to be in the SurvStar directory on the data collector The Predefl csl file is part of the default installation You will need to use Data Transfer to copy the gr3df97a bin file from your CD to your data collector OSTN02 UK This system is a grid transformation that requires the files Predefl csl ostn02_x bin and ostn02_y bin The Predefl csl file is part of the default installation You will need to use Data Transfer to copy the ostn02_x bin and ostn02_y bin files from your CD to your data collector RD2000 This is the RD NAP transformation for the Netherlands This system is a grid transformation that requires the file Predefl cs X2C grd and Y2C grd The Predefl csl file is part of the default installation You will need to use Data Transfer to copy the X2C grd and Y2C grd files from your CD to your data collector Denmark 34 Used for all cadastral mapping and for most techni
202. an In SurvCE s Monitor SkyPlot command located on the Equip tab the Sat Info screen displays the Russian satellites numbered 45 and up and the U S satellites numbered from 1 to 24 e Initialize to Known Point Use this option to speed up the initialization process Post Processing All Topcon GPS receivers can be used for post processing and will store raw GPS data on the on board RAM in the receiver The post processing can be activated by the Log Static Data command found in the Survey menu of SurvCE On every receiver you can also activate logging purely through hardware by holding down the FN key watch the light turn orange to green then release To turn off by hardware press FN until the light turns off Since SurvCE will prompt for antenna height type and other parameters it is recommended that software be used to initiate logging Topcon logging files typically start off with the word Log followed by the date and are post processed using Topcon Tools Topcon Tools will output a Rinex ASCII file of the logging data for use with programs such as NGS s OPUS GPS Trimble Trimble 4000 GPS The Trimble GPS 4000 is an older series of GPS receiver The panel on the receiver itself can be used on the Trimble 4000 to configure for RTK There is no Configure Base or Configure Rover in SurvCE for the Trimble 4000 p605 Trimble 4000 Utilities Re Solve Position Re Solve w Power Cycle Factory Restart Clear All RAM
203. and XML CRD2 XML This command allows you to export points from SurvCE to LandXML format CRD Points to LandXML Current CRD File C SurvCEDemoSpecial Data SurvCeE crd Select Existing File Current LandxML File Mone Select File LandXML Export Chain File to LandXML CHAINXML This command allows you to export all the polylines from the current drawing created using Feature Codes as LandXML chain objects into a LandXML file For example if you made strictly 3D polylines for break lines using descriptions such as EP for edge of pavement or DL for ditch line then the 3D polylines can be exported as a LandXML chain file and used as break lines for contouring in other CAD programs The combination of points and break lines can lead to optimal contouring Most CAD packages will import linework using the DXF file approach but many now recognize linework in LandXML Chain file format SHP File Import Shape File ISHP e g from ESRD This command allows you to import entities and also the associated attributes p443 values from a SHP file The routine displays Import from SHP dialog box If the SHP file has POINT or POINTZ type the entities will be stored into a CRD file In the cases of an ARC ARCZ POLYGON or POLYGONZ SHP type the entities will be stored into the current drawing The attribute values will be stored into a vtt file The routine requires a feature code name from the user which will be used
204. and press Enter or Store to save it Inverse This command reports the bearing and horizontal distance between any two user specified points that are contained within the current job If under Units in Job Settings Angle is set to Azimuth then inverse will display azimuths instead of bearings You can override the display settings in Job Settings by choosing p313 between Bearing Brg N E or Brg E N North Azimuth NAz N E NAz E N and South Azimuth SAz N E or SAz E N at the bottom right of the Inverse screen Inverse can be run in either 2D or 3D mode as selected at the top of the screen In 2D mode the program displays only the bearing and distance between the two points As many as four inverses can be viewed at once as shown below Point Inverse O20 20 fy x Ptl001 W9908 6459 E20026 3177 291 4084 CP Azi 131949 38 HDist 59 2885 Pti002 N9869 10 2 E200 70 4970 299 3703 F2 F Azi 24592708 HDist 29 1741 PTLOOS W9856 9569 E20043 93968 296 6101 F1 Azi 245 36 44 HDist 22 6690 PT1004 N9847 6206 E20023 3133 294 6663 Fi Azi 244 45 17 HDist 17 6720 PTLOOS N9840 0896 E20007 3294 293 3892 Fl a amp UL Next Point 4 isplay INAZ KE In 3D mode the report also displays the slope distance elevation difference slope in percent and slope as a ratio between each point The Northing Easting Elevation and description of the specified points are also shown p314 Point Invers
205. angle information the program displays the current mode as an extra confirmation at the bottom of the screen Hitting Enter from the last entry line or tapping Calculate or entering a C for calculate will solve for the coordinates and display them at the bottom of the screen Hitting Enter again tapping Store or entering S will store the points Before storing you can also tap the Map icon to see the location of the calculated point in reference to the occupied point and backsight point s MAP VIEW Click Back to return You always have the option to enter new angle and distance information Calculate check the Map then Store as desired Point in Direction offers the flexibility to check point locations graphically prior to storing FI Off If El Off is clicked on for Elevation mode a check screen is activated that allows you to see the calculated elevation and potentially override it with a new elevation This option is useful in combination with p342 Horizontal Distance for calculating points at a known distance and fixed elevation This screen also allows you to offset the point perpendicular to the computed traverse leg Enter positive for right and negative for left Elevation Offset Pt ID Northing Easting Offset Elevation Set El to Desc 1211 9572 8796 20207 1389 101 9700 101 9700 vale p343 ROAD This chapter provides information on using the commands from t
206. appears the software will continue to configure the rover This message should not affect the operation of the rover There are three sets of three LED s on the front panel of the Navcom receiver The GPS lights indicate the quality of the receiver s GPS position reading One or more base lights will be on if the receiver is acting as a base These lights will also indicate the RTK message type being broadcast When functioning as a rover all base lights should be off The number of link lights indicates the strength of the signal the receiver is getting from a base Blinking link lights or no link lights indicates that a base has not been found For a full description of the meanings of these LED s read below and also consult your Navcom User s Manual Navcom Receiver LED Lights NavCom receivers have three groups of LED lights labeled LINK BASE and GPS Each group contains a green amber and red light They are very useful for quickly understanding what state the receiver is in GPS LED Lights Whatever GPS LED lights are on they blink at the rate of position calculation 1Hz 5Hz etc If the red LED is on then there are not enough satellites to calculate a position The amber LED blinking by itself indicates that a non differential position is being calculated Blinking green and amber means p588 there is a differential position WAAS DGPS Starfire or RTK Float If the receiver has Starfire capability then when the green LED
207. ars The input data is displayed in a list structure and you have the ability to turn certain measurements on off and recalculate the solution without the necessity of re measurement You can also edit point numbers instrument and rod heights and more here When satisfied with your edits and the solution you can store the results of the resection Since there is redundant data the final calculated coordinate differs slightly from the individual measurements The command reports the calculated coordinate s northing easting and elevation and the difference between the calculated coordinate and the individual solutions as residuals which indicate the quality of the data High residuals suggest a problem with the input data If you select the red X in the Review Resection Screen you are returned to the Read screen in case you want to collect more shots Here in the Read screen you can truly Cancel if that is your intention Shown here is a resection to 2 points using D amp R direct and p264 reverse with angle only in the reverse face Note that even in a 2 point resection a closure calculation is presented Review Resection ON 0 00 11 ON 313 02 21 o o0 08 N 1266471 0007 StDev N 0 0012 E 20605201 9556 StDev E 0 0005 Chosure 33208 Dist RMS 0 001 Ang RMS sec 8 In the Store this Point dialog box shown below you are prompted for the point number and description of the calculated point the occupied station
208. ast and the elevation difference Cut Fill are also displayed The vertical offset input boxes allow for elevation calculations based on the input vertical offset values The vertical offsets can be entered in inches in English units in two forms 10 using the inch designator or 0 10 3 8 for 0 feet 10 and 3 8ths inches The second form requires 3 decimals to be used If Store Carlson Cutsheet Data in Note File has been enabled the vertical offset s specified will be recorded in the not file for the job If under Set Cutsheet Format in the Stakeout section of Job Settings a Set Pt Cutsheet Format has been established with a named file for storage then cut and fill data will be saved to a cutsheet ASCII file If using GPS the HRMS VRMS and PDOP values are also displayed Fields for Point number and point description input are also displayed If for example you choose not to store a staked point but only report the design point design elevation surveyed elevation and the cut and fill you could produce a simple cutsheet report as shown below One vertical offset per shot was recorded 10 The cutsheet can be reviewed from within the active stakeout screen using Alt V You can also click on the helmet and go to V iew Data when actively staking out and you will be returned to the stakeout screen Cutsheet data is always stored to the raw file so if you forgot to store the cutsheet information you could create a new point cutsheet file an
209. ated dat file in a dialog similar to below Loc alization File EE oe 9 Backup B csers MoDOT cl lac RemoteElevation loc Survie loc SurvCe loc e Read From File Reads a previously saved base position file All of the other methods of setting up the base let you save the base position at the end of setup If you return to a site set up the base in exactly the same position use p139 Read From File to use the same base position and you don t have to re align the rover the old alignment is still valid This option recalls a reference file in a dialog similar to that above Then you will receive the standard prompting Base Configuration Latitude N 42 921 41 79992 Longitude W 71 09 53 45797 Ellipsoid Hgt 35 451 Continue with Base Setup This is followed by the Reference Station ID prompt showing the default ID The new base antenna height which will change with each new set up is entered back at the first set of dialogs A message is displayed after successful configuration from a file Only if you set the base antenna on the same horizontal and vertical position each day would the base antenna height remain fixed Ifthe base antenna height and x y position is the same from day to day then you do not need to do GPS Base each day You would simply power up the base power up the rover and start workin
210. ated before entering the new name and selecting OK You can also create a new folder for this new file name Following job creation you will be asked to enter in Job Attribute information This feature lets you set up prompting for each new job with job related attributes like Client Jurisdiction Weather Conditions and the like This is discussed in detail in the Job Setting section Note If you key in a coordinate file that already exists it will load the file instead of overwriting it with a new file This benefit to this feature is that you cannot accidentally overwrite an existing coordinate file from within Carlson SurvCE J ob Settings New J ob p44 This tab allows you to configure how all new jobs will be created Job Settings Bae System Format Options Stake Prompt for First Pt Prompt for Units i Use Last Job Localization Pt ID 1 Attach Last Control Data Cutsheets North 9000 Manual o East 5000 W Use Template DXF Elev 100 Select File C SurvCE Data Job1 dxf Desc Start Define Job Attributes e Prompt for First Pt This option specifies whether or not SurvCE will prompt you to specify a starting point when starting a new job If enabled you specify the default starting point coordinates in the left column This applies for total station use only e Prompt for Units This option specifies whether or not SurvCE will prompt you to set the units when you start a new jo
211. b e Use Last Job Localization If this feature is enabled each new job will use the previous job s localization file and project scale If this feature is disabled each new job will start out with no localization and a project scale of 1 0 The default value is off e Attach Last Control Data This allows the user to use the same control file on all new jobs With this option off the control file will automatically be deactivated during new job creation e Cutsheets Auto Save by job will automatically create cutsheet files in the last format used for each new job If your job was named Maconl crd then the 3 cutsheet files created would be Macon1 Pt txt for non alignment point only stakeout Macon1 CL txt for stakeout involving alignments and Macon1 SI txt for slope staking Recall Previous will allow the user to use the same cutsheets on all new jobs With Manual the control file will automatically be deactivated during new job creation and you will need to create cutsheet files within the Stake tab of Job Settings p45 e Use Template DXF This allows users to create an empty DXF file that contains all of the layers and colors that will be used and displayed in the field The advantage of this is in particular with use of Feature Codes for linework If you designate code 201 for example as a pavement edge in the layer BitPav you could make a blank DXF drawing with BitPav layer created set to color blue Then using that te
212. b and one for GPS located on the GPS tab Calculate This routine will calculate the combined factor based on entered coordinates The coordinates must fall within the selected grid system and the elevation must be orthometric p168 Calculate Scale Point ID Northing rs moo Easting Elevation GPS Tab The GPS tab is where you define the RTK methods geoid file and GPS scale factor Localization System TS EJ Points By Helmert RETE Method Geoid File None Scale Factor 1 QO0O000000000 Fead GPS e RTK Method Transformation Types The transformation can be by plane similarity rigid body or seven parameter Helmert methods Plane Similarity p169 and Rigid Body both use a best fit least squares transform ation The difference is that the rigid body method does a transformation with a translation and rotation without scale The plane similarity does a rotation translation and scale These two methods only apply when two or more points are held horizontally in the points tab The Helmert method requires the user to enter the seven parameters on the BY HELMERT tab Localization System TS GPS Points dx 7 mo rotx oO s d ir oo m rot oO de oO mo rotz lio Scale pom Oo Calculate from Points Output to Text File RTK Method North Type This option applies to the rotation when using one point localization For this al
213. bed MAP YIEY Inverse Traverse Side Shot Polylines to Points terpolate Po s Divide Along Entity Calculator Interval Along Entity Area Slope Report Bearing amp 3D Distance Inverse I Inverse command Inverses and presents the bearing and distance between point numbers It has the added benefit that the previous point inversed becom es the backsight and the current point inversed becomes the occupied point allowing you to sequence directly into the Traverse or Sideshot commands Use angle code 7 to turn an angle right from the backsight to the foresight Inverse Tr Ss Pick point or point ID Crd OF BS Traverse T also TR Similar to the Sideshot command the Traverse command will move up to the last point traversed holding the previous occupied points as the backsight Ex it with Esc Sideshot SS also S This allows for sideshots from any point that is occupied by use of the inverse command For ex ample if you inverse from 126 to 150 you are on 150 and backsighting 126 Then at the prompt Cmd Inverse Tr Ss Pick point or point No You can enter S for Sideshot The first prompt is the Angle Bearing Code Sideshot eXit I Tr H Angle BC 1 7 lt 7 gt which can be any p473 of the following 1 NE 0 through 90 if degrees 0 through 100 if gons grads 2 SE same as above 3 SW same as above 4 NW same as above 5 Azimuth 360 circle if degrees 400 circle if gons grads
214. board Input This feature allows you to manually enter or edit coordinates in the current job file or the current control file The option to edit points in the control file only appears if Use Control File is enabled in Job Settings There are fields for Point ID Northing Easting Elevation and Description If adding a point to an existing job SurvCE displays a point ID one greater than the highest in the file If starting with a new job the point ID will default to 1 p312 Enter and Edit Coordinates Type CRD Alphanumeric Paint ID ee Northing 10000 0000 ft Easting 20000 0000 ft Elevation 100 0000 ft Description TPO Prey Next Store Delete e Previous and Next These buttons move back and forth through the coordinate file skipping points with zero coordinates The Next button will not store the current data to the file e Store This writes the entered data to the file and advances the display to the next point If you are editing an existing point when you press Store SurvCE will warn you that the point number has already been used You then have a choice to overwrite this point number or use a new number Delete The Delete button allows the user to delete a point or range of points from the file If you want to create a duplicate point simply change the point number and press Enter or Store to save it If you want a duplicate point with a different elevation change the point ID and elevation
215. by Direction option in Point Store key in the following p502 Point ID Point ID e g 1 2 To add or subtract a value from the computed azimuth key in the following Point ID PointID Angle e g 1 2 90 Or Point ID Point ID Angle e g 1 2 90 Tutorial 3 Performing a Compass Rule Adjustment In the example below as shown in the next figure the traverse was performed by occupying point 1 located at the NW corner of the block The initial backsight was established by azimuth measured and stored as point 2 shown NW along the hanging leg Angles and distances were measured in a clockwise direction Point numbers 6 and 1 are at the same location and point numbers 7 and 2 are at the same location This method allows for the closing of the angles and the measurement of all traverse legs SS TRAV MENU SNallollelle lz i Desc ez RI EA SD Process Raw File Select Process Raw File from the COGO tab as shown below in this figure p503 JOB Co elss Rule Examp ee File Equip Surv Leice Road 1 Keyboard Input 6 Station Store 2 Inverse Transformation 3 Areas 8 Calculator 4 Intersections Jo Process Raw File 5 Point Projection 0 Point in Direction Select Raw File The next figure below shows the standard Windows file selection dialog Select the RWS file you want to process followed by the OK button Raw File OK Cancel psr e EE o BI C SuryCEDemoData
216. by entering the point number of the desired point manually or by selecting the point using the List or Map icon You may also enter coordinates for the scale base point if the base point for scaling is not present in the coordinate file The coordinate of the base point will remain unchanged All other points will scale If the Ignore Elevations toggle is enabled then only the northing and easting values are scaled Note that you can scale your points from base coordinate 0 0 0 by entering a scale factor and answering Yes to the warning screen Raw Data Records The transformation raw data records are expressed as one string per command with the values separated by spaces These records will be recorded to the raw data file for processing purposes so that all Carlson processors will recognize the records and perform the transformation during re processing e TRANSLATE Range Dx Dy Dz Process Zero Z e ROTATE Range Angle Base Y Base X e SCALE Range Scale Base Y Base X Use Z e ALIGN Range From Tol From2 To2 Example CC Translate 8 9 200 50 0 0 CC Rotate 7 33 1234 79613 662 15619 725 p331 CC Scale 7 1 5 79613 662 15619 725 CC Align 8 9 8 69 7 Calculator This command eliminates the need to carry a separate calculator in the field The calculator can be used to do scientific computations standard calculations conversions triangle calculations including angles and curve calculations Standard Calculator Most basic calcula
217. c Set option is available Set Collection Configuration Number of Sets Num Dist Rdgs Obs Order Angle Only in Reverse Face gt Number of Sets This input box allows you to define the number of angle sets that are to be collected to each point An angle set is defined as a direct and reverse reading to the backsight and the foresight 1 e BD FD FR BR If multiple foresights are defined only a single backsight direct and backsight reverse set of readings will be collected for all foresight points Num Dist Rdgs This input box allows you to specify the number of distance measurements that are to be taken during each sighting Obs Order This drop list allows you to specify the order the angles are to be completed The definition for the abbreviations are Backsight Direct BD Backsight Reverse BR Foresight Direct FD and Foresight Reverse FR Since the backsight dialog is the first reading in all cases only the following options are available VY Robotic Set Only available for motorized auto targeting instruments This option will turn all reverse sightings without any assistance from the user The order will be the same as BD FD FR BR v BD FD FR BR v BD BR FD FR v BD FD BR FR v BD BR FR FD p268 Angle Only in Reverse Face This toggle is intended for use with non coaxial instruments Only direct face readings will be measured and all reverse face readings will be for angles only Auto Turn This
218. cal mapping carried out in Denmark System 34 is a two dimensional horizontal coordinate system System 34 is based on the National Geodetic Reference Network and is divided into two different zones one covering Jutland and Fuen and the other covering Sealand The island of Bornholm has its own coordinate system called System 45 Add User Defined To define a new coordinate system go to the Localization under the EQUIP tab You will find the Edit Projection List button under the SYSTEM tab Then select the Add User Defined button Enter a name for your system e g PRVI for Puerto Rico Virgin Islands then select a projection in the example below Lambert Conformal Conic 2SP and enter the appropriate parameters Note that all latitude and longitude values are in decimal degrees and False Northing and False Easting are always presented in meters All entries involving degree must be in decimal degrees based on a 360 circle pl65 New System in 4 System PR Projection la mbert_Contormal_Conic_15P ad Datum __toadrile EoNeweDatin Scale Factor fi False Northing C Meridian 66 4333333 jo m Lat of Origin 17 8333333 False Easting 152400 3048 m New Datum You may select a predefined Ellipsoid or set your own parameters by typing in a new ellipsoid name and entering values for a and 1 f The values for dX dY dZ rot X rot Y rot Z and scale are to WGS84 Define Coordinate S
219. can reset the hardware by following the applicable procedures described in the hardware documentation Color Screens SurvCE 1 21 or greater enables viewing of color Any red green blue or other colored entities in DXF files will retain their color when viewed within SurvCE Points will appear with black point numbers green descriptions and blue elevations Dialogs and prompting will utilize color throughout SurvCE Memory Memory on most CE devices can be allocated for best results We recommend setting Storage Memory to a minimum of 16 000 KB The following discussion is an example for setting that memory An equivalent process should be used for p22 other CE devices as available The SurvCE controller will function better during topo and stakeout with the Storage Memory set to around 18 000 KB Use the following process to check and or change the settings Go to the start menu by simultaneously hitting the Blue Key and Start Choose Settings then Control Panel then double click on System Touch the Memory tab and slide the pointer toward the left which is the Storage Memory side so that Allocated is around 18 000 KB Keep in mind that to upgrade software this setting may need to be changed back so that the Program Memory has more available To change do as above but slide the pointer toward the right which is the Program side so that Allocated is around 18 000 KB This assures that there is enough Program memory s
220. cant impact with one point alignments The zip file containing the Geoid Files GSF Geoid99 or EGM is found on the SurvCE installation CD and a portion of any such file can be specified by size and center point for downloading to the data collector using Carlson X Port or Carlson SurvCom Terrain Ge id 94 He Eo Ug Ellipsoeid How To Use Geoid Files with Carlson SurvCE 1 Download and or install either Carlson X Port or SurvCOM to the desktop computer Download and or install CarlsonGeoidGrids exe to a location on your desktop computer Typically installed to the Program Files Carlson X Port directory If you have Microsoft ActiveSync already installed on your computer make sure that it is not currently occupying the COM port To do this Launch ActiveSync and select Connection Settings from the File menu Remove the check box that refers to the port you intend to use with Carlson X Port Typically COM1 Select OK to exit Connection Settings and close ActiveSync Connect your handheld device to your desktop com puter using a serial cable p172 10 11 12 13 14 Run Carlson SurvCE on the handheld device and select Data Transfer from the FILE tab From within the Data Transfer dialog select the SurvCADD Carlson Civil Carlson Survey Transfer option Leave the data collector waiting for communications as shown by the resulting File Transfer dialog Launch either Carlson X Port or Su
221. careful with this command there is no Undo to restore the arcs though you can im mediately start a new job and re load the last saved DXF file of the drawing Modify Fillet F Similar to AutoCAD s Fillet command It prompts Cmd Fillet Ra Pl eXit First seg 25 00 If you are trying to inscribe a curve at the corner of a polyline you enter the desired radius first at the above prompt Then you choose the P option This leads to the prompt Cmd Fillet Ra Pl eXit Select pl 25 00 Select the polyline near the vertex where you want the curve to go This completes the process If you wish to change the radius enter R If you want to fillet the corner of 2 distinct polylines then just pick them as prompted do not do the P for Polyline option This command will only work with 2D polylines completed with the command 2DP or imported from a DXF file as 2D polylines or converted from 3D using the command C2D p466 MAP VIEW HE Fillet Ra Pliexit First seg 15 00 Crd Layer PNTELEW 100 ft E x FILE YIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Cmd Layer PNTELEW See the above two figures Because in the top figure from to 2 to 3 was one continuous polyline after the radius was set at 15 P was entered to set up the one pick approach for polylines leading to the completed fillet command and the result as shown in the bottom figure Now you can do Cogo Interpolate Points Polylines to Points P2P and solve for the po
222. cause they will degrade the precision of the work if backsights are not precisely measured with correct target heights Reverse Face Angles Only When taking Face 1 and Face 2 foresights or when doing Set Collection the program will use the distance from the direct reading only but will use the horizontal and vertical angles from both the direct and reverse face readings This setting 1s repeated and displayed within Configure in Set Collection Any change in either location controls the setting Note that in Manual Total Station you will be prompted for reverse face distance but the entry will not be used When using robotic total stations which do not take distance measurements in reverse face setting Reverse Face Angles Only is necessary to use motorized direct and reverse readings Reverse Face Auto Turn This option is for motorized instruments only and when enabled will automatically turn the instrument to the reverse face p161 e Reverse Face Auto Read This option will immediately take a reading after the instrument has turned to the reverse face You must make sure that the auto targeting option is on Localization This command allows you to define the project coordinate system geoid usage and scale factors as well as align on a local coordinate system for GPS Further discussions on localization are found in Tutorial 2 near the end of the manual System Tab Click Edit Projection List to add to the list and to c
223. cessing You can process or draw your total station traverse report out the Direct Reverse measurements Process GPS and Review and Edit the RW5 file Note that for all processing where new coordinates are calculated beginning with SurvCE 2 0 upon exit the program will prompt you whether or not to store the newly calculated points into the coordinate file This provides the flexibility to experiment with different processing settings and options without impacting the actual stored coordinates until you deliberately choose to do so Total Station Adjustments If you wish to adjust or draw a total station traverse you would choose any of the following Process No Adjust Angle Balance Transit Compass Crandall or Draw Traverse Lines All of these commands have the same four tab menu system outlined below p68 Process Raw File Cancel eee Proj Redundancies Other Scale 1 00000000 Apply Curvature Refraction starting Point 15 Ending Point 26 Total Station Tab Reduce to Grid Coordinates will perform a ground to grid calculation based on your GPS projection used viewable in the projection tab The Scale setting will multiply all distance measurements by the entered scale factor Apply Curvature and Refraction will compute curvature and refraction distinctly on all raw measurements and adjust accordingly p69 Process Raw File Cancel Total Station amp Redundancies Other Projection
224. ch location is included in the section the software will automatically determine the pivot point at the next interior section point for slope staking purposes The design slope ratio will be determined by the last two points in the section e Always Zoom All This zooms the preview window automatically to fit the extents of the current section e Zoom In Out This determines the zoom increment of the preview window e Vertical Scale This allows the user to exaggerate the scale vertically e Degree of Curvature This allows the user to define the value of the base value used to define the degree of curvature 100 ft it is the default value used for US Feet or US International Feet e Use Railroad Type Curves This allows the user to define the use of railroad definition for the curves present within the alignment used inside the Stakeout Line Arc routine Cutsheets There can be as many as three cutsheet files active at one time one for point staking cutsheets one for centerline staking cutsheets and one for slope stake cutsheets All three cutsheet files can be given distinct names and any of the three can be turned on or off for purposes of storing It is even possible to have a fourth named cutsheet file if cutsheets are turned on within Cross Section Survey in the Roading menu And finally if cutsheets are reported from the raw file a distinct new name can be assigned prior to recalling the raw file and creating the cutsheet file Al
225. cific Crest radios These must be set to 38 400 baud rate TOPCON can also use Spread Spectrum radios which work at 115 200 baud rate The HiperLite GPS uses Spread Spectrum radios running at 57 600 baud The standard Hiper uses Pacific Crest PDL Radio Baud This defines the over the air baud rate that the radio will use In many cases the user must know what the radio expects this setting to be based on the radio s firmware or pre programming RTK Message Type You must select the RTK message type that you wish to broadcast Configure Rover Station Receiver Type You must select the receiver type e g Hiper Lite Antenna Type You must select the Antenna Type e g Hiper Lite Antenna Height This is entered as a vertical or slant height in the job units The Vertical option is measured from the tip of the pole to the unit s ARP For the Hiper series GPS units this is the bottom of the unit where the pole screws in Vertical is typically used for fixed height poles and tripods For the Hiper series the Slant option is measured from the point on the ground to the bottom edge of the square housing This point is approx imately 30 50mm higher than the ARP and is located at the bottom edge of the receiver s metal housing and is marked by a small arrow For detailed information on antenna heights please see http www ngs noaa gov ANTCAL Elevation Mask This value establishes the cutoff value above the horizon in degrees where
226. coordinates are shown at the bottom and can be updated with the Read GPS button or you can choose to have the GPS position read automatically before each point store by choosing Settings and enabling Auto GPS Update When all p218 necessary data has been entered you ll be able to store by clicking Store or preview the point you re storing by clicking Map or Results Before you can begin using the Laser offset feature you must configure the laser either by clicking Settings or by selecting Peripherals from SurvCE s main menu Under the peripherals menu you will have to activate your laser select your laser type and choose a COM port It is also recommended that you deactivate all other peripherals except GPS while using the laser For more details on laser setup see the Peripherals section of this manual Once you have activated a laser you may click Read Laser to begin collecting data from the laser In order to expedite the data collection process the methodology for reading an offset from the laser has been optimized so that you do not need to touch your data collector between shots This option can be enabled by selecting Multiread Laser If you are a first time user it is recommended that you disable this option If Multiread Laser is disabled pressing Read Laser will pop up a dialog asking you to trigger the laser as shown below From here you can either cancel or fire the laser to record the shot If Multiread Laser is en
227. creens When Power Search is pressed the total station will typically find the prism in 10 seconds regardless of the direction it is initially pointed If it has found one prism and you hit Power Search again it will leave that prism and find the next one If you have only two prisms on the job foresight and backsight it will conveniently rotate from the foresight to the backsight and back again each time it 1s pressed Work Area This will define a limiting area for searching This can speed up both the standard ATR Search and the PowerSearch The Work area angle ranges apply to both searches The Show button will show the two positions of the search window first by moving immediately to Position 1 Y ou will be prompted to press OK to see Position 2 Having defined a window of searching Center will move that window to a new center position Y ou will be prompted to Sight on Centered Position and Press OK The Define button prompts you to shoot the lower left and upper right positions which are then displayed above under Work Area If the Work Area is set to start at 0 0000 horizontal for example searching would send the instrument to the backsight point Tracking and Reflectorless The upper left of the screen controls the ATR Search and the upper right controls the PowerSearch The Work area angle ranges apply to both searches The Show button will show the two positions of the search window first by moving immed
228. d in the field If instead you wish to obtain the offset vector from two points then disable Read Inst and enter the two point numbers The offset entered will extend the vector from point P2 in the direction of P1 to P2 The vector offset will also impact the elevation that is calculated This might be used to calculate a point at the top of a cliff for example where you stand above the cliff top pick up two points on the slope to the cliff edge and estimate the distance to the cliff face from the second point The offset by two points routine will write an SS record in the RW5 file raw file which enables re processing e Settings The Settings tab appears with robotic total stations running remotely from the prsim and permits reading the target height from a laser and accesses the entire range of laser devices found in the Peripherals menu option under Equip Store Points GPS Store Points 1s the principal data collection routine for GPS equipment Store p213 Points interacts with numerous settings including the feature codes and will draw line work The Store Points screen in GPS shows the cursor moving on the screen in real time Shots can be taken anytime by pressing Enter The screen will pan automatically so you are always in view as you move Points will plot on the screen as shots are taken In GPS mode Enter has only one function Read amp Store The after shot antenna height and description prom
229. d select Cutsheets from Raw File Edit CutSheet File SubdivPt txt DesignPt_ DesignEL _ StakeEL_ aut 7 EE 843 31 2 0 83 842 48 846 39 13 13 0 83 41 64 46 39 5 0 83 gt Insert Up Down Special Delete Pressing OK which optionally will Store Point if enabled will return to the p227 Stakeout Points dialog to select the next point for staking If the Use Control File option is set under the Job Settings you have the option of staking control file points If you enter in a point number to store that is the same as a point number in the control file the point in the control file will remain unchanged It will only modify the point in the current coordinate file If the point being stored is the same as one in the current job file the Point Protect dialog box appears stating that the point you chose is already used The next available point number is listed with the option to overwrite the current point or use the new number Stake Line Arc This command opens a secondary dialog where you can choose between Define Line Define Alignments Define Arc 3 points and Define Arc PC PT Value Define Line is documented below Stake Line Arc Define Line Define Alignments Define Arc 3 Points Define Arc PC PT value Define Line This command allows you to stakeout to a line between two points by guiding you to the point with a series of commands and directions This option is for
230. d stakeout within the left to right range of the sections on station or at interpolated stations The Input Edit Section File routine begins by prompting for a cross section file name If you wish to start a new cross section file just enter a new name Section List mere Se Jc SuryvCEDemoSpecial Data Name Satie Sete If you choose to select an existing cross section file such as DEMO sct after selecting the file you will see the Section List dialog p376 Section List DEMO Station 0 50 000 1 00 000 1 50 000 5327 2 2 00 000 2 50 000 2 90 588 3 00 000 lt i gt Add Ee Edit Remove From this dialog you can Add stations Edit existing stations Remove stations Load entire new cross section files Save As to save your changes to the current loaded file or to a new cross section file and Clear the list of stations not recommended unless you want to start from scratch Select Edit to review a Station Edit Station 13 50 000 In this dialog you can Add Edit Remove Rearrange or Clear existing offsets p377 and elevations Note that cross section offsets are negative for left of centerline and positive for right of centerline and can have descriptions such as SH EOP CL Ditch 21 22 23 etc These descriptions where they exist are potentially useful for description based interpolation between stations as applied in Stake Road If y
231. d the rover stops receiving RTK corrections from the base station the receiver automatically and seamlessly transitions to RTK Extend mode by employing the Starfire signal Using RTK Extend the receiver is able to compute an RTK equivalent position for up to 15 minutes If the receiver remains in RTK extend mode for more than 15 p616 minutes the position solution will slowly degrade to the typical 10cm accuracy of the Starfire system Once the communication link is restored the rover automatically switches back to the standard RTK solution The break in communications and the seamless mode transition of RTK Extend is designed to go unnoticed by the user with the exception of the mode flag indicating the receiver is operating in the Starfire aided RTK Extend mode rather than standard RTK How it Works To enable the RTK Extend process the base station must compute a Starfire solution and constantly difference this position against the known RTK base station position This difference information is transmitted to the rover as an additional RTK message The difference results from two different sources 1 The Starfire system inherently operates on the ITRF coordinate system and the solution will differ for the known base station position if it was entered using a different coordinate system 2 Because RTK and Starfire use different techniques to compute a position solution at any given time there will be a few centimeters difference between t
232. d to compensate for all satellite based errors by continuously tracking the GPS satellites and calculating the clock and orbit errors in real time These errors affect all GPS receivers but are removed by applying the Starfire corrections Correcting for the remaining error created by the GPS receiver involves a different process that must be done by the receiver itself The process of eliminating these errors involves smoothing the code measurements for up to an hour during which time sufficient satellite geometry changes occur allowing these errors to be estimated This process is called convergence or p619 pull in Q What is Starfire QuickStart A Navcom offers the unique feature called QuickStart where an accurately known ITRFOO position can be used to initialize Starfire navigation and eliminate the convergence period This is typically a position previously surveyed and converted to ITRFOO prior to initialization It can also be a position obtained from the Starfire receiver while in steady state or fully converged navigation For example vehicular installations can be initialized using the last position from when it was parked and powered down Employing QuickStart from a position that is not geodetic truth will be followed by a longer term convergence to geodetic truth so entering false coordinates into this function is not a recommended approach Note RTK Extend is an automated extension of QuickStart GPS Uti
233. de Angle Angle Side Angle Side Side Side Angle Triangle calculator Side Side Side T Sidetas 21 1200 side B Clear 15 8400 Side C Results 26 4000 View Triangle Select 3 points fram After choosing a mode simply apply the values to the appropriate blank and hit Solve Points from your current job can be selected to fill out the blanks as well The points can be selected from the screen or from the point list by picking the appropriate button icon After the calculations have been performed you will see the Clear Results and View Triangle buttons Clear will clear the entry fields Results will show the results dialog again View Triangle will draw the triangle on the screen connecting the points chosen for the calculation The triangle calculator using 3 points is a convenient way to calculate the interior angle between 3 points For example if you were setup on 1 backsighting 10 and turned a 90 degree angle to 21 then the triangle defined by 10 to 1 to 21 would indicate a 90 degree angle at point 1 p337 Triangle Solution Side A 10 21 109 0874 Side B 10 1 61 6447 Side C 1 21 90 0000 Angle a 1 90 00 00 Angle b 21 Curve Calculator The figure below shows the Curve calculator Simply use the pull down at the upper left to select the desired method of curve calculation Radius Delta Angle Radius Chord Length Radius Arc Length Deg of Crv Delta Angle Deg of Crv Chord Lengt
234. default to USB Go to Start on Allegro blue key and Start button then Settings and open the Control Panel Next choose the Communications icon then PC Connection Choose COM at a high baud rate such as 57 600 baud This will download programs and files at a high rate of speed On the Allegro use PC Link to connect to PC with ActiveSync On the Panasonic Toughbook do Start Run and in the Open window type in autosync go autosync then spacebar then minus go Then go to Start then Settings and open the Control Panel Choose the Communications icon then PC Connection Change Connection to Serial Port 115K Make sure Enable direct connections to the desktop computer is checked p15 Note When using SurvCE s Data Transfer option you will need to disable Serial Port Connection uncheck Allow Serial Cable This is done in the Connection Settings in ActiveSync This option must be enabled again in order to use ActiveSync Installing SurvCE Before you install Carlson SurvCE close all running applications on the mobile device 1 Connect the mobile device to the desktop PC and ensure that the ActiveSync connection is made 2 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive on the desktop PC If Autorun is enabled the startup program begins The startup program lets you choose the version of SurvCE to install To start the installation process without using Autorun choose Run from the Windows Start Menu Enter the CD R
235. diting GIS Information on Points using List Points Input Edit GIS Data only works creating reviewing or editing GIS information on Arcs or Polygons To create review or edit GIS information on points use List Points shown below under File 3 List Points p527 JOB VA_Beach i i MAP gt Sury COGO Road 1 Job 6 Data Transfer 2 Job Settings 2000 00 3011 29 2016 16 4992 50 4973 00 PS voll 2014 01 5032 35 500 000 096 22 095 81 407 749 105 000 14 127 104 145 995 501 996 907 EPI CLO EPZ EPZ Highlight point 4 and select Edit see figure immediately above Point 4 is the only Surveyed number with GIS data stored to the point The Edit Point pop up box appears and can be seen in the next figure below To create review or edit GIS information select Input Edit Attributes See Figure 9 32 Note At the UP box on top the down arrow can be selected and one or more GIS field codes could attach GIS data to this same point Points Arcs or p528 Polygons can all have one or more GIS field codes attached to these entities OK Cancel pointiD 4 EditNotes Northing 5062 2643 ft Easting 5016 6837 ft Elevation 497 7491 ft Description WP Input Edit Atr butes Up EdittID 4 gt Wtility Pole Char UTILITY POLE NUMBER 1014 Char HEIGHT 35 5 Char cond Good Char Comments JSC Survey Manual Total Station Ext Previous Delete save E
236. during stakeout routines Store Data Note File This option specifies whether or not to store the stakeout data in the note file NOT for the current job At the end of staking out a point there is an option to store the staked coordinates in the current job Note NOT files are associated with points so you must store the point to also store the cutsheet note This additional data includes the target coordinates for reference Keep in mind that the cut and fill data is also stored in the raw file You can also store an ASCII cutsheet file using the button at the bottom of the dialog so storing into the note file is somewhat redundant SurvCE does not show the cutsheet note within List Points notes turned on since this feature only shows notes that begin with Note The one advantage of the note file is that notes are viewable in association with points using Carlson Software office products such as Carlson SurvCadd Carlson Survey or Carlson Survey Desktop See command Cutsheet Report option Note File Control File Points have Priority for Stakeout This option which applies to both total stations and GPS will give priority to the control file point during stakeout when the point requested exists in both the current file and the control file p54 Note Use this option with care You may not realize that this option is set and will discover that directions to your expected stakeout point of 10 are really based on a point 10 f
237. e Monitor SkyPlot GPS The Monitor Skyplot command allows you to review local position and quality of data e Quality Under the QUALITY tab you monitor the status and number of satellites You can also see values for horizontal and vertical RMS values as well as HDOP VDOP PDOP TDOP and GDOP values Some instruments refer to RMS values as CEP and SEP For the CSI DGPS and the Sokkia Axis 3 receivers using OmniStar the BER value will be shown in order to give indication of the strength of corrections received When set to CSI DGPS the p180 age of corrections is also displayed The number of satellites SATS is shown Monitor Skyplot TELE Position SATView SATInfo Status FIXED Satellites 5 HAMS 0 006 YRMS 0 072 HOOP 2 90 YDOP 3 80 POOP 3 20 TDOP 2 00 GOOF CN The Status is shown as either AUTONOMOUS No radio communication between base and rover DGPS Corrections from a differental sources such as WAAS or SBAS FLOAT Communication has been established but ambiguities have not been resolved FIXED Position has been resolved e Position Under the POSITION tab you see the current position given in latitude longitude ellipsoid elevation geoid separation and orthometric elevation You will also see the local grid coordinates here p181 Monitor Skyplot Quality DA SA Tview SATInfo Latitude N 38 20 37 87670 Longitude Wl 92 05 S4 13302 Ellipsoid
238. e 20 O20 Ry x PtlO01 W9908 6459 E20026 3177 291 4084 CPA Azi 131 949 38 HDist 59 2885 SDist 59 8207 ED 7 9619 Slope 13 43 7 45 1 PTLOUO2 N9869 1072 E200 0 49 0 299 3703 F2 F Azi 245 7 08 HDist 29 1741 SDist 29 3044 EDI 2 7602 Slope 9 46 10 57 1 Pt1003 W9856 9869 E20043 9598 296 6101 F1 A D Next Point 4l isplay NAZ NE M To run the inverse routine enter the first point number at the bottom you may also select from a point list or select from the map screen Press Enter and then enter the second point and press Enter again If a control file is specified in Job Settings then when you run inverse you can choose the List icon at the bottom center of the screen and then select points from the control file In this way you can inverse between points in your current file and your control file as needed If under Units in Job Settings Angle Unit is set to Grads Gons then the Inverse command will default to the 400 circle and will display North azimuths e Clear Dialog Use this icon to clear the results window Areas This command calculates the area of a closed figure that 1s defined internally by user entered point numbers contained within the current job or by a polyline picked from the screen p315 Area Calculation Starting Paint or Range Select polyline Leave Blank to End You may specify individual point numbers or type in a range of point number
239. e e g Market txt can always be edited using Notepad or any text editor to accomplish the change e Down Up Items in the list can be moved up and down to change their order For example if you prefer Fill before Cut in the report just move Cut down below Fill e Cutsheet from Raw SurvCE automatically stores cutsheet data and header information to the raw file for the job You can capture and report the cutsheet information directly from the raw file Before doing this it is recommended that you start a new cutsheet file configure the header lines and order of information as desired then run Cutsheet from Raw Edit File Select this option to edit and review the cutsheet file Shown below is a point cutsheet file as viewed in the Edit File option Notice that the vertical bars of the spreadsheet can be moved left and right to condense the display and who more of the header lines Just pick them in the title line and move them The Cutsheet editor also includes the ability to insert and delete lines If you insert a line and enter a Design Elevation and a Stake Elevation the program will compute the cut or fill Using the Special button you can increase or decrease the Pt ID Design Elevation or Stake Elevation by any desired amount and the cut or fill will be computed Do not use the Special button to directly modify the cut or fill p62 Edit CutSheet File CS_PT1 txt Design Pt ID Stoke Pt ID Delta X_ Delta List Po
240. e centerline and enter these new coordinates into the Point Projection dialog From there you can store or stakeout the intersect points e Stake This command will allow you to stakeout the displayed coordinates typically used to stakeout the intersect points e Store Pressing Store after Read stores the offset coordinate Store after Intersect is selected stores the coordinates for the intersect point on the centerline perpendicular from the offset point Store after entering coordinates or a point number for the offset point without selecting Intersect p326 will simply store the offset point coordinates again as a new point number Store is most often used to save the calculated intersect points to the coordinate file Pressing Store will save an SP store point record in the raw file and a note record will indicate that the point was calculated within Point Projection Station Store Station Store is a pure calculation routine that will create points based on a station and offset from an alignment The alignment may be defined as a centerline a 3 point arc an arc defined by a PC Radius and PT a selected polyline or a sequence of points The user may also assign an elevation to the calculated point Station Store might be used to enter elevations of pipe culverts for ex ample where inlets and outlets are located at distinct stations offsets and elevations Then the two calculated points at the inlet and outlet can be used wi
241. e desired point number or pressing the Point List icon and selecting the desired point Pressing the Map icon will allow for selection of the desired point directly from the screen Note that when selecting a point from the screen if the desired point cannot be determined from the picked point on the screen a listing of the nearest points to the desired location will appear allowing for verification of the targeted point If the list appears select the desired point from the list by clicking on it Define the bearing from the first point by typing in the bearing or by specifying two point IDs Repeat the procedures for defining the bearing from the second p318 point Bearings can be entered in three forms e SE40 5945 becomes S40d59 45 E S40 5945E becomes S40d59 45 E 240 5945 becomes S40d59 45 E INTERSECT H amp E 70 ft Once data entry is complete press the OK button The calculated point will appear on the screen with the input data detailed at the bottom of the screen Store Modify review and revise and RESULTS Options are located on the right side of the Map screen p319 Results Pt 1064 N 9562 5833 E 19983 0123 1064 4 N45 O0 00 15 6518 A N 9673 6508 E 19973 9445 A 1084 WN45 O0 00 E 63 1615 Pt 1084 N 9918 3127 E 20018 6067 Save Use this icon to save a report of the inverse The results screen will display the coordinates of the base points the inverse bearing the distance
242. e followed by the Hgt Desc Prompt on save This is the most cautious designation of the use of the Enter key for taking shots Note below that after the read the point is displayed with a question mark and the raw data is displayed It is saved only when Enter is pressed again or S is pressed or even Alt S all of which store a previous Read In the final Store Point dialog with Rod Hgt Desc prompt turned on you will find the Point Description field Along with the designated Feature Code list all descriptions entered for the current job will accumulate in the available Point Description List allowing the user to select the text graphically arrow key to the desired text or highlight and select the correct text after entering the first character in the edit box An entry of P goes right to all text starting with the letter P Then you can select the one you want The Enter key will continue on at this point Height Description Prompt When this option is turned on within Configure EQUIP menu you obtain the full list of Feature Codes plus any descriptions you have entered that are not included in the Feature Code list Shown below is a reflectorless shot rod height 0 with Height Description Prompt on p208 Store Point y 4 Pt ID 34 HT p N 3518 4590 ZA 91 23 41 E 4834 3539 AR 135 11 09 849 8993 HD 102 2997 Desc See Field Notes 10 Light Pole 7100 Centerline Concrete Pavt p1 101
243. e in the dat localization file is detected you are prompted whether you would like to re process any previously stored GPS points found in the raw file The dialog below appears 9 Points have been surveyed prior to wt updating localization file Would you like to reprocess the raw file If you answer Yes you will be directed to the Process GPS command found within COGO Process Raw File Recalculating Stored GPS Points There is no requirement to survey all localization points first unless you are doing stakeout For simple topo or data gathering you can set up your base survey in one or two localization points with the rover then gather data in Store Points as needed As you move cross country and encounter another known or unex pected control point you can localize on it and add it to the list The next step would be to verify residuals and if the results are good you can reprocess the raw file and keep your entire survey fully updated If the residuals are disappointing you can choose not to include the new point in the localization file Either remove it or turn its H and V components off You can also choose Process Raw File to recalculate all GPS measurements at any time Including the Base Position in the Localization File p179 To use the base in the localization you should configure the base with the Use Local Coordinates option under From Known Position Here you configure the base by entering the local p
244. e name template ID dialog Repeat for the outer polyline SH left side then for the EP on the right side and SH on the right side You now have a centerline and 4 offset alignments from which to cut sections When you get the full contingent of alignments defined click Save As to save the TPA file Now any design offset at any station will be automatically interpolated and normal template section stakeout can proceed e Save Roading Files This button will save the selected set of roading files as an RDF file for recalling later e Load Roading Files This button loads all of the files previously saved to an RDF file The files must still be present in the original locations Interpolation If descriptions are provided intelligent interpolation is performed between similar descriptions on slope transitions or widening lanes as well as vertical curves for all methods described above Stake Road p430 The next screen is the heart of the program Here is where you select the station and offset to stake out You can even launch into a slope stake and then return to stake out other template points Stake Road Sta 0 70 000 qa mm z 1000 3 Interval 10 P cof 18 01 Design Off 18 01 C Left Right Stake Off Jo ato E 4 Slope Stake a Kexe _ _ _ 3 98 e Settings The Additional Stake Stations that appear in the List are set in the lower portion of the dialog The Vertical Sca
245. e offset side This list also provides additional methods of offsetting such as Skewed Offsets Bisectors Intersections and PI or Radius Points A Skew Forward angle is measured forward from the perpendicular and a Skew Back angle is measured back from the perpendicular So looking forward down a tangent centerline a pipe with a skew of 70 degrees in DD MMSS from the forward tangent would be a Forward Skew Angle of 20 degrees as measured forward from the perpendicular normal offset Elevation This is the design elevation If the defined geometry is 2D then p237 this option will be active e Override Design This allows the user to override the design elevation of 3D geometry e Off Inc This is for entering an optional incremental offset along the line This is a rarely used feature that would trend the offsets away or in to the centerline e Segment This defines the current segment of the alignment based on the entered station e Cutsheet This shows the currently selected Alignment Cutsheet file Settings This icon takes you to the Job Settings that apply to alignm ent staking See Job Settings Stake for more details Note that this is where you instruct the software to include and stop at critical alignment locations Stake Line Arc Point On Line The Point On Line option appears when Define Line or Define Alignments is selected It offers a Perpendicular to Line method for total stations and G PS This me
246. e roads have superelevation the super files can be made in Road Utilities If template transition files are to be used for lane changes then this file type must be made using external software such as Carlson Civil or Carlson Roads Note that sets of Roading Files can be saved and loaded using the buttons at the bottom of the screen The Settings icon at the top of the screen to the left of the checkmark allows you to place the profile grade at an offset to centerline such as at the inside edge of pavement for divided highways as shown below p398 Settings 0n 90o xX e Section File Dialog If Section Files are selected a dialog appears Section File JUX Centerline c SurvCEDemo Data Boneta cl Centerline 9 00 000 to 23 00 000 Profile C SurvCEDemo Data Boneta pro Profile 94 20 000 to 22 80 000 Design Section C SurvCEDemo Data boneta sct Sections 10 00 000 to 20 00 000 The Section file which has an sct file extension can be entered in Road Utilities or imported from the LandXML format using Section File Conversion also in Road Utilities Note that for all roading design files there is no requirement that starting and ending stations chainage match All that is necessary is that they have a station range in common in the above case p399 10 00 through 20 00 is common to all files Roading File sets as in the above Boneta files can also be saved to a named set and then re loaded later
247. e sure all of the toggles in the settings dialog are off Total Station Leica Robotic This series covers most of the current Leica standard total stations including the TPS 1000 TPS 1100 and TPS 1200 series For best results set the instrument to Geocom Online mode From the Main Menu go to Configuration Communication Mode GeoCom Online Mode Comms p554 The default communication settings are baud rates 19200 Parity None Char Length 8 and Stop Bits 1 Instrument Setup This is a Bluetooth port Baud Rate 19200 M Parity None M Char Length E M Stop Bits p M Defaults e Wireless Connection Using the Juniper Allegro CE RCS a built in radio modem and internal antenna is included which permits wireless communication with the robotic total station when using the RM2410 radio This wireless connection is through the Leica propriety radio and does not involve Bluetooth per the Comm Setup screen The Comm port for the internal radio on the Allegro is COM 3 For one man operation the pole and prism become freed from wire connection and can be placed anywhere for a shot or reading with the process driven remotely by the data collector communicating with the robotic total station Settings Search p555 Instrument Setup Current Comms EEGs Search EDM Mode Fat Target Offset 23160 BS Prism Offset 0 0 Circle Guide Lights Auto Laser Pointer EDM Mode Available methods are
248. e the horizontal or vertical components of your localization points This is a frequently used feature that enables the use of one point for vertical control only turn off its horizontal component and other points for horizontal control turn off their vertical if appropriate Points with no known elevation 0 for example would obviously be used only for horizontal control as shown in this ex ample Localization Ts ces D py Helmert k 11 9700 0 000 0 000 Y 4 Li gt Add Delete Edit On Off Load View Monitor Save Note that in this example it takes three horizontal control points active H On Y to get horizontal residual results and four vertical control points active V On Y to get vertical residual results You can employ trial and error to remove different points from consideration both vertically and horizontally p176 and watch the residuals of the remaining control points improve or degrade In this way if you have four or more total control points you can determine the best combination to use as horizontal and vertical control e Load This allows you to load any localization file for modifying or for the purpose of associating it to the current job Note that the OK button must be used if the intention is to associate the loaded file to the current job e Monitor Goes to the standard Monitor screen This is particularly useful to verify the quality of your satellite
249. ect to the receiver check connections and the data card Y ou have three choices on the setup screen Navcom Setup Exit File None Start Resume File Close File File Manager e Start Resume File To start a new file on the receiver or to append to an existing file select Start Resume File In the next menu type the name of the new file or select the name of an existing file from the drop list and press OK e Close File Select this to close a file that is open for logging p310 e File Manager To manipulate files on the receiver choose this button Files on Receiver No Files Found Download File O files Format Card Free Memory UNKNOWN Delete All of the files on the receiver along with their sizes and creation dates are displayed in the list Also the total memory used is displayed in the lower left corner of the dialog To delete a file select the file and press Delete To download a file to your data collector select the file and press Download File To format the MMC data card on your receiver press format card Formatting the card will erase all existing data p311 COGO This chapter provides information on using the commands from the COGO menu JOB SURYCE File Equip Survey COGO Road 1 Keyboard Input 6 Station Store ia Inverse a 7 Transformation ye 3 Areas 8 Calculator E 4 Intersections ik 9 Manual Traverse Tew 5 Point Projection fa Key
250. ection of that offset point on the baseline This baseline intersect or perpendicular projection point can be staked out and stored The application of the routine is shown below p323 The coordinates from which to project can be entered in three ways e By point number e By entering the coordinate values e By taking a GPS or total station reading The station offset and vertical difference of the point is then calculated and the Intersect button see the above figure will calculate the projected perpendicular intersect point on the baseline This Intersect can also be staked out using the Stake button You must first define the baseline You can define the baseline by one of the following methods e Define Line Select two points to define the line Define Alignment Select a predefined centerline file cl file graphically pick a polyline or enter a sequence of points e Define Arc 3 Points Select three points on the arc e Define Arc PC PT Value Select the start and end points of the arc and enter the radius length p324 Point Projection Define Alignment Define Arc 3 Points Define Arc PC PT value If you choose two points you must then define the line in the Point Projection dialog box as shown below Define Line y x First Point ID lier a S d Point ID Curent zob 165 EE North Azimuth Method f 2 Point f Azimuth Slope Start Sta 0 00 000 O4 4
251. ection of the manual With a robotic total station enabled a laser can be used to automatically measure the rod height of each total station reading Peripherals EEE Depth Sounder Light Bar w Active W Auto GPS Update Auto Laser Read Type Atlanta Height 0 000 ft Alignment oep0 00 Align Laser Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Char Length E Stop Bits 1 M COM Port comi M Default To activate a laser for use with GPS follow these steps 1 Plug in your laser to any of your device s COM ports make sure that it is adequately charged and turn it on Enter the Peripherals menu and select the LASER tab as shown above Check Active Select the type of laser you are using Enter the height of your laser from the ground This value will be added to the vertical offset returned by your laser For accuracy this value should be specified with respect to the same ground elevation that your GPS rod height oF ge E p188 was specified 6 Directions for aligning your laser will be given in a different section For now leave the laser alignment value set to 0 7 Ifyou want GPS to be automatically updated between each laser read enable Auto GPS Update If you want the Read Laser button to automatically trigger the laser enable Auto Laser Read 8 Set appropriate COM port settings To load the default settings for the laser you specified select the Default button However you will still need to
252. ed by selecting the angle balance option from the process raw file menu p74 Process Raw File Asbury rw5 Close Crandall Angle Balance Direct Reverse Report Transit Draw Traverse Lines Compass Edit RWS File Process GPS The Angle Balance Measurement dialog appears in the figure Suppose a given traverse started at 24 traversed up to 25 then around a loop and back to 24 point 45 If point 45 was the end point or closing shot the traverse leg from 45 to 46 could be the angle balance shot It is very common for ex ample in closed loop traversing to take a closing angle shot from the closing point 45 by measuring the angle along the first traverse leg 24 to 25 That is what occurred in the case of this sample traverse p 5 Next the Reference Closing Angle dialog appears Enter the bearing or azimuth of the reference angle or define the reference angle with points by entering in the desired point numbers in the From Point and To Point fields If using bearing or azimuth enter the bearing in DD MMSS format and then select the correct quadrant from the format field located at the bottom of the dialog Once the reference angle has been defined then the angular error display will update with the calculated angular error The measured closing bearing and measured closing azimuth is displayed at the top of the dialog box If the reference angle has been defined by point numbers then the reference clos
253. een drawn in direction of increas Station Northey 0 00 0000 16531 2200 146342 3 1 50 0000 16538 4163 14781 7t Radius 684 9315 Length 479 4176 Delta 40 06 15 0 29 4176 18340 3055 15207 02 Radius 603 5534 Length 474 0297 Delta 45 00 00 11 03 44 3 18163 5258 156034 4 12453 44 73 18163 5258 157084 4 ii gt lt CL to Polyline CL2P This command draws a POLYLINE entity using the data from a centerline file You can practice this command by selecting the file Demo cl provided with the program Convert Polylines to 2D C2D Pick any 3D polyline and convert it to 2D elevations of vertices are set to 0 Edit Polyline EDP Remove vertices insert vertices and update alter the coordinates of any vertex For example if we pick the centerline that was used above we obtain the edit dialog with options to add or remove segments or arcs edit curve information etc Saving changes updates the graphics on the screen p489 Polyline 2D j List of Vertices Easting 18551 2200 14632 3300 16538 4183 14 81 82 18340 3055 15207 0473 18163 5268 15634 4240 5163 5268 15784 4240 Edit Input Edit GIS Data EGIS This command allows you to input or edit GIS attributes associated with an entity Select the entity from the screen or for the case of a closed
254. emove All Remove Source When you press Enter after selecting the point or points the program will display the source of the points either as Current Job or Control File The display of the source is important for verification You may discover for example that someone has turned on Control File Points have Priority in the stakeout settings and this is a way to catch the mistake p224 Northing Easting Elevation You must have a northing easting and elevation entered for the point you are staking out If you type in the point number of an existing point and hit OK these values will appear automatically The description of existing points is displayed at the bottom of the dialog Point by Direction In addition to staking a point ID or entered coordinate you can stake a point defined by a direction and distance and even slope from the entered point coordinate This allows you to stake points without calculating point numbers or point IDs for the target point Simply enter the bearing azimuth horizontal distance and also slope if applicable If the distance entry is not known but must be computed the calculator 1s accessible from the distance dialog box by hitting the button Shown below is a stakeout of a point calculated at NE45 degrees 100 feet from point 10 7 0 000 Turn to AR 162 45 03 Move Out 147 45 View Pt Depending on your settings in the View Pt tab of Configure in the EQUIP tab the direction to
255. ems to choose from under the GPS tab in Job Settings This list can contain one projection system or many different systems the user selects p536 Job Settings Cancel Options Units New Job BE stakeout UTMAWGS S4 UTM zone 16h UTMAYGS 84 TM zone 16M JUSA NADBS KY North MUSA MNAD2 7 ACY North SWITZERLAND CH1903 LY95 One Point Localization Azimuth State Plane Grid This is a special list of either predefined eg KY North NAD83 or user defined coordinates systems To get the list started or add to the list select Edit Projection List and click Add Predefined In the U S for example surveyors might want to keep the UTM WGS84 system plus the NAD83 and NAD27 state plane zones in the list for quick access covering the region of your work European and other worldwide zones can be added When setting up a UTM selection you can choose your zone referencing the graphic below for the US p537 UTM Grid Zones of the World ra er AAL Rote LA it Le You can see a map of the UTM zones online at h www dmap co uk utmworld htm To edit the list of saved projections click on Edit Projection List Here we select a user defined UTM system from the list to Delete or Edit p538 Coordinate Projection Done Selection List
256. en saved using the QuickStart dialog it can be loaded and used to perform a QuickStart Best results are obtained by performing the QuickStart 5 minutes after turning on the receiver Performing a QuickStart to point with a position that is wrong will increase the pull in time to 2 3 hours It will start at the bad position and then drift toward the correct position It is better to not perform a QuickStart if the receiver has already been on for 30 40 minutes RTK Extend Introduction An industry first from Navcom RTK Extend enables continuous RTK position accuracy during radio communication outages by utilizing Navcom s global Starfire corrections Traditionally when an RTK rover loses communication with the base station it is unable to continue to provide position updates for more than a few seconds resulting in user down time and reduced productivity A Navcom Starfire receiver operating in RTK mode can transition to RTK Extend mode and maintain centimeter accurate positioning during communication loss for up to 15 minutes or in some cases even longer RTK Extend allows the user to work more efficiently and without interruption thus enabling them to concentrate on the work rather than the tools The Concept Using a receiver capable of Starfire and RTK at both the base and the rover locations allows the receivers to compute Starfire and RTK solutions or corrections simultaneously If a communication outage occurs an
257. enabled in Equip Configure for this dialog to become active Otherwise choices are grayed out Traverse Defaults Prompt for Instrument amp Rod Height Vertical Angle Prompt None C O Degrees Level C 90 Degrees Level C Elevation Difference Faw File Triangulate amp Contour TRGC Triangulate and Contour can create a final contour map based on user given data points polylines This function has many options which are specified in its dialog box The routine will prompt also for inclusion and exclusion polylines To delete entities drawn with this command turn off all of the drawing options and reprocess p492 Triangulate Contour Range of Points ALL Wildcard descriptions a Craw Contours Contour Interval E 10 0000 Include Breaklines i Draw Triangulation Save Triangulation to File Select File C SurvCEDemo Pataex qrd tin i Prompt for inclusions exclusions MAP VIEVi FILE WIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Cmd Layer ae PTR nae s LEACAN TEA 7 LE Lih ATATA TA ovo ie amp as yoy pa Volume VOL Volumes can be computed by several methods using point ranges and or layers to define existing and final surfaces Perimeters can be used to further limit the area of the volume calculation p493 Yolume By Surfaces Final File None C Points Breaklines Incl Map Layer Original File None C Points Breaklines C Elevation 0 000 C Stockpile
258. ence portions of four of the file types are shown below as they might display in a Text Editor The LandXML SurvCE and SDR examples all reference the file DOT1 CL These displays may help you recognize these file types in the future The new LandXML format endorsed by many Departments of Transportation in the United States may soon become the standard in the future for internet transfer of roading and other types of design files p368 Lands ML SurvCk SDR lt aordGeom gt lt Line length 848 64000000 dir 2 36921515 gt lt Start gt 1O000 00000000 10000 00000000 Start gt lt End gt 10579 94056914 9360 45661675 lt End gt Line gt lt CLurve rot ccow chornd 1914 99460 706 cry Type lt Start 10579 94056914 9360 435661675 lt fStart gt lt Center gt 22135 99512832 154951682467 iCenter zEnd gt 1176720701020 7877 90450628 lt fEnd gt lt fLUrVe gt lt Line length 1947 7 1000000 dir 2 55652497 gt 0 10078 69000 L 10000 00000000 10000 00000000 0 10927 33000 L 10579 94056914 9380 43661675 0 10927 33000 PC 10579 940536914 9380 436061673 0 9 331012766 R 2213 99312832 1549 51682467 0 12844 56000 P T 11767 20701020 7877 90450628 0 14 792 2 000 L 12542 5411 7254 6254 14793824 0 14 792 2 000 PC 12e42 6411 7284 6254 14 95824 0 7 125600000 F 3259 62929108 74 259 4529 0 16235 38163 PT 13562 04766716 5004 12304524 O 24641 59005 L 17287 s6502100 25
259. end involves very little p617 additional effort The Starfire activated receiver at the base station is setup ex actly the same as if it were a standard RTK receiver using an ex ternal communication link with the addition of two key steps 1 The unit will be configured to navigate as a Starfire rover in addition to operating as an RTK base station 2 2 The unit will be configured to output a third RTK message namely Navcom s binary 0x5D message which carries the Delta between the fixed RTK position and the Starfire aided navigation position to the rover The rover being able to translate and adjust for the bias mentioned in item two above is able to instantaneously QuickStart to the Starfire aided navigation solution when standard RTK corrections are unavailable While the receiver is navigating in Starfire mode the position is flagged in its binary output indicating that the Starfire solution is actually coasting through an RTK communication dropout Frequently Asked Questions Q How long are the near RTK level accuracies maintained if the communication link is lost A To allow a Starfire receiver to work anywhere in the world rather than just within a few kilometers of an RTK base station unique processing techniques must be used and the typically obtainable accuracy is around 10 cm rather than the 1 2 cm obtainable with an RTK system The errors that cause Starfire to fluctuate around the true position by a fe
260. enterline defining screen is similar to the screens found in Stakeout Line and other commands Define Alignments CA vertical 1 Centerline File Use Ref CL 2 Select Polyline 5 Preview 6 Edit 3 Define Point List Centerline C SurvCEDemoSpecial Data DEMo cl ees Ending Station 3 08 327 Cutsheet None p428 This just starts the process With both horizontal and vertical alignments defined click OK You will then be asked to define a template point alignment TPA file In this process you must either pick or identify by point number or file each alignment pair H and V that define an edge of pavement or other feature of the sections It takes a 3D polyline or a pair of horizontal and vertical files or any mixture of points polylines and files to define a single offset feature Template Alignment CSurvCEDemoSpecial Data Roadsa tpa ELSTON ight SURFACE Template ID Template ID Click on Left Surface for example then Click Add This brings up the same screen used to define the centerline If you have a drawing of 3D polylines brought in as a DXF file for example it is very easy to illustrate this command by the Pick Polyline option When chosen you obtain the next screen where you can pick the EP p429 Now click OK say Yes to Overwrite vertical alignment if the polyline is 3D and simply OK the screen no need to save the file as a named alignment This brings up th
261. enterline was picked from the screen Select Polyline and the vertical alignment was selected from a file p233 N 3349 2715 E 4706 5259 839 4925 HRMS 0 049 VRMS 0 099 LO 000 Define Arc 3 Points This routine requests three points to define a unique arc which 1s then used for stakeout by station and offset The first point becomes the beginning of the arc The prompting is shown below Define Arc 3 Points First Point 2 EA Second Point 4 FA Third Point 5 EA 0 00 000 Start Sta End 6 48 742 The points can be entered in chosen from the list points button or selected from p234 the map After selecting the three points choose OK green checkmark to go to the Stakeout Arc dialog The special stations are limited to PC start and PT end After choosing a station and offset to stake and selecting OK the main stakeout window appears in map view In total station mode an angle to turn to and a distance to go will be displayed at the bottom of the screen Taking a reading to the current target position will update the display with a new out in distance and a right left distance depending upon your job settings Y ou should see your points and centerline or curve in the map with an icon of the point you need to stakeout to the circle with the X inside When using GPS after selecting OK to the Stakeout Arc dialog you will be placed in the Map screen at your current position with directional
262. eport ww x PT 1198 BS o oo 00 90 00 00 1000 0000 F2 FS 270 00 00 27090000 100 0000 BS 1e0 o0 oo 270 00 00 1000 0000 Arg Rt BS H Dist FS H Dist Avg 90 00 0O 1000 0000 100 0000 Hi gg go oo 1000 0000 100 0000 Low 90 00 00 1000 0000 100 0000 Diff O 00 00 0 0000 0 0000 lt If you had specified 2 points or more in the initial Set Collection Point Order screen you would obtain a tabbed dialog of all the points to review p273 Set Report o o0 oo 95 18 55 7 305 133 00 47 26791907 14 51 179 35 26 264 29 02 7 305 Ang Rt BS H Dist FS H 133 00 54 7 2730 14 49 313 O1 21 7 2751 14 50 313 00 42 7 2710 14 49 0200 38 0 0041 After all of the Reciprocal Calculation and Store Point dialogs have been accepted the dialog below will be presented Set Collection STM 1197 Number of Sets 1 Change Station Collect More Sets Review DirectReverse Report Change Station This button will take you to the Instrument Setup dialog and advance the point numbers so that the original occupied point is the backsight and the last foresight point is now the occupied point p274 Collect More Sets This button will take you to the Backsight dialog and maintain all of the previous setup information Review Direct Reverse Report This button will allow you to select the occupied point ID from a list of points that were used with set collection The software will t
263. er name in the list and tap the Delete button You cannot delete layers that contain objects If you select a layer and the Delete button is not visible then this layer contains objects To turn a layer On Off Highlight the layer name and tap the On Off button Objects on layers that are On will be visible objects on layers that are Off are not visible On all This button will turn all layers on Off all This button will turn all layers except the current layer off Color Clicking on the color bar will bring up the color palette allowing you to set or change the layer color of the highlighted layer One of the main purposes of the Layer command is to permit the import by DXF of a drawing containing all possible polyline work to stake out set out Then you can reduce clutter on the drawing by turning layers off leaving only the layers you want You can then do the command Cogo Interpolate Points Polylines to Points and make point numbers out of all vertices corners of polylines where you need to set stakes Then proceed with Stakeout by Points p456 View Options VO This command controls the appearance of point objects on screen This is ex actly the same as touching the lower left graphic icon The routine displays the View Point Options dialog Pt Description and Elevation toggles control whether these attributes are labeled with the points If Freeze All is on the points are placed on the map without attributes Availab
264. er of the computer on which this software is installed may make a second copy for his or her exclusive use e Additionally you may store one copy of this software on a storage device such as a network server used only to install or run this software on other computer over an internal network However you must acquire and dedicate a license for each separate computer on which this software 1s installed or run from the storage device A single license for this software may not be shared or used concurrently on more than one computer unless a license manager has been purchased from Carlson Software p OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS e You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble this software except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation e This software is licensed as a single product Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one computer e Under certain circumstances you may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA provided that the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA e Without prejudice to any other rights Carlson Software may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA In this event you are required to destroy all copies of this software and all of its component parts COPYRIGHT All title and copyrights in and to this software including but not lim
265. eries File shown below the program will auto calculate a 15 left pavement width at station 1150 This same feature can be accomplished by using one template and applying a Template Transition File which instructs on the changing dimensions of portions of a single template Unlike the Template Series File the alternate Template Transition File can only be created at the office using Carlson Civil Carlson Roads or Carlson TakeOff Input Edit TSF File Clear Close CADisk Data KYDOT pro Template 0 00 000 Poadi 11 00 000 Roadi 12 00 000 Road 0 00 000 Poadz2 lt Add Edit Remove l Save As Draw Template One advantage of the design files method is that since each template point has an ID the slope stake report will include information to locate all ID d template points from the slope stake back in to the centerline In this way the entire road can be built from the information marked on the slope stake which is placed outside the construction area at a user specified eg 5 offset to the actual catch point A report might appear as follows p390 HDIST VDIST SLOPE OFFSET to CATCH CUT 34 295 CATCH to PIVOT 32 20 16 10 FILL 50 0 2 0 1 PIVOT to SHLDR 14 00 FILL 16 7 6 0 1 SHLDR to EOP 12 00 FILL 4 0 25 1 EOP to CL 12 00 FILL 2 0 50 1 Within the program itself the report might appear as shown here Offset Point Report Ww Progressive Total Offset PT
266. ernet connection has already been established to the data collector One way to tell that the data collector is connected to the internet is to browse the internet using Internet Ex plorer For p148 information about how to connect a data collector to the internet using an Enfora cell card in an Explorer 600 search Carlson Knowledge Base for Enfora Once the connection to the internet has been established start SurvCE and select Configure Rover in the Equip tab GPS Rover Current Comms Receiver Device Data Collector Internet Configure Network ggeiiialieta Configure RTE Port Icom 2 Baud 1 15200 S Parity stop Bits E Message Type CMR a Base ID Charleston Rez l Send Rover Position to Network Press the Configure button to the right of the Data Collector Internet option p149 gt Config e Data Collector Internet l Data Collector RTE Port COM T M Select the COM port on the data collector that is connected to the RTK port of the GPS rover receiver It cannot be the same port that is used to control the receiver and is selected in the GPS Rover Comms tab It may be a serial port or a BT port with a connection that has already been established After selecting the port and pressing the green check to accept the input select the network type in the RTK tab Other settings are just like using the other modem selections as explained in the section
267. ertical example is shown in this above figure e 3D SurvCE has enough information to fix an arbitrary plane Press OK and the following dialog will appear The building face or vertical plane is drawn as a solid line and any measurement taken by angle only reading eg angle right of 270 zenith angle of 83 degrees will plot as a point with calculated x y z position such as point 20 BLDG FACE Non Vertical Plane Survey Surveying a non vertical plane is similar to surveying a vertical plane Once the plane has been defined picking up detailed observations follows the same general process detailed above All three points must be defined for a non vertical plane survey When defining a non vertical plane the three points cannot be in a line p261 Resection This command allows you to calculate coordinates of an unknown instrument setup point given the angles and distances from up to 20 distinct reference points The reference points are recalled from your working job file If a control file 1s active in Job Settings and the entered point ID is not found in the current working coordinate file then the point will be recalled from the control file automatically You can also access points from the control file by using the from list icon Direct and Reverse measurements can be activated within the Configure screen in Resection The options within Configure expand eg for Auto Turn capability if you are using motorized or r
268. es Transit Compass Crandall Adjustments These methods apply the selected rule to the traverse lines when calculating the coordinates After adjusting the traverse points the sideshots can also be recalculated The closure error is calculated as the difference between the specified ending point and a reference point The ending point is specified in the initial dialog p78 Process Raw File Cancel eee Proj Redundancies Other Scale 1 00000000 Apply Curvature Refraction starting Point 15 Ending Point 26 You can change the ending point to correspond to the point in the traverse that closes back to the existing reference point In the current example point 26 is the final shot and is closing to an existing point 10 The reference point is specified by point ID or by entering the northing easting and elevation of the reference point Process Raw Data Options Cancel Ww Report Sideshots Reference Closing Point ID 10 North Spee M Apply Angle Balance Fast 4311 6031 M Vertical Error Adjustment Ely 441 404010 i Report Point Adjustments lf Report Unadjusted Points p79 The process results show varying information depending on selected options from the Process Raw Data Options dialog box e Reference Closing Point ID The desired closing point number must be entered into this field If the closing point does not exist in the coordinate file the known coordinates can be entered into t
269. es include templates centerline profile and optionally superelevation and template transition files If you wish to clear a file such as a superelevation file just click it and choose Cancel The definitions for each of these files 1s covered in their own sections of this manual Design files are recommended for subdivision streets access roads and simpler highway designs Section Files Sections are made up of simple offsets and elevations that can have descriptions such as EOP DL or SH and must be accompanied by a horizontal alignment file centerline Every cross section is a snapshot of the template at a given station SurvCE supports using multiple surfaces simultaneously in Stake Road by using multiple section files or by extracting the section for each surface when all surfaces are within a single file Each surface can exist on its own layer with its own color for easy identification while in the Stake Road dialog For complex designs with non conforming intersections transition lanes special ditches etc 1t is recommended to use cross section data if available Cut Section from Alignments Provides the ability to extract cross sections directly from 3D polylines that exist within SurvCE The first thing you need to define is the horizontal and vertical alignment files These form the basis for cutting the sections and determining left and right offsets from the horizontal alignment or centerline The c
270. ex isting coordinates you will most likely need to do a Localization Even if that ex isting job is supposedly on state plane UTM or another known coordinate system the project coordinates often fail to match grid scale and grid north ex actly requiring localization When localizing it is advisable to use at least three points for horizontal control and four points for vertical control in order to get a measure of residuals or accuracy The program will best fit a plane through all activated H On and or V On control points The residuals are how much each activated point is off of the plane surface Because multiple elevation points may create a slightly tilted plane some surveyors will verify that the vertical control has low residuals and is accurate using multiple vertical control points then turn off all but p177 one V Off and use only the nearest vertical elevation as they progress through the job Note The Scale Factor chosen in UNITS under Job Settings will cause all GPS measurements to be adjusted by the scale factor For GPS scale factors can only be entered for one point localizations base or rover For multi point rover localizations the scale factor is computed by the localization and fixed It appears grayed out under UNITS in Job Settings When a scale factor is used for one point localizations scaling occurs along the vector outward from the single localization point in the direction of the measured poi
271. f connected to a base when pressed it determines if the base is transmitting corrections and if not tells the user why If connected to the rover it tells the user if in RTK Fixed and if not and it tells the user why Configure RTK Device is the same as the Configure button in the RTK tab of the Base and Rover dialogs Close Latitude dd mmssss 0 Worth C South Longitude dd mmssss 0 West C East Ellipsiod Height 0 ft N Number of Readings 1 1 999 i Antenna Height ac Read Save QuickStart allows the user to save a QuickStart point or to QuickStart from a previously saved QuickStart point Starfire and QuickStart Starfire 1s a space based GPS correction system capable of 10 cm horizontal accuracy Vertical will be 1 5 to 2 times as much It is kind of like WAAS on steroids The positions that it calculates are ITRF 2000 This is different from the p615 positions calculated in RTK surveys Since the RTK survey is based on a base point on the ground and the Starfire position is a space based position they do not match A localization created from an RTK system cannot be used by a Starfire receiver The localization must be created using Starfire positions It normally takes about an hour to get to the 10cm accuracy The receiver does not have to be stationary during that time QuickStart is a method of reducing the pull in time to 50 seconds If a QuickStart point has be
272. f desired You first fill out the options in one or more of the tabs Translate Rotate and Scale and then you press Enter and obtain a second screen where you fill out the range of points to transform p328 Linear Transformation Rotate Scale Delta M 0 0000 3 0 0000 Ely 0 0000 Original PtID M E Ely Destination PtID as M 3 pO Ely pO Range of Points Enter the range of points to translate Ranges can be entered in the following format 1 20 32 40 45 etc Add to Point Numbers Enter a number to add to existing point numbers when creating new point numbers This option is not available when overwriting your existing point numbers See example below under Use New Point Numbers Overwrite Existing Point Numbers Overwrites the existing point coordinate data with the new coordinate data Use New Point Numbers Uses new point numbers for the new coordinate positions while keeping the existing point numbers and coordinate data Each time a point is to be overwritten you will be prompted whether to overwrite or use a new point number This method is only recommended when you are transforming very few points and wish to give each a specific point number assignment Store in New CRD File This option writes the transformed points to anew CRD file while keeping the existing point numbers and coordinate data Y ou may also choose to input a number for Add to Point Numbers but this is n
273. ference for reporting cut fill information while staking So you could stake the shoulder but also reference cut and fill to the centerline as an option With this option the selected offset and the secondary reference offset will both be reported to Offset List 838 3869 839 1669 10 0000 839 9469 X 14 0000 840 2589 R305_2 is 0000 840 5709 R3053 2a 0000 _ R37 9043 R05 4 The resulting plan view in stakeout shows cut and fill to both the reference and the target point p432 N 3372 7838 E 4650 4299 939 50 0 HRMS 0 046 VRMS 0 078 Z 840 727 Dsq 3 05 000 R20 000 Sta 3 06 969 L12 730 Fill 1 22 Cut Ref 0 34 In 2 59 Right 32 69 Design Offset Any offset can be entered even if it is not a break point on the template For example an offset of Left 5 5 or Right 7 23 could be entered For every design offset point selected the elevation is calculated and presented You can select the offset point from the offset list or literally pick it on the screen The touchscreen is active in the graphic so you can select the 12 EP just by picking it Picking on the graphic screen will take you to the Offset List screen for verification where you can confirm your pick by pressing Enter or selecting another offset Stk Off H Horizontal offset from the design offset If you enter an stake offset of 2 and the design offset point was at 12 then the stake would go in at offset 14 off of CL but the cut fil
274. follows if formatted in Excel or another spreadsheet form Des Sta Des Off Des Elv Staked Sta Staked Off Staked Elv Desc 1 00 000 L33 849 998 075 0 99 966 L33 453 998 075 Catch Point 1 00 000 L38 849 1 00 019 L38 866 998 15 First Offset Point Here is another example as viewed in the Edit mode within Job Settings Stake Cutsheets Edit Slope Stake Edit CutSheet Ale slope txt Pivot Off OFFSET to CATCH OFFSET to BD H 14 49 OFFSET to EP H 20 49 OFFSET to CENTER H 32 49 4 50 00 Right 18 0 The columns are configurable with the Slope Stake formatting in Job Settings Shown above is a total report as opposed to progressive No offset stake was set The template involved was flat from centerline for 12 then had a 2 1 slope for 6 into a ditch point ID BD for base of ditch This cut downslope condition was created within an office entered template using Carlson Civil or p411 Carlson Roads and SurvCE automatically detected the cut condition and used the ditch points as pivot points offset 18 with elevations 945 75 at station 6 00 and 946 50 at station 6 50 Some survey teams use one person to set the slope stakes and another to enter data on the stakes which is easily done using the stored slope stake report above Store Sections This function collects as built cross sections of roads or other alignm ents and stores them optionally as points as cross sections or as an ASCII file organized by s
275. from the base points to the calculated INT1 point and INT2 for distance intersections and the coordinate data for the calculated points Note that calculated points are labeled as Intl and Int2 until the points are stored These Option Buttons are present on all Map screens displayed while in the Intersections routine Once Store is selected or the Enter key pressed the stored point will inherit the specified point number description and the elevation displayed at the bottom of the screen optional There can be only one solution for a bearing bearing intersection All Intersect routines handle the 400 circle if configured to grads gons within Job Settings Units Bearing Distance Define the Bearing from the first point then define the known horizontal distance from the second point p320 Intersection First Point PointID 2 Azimuth 235 00 00 Use Points Distance ft off Second Point Point ID 1040 Azimuth Use Points Distance 40 000 ft off Select OK and the map screen will appear showing a circle radiating from the distance base point and a line from the bearing base point defined by the entered bearing The line is extended to intersect the circle at the two possible solutions Pressing Enter or Store will display the prompt Pick a Solution To select the point simply pick it from the screen Picking near the desired solution is sufficient The program will select the nearest so
276. from the current drawing and also the associated attributes values into a SHP file or more accurately multiple shape files The routine will allow the user to select which entities will be ex ported based on entity type and also based on the feature code name The routine displays Export to SHP dialog box Export to SHP val Current SHF Ascotl Select New SHP M Export All POINTS gt 187 ARCS gt 19 POLYGONS 2 W Include special attributes Remove Arcs offset cutoff o1 W Include Z Coordinates Click on Export All and include special attributes and optionally the Z coordinates If you have point arcs non closed polylines in ESRI terminology and polygons closed polylines all with one attribute you will obtain up to nine files as shown below Ascotl_11 dbf Ascotl_11 shp Ascotl_11 shx Ascot 13 dbf Ascotl_13 shp Ascotl_13 shx p445 Ascot 15 dbf Ascotl_15 shp Ascotl_15 shx The selection of the Z coordinate places the 1 after the underline character Otherwise the file form would be for example Ascotl_1 shx special attributes only The 1 group represent points the 3 group represent arcs unclosed polylines and the 5 group represent polygons closed polylines Within Ex port Shape file the field name in the dbf file is expanded to handle up to 254 characters SHP File Quick Export SHP QESHP This command allows you to export polylines and or points to an SHP file
277. fter entering these the job will start recording To end the job turn off the receiver Your next job should start up without complication p300 lobs on Receiver lob 05 25 07 15 26 04 Job TestS 04 05 07 21 21 18 Test Job 04 05 07 20 46 24 Test Job 04 05 07 20 50 10 _ Format Card Recording site 1 Site Duration 00 00 05 Antenna Height 5 0000 ft Antenna Type AT502 Pole Stop Point Logging Exit Continue Logging Setting Up Post Processing as a Rover From the SURVEY tab choose Log Static Data The data collector will check to see that the receiver is connected and has satellites if the receiver doesn t have satellites no post processing is possible If successful a screen with four buttons will appear p301 Topcon GPS Setup File None art File To manage jobs click the Job Manager button more information on this feature will be covered later in the documentation To start a post processing job click the Start Job button Select a job name from the existing jobs or create a new one To change the antenna settings click the Change Antenna button olan New Job Job Name C New Antenna Height 0 000000 Change Antenna Antenna Type ATSO1 Pole Interval After starting a job you will return to the Post Processing menu Now you will be able to log points close the job or manage jobs To start logging a point click the Start P
278. g Hgt Desc prompt on save Backsight Continues to the Take Backsight screen OK or pressing Enter Continues straight to the Foresight screen If OK is not highlighted and not ghosted pressing OK will still go to the Foresight screen even if Enter does not p198 Orientation Backsight The backsight dialog has Setup and Results tabs showing the results of a measurement to the backsight Backsight gt Rs Set to Zero 0 00 0O Setup Results OC Point 1 BS Point 21 BS AZE 184 53 43 BS Bearing 54 53 43 W Inst Hgt 5 531 Target Hgt 4 600 Set Angle Option List There are three options for setting the reference angle in backsight They are found in the options list at the upper left of the Take BS screen Set to Zero This is the most commonly used option A message is sent to the instrument to set it to zero then the backsight is taken at a zero reference angle Angles are then typically turned to the right from zero Set to Backsight Azimuth In this scenario the backsight direction in the gun is set to the azimuth of the backsight For ex ample if the backsight azimuth is 180 degrees then an angle to the right of 10 degrees would read 190 degrees from the instrument This is useful in underground mine surveying because it ensures that the readings displayed by the total station always refer to true azimuth Some surveyors are azimuth surveyors and others prefer set zero Use Current Do No
279. g in direct mode measurements taken from the instrument no radio connection to the prism All 800 series instruments are motorized The Topcon 8000 is a reflectorless unit The Topcon 800A is motorized but not fully robotic The 800AR is motorized and robotic The Topcon 802 refers to a 2 second version of the 800 series for example To operate either direct or remote press the Power button to turn the instrument on After you level the instrument will go through a motorized self test You obtain a 6 icon menu To run direct press F2 for Standard This puts you in the measure screen Note that in Direct mode the Topcon 800 typically ex pects 1200 E 7 1 for communication but 9600 N 8 1 in Remote mode Note that the Topcon 820 and 8200 are a new series of instruments where Topcon 822 indicates a 2 second version of the 820 series Running Direct the Topcon robotic instruments that have the reflectorless option offer a handy one click reflectorless off on icon at the top of the screen as shown above in the discussion of the Leica TPS series where it also applies Direct The following settings are presented by selecting the Topcon 800 8000 Direct instrument e EDM Mode Choose between coarse tracking fine and reflectorless e Turn to point in stakeout Turns the instrument to the horizontal angle as computed to the stakeout location specified e Turn to vert point in stakeout Turns the instrument to the vertical a
280. g in that case Keep in mind that in certain power surge conditions receivers can lose their settings and a re configuration may be necessary even if the base receiver antenna has not been moved Note In SurvCE 1 50 006 or later a quick connect is performed when you exit and re enter the SurvCE program In earlier versions of SurvCE before August 20 2004 and after the release of SurvCE 1 50 in May 2004 it was necessary to conduct a fresh GPS Base after exiting SurvCE Note One method of obtaining Latitude Longitude and state plane p140 coordinates in the U S is to occupy a point any point for two hours or more logging the static data then submit the Rinex file to the NGS OPUS program accessible on the web You must log the data with dual frequency equipment The OPUS program is fully automated and will return the x y z lat long ellipsoidal height and orthometric height This data can then be entered in during base localization Though most post processing programs Trimble Geomatics Office Leica SKI Pro use proprietary post processing file formats they will output the ASCII Rinex format needed by OPUS GPS Rover GPS Rover For many brands of GPS receiver perform differently depending on whether they are set as base or rover Even though the receivers are identical they perform differently depending on whether they are configured as a base or a rover Multiple rover receivers can communicate with a s
281. g to close on It can be entered as a point ID or a coordinate Note To preserve coordinate values of the initial setup and backsight particularly with D amp R measurements involved it is recommended that Redundancies be set to Average by Distance Measurement _ if averaging is used Pressing OK leads to the calculation and the report screen for Process No Adjust p73 Review File Azimuth Error 153 O07 S5 A North Error 0 04214 East Error M02135 vertical Error 0 20224 Hz Dist Error 0 04 24 S Dist Error 0 20769 Traverse Lines gt 9 SideShots gt 40 Horiz Dist Traversed 646 830 Slope Dist Traversed 861 660 Closure Precision 1 in 17927 a g Angle Balance This method of processing applies an angle balance to the traverse lines when calculating the coordinates The angle balance takes the angular error divided by the number of traverse lines and adjusts the angle of each traverse line by the calculated amount The angular error is the difference between the angle balance shot and a reference angle The program will prompt you to enter the traverse shot to use as the angle balance shot The measured direction between the occupied point and the foresight point in the specified angle balance shot is then compared to a reference angle The reference angle is specified as a bearing azimuth or by a traverse line defined by entering a From Point and a To Point The angle balance process is initiat
282. graphy Read DER Q Stakeout Read DER kd Robotic Set Collection Options Review Individual Reading Data Set Order BD FD BR FR No of Sets 1 Configure General View Pt Q Stakeout Read DAR CJ Reverse Face Angles Only Reverse Face Auto Turn Reverse Face Auto Read Q Calculate Reciprocals Ee ut Robotic Set Collection Options Ww Review Individual Reading Data Set Order BD FD BR FR el No of Sets 1 D amp R The user can choose to measure direct and reverse readings for backsight traverse resection topography or stakeout routines If the user measures direct and reverse for the backsight readings all foresight readings that also are recorded direct and reverse will be recorded and computed as angle sets If the backsight reading is only measured direct then foresight points that are measured direct and reverse are then combined to produce an p160 average observation record for the vertical circle which is stored in the rw5 file as a sideshot SS record For calculation purposes the routine only averages the distances using both vertical circle readings and uses the direct horizontal reading for the direction Both the direct and reverse readings are stored in the rw5 file as a note record When disabled default setting only the direct foresight shot will be taken This option improves accuracy on elevation measurements and mimics a feature found on the SDR data collec
283. h Deg of Crv Arc Length Delta Angle Chord Length Delta Angle Arc Length Chord Length Arc Length p338 Curve calculator Radius Chord Type Degree of Curve Roadway Radius R Railroad 00 2100 Chord Lengthtcs 94 2500 clear Select 3 points fram Select arc from 4 The type of curve can be toggled between roadway and railroad Values can be entered into the blanks by keyboard entry by selecting points from the current job from a point list from the screen or by selecting an arc drawn on the screen Once the values are entered the results are displayed on the screen The results can be viewed by selecting the Results button The curve can be viewed on the screen by selecting the View Curve button Manual Traverse This command allows for manual entry of angles and distances and calculates sideshots or traverses from a known occupied point If the direction is defined by a bearing or azimuth a backsight point is not required If the direction is defined by angle left or right or a deflection angle left or right then a backsight point is required Manual Traverse is actually one of three options for manual traverse and sideshot entry A second option is to go to the Map screen and at the command line Cmd enter I for inverse to inverse to an occupied point or from backsight point to occupied point then T for traverse or S for Sideshot using angle codes 1 NE 2 SE 3 SW 4 NW 5 AZ 6 AL 7 AR fol
284. h point s elevation This setting is not applicable if Polyline On is set to NO New Attributes This option leads to GIS type attributing where you can further describe the code e g fence with additional attributes For example one attribute might be Fence Type and there may be 4 options with a default option These can be set up one time by using the Add option within New Attributes Once setup whenever a fence is chosen the attributes can be selected from a list These attributes will be stored in the raw file and most importantly will output to an ESRI Shape file Map Screen File pull down Export SHP File You can even control the prompt and what the default attribute is in this example barbed wire and whether each attribute entry is required or just optional With this setting any shot to FL for fence will jump into the GIS attribute p91 screen The setup screen for attributes is shown below New attribute y x Hame FENCE TYPE Prompt Type Default value Barbed wire Set List Values Type Barbed Wire Woven Wire Wood Fail Fence type is a user defined attribute But many attributes of the feature are known by Carlson SurvCE e g the current instrument being used the date and time etc These types of known attributes appear in a list of special codes selectable above and shown in the figure below Special codes wl x EASTING ELEY ATION DESCRIPTION Lill LA
285. h to continue SurvCE will then warn you if the file or files to be deleted have never been downloaded before p112 Some of the files have not been downloaded since they were last modified Do you want to continue Yes No Press Yes if you wish to continue You will be asked to confirm your file selection once more Press Yes to accept the deletion of the file or files or No to cancel the selection Add J ob Notes This command allows you to enter job notes as ASCII text These notes are saved with the job in the raw data file Notes ex Dayi Cloudy 64deqg Exit This command will exit the Carlson SurvCE program The software presents the p113 confirmation dialog Are you sure you want to exit Yes No If you choose Yes SurvCE will exit and your data files are saved If you choose No SurvCE does not exit p114 EQUIP This chapter provides information on using the commands from the Equip menu JOB SURYCE File Equip Survey COGO Road 1 Total Station at 6 Localization a 2 GPS Base T Check Level 3 GPS Rover T 8 Tolerances P 4 GPS Utilities W 9 Peripherals le 5 Configure N 0 About SurvCeE JOB SURYCE File Equip Survey COGO Road 1 Total Station i 6 Localization 2 GPS Base 7Monitor Skyplot amp 3 GPS Rover be 8 Tolerances Elia 4 GPS Utilities K 9 Peripherals Hi 5 Configure P a 0 About SuryCE Instrument Setup p115
286. he North East and Elevation fields on the dialog box e Apply Angle Balance This option performs an angle balance on the traverse lines before the selected adjustment routine is processed With this option enabled the Angle Balance Shot must be chosen from the Angle Balance Measurement Dialog box The adjustment method is applied without angle balance computations e Vertical Error Adjustment The vertical error between the starting and ending points will be calculated and displayed in the results screen An adjustment value is determined and applied to the traverse points proportional to their measured distance Report Point Adjustment The adjusted point coordinates and the original point coordinates will be displayed in the results display under the adjusted point comparison section e Report Unadjusted Points Displays the unadjusted points in the results screen e Report Sideshots Displays sideshot data original and adjusted in the results screen If Angle Balance is enabled you will be asked for the closing angle shot and the reference closing angle screen will appear which you complete as described in the Angle Balance section above The closure method will be applied to the coordinates before or after angle balance depending upon whether angle balance is enabled The routine will conclude for all three closure methods by displaying the final adjusted angles distances and coordinates The coordinate values in the C
287. he Road menu JOB SURYCE File Equip Survey COGO 1 Centerline Editor d 6 Draw Template ug 2 Draw Centerline 46 gt 7 Utilities 3 Profile Editor 8 Store Sections H 4 Draw Profile pe 9 Stake Slope a 5 Template Editor 0 Stake Road fy Centerline Editor This command allows you to enter new centerlines as well as recall and edit existing centerline files Centerline files in SurvCE are ASCII files with a CL extension When the routine is selected a dialog will appear in which you can load existing centerlines or begin entry of new centerline information p344 Input Edit Centerline C ede ia Start Pt ID w 127 6211 92 0000 56 7062 1 27 6211 2 19 6211 3 08 32777 Load Add Edit Delete EQ Save As Clear This icon at the top of the screen clears out all information in the dialog in preparation for entering a new centerline With no centerline file loaded or saved yet the file name in the upper left is displayed as None Start Pt ID Ifthe centerline starts on a point number that exists in your current coordinate crd file you can enter the point number here and it will recall and display the starting coordinates The point can also be selected from the list or map using the appropriate icons Start Station You must enter the starting station for the centerline Station is the same as the European term Chainage Many surve
288. he data displayed and entered in the current job Job Settings New Job System Ga Options Stake l Coordinate Display Order North East ih Angle Entry and Display Azimuth Vertical Observation Display Zenith Angle 7 Distance Observation Display Slope is Slope Entry and Display Percent Station Display e g 1 00 000 00 O00 a e Coordinate Display Order This option allows you to display coordinates with the order of North then East or East then North e Angle Entry and Display Options are Bearing or Azimuth This applies to numerous commands such as prompting and displays in Sideshot Traverse p52 the backsight as azimuth or bearing Intersections and Inverse e Vertical Observation Display Allows you to set the default prompting to Zenith 0 degrees up 90 degrees level Vertical Angle 90 degrees up 0 degrees level or Elevation Difference up 1s positive in absolute units down is negative Normally combine Elevation Difference with Horizontal Distance If combined with Slope Distance the non zero Elevation Difference will be used to compute the equivalent zenith angle and will reduce the Slope Distance to a lesser Horizontal Distance Applies to entries in Manual Total Station mode e Distance Observation Display Options are Slope or Horizontal This applies to the values displayed from total station readings e Slope Entry and Display Whenever slopes are reported or prompted you
289. he elevations on the sequence of points or you can separately enter a profile This method is useful for slope staking ex isting flow lines where you simply take two shots at either end create an alignment by point number then set the slope stakes at the user entered slope ratio Design Files This is the most formal way of slope staking but typically only applies to uniform simple road drainage ditch or levee projects where the pivot offset positions do not vary from station to station While all methods require that a centerline be selected the design file method additionally requires at a minimum a template file and a profile vertical alignment For more complex roads superelevation files and template lane width transition files may also be entered With the exception of the centerline profiles and simple templates the other files are usually created at the office using Carlson Civil Carlson Roads or TakeOff and then downloaded onto the field computer p389 Note Whenever the Road Design File option is selected templates can be selected as a single TPL file or as a series of templates organized as a TSF file Template Series File The TSF file can be entered within Road Utilities If the left pavement lane of a road expanded from 10 to 20 for a passing lane from station 1100 to 1200 you can create two templates Road1 with the 10 lane and Road2 with the 20 lane Then if you create the Template S
290. he feature code list will appear with the fieldbook symbol above e Prompt for Point Notes Point Notes are additional descriptions that can be stored with a point A regular point consists of a point ID number or alphanumeric northing easting elevation and description up to 32 characters Point Notes are a way to add an unlimited number of lines of tex t to a point With this toggle enabled you will be prompted for notes after collecting a point The notes are stored in a file with the same name as the coordinate file but with a NOT extension For example a job called TOPO CRD would have a note file called TOPO NOT e 3D Mode This option allows you to toggle between 2D or 3D data In 2D mode all elevations will be stored as 0 0 e Use Virtual Keyboard This option provides a software keyboard for data collectors without keyboards e Use Graphic Icon This option toggles between the traditional letter icons in versions prior to SurvCE 2 0 and the new graphic icons e Use Audible Alerts Turn on or off data collector sound alarms e Use Alphanumeric Format When this option is enabled SurvCE will allow alphanumeric point numbers such as 2A or T1105 When this option is disabled SurvCE will only allow numeric point number entry Note this setting only affects new jobs not existing ones Using purely numeric files can increase operation speed in very large files however this option limits points to just over 32 000 An al
291. he stake anywhere the Forward Back portion of the screen becomes vertical Current Fill or Current Cut In this fluid stake out mode you simply move in or out from the centerline to set the slope stake there is no correct or incorrect forward or back station So the program instead reports the vertical up to the fill slope above you or down to the cut below you Ground Catch p403 If you are moving out to the catch point along the ground you would get a report of CrtF 1 25 or some such number and the Current Fill amount to the ground would decrease as you approach the catch The actual stakeout screen would appear as shown below Note that some surveyors will watch the lower line 1 6 1 for 3 65 and just keep moving out until they see 2 1 or the desired slope and drive the stake Others will watch the CrtF value decrease to 0 and drive the stake or watch OUT decrease to 0 SLOPE STK N 960388 3320 E 1838226 903 7 934 995 COTf 16 446 HRMS 0 032 VRMS 0 048 Sta 9 19 714 R15 054 OUT 0 79 CrtF 0 40 Design Fill 2 000 1 from 957 219 Fill 2 223 1 644 1 for 3 654 Storing the Slope Stake and Offset Stake Points When S for Store is pressed you may store the actual slope stake point Y ou can also store a first offset point since the slope stake itself can be removed by construction The slope stake information is typically written on the first offset stake Then you can also stake a sec
292. he two solutions The rover uses this difference information to prevent any position jumps from occurring when transitioning into or out of RTK Extend mode such that the geodetic datum of the rover position will always be the same as the RTK base station position The RTK extend process works by continually forcing agreement between the Starfire and RTK rover solutions at every epoch while receiving a signal from the base station Prior to initializing Starfire at each epoch the RTK solution is modified by the delta received from the base station By first applying the delta Starfire is initialized to a true Starfire position but with a known offset from the desired RTK position When the system transitions to the RTK extend mode all that is required is to subtract the delta prior to outputting the position Had the delta not first been applied to the RTK position prior to initialization Starfire would immediately attempt to return to the correct Starfire position once it was no longer locked to the RTK position In addition to the loss of accuracy that would result if the Starfire solution diverged from the RTK position there would also be a sudden position jump when the link to the base station was restored Thus by making use of this additional information the rover is able to extend RTK through position gaps that would normally result from loss of communication with the base station Setup Setting up an RTK system to take advantage of RTK Ext
293. hen generate a report of all of the sets measured from the specified occupation point Set Review Enter Station to Review 1197 6 1194 In the figure above select a point number and tap OK to view the report The report is shown below p275 Feview File Type Setup FSight HorzA4ngle Distance Vertical A BDO 1197 1195 0 0000 1000 0000 90 0000 1197 1198 90 0000 100 0000 90 0000 1197 1198 270 0000 100 0000 2 0 00L 1197 1195 180 0000 1000 0000 270 001 Means Horz ngle HZ Dif FS Diff BE Dif Distance Diff g0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 O lt 0000 100 0000 C lt gt Leveling This routine allows you to run trigonometric level loops using a total station or digital level loops using a digital level There are also manual entry modes available for both types of level loops The raw data collected for a total station is slope distance zenith angle and prism height For digital levels the vertical difference and if available the horizontal distance is stored in the raw data file The calculation routines assume there is only one loop per level file A benchmark is required at the beginning of the loop BM and a benchmark is required at the end of the loop BM After the BM measurements back to a known elevation TP and measurements forward to establish an elevation TP are alternated Any number of side shots to points SS or stations STA is allowed while traversing Spurs series of TP and TP measurements
294. his will return you directly to stakeout If using G PS the HRMS VRMS and PDOP values are also displayed as are Fields for Point ID and point description input After the point has been stored you are taken back to the Station Offset dialog to select the next point for staking When you return to the Stakeout Line screen after storing a point there is a tab option for Next Alignment that allows you to define a new alignment without exiting the command Stake Offset p245 This command will stake out up to two user defined horizontal offsets to a centerline at any station as well as an unlimited number of offsets per station if you are using a predefined Cutsheet Station and Offset List loaded using the Settings button It will also stake out the centerline itself Station intervals can be entered and the program will auto detect at the user s option special stations such as the TS SC PC PT CS ST and vertical curve points including high and low points Because individual stations and offsets can be entered and also because pre made station and offset lists can be recalled in the field Offset Stakeout can be applied to virtually any offset point along a centerline Prerequisites and Procedures Stake Offset requires both a horizontal and vertical alignment If total stations are involved Stake Offset passes through the normal backsight confirmation screens that Store Points and other forms of Stakeout require The Offset
295. hough office plans may predict the position of the catch points slope staking is necessary to accurately determine the catch points based on actual field conditions Slope stakes are often set at an offset to the actual catch points since stakes at the precise top of slope or bottom of fill are likely to be knocked out by earthmoving activity Furthermore slope stakes are often marked with information on the slopes and distances in toward centerline or in toward the building pad or other feature The information on the slope stake is often written in progressive form distance and slope from offset stake to slope stake distance and slope from slope stake to outside shoulder distance and slope from outside shoulder to edge of pavement on into centerline Thus the slope stake placed safely beyond the area of construction tells the story of the cuts and fills in toward centerline or toward the center of the work Catch points for both cut and fill are shown in the typical section graphics below p387 See these two figures P k Dt Fa i rt L f Cilan Pe ra Note in the cut example above bottom figure how the catch point may be closer or farther from the pivot point based on the slope of the original ground With flat ground at virtually the same elevation as the centerline of the road the catch is found approximately 15 feet from the pivot point in the base of the ditch But with ground sloping slightly uphill it take
296. ht if you chose slant height Antenna height is displayed in the original dialog Post Processing Logging Static Data for Thales Ashtech in SurvCE There are two methods to log static data with a Thales Ashtech receiver The first is from the Log Static Data button under the SURVEY tab of the main menu The second is using Configure Rover and Configure Base as described below Logging Static Data from the Survey Menu Go to the SURVEY tab and select the Log Static Data button The result is a dialog with six buttons or an error message stating that the data collector could not connect to the receiver If you receive the error message check connections on the data card From here one can start a file leave the file recording ex it manage files pause recording stop processing resume recording start processing or start tagging sites To manage files see below If a file is open but paused you can choose to resume it here p305 Ashtech Thales Setup File Nore Start File If a file is open you can now tag sites Otherwise open a file by clicking the Start File button The receiver chooses the file name based on the names of the last site in the file The antenna height and type can be changed via the Change Antenna button see Changing the Antenna The interval can be selected from the list or you can enter your own in seconds using the edit field Start New File Oh Cancel Elevation Mask 10 Antenn
297. i 7 2 Traverse Defaults EPI CL p EF EPT Edit Polyline Start i 60 it GPS Simulation screen capture examples are shown in these next four figures p523 Store Point Cancel Point Number Target Height 3 3 281 Nra0 73 2243 E 3030 958 d 2 96 7679 HEMS 0 045 VEMS 0 087 POOP 33 200 Point Description LIP Store Point Point Number Target Height 2 3 281 M 5073 2443 E 5030 9558 2 98 7679 HRMS 0 045 YRS 0 057 POOP 3 200 EP ERD Point Description LIP p524 Ep Cancel Add 1D 1036452394 gt Edge of pavement Char Road Surface Wacadarri Char Location Street Numbers Name Char Condition Good Char Measured Width Ep Cancel AdddD 1036452394 gt Edge of pavement Char Road Surface Macadam hi Char Location Street Numbers Name 115 to 175 Robin Road The sequence of shoots started with GPS Simulation storing points 2 and 3 as EP codes Point 3 was stored as EP END A 3D Polyline was drawn between 2 to 3 and GIS prompting popped up after point 3 was stored shown above Note in the Condition field the operator input data not found in the default settings Point 4 was stored using manual total station as a UP point code Point 4 s UP GIS prompting appeared after point 4 was stored Points 5 through 7 were stored as a closed polygon This was done by storing point 7 as EP1 CLO to close back to the start point 5 of the EP
298. ial Codes within the Feature Code command p98 Special Codes Code Separator s String Designator BS Begin Line ES End Line Cc Arc PC EC Arc PT CL Close Figure CLR Close Rectangular Offset Horizontal Carlson Eagle Point pak MO DOT Geopak NC DOT TMOSS CO DOT Geopak OH DOT InRoads WA DOT When a specified format is selected such as Geopak MO DOT the standard codes all change including the separator code Whereas for normal coding a space is used to separate a description from a special code eg EP PC with MO DOT coding a dash would be used as the separator as in EP EC The users of these systems need to be familiar with the required coding For example with Geopak MO DOT coding a typical edge of bituminous survey might be coded 201 BS 201 201 201 C 201 C 201 EC 201 201 ES Note that Geopak requires a start line and end line and requires coding on all are points C or EC This coding will process correctly in SurvCE but SurvCE will also process this coding if the BS is omitted on the first measurement Use of the special icons within the Hgt Description prompt screen will append the correct special codes that are active Geopak also requires points to process linework so it will not respond to the OH feature and the CLR feature which create lines without always creating points for each vertice With Geopak style configurations you can click the p99 Setting
299. iately to Position 1 Y ou will be prompted to press OK to see Position 2 Having defined a window of searching Center will move that window to a new center position Y ou will be prompted to Sight on Centered Position and Press OK The Define button prompts you to shoot the lower left and upper right positions which are then displayed above under Work Area If the Work Area is set to start at 0 0000 horizontal for example searching would send the instrument to the backsight point p127 Work Area Settings PowerSearch Only Hz Search Eoo Minimum Dist o Y Search 15 00 Maximum Dist 1312 332 Work Area Hz Left 0 00 00 Hz Right 0 00 00 Upper o 00 00 v Lower 0 00 oo Define Center Show Manufacturer Setup Instructions For manufacturer specific information please consult with the Instrument Setup by Manufacturer section Setup GPS Both Base and Rover GPS are configured with Receiver and RTK in the same manner Base GPS requires additional setup and 1s covered in the GPS Base section GPS Rovers section covers the configuration of GPS networks and internet corrections Receiver Tab This tab is used to Configure the receivers Antenna set the elevation mask and for some gps position rates p128 Antenna Type Antenna Height 5 25 ft e vet C Elevation Mask 10 Receiver Model SurvCE will auto detect the receiver model and display it in this list It will als
300. ie i Active Light Bar Model Mikrofyn a Grading Tolerance 1 LOM Port come M To activate the light bar follow these steps Plug in the light bar to any of your device s unused COM ports and turn it on Enter the Peripherals menu and select the Light Bar tab as shown above Check Active Select the Type of light bar you are using Set the Grading Tolerance to the maximum permissible deviation from the target path or elevation 6 Specify the Port the Light Bar is plugged in to ARTD About SurvCE This command allows you to view information about Carlson SurvCE and your registration p193 About SurvCe SurvcE Version 2 00 01 7 01 07 Copyright C 2001 2007 Carlson Software TS DEMO GPS DEMO ROBOTICS DEMO ROADS DEMO Change Registration The Change Registration button will open the SurvCE product registration dialog box This dialog will allow the user to register SurvCE p194 SURV This chapter provides information on using the commands from the Survey menu JOB SURYCE File Equip EMEY coco Road 1 Store Points B 6 Grid Face 2 Stake Points A Resection 3 Stake Line Arc Fa 8 Set Collection he 4 Stake Offset a 9 Leveling on 5 Eley Difference By ORemote Elevation l JOB SURYCE File Equip EEY coco Road 1 Store Points m 6 Auto by Interval 2 Stake Points a 7 Log Raw GPS 3 Stake Line Arc fa 4 Stake Offset te 5 Ele
301. ifference slope distance vertical angle percent slope slope ratio bearing and azimuth between two 3D points The user can pick or enter the number of two points select a polyline segment or pick two points on any polylines from MAP p486 MAP VIEW lt Calculate Y 4634 1549 425226 7657 2 0 0000 Second Point 43 Y 4611 9357 25350 7 7 24 4 2465 Horiz Dist 133 8636 Ely Diff 4 2465 Slope Dist 133 9309 Vert Ang 358 10 58 94 zenith Angle 91 49 01 06 Slope percent 3 17 Slope ratio 31 52 1 Bearing S80 26 44 31 E North Azimuth 99 33 15 69 TOOLS The Tools menu is found next to the COGO menu in MAP view Below you will find each feature described p487 MAP VIEW E x VEW DRAW coco feels E oeoc L onvert Polylines to 2D Cto FPolyline Edit tI Offset Settings Traverse Defaults Surface Field to Finish Polyline to CL P2CL Converts any polyline into a centerline file for use in the Roading commands and in Centerline Curve and Offset Stakeout You will be prompted for starting station and you will obtain a centerline report Use Reverse Polyline RV and repeat the command to change the direction of the stationing If we choose the existing polyline as shown we obtain the following CL file report MAP VIEW PlinezcL Undo Beginning Station lt 0 00 000 gt Cmd 400 000 Layer PR RD STAM CL file report Warning Polyline should have b
302. ight Tab Left Shift Tab Up Down Arrows Move through the list items Tab Move to the next tab stop Edit Box Enter Move to the next tab stop For any measurement screen p40 if focus is in the description edit box take a reading For all other edit boxes ENTER moves through the tab stops O Right Left Arrows Move through the text like standard windows Up Down Arrows Move to the next tab stop Down Tab Up Shift Tab Tab Move to the next tab stop e Tab O Enter Move to the next tab stop O Right Left Arrows Move through the tabs Right Next Tab Left Previous Tab Up Down Arrows Move to the next tab stop Down Tab Up Shift Tab Tab Move to the next tab stop Abbreviations Adr Address AR Angle Right Avg Average Az Azimuth Bk Back Calc Calculate Char Character Chk Check cm Centimeter Coord s Coordinate s Ctrl Control Desc Description Dev Deviation p41 Diff Difference Dist Distance El Elevation Fst Fast ft Foot Fwd Forward HD Horizontal Distance HI Height of Instrument Horiz Horizontal Ht Height or Height of Antenna with GPS HT Height of Target ID Identifier ift International Foot in Inch Inst Instrument Int Interval L Left m Meter No Number OS Offset Prev Previous Pt Point ID Pts Points R Right Rdg Reading SD Slope Distance Sta Station Std Standard Vert Ve
303. ight for a 2 slope pavement and shoulder road The last slope in each column acts as the pivot point for the slope stake calculation The fill slope is set at 4 1 and the cut slope at 3 1 p362 ee cael File 12 000 000 EF 12 000 2 000 EP 8 000 Susu GE 8 000 4 000 GB Cut Fill Grades W Right Side Same as Left C Percent Ratio Left Side CUT Slope FILL Slope Right Side CUT Slope FILL Slope Using this template cut slopes on the left side of the road will find the pivot at the base of ditch while fill slopes on the right side of the road will pivot from the edge of shoulder Draw Template p363 The Draw Template command will draw the selected template on the screen All the zooming commands Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Window Zoom Previous and Pan are available to you in the Draw Template command Tap the Menu button to exit this command The figure below illustrates this command using the demo tpl template s TPL VIEW Template Sc Y 10 00 C Sur o Data DEMO tpl Utilities Road Utilities includes necessary routines to convert centerlines profiles and cross sections from other formats to the formats used by SurvCE SurvCE uses ASCII file formats for centerlines cl files profiles pro files and cross sections sct files These same formats are used by other Carlson products such as Carlson Civil formerly SurvCADD Carlson Survey and Carlson Road
304. ignment method the state plane coordinate is translated to the local coordinate Then the rotation can use either state plane grid north or geodetic north Scale Factor GPS For most applications the Scale Factor should be set to 1 0 to work on the grid coordinate system using GPS The scale factor represents the combined grid elevation factor that reduces ground distances to grid Therefore for GPS the scale factor acts as a divisor All GPS coordinates will also be divided by the scale factor In this way the same ground to grid number can be used to convert total station shots to the grid or alternately to convert GPS shots to the ground To match the coordinates of any standard transform ation e g UTM NAD83 the scale factor should be set to 1 0 When configured to total stations the Calculate option will calculate the combined grid elevation factor from any entered coordinate based on your current state plane zone setting This can p170 allow you to go ground to grid to reduce the distance measured by total station to the sea level grid distance of GPS If set to a GPS configuration Calculate becomes Read GPS The Read GPS option is grayed out if a multi point localization is active In that case the scale factor is fixed by the localization itself and is the inverse of the value appearing in localization because within Units we display the ground to grid number whereas in localization we displa
305. ile so that if you Cancel the above screen and re enter Store Sections you will be prompted again whether to 0 125 0 150 0 150 0 150 0 150 Left 23 5759 Left 33 2363 Left 19 3923 Right 1 9816 Right 18 1201 Process SCT File 991 2901 989 9193 996 8921 998 2340 997 0731 Current SCT Section file 0 125 L23 58 0 150 L33 24 0 150 L19 39 0 150 R1 98 0 150 R18 12 Discard temporary SCT Section file save process or discard the cross section data collected earlier Options When Storing in Raw Geodimeter Format Different options present themselves when the Raw G eodimeter Format or File Type 1s chosen p422 Cancel Select RAW File When Raw Geodimeter is selected a distinct set of screens are obtained This particular format was adapted for highway departments and survey companies that had built cross sectioning practices around the Geodimeter format This method requires that you enter the station chainage being surveyed and only uses the centerline position to advise you on your station and offset A horizontal alignment is not required The program detects the selection of this format and before proceeding opens with a starting screen where job based information is entered p423 Cross Section OE Project 104 Morth Info As Builts 240 300 Operator F Temp 63 0 Press 30 10 Signal Ht 2 100 x 5ec Type Origin
306. ilities Topcon GPS Utilities Trimble Troubleshooting GPS Heights Handheld Hardware Miscellaneous Instrument Configuration Supported File Formats Raw Data File Format p6 611 620 620 626 627 627 627 630 630 633 633 End User License Agreement Copyright 2007 Carlson Software All Rights Reserved CAUTION READ THIS NOTICE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING SOFTWARE Use of this software indicates acceptance of the terms and conditions of the Software License Agreement SurvCE End User License Agreement This End User License Agreement henceforth EULA is a legal agreement between you the individual or single entity henceforth you and Carlson Software Inc henceforth Carlson Software for the software accompanying this EULA and may or may not include printed materials associated media and electronic documentation henceforth this software Exercising your right to use this software binds you to the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms contained herein do not use this software SOFTWARE LICENSE This software is protected by United States copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as applicable intellectual property laws and treaties This software is licensed not sold GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants you the following rights e You may install and use one copy of this software or any prior version for the same operating system on a single computer The primary us
307. in following figure below Note that Macadam is highlighted and will be the default value If there are more than six attribute List Values scroll bars will appear This defines only one GIS entry Material for the EP field code Each GIS prompt for the field code EP e g Material Location Condition Width Slope and so on will require being created using Add in the Feature pop up box as shown earlier in this tutorial Hew attribute Name MATERIAL Prompt Foad Surface Default Value Macadam Set List values isst Char DEEDEE Add Remove Up Down OK _ Add Remove uo Down x Add Remove Up and Down pertain to GIS List Values prompting Add and Remove create or delete List Values entries Up or Down reorders the highlighted List Value up or down OK exits the GIS prompting screen retaining the GIS p515 prompting entries and Cancel exits and discards all new inputs The completed GIS field code for EP is shown below in the Feature dialog MATERIAL LOCATION CONDITION With all of the GIS Features input Material Location Condition Width and Slope the operator can now select Save to store the GIS prompting for the field code EP When storing points in the Survey menu in Store Points with EP or EP 3D linework when ended will prompt for EP GIS data as defined here If 2D or 3D linework is created the GIS data will be attached to the linework Note that Location Condition and Width are required i
308. in point 1 and point 2 or key in the known azimuth or bearing followed by the OK button In an open traverse key in the stored point numbers that represent the values for the known control points at the end of the traverse or key in the known azimuth or bearing The adjustment report should be presented and the adjustment should be complete The angle balance point number 7 will not be adjusted to fit point number 2 and can be discarded p508 Reference Closing Angle Cancel Measured Closing Bearing NW45 00 08 Measured Closing Azimuth 314 59 52 Angular Error 0 000800000 From Point 1 To Point 2 Reference Closing Angle idd mmss 45 0000 Format one C SE CSA of NAW C AP Tutorial 4 Defining Field Codes Line Layer Properties amp GIS Prompting SurvCE can have one pre defined FCL Feature Code List file loaded with the job coordinate CRD file The Feature Code List file stores pre defined field codes that define Line Layer drawing properties and optionally GIS prompting More than one FCL file can exist but only one can be loaded at a time per job coordinate CRD file The operator builds this FCL file using option 5 Feature Code List in the File main menu See the figure below p509 JOB VA_Beach E MAP gt aF Equip Sury COGO Road 1 Job 6 Data Transfer 2 Job Settings 4 Configure Reading 3 List Points After you select 5 Feature Code List the following Code
309. ine up vertically VC Lng For road jobs you can enter the vertical curve length in this column This 1s the total length of the vertical curve If the length entered is 600 this means that the vertical alignment transitions through a curve parabola beginning 300 units feet or meters before the PV I and ending 300 p354 units after the PVI Ifa vertical curve is uneven that is it transitions from say 400 feet before the PVI to 200 feet after the PVI then the curve must be entered using the form 400 200 the before and after distances separated by a dash SurvCE assumes all vertical curves are parabolas U S road industry standard However you can tap the circular curve option when that applies For sewer and water line alignments there is typically no vertical curve transition so this column can be left blank or Os can be entered for vertical curve lengths Check Station When the profile for a highway job has been entered in a dialog you can also enter a value to Check Stations This feature is at the bottom of the dialog This will check the grades at any desired station When entering stations you may include the that is often used as in 12 680 5 English and 126 80 5 metric Load The Load command presents a list of all previously stored profiles When one is selected it displays the profile information in the dialog To load a stored file you simply enter the name for ex ample Demo No file extension i
310. ing angle field will update and display the defined angle There is no need to select a format from the format field if point numbers are used p76 Reference Closing Angle Measured Closing Bearing N45 00 06 Measured Closing Azimuth 314 59 54 Angular Error 0 000600000 From Point 24 Ta Point 25 Reference Closing Angle dd mmss3 fa5 0000 Format One OSE COSW NW Caz Pressing the OK button or the enter key will execute the angle balance process and the process results will be displayed The results display shows the closure results before angle balance and after angle balance Review File East Error 0 31194 Vertical Error 0 00000 Hz Dist Error 0 49576 Sl Dist Error 0 49576 Traverse Lines gt 1 sideshot Traverses gt 1 sideshots gt oO Horiz Dist Traversed 10257 250 Slope Dist Traversed 1025 7 250 Closure Precision 1 in 20690 p77 Review File Ending Coordinates N LOOO0 3 73 heimuth Error 37 02 17 Morth Error i 30T East Error i 26122 Vertical Error 00000 Hz Dist Error i 46687 al Dist Error 46607 Total Hz Dist Traversed 10257 2250 Total Sl Dist Traversed 10257 250__ Closure Precision 1 in 21970 The angular adjustment applied to each traverse leg is also displayed along with unadjusted angles and adjusted angles for each traverse leg The adjusted coordinates are written to the coordinate file replacing the unadjusted coordinate valu
311. ing your PC screen Observe the above dialog and with your device properly connected to the PC be prepared to click the Next button at the bottom Now look at the mobile device screen for the PC Link icon First click Next on the PC Then immediately double tap the PC Link icon You may have to do the double tap more than once If successful after you press Next the following screen will appear and the connection will be made p13 Cart Oori ec In ActiveSync you will then see the New Partnership dialog Click No to setting up a partnership and click Next When you see the icon in the system tray and it is green with no x through it you are connected Once you are connected you should see the following dialog It should say Connected pl4 Microsoft Active Sync File View Tools Help Ga SPNG Senet le re Explore Guest Pals E Hide Details Troubleshooting If you cannot get connected make sure that no other program is using the COM port Programs to check for include any Fax Modem software and other data transfer software If you see anything you think may be using the COM port shut it down and retry the connection with ActiveSync Enabling COM Port Communication for ActiveSync on Allegro Panas onic Toughbook 01 and other CE devices In order for ActiveSync to communicate it may be necessary to direct the CE device to utilize the COM port as a default Some may come set
312. ingle base receiver The GPS Rover command is used to set the rover receiver to the correct parameters and to instruct the receiver that it 1s in fact a rover Connecting a GPS Rover to a Modem or Base Network There are several methods for connecting to an available network The RTK tab in the GPS Rover dialog configures the modems and network settings p141 Current Comms Receiver Device AirLink Configure Network Configure RTE Port lcom2 gt Baud i5200 Parity None Stop Bits io Message Type J tm si io Send Rover Position to Network The dialog is designed to be filled out from the top to bottom and from left to right First select the device you will use to connect to the remote modem or network GPS Rover Current Comms Receiver Device AirLink Configure Network Internal GSM AJ Configure Internal Satel RTE Port Bluetooth Cell ee Cable or Generic Device Parity pacific Crest PDL Message Ty Satel AirLink Base ID Send Rover Position to Network If a particular receiver model supports an internal modem or radio meaning it is integrated into the receiver those devices are shown first in the list When an internal device is shown in the list it means that model could have the device p142 inside but does not guarantee it The user will have to know if the receiver was purchased with an integrated radio or modem External radios a
313. instructions to the target point continually updating You can click RR to stake out a 3 point arc by railroad definition Define Arc PC PT Value This option for defining the arc requires four input parameters the Start point End Point Curve Direction and any of the following Radius Point Radius Length Arc Length Delta Angle or Degree of Curvature The starting station defaults to 0 but can also be changed See the figure below Define Arc PC PT Value Ww Direction C Curve Left Curve Right End Point 13 EA Start Sta 0 00 000 End 0 48 108 When selecting the PC point option Radius Point and PT point enter the point ID choose the point from the list points screen button or pick the point from the map button After selecting OK you will be directed to the Stakeout Arc dialog After selecting OK to the Stakeout Arc dialog the main stakeout window appears in map view Here we are staking station 75 at 0 offset In total station mode an p235 angle to turn to and a distance to go will be displayed at the bottom of the screen Taking a reading to the current target position will update the display with a new out in distance and a right left distance depending upon your reference settings in Configure Reading You should see your points and arc in the map with an icon of the point you need to stakeout to the circle with the X inside When using GPS after selecting OK to the Stakeout Arc dialog you will be pl
314. instruments which have a Sokkia or Set emulation mode including Nikon Pentax and Topcon The advantage of Sokkia emulation is that the Sokkia driver includes a 2 way setting that will upload configuration settings into the instrument such as units prism constant and the backsight circle Most important for stakeout the 2 way setting will upload the angle to turn so that you turn to zero to get on target The Sokkia Series 30R is reflectorless The On key is the upper right which takes you to the Measure screen where it is ready to work with SurvCE Commands would not be accepted for ex ample if you were in the Config screen Use the instrument to activate reflectorless mode and in SurvCE be sure to set target height to zero The gun will control prism offset in non prism modes Sokkia Motorized Series This driver is necessary to utilize the motorized features of the motorized instruments For example in stakeout it will turn to the point automatically The motorized features will turn to the appropriate horizontal and vertical angle in most commands when the instrument is set to Remote mode p568 Note that baud rates on motorized instruments must be set to 9600 in remote mode but are typically set to 1200 baud in direct mode Change on the instrument and in SurvCE Equip Com Setup The Settings options for the motorized instruments are shown below p569 Instrument Setup
315. ints This command will list all of the points in the current coordinate crd file You can also edit any point in the list Pts 189 lt 1187 996 24 19952 22 9967 26 19932 21 9973 39 19959 7 6 9983 40 19967 35 9992 97 19984 48 9949 11 19966 32 9939 70 19946 44 9930 56 19923 33 9950 27 20072 02 991261 20115 37 9 395 Edit i Find Delete p63 The above figure shows the List Points dialog The point list includes Point ID Northing Easting Elevation and Description Columbs can be shifted to condense the display as desired The new positions however are not stored Details The number of points and highest point number in the file will now appear in the Details option Current Job Point ID Report Highest Point ID 1187 Used Points 6 68 1001 1187 Number of used points 189 Unused Points 1 5 7 07 69 1000 Number of unused points 998 hyt Settings Select the Settings button to customize the List Points display The next figure shows the Settings dialog for List Points p64 Settings Field Name Display Name Point ID Pt ID Northing Northing Easting Easting Elevation Elevation Description Description Motes Motes Show Point Notes 4cdd to Next Pt ID 1 Display Name Eley Digits Nor Eas Digits Pio 0 000 0 00 Update Item Move Down Show Point Notes Notes can be placed in any order on the list or can be disabled as shown above On
316. ints for the beginning of the arc radius and end of arc for purposes of stakeout set out p467 Modify Join JN This command allows you to join polylines Enter D to specify a new max imum separation distance then select the polylines on the MAP screen The advantage of joining polylines is that they can then be offset as a unit and the vertices of the offset polylines can be turned into points for stake out The offset command in effect does all the complicated bearing bearing intersects for you For ex ample if the resulting polyline were a pipeline with a 20 meter total right of way then to stake the right of way points you would offset the polyline 10 units left then 10 units right then turn both offset polylines into points S MAP VIEW E x Dst 40 00 Selected plines gt 2 Layer ONC p468 MAP VIEWS FILE YIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Cmd Layer CONC Modify Trim TM This allows you to trim polylines to the edge of other polylines just like in AutoCAD Then the command Polyline to Points P2P will turn all vertices including the trimmed end points into points for stakeout MAP VIEW HE Selected cutting edges gt 1 Layer CONC p469 MAP VIEW HE Wndo lt Select pline gt Layer CONC Modify Reverse Polyline RV When you turn a polyline into points it will start the point numbering at the beginning of the polyline Thus it may be useful to control the direction of the p
317. is being logged If you wish to leave the receiver logging you can exit the setup and the next time you come back to post processing the software will know you are still logging a file File Manager Under the SURVEY tab of the main menu select the Log Static Data button You will either see a screen with three buttons or an error message stating that the data collector could not connect to the receiver If you receive an error message check connections and the data card Click on the File Manager button to see what files are on the receiver s card In this dialog you see a list of files along with their respective sizes p294 Files on Receiver 11281459 PDC 62988 bytes 11281520 PDC 33994 bytes SOK1 PDC 9932 bytes 112891614 PDC 33464 bytes 00463320 PDC 5624 bytes 11281709 PDC 32532 bytes 00463330 PDC 479100 bytes 00460250 PDC 56208 bytes 27 files Free memory 476160 bytes At the bottom of the dialog the free memory is shown along with a cancel and a delete button If you are running low on memory you can delete files here To delete a file click on the file from the list and the tap the delete button You will be asked to verify that you want to delete the file To exit this dialog click Exit Group Editor Go to the SURVEY tab and select the Log Static Data button You will see a screen with three buttons or an error message stating that the data collector could not connect to the receiver If y
318. isplay ALT D Store Points GPS Offsets The GPS Offset command allows you to calculate and store points by specifying p216 an offset from a GPS position Offsets can either be entered manually or read automatically from a laser There are three GPS offset methods Distance Angle Intersection and Two Point The current method can be set from the Method tab Distance Angle Laser Offset Results Intersect 2 Point Distance Angle Offset In the Distance Angle method offsets can be specified manually by choosing the OFFSET tab or with a laser by choosing the LASER tab e Manual Offset Under the OFFSET tab offsets are specified by entering azimuth vertical and horizontal distance offset values as show below The azimuth can either be specified with respect to north or with respect to a specified point Current GPS coordinates are shown at the bottom and can be updated via the Read GPS button When all necessary data has been entered you ll be able to store by tapping Store or preview the point you re storing by selecting Map or Results p217 Distance Angle Laser HINA Results Method AZ Reference Hz Offset ft f North Point tt Offset Azimuth vertical Offset Fead GPS Store N 9870 6196 E 20101 5662 Z 97 408 HAMS 2 643 VRMS 2 696 AUTONOMOUS Laser Offset For more accurate offsets lasers can be used for either the distance with direction and vertical off
319. ited to any images photographs animations video audio music text or applets incorporated into this software the accompanying printed materials and any copies of this software are the sole property of Carlson Software and or its suppliers This software is protected by United States copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as applicable intellectual property laws and treaties Treat this software as you would any other copyrighted material U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government of this software or its documentation is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 i1 of the Right in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFAARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable The manufacturer is Carlson Software Inc 102 W Second Street Maysville KY 41056 LIMITED WARRANTY e CARLSON SOFTWARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT ps REGARDING THESE MATERIALS CARLSON SOFTW ARE MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN AS IS BASIS IN NO EVENT SHALL CARLSON SOFTWARE BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL COLLATERAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURC
320. iver Similar hook points exist on all Sokkia antennas Sokkia GSR2600 GPS The GSR2600 is a modular version of the Radian IS with a variety of antenna p598 types available The Log Static Data routine in SurvCE will initialize the storing of raw data to the receiver This raw data can be post processed in Sokkia Spectrum Survey Sokkia Axis Axis 3 GPS The Sokkia Axis 3 is the current GIS level GPS product from Sokkia and obtains corrections from Coast Guard beacons WAAS and OmniStar There is no subscription fee for beacons or WAAS but there is for OmniStar The subscription can be by month or year or any other time period even weekend use Accuracy varies on correction method used but is typically sub meter to 3 meters For example 0 5 meter accuracy 1 5 feet is common with beacon corrections when located within 60 miles of a Coast Guard beacon The Ax is 3 is designed for GIS and environmental applications which are effectively addressed by SurvCE through use of attributing on feature codes and through ESRI import and export features GPS Topcon This configuration covers all Topcon GPS receiver types Some of these receivers utilize Glonass satellites as well as the standard U S satellites In the Configure Base routine for Topcon GPS the firmware version of the receiver will be checked and the correct message for setting the base position will be sent according to the firmware version in use Note Glonass
321. k should use the SpiderNet option The SpiderNet Configure window comes up when the Configure button to the right of the SpiderNet option is pressed p147 Configure SpiderNet Name Airlink C3210 Delete Address 166 159 107 139 Port 12345 User Mame ken Password trent Add a new network by selecting lt New gt in the Name combo box and typing in the name of the network and filling out the other fields If the User Name and Password fields are left empty the GPUID message is not sent to the network Just like when using a radio the RTK Port combo box is to identify which port on the receiver should be configured to accept RTK corrections The Baud Parity and Stop Bits combo boxes specify the settings for the RTK port Message Type identifies what type of RTK correction message the receiver should be ex pecting Base ID when using a network is a combo box to select the name of the network or base the modem should connect to Use the Network Configure button to change the bases available in this list Send Rover Position to Network if turned on will cause the receiver to periodically send GGA messages out of the RTK port to the base or network Connecting a Data Collector to the Internet There are several ways of connecting a data collector to the internet Cell phone cards inserted into the data collector connections to a cell phone with a data plan etc These instructions assume that an int
322. ke Road If descriptions are found in the source section file they will be captured by the import process into the sct file for use in SurvCE Input Edit Section File This routine is a convenient cross section editor It can be used for entering new p375 sets of cross sections or for editing and reviewing an existing set of cross sections One nice application is Slope Staking If you know the left and right pivot points on stations to be slope staked you can enter very sim ple two point cross sections consisting of the left pivot offset and elevation and the right pivot offset and elevation Then without taking a cheat sheet into the field you can slope stake by cross section method and the program will seek these pivot points and even interpolate the correct pivot points between entered cross sections A better approach would be to include all break points in the sections from pivot left to pivot right along with descriptions Then Slope Staking will report the progressive information to grade each point from the catch all the way into centerline This section based slope staking is a cross between user defined where you need the cheat sheet and design files where the pivot offsets and elevations are taken from the pivot points in the template as they react with the profile and superelevation files Sections used in Stake Road should be complete cross section files with all offsets to enable precise interpolate
323. ke to the catch and then all the way into centerline These last three options allow you to customize the respective output report To change an item label highlight the item change the Header Label field then tap Update Item You can select an item in the list and turn it ON or OFF no reporting You can also control the order of the report items by using the Move Down and Move Up buttons Changes must be made prior to starting a new cutsheet file Select File Tap this button to select the output file The file name is shown below this button Format Select the format button to configure each cutsheet to your liking Column order and column headers are completely user defined and any column can be turned off if not useful Settings C SurvCeE Data CS PT1 txt Header Label Design Pt Design Pt ID Stake Pt ON Stake Pt ID Delta X ON Delta X Delta Y ON Delta Y Design Elv ON Design Elev Stake Eas ON Stake East Stake Nor OFF Stake North Stake Elv OFF Stake Elev r Header Label CESP UEa St Update Item Cutsheet from Raw M On Off Down pol e Header Label You can substitute header text of your own choice for the defaults Here the text Pt ID was substituted for Design Pt Tap Update Item after changing a Header Label These changes should be done prior to starting a new cutsheet file they cannot be applied retroactively to a file that already contains information However the header line in that fil
324. king has 2 advantages First all sections can be entered in the office as 2 point sections left and right pivot minimizing field paperwork and reference material Secondly odd stations can be staked out eg station 0 27 5 since the pivot points can be straight line p392 interpolated by the program Note Section files can be used for slope staking within the command Stake Road In this routine you can choose sections or templates to stake and you can pick any point to slope stake from so any point on the section can become the pivot point The advantage of slope staking by section file within Stake Road is that you can pick any point greater flexibility The advantage of slope staking by section file within the Stake Slope routine is that it automatically uses the left and right end points of the section as pivot points which means less screen picks are involved greater speed Section files may be entered in Road Utilities or in an external program such as Carlson Civil Roads or TakeOff Choosing the Slope Staking Method When Slope Staking is selected you are presented with a Definition Method screen where you choose among the 4 methods of Slope Staking User Defined Point Defined Alignments Design Files or Section Files The application of these methods is discussed above Slope Staking Definition Method C User Entered C Point Defined Alignments Load Road Net File Select Road Net Element C
325. l An angle of 397 9809 gons is equivalent to 358 degrees 10 minutes and 58 seconds Note you can verify this in Cogo Calculator Conversion tab The Angle Unit configuration impacts commands such as Inverse Traverse Sideshot Input Edit Centerline and other commands where a direction is displayed or entered Zero Azimuth Setting Allows you to specify the direction for zero azimuth North or South J ob Settings Options This tab allows you to set configuration options for the current job p47 Job Settings a x New Job System Format Stake Select File C SurvCE Data ControlJob crd J Time Stamp Each Point Store GPS Accuracy in Raw File Use Code Table for Descriptions Recall Job Road Files Recall Job Localization Auto Load Map L BFL Boeke D emn KAS es e Time Stamp Each Point When enabled a date and time stamp will be noted in the raw file beside each point Raw files in Carlson SurvCE have a RW5 extension and are nearly identical to the TDS RW5 format See the image below for simple SurvCE RWS file Edit Rawfile SUR YCE RWS5 GPS Scale 1 00000000 InstHt FodHt LS 6 5620 Panto Latitude GPS 1186 Mote Longitude Ellipsoid El fm 38 2024 78661844 92 06005592959 Fal x GS PN1186 N 9950 26 70 E 200 2 6182 EL9 40 TE EA o mens S4 TM16 57 18 e em ILII lt gt Add Edt Remove
326. l C ASUR YCEDEMOSPECIAL DATA TESTSECTION XML New File Existing File SCT File sct C ASUR YCEDEMOSPECIAL DATA DEMO SCT New File Existing File Conversion type 7 Export to Land ML Note that if you select XML Info at the top of the screen you ll see some of the header information associated with the XML file to be ex ported or imported L version 1 0 Project testes 2 Created using Carlson SurvCE Software Carlson Software 3 Units Imperial area squareFoot linear USSurveyFoot volume cubicFeet temperature fahrenheit pressure inHG angular radians direction radians To export to LandXML you need to load a LandXML file that already contains a centerline covering all or part of the station range in the SCT cross section file Otherwise you will see an error message p374 There are no alignments in this Q LandxML file Please add at least one alignment to LandxML in order to import selected file Despite the message you can add the horizontal alignment portion to the LandXML file after creating the file with sections only However if you first create a LandXML file containing one or more alignments then choose that existing LandXM L file to export to you can select among those centerline alignments when making the cross section file Select Land ML Alignment Section files in SurvCE can contain descriptions useful for reference in other routines such as Sta
327. l area along with the slope area of a figure defined by a range of points The command actually executes the TRIANGULATION command to compute the slopes within the defined area There are options to include breaklines use a predefined TIN model and prompt for inclusion exclusion areas Consider the figure defined by points numbered 570 97 569 584 585 75 and back to 570 as shown below From the COGO AREA command we see that the horizontal area of the enclosing polygon is 11 653 4122 Sq Ft Performing the SLOPE REPORT yields the same horizontal results but also reports the slope area and the maximum minimum and average elevations and the average slope within the area p484 MAP VIEW oly line ee S a aD An Triangulate amp Contour Range of Points 5 0 97 569 584 565 75 Wildcard descriptions Include Breaklines Use Triangulation File Jessecri Prompt for inclusions exclusions p485 Horizontal 4rea 116533 412250 FEET 11653 4588S0 INT L FEET 1294 822350 YARDS 0 000450 MILES 1082 641150 METERS 0 207 5ACRES 0 10S83HELT ARES Slope Area 16140 2 2250 FEET 16140 336850 INT L FEET 1793 361850 YARDS 0 000650 MILES 1499 465450 METERS O 3 054CRES O 1499HECT ARES AVERAGE ELEVATION 511 4906 AVERAGE SLOPE 62 2649 MAS IMUM ELEVATION 520 0000 MINIMUM ELEVATION 440 9770 Bearing amp 3D Distance 3D This command reports the horizontal distance elevation d
328. l be available for input only if Method is set to Azimuth If Method is set to Two Point then the slope is inactive but still displays the slope between the two points of the line e Method This options lets you choose how to define your line The available options are by two points or one point and an azimuth and slope e Start Station This option defaults to 0 within Stakeout Line but can be changed to any starting station e Confirm NEZ Selecting this button brings up the Confirm NEZ dialog box This screen displays each point as a tab at the top of the screen Listed is the point number Northing Easting Elevation and Description of the point s selected for the line After you confirm the points selecting the back arrow will take you back to the line definition screen Pressing Enter after Confirm NEZ automatically continues to the next screen Define Alignments Horizontal Stakeout Centerline only requires a horizontal alignment but you have the option to specify a vertical alignment which will lead to cut and fill results as well Additionally you can specify a reference alignment This feature allows you to stake the offset off of one alignment e g curb and report the station of a reference alignment e g centerline p230 Define Alignments EERIE vertical 1 Centerline File Use Ref CL 2 Select Polyline 5 Preview 6 Edit 3 Define Point List Centerline C SurvCEDemoSpecial Data DEMd
329. l cutsheet files are ASCII and can be viewed in a text editor or an Excel Spreadsheet The Cutsheets button leads to the following options p59 Select File Format Edit File File C SurvCe Data CsS PT1 tt Alignment Stakes Select File Format Edit File File C SurvCeE Data CS_ALG1 tt Slope Stakes Select File Format Edit File File C SurvCe Data CS SSTK1 tt Point Stakes Toggling this option on enables writing to the selected cutsheet file The buttons allow the user to select the file customize the Point Cutsheet report format as well as edit and view the current point cutsheet file This applies to the command Stake Points Alignment Stakes Toggling this option on enables writing to the selected cutsheet file The buttons allow the user to select the file customize the Alignment Cutsheet report format and edit and view the current alignment cutsheet file This applies to commands within Stake Line Arc and to Offset Stakeout Point Projection and Stake Road in Roading and includes station and offset options in the stored file as well as cut fill A special centerline style cutsheet file containing station and offset inform ation can be named and saved within the Roading command Cross Section Survey This file is viewable in the editor within Set Cl Cutsheet Format but has no cut fill values just as built data Centerline based cutsheets have more configurable options in the report
330. l sections the Load RoadNet File option is accessible when slope staking by Design Files and Section Files If you select Load RoadNet File it merely loads the files announces Process Done and all road files are placed into a temporary directory You then need to click Select RoadNet Element to choose the element of interest The three choices are centerlines cul de sacs and the curve returns at intersections For centerlines the Center ID of the design template if that method is used is applied to the horizontal alignment Keep in mind that for cul de sacs and curve returns the position of the horizontal alignment is set in RoadNet within Carlson Civil and Carlson Roads and typically is set to the edge of pavement alignment position Slope staking will therefore use just the outer part of the template for ex ample from EP ID outward to find that pivot point If you re load the same RoadNet File the program warns you that the prior temprorary files will be erased and new ones created This is done in case you actually modified a profile or other files in the temporary files in which case you should use SaveAs in the appropriate command to preserve the changes in a new file name When you Select RoadNet Element after loading an RNF file you can highlight any element to stake which then appear dashed when highlighted p394 Road Network When you click out of the opening dialog that offers the 4 methods of Slope Staking y
331. l would refer to the elevation at the design offset location of 12 The stake offset and Off to CL inter react A stake offset entry of 15 with a design offset of 12 left calculates to a setback of 3 If you click the Stake Off button you can choose from a variety of methods to create an offset point including extend current slope apply next slope vertical offset or user defined slope p433 Calculate Stake Offsets Extend Current Slope vert Dit 0 1560 Slope Stake Off SD 2 0061 M Display as Ratio up 42 z 840 727 gt coff 20 Note that you can zoom and pan in the dialog above Pan using your finger or stylus e Stake Off Button This button allows the user to specify the horizontal and vertical offsets relative to the design offset Various methods can be used for p434 computing the offsets based on the template or section points and their elevations Off to CL This is the total distance that the stakeout position is from the defined road centerline Vert Off V Vertical offset from the design elevation Elevation Elevation to be staked This value is based on the combined design elevation and vertical offset Run Slope Stake This feature allows for dynamic slope staking in the middle of the Stake Road routine This option is very useful for road staging and also for staking interior catch points like central median ditches When the slope stake is completed the program returns to the main St
332. lator routines and allow copying and pasting of any selected calculation result back into the dialog entry line For example if you were grading a site that had 19 5 of subgrade and had modeled the top surface you need to grade to the top surface with a vertical offset of 19 5 12 You could quickly obtain the value in feet by entering in the Vertical Offset field within the Elevation Difference dialog as shown in this next figure p29 Elev Difference Select Type of Surface Model Grid C Triangulation Elevation f Road Design f Section Set Elevation vertical Offset F Use Centerline for Station Offset Light Bar Settings This leads immediately to the Calculator dialog with its four tabs or options many with sub options Using the Standard tab we can enter 19 5 12 and get 1 625 as shown Then select the Copy button which places the value in the banner line at the very top of the screen Then choose Paste in the upper right to paste the value back into the Vertical Offset dialog edit box These calculations can also be done directly from the edit box within the Vertical Offset dialog You could enter 19 5 in for inches which would auto convert to feet or the current units setting In this same edit box you could also enter 19 5 12 which would do the division directly in the edit box This figure shows the Calculator screen p30 Calculator Standard Scientific Conversion Other
333. ld device go to the FILE tab and select Job Settings then choose the GPS tab Select the Geoid Separation File button and choose the geoid file you created and transferred with SurvCOM You have now completed the definition and selection of the geoid file Select OK to exit the Job Settings dialog Points Tab This tab is where the user adds pairs of positions to create a localization p173 Localization 9912 6050 20115 3680 A w Add Delete Edit On Off Load View Monitor Save View The local coordinates are shown in the POINTS tab by default Pressing View will switch the view to show the geodetic Lat Lon coordinates Scale The Scale Factor shown in the Localization dialog when two or more localization points are used is a multiplier and represents grid to ground When configured to GPS in release 1 50 004 or higher of SurvCE any GPS localization scale factor is displayed within the UNITS tab of Job Settings in inverse form to represent ground to grid Add Enter the alignment or localization points by coordinate values or by entering a point number If you choose the point number method you can enter a point number or select them from the point list If you choose the From List method you can access points in the Control File if a Control File is active See Job Settings Options You can average as many readings as you like when you add points and view the range and residua
334. le option will allow for exaggeration of the vertical on the template graphic Though defaulting to 1 we can double the exaggeration by setting this to 2 In fact an exaggeration of 5 works fine for the demo tpl template file The Next Station Method governs how N for next from the stakeout graphic screen moves you up When set to None N for Next will stay put until you change your entries But if set to Next Offset Left to Right Next will stay on the current station and move to the next offset The Next in the dialog below however always increments the current station by the next station in the List Don t confuse the Next button on this screen with the N button on the graphic screen to follow which is influenced by Settings and moves you along after you complete each point stakeout e Station The value of the Station to Stake e Interval The horizontal distance to increment the stationing when using the Next and Previous buttons e Play Pause This button allows the user to play through the road file like watching a drive through movie e List Depending on the settings and specified interval List will list the p431 defined stations including intervals and critical stations e List Offsets This dialog allows the user to pick from the known offsets by a list rather than using the graphic screen below It also allows the user to select an optional second point of Re
335. le point symbols are x The Decimal is point location toggle determines if the decimal point used in the display of elevations represents simultaneously the point location and symbol This slightly reduces screen clutter Small and Large toggles determine the size of font used to display the point object on screen Set Color Attributes brings up the color palette available only on color CE devices This lets you choose the color of the point symbol elevation and description text The Traverse Defaults button brings up a dialog that has the settings for prompting each time for instrument and rod height and the vertical angle This applies to the T for Traverse and SS for Sideshot commands that allow point calculation within the MAP Screen For Cogo work turn off Instrument Rod Height and Vertical Angle prompting For manual entry of actual field measurements turn them back on View Options Point Label Settings W Freeze All E Small C Large Font Size E Symbol F o s Set Color Attributes Traverse defaults Saves Redraw p457 Color Point Attibute E Pt ID Elevation Description Traverse Defaults Prompt for Instrument amp Rod Height Vertical Angle Prompt None C O Degrees Level C 90 Degrees Level Elevation Difference Raw File ae Off Isolate Points ISO This is another useful command to reduce screen clutter If you have 500 points on
336. licated points on vertices that already have point IDs p475 MAP VIEW The new points are shown in large format for emphasis Interpolate Points Divide Along Entity DVS This divides a polyline into the number of segments entered A dialog will allow you enter in the number of segments There are settings to prompt for descriptions and elevations and to create points at the end points of the polyline p476 Divide Along Entity starting Point ID Point Prompt Settings Prompt for Descriptions Elevations Create Points At Endpoints Number of Segments z The command will create new vertices along the polyline but can also create point numbers starting at the entered Point ID and you can elect to be prompted for descriptions and or elevations at each new point If a property line were divided into two segments you would create three new points MAP YIEY Interpolate Points Interval Along Entity DVI p477 This divides a polyline by the distance entered Curves can have a different interval There are settings to prompt for descriptions and elevations and to create points at the end points of the polyline Interval Along Entity starting Point ID Point Prompt Settings Prompt for Descriptions Elevations Create Points At Endpoints Horizontal Distance Between Points Distance On Line Segments 25 0000 Distance On Curve Segments 25 0000 This command is often used for c
337. lities Sokkia and Novatel The NovAtel and Sokkia GPS options like Ashtech allow for hard and soft resets permit sending commands to the receiver consult your dealer and allow the review and re setting of base and rover radio channels for Pacific Crest PDL and RFM series radios Additional options check the communication status shows the quality of the message string The Review REF File will display the reference file which stores the GPS base position information which also helps in troubleshooting GPS Utilities Magellan Ashtech The Magellan Ashtech Receiver Utilities screen has the following options p620 Magellan Setup Hard Reset Save Settings to Receiver Set Factory Defaults Send Command to Receiver Beep Off Bluetooth Settings Reset RTE Engine Update Clock from GPS Power Of Receiver e Base and Rover Radio GSM Setup The Base and Rover Radio GSM setup options will read the receiver display the current radio channel and allow the user to change to another channel This feature is available for Pacific Crest PDL and RFM Series radios and Ashtech internal radios Be sure that you have the right Radio Port set under the Configure Rover or Configure Base Ports tab For GSM see discussions under Configure Rover The Base and Rover radio buttons work similarly It is important for the user to choose the right button base radio setup for base receiver and rover radio setup for rover receiver
338. ll force the instrument to perform a search before initiating a reading if the instrument is not locked on the prism Diode Backsight This setting allows the user to specify if the backsight has an active diode prism or not Horizontal Vertical Range These input boxes allow the user to specify the range to search for the prism when a search function is initialized Minimum Maximum Distance Determines the range by distance that the instrument will search for or track a prism p546 Instrument Setup Current Comms Settings Search Standard Deviation Search When Lost Lock Turn Off Instrument Initialize GeoRadio e Standard Deviation Defines the allowable standard deviation of the instrument readings Search When Lost Lock This setting will force the instrument to begin searching for a prism as soon as lock is lost e Turn Off Instrument Turns off the instrument Initialize Instrument Turns on the instrument and initializes the instrument GeoRadio Settings Remote These settings are accessed by selecting GeoRadio as your communication type and pressing the Configure button This mode works exactly the same as the Direct Robotic mode except a GeoRadio must be used in lieu of the cable The instrument must also be robotic and be operating in the Remote mode with the faceplate removed The only additional settings are for the GeoRadio itself p547 Configure Radio Power 500 mW Channel
339. ll store cut and fill data into a point style cutsheet file Elevation Difference can also be used with a light bar Prerequisites and Procedures There are five types of data that can be used to define the design surface Grid File You may use a GRD file that has been created using software packages including Carlson Civil or Carlson Survey You must transfer this file to the collector via the File Transfer routine prior to running this command Triangulation File You may use a TIN file created within SurvCE using the Triangulate amp Contour command found in the Map screen under Tools Surface You can also use a TIN or FLT file that has been created in Carlson Civil or Carlson Survey office products in which case you must transfer this file to the collector via the File Transfer routine prior to running this command Note that triangulation files can be imported from LandXML or DXF format using the command File DTM Import found in the Map screen Elevation You may use known elevation that you specify in the Set Elevation field Road Design This method requires a Template Centerline and Profile file at a minimum and can utilize superelevation and template transition files Section This method requires a Cross Section file and a Centerline file Select Type of Surface Model Specify the type of surface to be used With the exception of the Elevation method the 4 other methods allow the option to specify a vertical offset
340. lowing the prompting for angle and distance entry This style works strictly off the keyboard and does not require any screen tapping to switch from traverse to sideshot to inverse The points plot on the screen as you go A third option for traverse and sideshot entry p339 is to set the equipment type to Manual Total Station and enter the traverse and sideshot data within the Store Points command All three of the methods will store data to the raw survey file for re processing and will allow entry of instrument heights and target heights In the Map screen Traverse Defaults TD will turn instrument and target height prompting on and off All three methods allow for zenith angle prompting as an option The command centers around one main entry screen You must enter an occupied point for traversing You must also enter a target point number to calculate Manual Traverse Occupy Pt ID 6 str EA Backsight Ft io Target Pt ID 13 Desc l Evoff I TR Mode Bearing SE 545 00 00 E SE Slope 2 64 SP Horz Dist HD N E Z Calculate Store e Horizontal Angle You must select a horizontal angle method Options here are AR angle right NE SE SW NW AZ SAZ south azimuth AL angle left deflection left and deflection right If a bearing or azimuth is selected for traversing the backsight point number will become inactive Only an occupied point is required to traverse forward by bearing or azimu
341. ls It is recommended that you use the point number option and carefully hand enter your local grid system coordinates first using either List Points option Add or Keyboard Input Entry of coordinates on the fly in the field provides opportunity for error Once you click OK in the coordinate dialog you will have three options for establishing the GPS position for the named local point Add Method 1 Read GPS This allows you to collect measurements from the GPS receiver and average as many readings as you choose Once the readings are complete the software will present a dialog that p174 displays the range and residuals of the averaged readings Add Method 2 Enter Latitude Longitude This allows you to hand enter known geodetic coordinates for the local position The elevation should be the ellipsoid elevation in the current job units if a geoid model is not applied If a geoid model is applied then the elevation should be the orthometric elevation in the current job units This method allows manual entry of a localization file without occupying points in the field Note that you do not enter the decimal point for decimal seconds Enter Lat Lon Use dd mmssss format Latitude J f Norti C South Longitude E fe West l East Elevation ft If you use manual entry of a localization data set it is important that you either utilize an existing base GPS receiver with the fixed antenna location that was used to sur
342. lt V you can select Cutsheets and the Edit File option to review the stored cut and fill data at any time assuming a cutsheet file has been named and set active The data might appear as follows p256 Edit CutSheet File elevadiff tkt Staked Off Stake Elev 1 39 09 Right 49 64 2006 51 11 Right 11 39 1429 73 Right 1 06 2006 55 The order of the columns in the cutsheet is set by the user when the cutsheet file is named In this case the Use Centerline for Station Offset was clicked on and the shots were stored to the alignment based cutsheet because a centerline was active All shots were cut so if you scrolled right to the fill column it would be blank Columns can be extended and compressed by moving the vertical bar between columns In addition cut and fill data is also stored to the Raw File associated with the job name Then when a new cutsheet file is named you can choose Cutsheets from Raw File For those users who always want a cutsheet file to be made in commands such as Elevation Difference you can auto create a new cutsheet with the job name as the prefix whenever you start a new job by the following selection within Job Settings New Job tab p257 Job Settings EZEIN system Format Options Stake i Prompt for First Pt M Prompt for Units F Use Last Job Localization Pt ID E Attach Last Control Data Cutsheets North 5000 EEI East 5000 Manual Recall Previous
343. lumns much like in programs such as Excel and make the column wider Superelevation List SurvCE end T 100 00 300 00 1500 00 1700 00 1900 1 ef00 00 2500 00 3600 00 3700 00 3800 1 Pi gt Add Edit Femove Load Save As Clear The superelevation file is one of the optional roading or design files in Stake Slope Stake Road and Elevation Difference After a superelevation file has been entered and saved it will appear as the default superelevation file in all of these commands unless removed from the design file list by the user Input Edit Template Series SurvCE allows for two types of transitioning 1 a single template can transition by being acted upon by template transition files made in Carlson Roads Topsite Leica Site Manager or Carlson Civil and superelevation files or 2 a template series file can transition between several templates sharing identical IDs but having different slopes and widths between ID points within the templates You can load an existing TDS template series file in the RDS format by clicking Load then clicking the down arrow for Type of File and selecting TDS format TDS templates always have IDs and the same number of template points per cross section so once imported they behave exactly like SurvCE defined templates Using the Draw Template option any particular template in a template series file can be selected and displayed as shown p382 T
344. lution position Pressing Enter again will accept the second possible solution for the intersection p321 MAP VIEW Distance Distance Enter the known horizontal distances from both points Intersection First Point Point ID 6 Azimuth Use Points Distance 150 ft off Second Point Point ID 1040 Azimuth Use Points Distance 40 000 ft off Select OK and the map screen will display showing circles radiating from the first and second selected base points Lines leading from both base points to the two possible intersections of the circles are also shown p322 Pressing Enter or Store will display the prompt Pick a Solution Select the desired calculated solution To select the point simply pick it from the screen Picking near the desired solution is sufficient The program will select the nearest solution position Pressing Enter again will accept the second possible solution for the intersection If there was no solution for the input data SurvCE will display No Valid Solution s MAP VIEW Point Projection This command allows you to calculate the station and offset of any entered or surveyed point relative to a known centerline or baseline Note that the Station Store command will calculate a point at a given station and offset Point Projection does just the reverse it calculates a station and offset for any given point It also will calculate the Intersect or the proj
345. ly or calculated using the laser and GPS To calculate this factor using the laser follow these steps 1 2 6 7 If you don t already have two known points in your vicinity use GPS to store two points within 50 feet of each other From the LASER tab of the Peripherals window select Align Laser s Laser Alignment Occupied Point Reference Angie Target Point Laser Reading Read Laser Alignment factor Horizontal error Vertical error Choose an Occupied Point from your point list and prepare to fire your laser from that point Choose a Target Point from your point list and prepare to fire your laser at that point Click Read Laser and when the Reading Laser progress bar appears fire your laser at the target point from your occupied point An azimuth reading will appear in the Laser Reading box and two values will be calculated The Reference Angle is the azimuth of the vector from the occupied point to the target point The Alignment Factor is the difference between the azimuth read by the laser and the Reference Angle Press OK and the Alignment Factor that was calculated will appear in the Laser Alignment box Click OK again to save the new alignment settings Laser Specific Configurations If you re having trouble establishing communication with the laser you may need p190 to change certain settings on your laser s instrument panel Here are laser specific setup ins
346. ly notes entered in response to Prom pt for Point Notes or Edit Notes within List Points itself will display Notes for GPS accuracy time stamps and cutsheets for ex ample appear in the raw file but not within List Points Add to Next Pt ID This makes it possible to number sequentially using 1 or add 2 to every point to skip every other number Move Up Down To rearrange the order of the fields highlight a field and use the Move Down and Move Up buttons Display Name To rename a field highlight it enter a new name in the Display Name field and then tap Update Item This feature allows customization so that for instance Northing and Easting could become X and Y as renamed Precision Elevation Digits North amp East Digits The decimal precision for each field can also be set in the Options dialog Edit To edit a point in the list double tap on it or highlight the point and tap the Edit button You may edit any aspect of the point To edit move the cursor into the field of the aspect to modify and enter the new value Choose OK to enter the edited point into the coordinate file or choose Cancel to negate your modifications The Input Edit Attributes button refers to GIS data attributes associated with a point These GIS attributes will export in the form of shape files Tools pull down in the Map screen Few surveyors currently need the GIS attributing features of Carlson SurvCE but these features help link p65
347. m WGS84 to NAD27 coordinates By default only data files for the continental U S are loaded to the data collector If you are working outside this region please load the appropriate files from your CD to the SurvStar NADConv directory NAD27 uses the Clarke 1866 ellipsoid NAD 83 When selecting this coordinate system you will also need to specify a state plane zone NAD 83 uses the GRS80 ellipsoid UTM The ellipsoid used in the Universal Transverse Mercator calculation is determined by the Datum selection If you choose the option WGS 84 Automatic Zone Selection the zone is determined by the lat lon values read in from the receiver If you know your UTM zone you can also select it Whenever SurvCE does a reverse calculation from UTM to WGS84 you will be prompted to enter a zone number 3TM Canada This system is also referred to as MTM Itisa3 degree zone width Transverse Mercator calculation You may select between the Clarke 1866 ellipsoid and the WGS84 ellips oid New Zealand You may select between NZGD2000 and NZGD49 Both use the Transverse Mercator calculation NZGD2000 uses the GRS80 ellipsoid NZGD49 uses the International 1924 ellipsoid You p164 may specify a Meridional Circuit with either datum To select the circuit press the Define button You will see a pull down list with all Meridional Circuits as well as the option to pick None RGF 93 France This system requires that you have the file n
348. mand Field to Finish found under the Tools pulldown menu in the Map screen you can reprocess your field codes after editing any aspect of your point data So if you left off an end line command you can edit the point change the description and re process the linework In the example using the code RECT25 above if you edited that point and changed it to RECTS0 it would draw a twice as large building when you run Field to Finish and RECT 25 would draw the same building but instead in the opposite direction Data Transfer This command prepares Carlson SurvCE for transferring data to and from a desktop PC Data Transfer requires that a companion program on the PC is running to receive and send files SurvCE using the Data Transfer option must handshake with the program on the PC in order for the transfer to be successful A serial cable must connect the PC to the handheld device running SurvCE COM ports must be identified correctly as well as baud rates Data Transfer x Carlson CAG Transfer kermit Transfer SDF Transfer TOS Transfer COM Port COM 1 e Carlson C amp G Transfer This option is designed to work with Carlson Software and C amp G office products SurvCADD Carlson Civil Carlson Survey Carlson Survey Desktop Carlson Connect in Autodesk products X Port CG Survey and CG SurvNET It also works with the standalone SurvCom program that is included with the purchase of SurvCE The p101 handsh
349. manually or defined by selecting points from a point list or map The kind of intersection calculation to be performed determines the number of possible solutions With a Bearing Bearing calculation there will be only one possible solution Bearing Distance and Distance Distance calculations will have two possible solutions prompting the user to pick the desired solution Note that in intersection calculations of Bearing Distance and Distance Distance there may be no solution for the input data In these cases Carlson SurvCE will display the message No V alid Solution p317 7 Intersection First Point Point ID pO Azimuth Use Points Distance ft off Second Point Pointo I Azimuth Lise Points Distance ft off From the COGO Menu select Intersections Fill out the appropriate data fields to perform the desired calculation The Enter key moves forward through the edit boxes The current Angle setting in Job Settings Units dictates whether angles are prompted as azimuth or bearings e Off Use these edit controls to create intersections that are defined by parallel offsets to the defined or computed direction All Intersect routines create SP records in the raw file storing the calculated coordinates for each new point This SP record is identical to records created by keyboard input Bearing Bearing This method locates a point at the intersection of two lines Select Point 1 by entering th
350. mplate dxf file everytime you code a 201 you will see the blue linework as an extra confirmation of correct coding This color coding could be repeated for other often used layers Define Job Attributes This lets you set up prompting for each new job for job related attributes like Client Jurisdiction Weather Conditions Party Chief and other notes These will prompt when each new job is started and the attributes and entries will appear in the raw file rw5 file Select Add to enter new attributes Job Attributes Attribute Name Client Add _ edit Remove J ob Settings System This tab allows you to define the units for the current job p46 Job Settings A ES New Job Format Options Stake l Distance Decimal Feet fig Angle Degrees Minutes Seconds Zero Azimuth Setting North US Survey Feet Projection Edit Projection List USA NAD83 MA Mainland M Distance Select the units that you want to use Choices include US Feet International Feet and Metric If US Feet or International Feet is selected you have the option to display distances as decimal feet Dec Ft or Feet and Inches Inches This is a display property only and will not change the format of the data recorded to the raw file Angle This offers the option of degrees 360 circle 60 minutes to a degree and 60 seconds to a minute or gons also refered to as grads 400 circle and fully decima
351. mportant to note that firmware 696 03 xx or later is required To check firmware version select Menu 5 4 1 on the instrument Comms Geodimeter Trimble default communication settings in SurvCE are 9600 8 None 1 To check these settings on the instrument do the following 1 Select MNU ENT 4 Data com 1 Select device 2 Serial 2 At prompt Serial ON select ENT 3 Verify COM 1 8 0 9600 followed by ENT The software allows you to run the instrument in several modes depending on the capabilities of the instrument Selecting a model that says DR informs the software that the instrument is a reflectorless Direct Reflex model and the reflectorless EDM mode will be made available Settings Search Station If the instrument is not robotic or you want to operate it as a standard total station the Station mode should be used p543 Instrument Setup Current Comms PSAi eE Search EDM Mode Standard Instrument Setup Current Comms Settings e Turn to point in stakeout Turn to vert point in stakeout e EDM Mode Allows you to specify the EDM measurement setting as one of the following types Standard Standard EDM mode Fast Fast Standard EDM mode p544 Reflectorless Reflectorless EDM mode DR Models e Turn to point in stakeout Turns the instrument to the horizontal angle as computed to the stakeout location specified e Turn to vert point in stakeout Turns the instrument to
352. must use Input Edit Centerline and enter a new start station in the initial dialog This will automatically translate all stations in the centerline by the appropriate amount When Apply Scale Factor for start station is enabled the centerline is adjusted by the scale factor after a confirming warning screen Profile Conversion This command converts vertical alignments to and from the Carlson profile format PRO Supported file types include e ASCH LDD TXT e Caice KCP e CLIP ALZ p370 ISPOL RAS LandXML XML Leica GSI MOSS INP SDR SDR TDS RD5 Terramodel Geodimeter RLN ALN and ARE The SurvCE format has a PRO extension These source files can be loaded into SurvCE using the Data Transfer feature in the FILE tab The conversion screen is similar to Centerline Conversion with the characteristic criss cross logic for 2 way conversion LandXML and Leica and one way conversion for the other options Import Export Profile LandxML File mls Hone Existing File PRO File pra None New File Existing File Conversion type LandxML DO mtem Deporte tera The SurvCE Profile File Format It should be noted that of all the SurvCE file types that are ASCII and therefore viewable in standard text editors the profile pro file has the simplest format The format is station elevation length of vertical curve and description for road profiles For ex ample
353. n has a maximum range of 1500ft while the two way remote communication is limited to 800ft Instrument Setup Remote Connection Channel Frequency Track Sensitivity Medium hd Tracking Speed Machine Topcon provides distinct cables for radio communication and RC communication The Y cable is used with radios and RC in combination but is not required You can press the yellow button on top of the RC to initiate a quick lock The Y cable is not used for RC only communication The advantages of using both radio and RC are range works remotely over 800ft speed faster reading and ease of operation Within SurvCE go to Equipment select Topcon 800 Remote use default port and baud settings p577 The recommended settings are as follows Tracking 10mm Search Pattern Normal Track Sensitivity High best with Quick Lock Search Scan Range Middle applies to APL1 only Tracking Speed Middle Joystick Middle this changes the response of the arrow keys Vertical Range 10 Horizontal Range 10 Wait Time how soon it starts searching when you lose the link 3 to 5 seconds low traffic areas and 120 2 minutes in high traffic areas e Guide Lights User choice SurvCE will track the prism in the fastest mode 10mm then switch to configured reading when a shot is taken Note configured reading was also set to Tracking 10mm which will take a nearly instantaneous shot If configured for
354. n will advance stake location incrementally to the Next point or station ALT N 5 This icon returns to the previous stakeout settings dialog where you can Modify the current design stake data ml This icon allows the user to override the design Elevation ALT E OK This icon will accept the dialog Back This icon will return you to the previous dialog p26 Exit This icon will return you to the main menu and dismiss any changes ALT X Standby Search Robotics only This status icon shows the instrument is in standby and when pressed puts the instrument in search mode Locked Robotics only This icon shows that the instrument is locked and when pressed places the robotic total station in Standby mode meaning it will suspend tracking mode e g allows you to place the pole down drive a stake then resume work il Tracking is On Robotics only This icon shows that the instrument is continuously measuring distances tracking and when pressed will stop the EDM m Tracking is Off Robotics only This icon shows that the instrument is NOT continuously measuring distances not tracking and when pressed will start the EDM tel Prism Mode This icon shows that the instrument is currently configured to read a prism and when pressed will switch the instrument to reflectorless mode S Reflectorless Mode This icon shows that the instrument is currently in reflectorless mode and when pressed will switch the inst
355. nd elevation over which the instrument is set Units for the instrument height will be set according to the options in Job Settings The units for the job are displayed ft ift or m If you brought a feet and inches tape to the field and you are set in decimal feet units you can enter the instrument height as 63 in which case 5 25 will be computed or as 5 6 3 8 5 feet 6 and 3 8 in which case 5 5313 will be computed e Backsight point Here you enter your backsight point ID or pick it from a list or from the map itself using the icons to the right You can also click the station and offset icon as with the occupied point A backsight point ID 1s required even if you choose to enter an azimuth or bearing only p197 Backsight Bearing or Azimuth This displays the bearing or azimuth between the two entered points when both points have coordinates If Angle Type in Job Settings is set to bearing then a backsight bearing will appear If set to azimuth then the backsight azimuth is shown Azimuth should always be used with a 400 circle gons configuration When both point IDs have coordinates the backsight is fixed and predetermined and therefore the bearing azimuth field is disabled since it cannot be altered However if the backsight point has no coordinates then you must enter a backsight bearing or azimuth which will be used to calculate the null or zero coordinate point ID Target Height This is the height in feet or meters
356. nd modems are shown next and then one of the last options is Data Collector Internet which is a special case explained below where the data collector provides access to the internet instead of a modem inside the receiver or connected to the receiver Once a device that is capable of connecting to the internet is selected the Network combo box is enabled Select the type of network connection you will use s GPS Rover Current Comms Receiver Device AirLink Configure Network NTRIP Configure RTK Port None TCF Direct Parity UDF Direct NTRIP Message TY niderhet Base ID Send Rover Position to Network Here is a brief summary of the different network types available TCP Direct For connecting to a single modem at a base or to a VRS network or another network that doesn t require a special login The configure button for TCP Direct brings up this window p143 Configure TCP Direct Name Charleston Address 198 202 278 252 Port r004 To add a new base or network address select lt New gt in the Name field and replace the lt New gt text with what you want to call the connection and fill out the Address and Port fields Most modems support either an IP address Ex 192 202 228 252 or a URL address Ex www basenetwork com UDP Direct This works exactly like the TCP Direct option but uses UDP protocol instead of TCP Most networks use TCP NTRIP
357. ng Store in New CRD File Raising and Lowering Elevations Users often ask How do I raise or lower elevations on a range of points The answer is the Translate option in the Transformation routine To adjust elevation only enter only the delta elevation leave Northing and Easting at 0 translation Rotate The ROTATE tab is used to rotate points in a coordinate file Enter the desired degree of rotation into the degree of rotation data field Specify the rotation base p330 point This can be accomplished by either entering the point number of the desired point manually or by selecting the point using the List or Map icon You may also enter in coordinates for the rotation point if the point is not present in the coordinate file Lastly you can define the rotation by referencing two points such as From 1 To 2 then specifying the desired new bearing for these points Even the new bearing itself can be computed from two points used as a reference The second screen appears which allows you to set the range of points to transform and choose how to store the newly calculated points For all rotations the rotation value is written into the RWS file as dd mmss the current angle format Scale The scale tab is used to scale the points in a coordinate file The northing easting and optionally the elevation are multiplied by the specified scale factor Enter the desired scale factor in the scale factor field Select the base point
358. ngle as computed to the stakeout location specified This option is not typically used unless a true elevation is known for the stakeout location specified e Use CR LF If set this must match the settings on the instrument e Auto Aim This forces the instrument to lock onto the prism before a configured read This is particularly useful when turning robotic sets Auto Aim is not available in reflectorless mode p573 Instrument Setup EDM Mode Use CR LF Instrument Setup Current Comms Settings Turn to point in stakeout T Tur M Auto Aim Remote This configuration works for the Topcon 800 series running in remote mode radio link active equipment operation driven from the prism The optional RC unit mounted on the prism pole provides a quick lock feature for rapidly guiding the instrument to the prism Additionally the RC provides an alternative to radios p574 allowing limited remote communication between the data collector and instrument Be sure that the RC unit is pointed directly at the instrument before executing a quick lock To operate in remote mode on the instrument obtain the 6 icon menu press F1 for Program F6 for More then F3 for External Link Press F2 to verify your currents settings then hit Escape and press F1 to execute the remote settings Instrument Setup Current KAn zE Type RC Only bluetooth b Device Other Type Topon Rem
359. ngs Then the base coordinate point can be used for total station work as a setup or backsight If a base position of 0 0 0 is detected representing in invalid base setup the Store button will be grayed out p183 Monitor Skyplot lt Quality Position SATView SATInfo Reference Station Coordinates Latitude N 42 21 41 71900 Longitude W 71 09 53 46860 Ellipsoid Hat 0 0000 Ante Antenna Type 5 250 ASH110454 CY Distance to Ref 4670 6856 Northing 2956970 0449 Fasting 746745 6856 Elevation 21 3668 With Leica GPS it also shows the status of the radio signal in the middle two lines If the radio signal is interrupted a No Radio message will appear The Utilities button associated with the Leica GPS configuration takes you straight to the radio settings including cell modem configuration Check Level Total Station This feature is only available on instruments that provide information from electronic compensators It allows the user to Check the level of the instrument from within the software p184 Check Level Tilt T O 00 00 000 TiltL O 00 00 000 e Tilt T Shows the compensator value e Tilt L Shows the compensator value Tolerances This command allows you to set operating tolerances for the collection of points Total Station Tolerances p185 Tolerances H Obs Jbeo0 s0 v Obs 0 00 30 Edm tal fmm 5 Stakeout Tol 0 328 ft e H Obs
360. nput GIS fields Load allows selecting any existing field codes GIS prompting for reuse Edit reviews or revises existing GIS prompting Remove deletes highlighted GIS attribute prompting The Up and Down buttons will reorder GIS attribute prompting Save stores and exits Importing amp Exporting GIS Information from SurvCE SurvCE imports and exports ESRI SHP files SurvCE solely uses ESRI SHP files to interface with all GIS programs ESRI SHP files are open architecture and are a widely used and accepted GIS format for most common GIS packages To import or export GIS data to or from SurvCE select in MAP File SHP File Import or Export SHP File Quick Import or Export only reads and writes the drawing entities and doesn t include the GIS info There are two figures later in this tutorial that depict this p516 SurvCE Creates Three ESRI GIS Drawing Objects Points Arcs Polylines and Polygons Closed Polylines There are only three types of drawing entries in ESRI SHP files points arcs open 2D or 3D Polylines and polygons closed 2D or 3D Polylines The EP field code creates points and arcs and or polygons GIS information is stored only to the arcs or polygons and not the EP points All GIS information for EP will be attached to the 3D Polylines The second Field Code UP in the FCL job file creates points only with no linework The UP field code attaches GIS information to the UP points See the next two figures below
361. nt For GPS the scale factor acts as a divisor A scale factor of 0 9 will calculate the measured point 1 0 9 units further away from the single localization point Therefore it is recommended that you keep the scale factor set to 1 0 When configured to total station the scale factor is sometimes used to go ground to grid When configured to GPS the scale factor in is sometimes used to go grid to ground to better match total station scaling The scale factor is defined as ground to grid To go ground to grid from high elevations for example it would be less than 1 It would multiply total station measurements and reduce them to grid It would divide GPS measurements and expand them to ground If your goal 1s to work on the specified state plane UTM or other grid coordinate system and you are planning to use a one point localization then the scale factor should be set to 1 unless you are trying to match ground coordinates where the coordinates are true north but not true scale In all other cases matching ground coordinates with GPS is best accomplished with a multi point rover based localization The resulting effective scale factor multiplier will appear in the localization screen such as the 0 999779 value shown in the last figure After a change in a localization file any points measured in the field by G PS will be converted from Lat Long to local coordinates by using the new localization
362. nt 2 would be the vertex point Pt North East l 5500 5000 2 5000 5000 3 5000 5500 Mathematical Expressions Mathematical expressions can be used in nearly all angle and distance edit box es For example within the Intersection routine an azimuth can be entered in the form 255 35 90 which means 255 degrees 35 minutes minus 90 degrees Additionally point defined distances and directions can be entered with a comma as separator as in 4 5 If point 4 to point 5 has an azimuth of 255 degrees 35 minutes then the same expression above could be entered as 4 5 90 For math the program handles rep orem and To go half the distance from 103 to 10 enter 103 10 2 Point Ranges When ranges of points are involved such as in stakeout lists a dash is used Y ou can enter ranges in reverse e g 75 50 which would create a list of points from 75 down to 50 in reverse order p38 Survey Data Display Controls ANGLE The angle control will display the angle as defined by the current settings in Job Settings Options are available for Azimuth North or South or Bearing combined with the option of Degrees or Grads Format The display format of degrees uses the degree minute and second symbols For the case of a bearing we display the quadrant using the characters N S W E Example Bearing N7 09 59 E Example Azimuth 7 09 59 All angular values entered by the user should be in the DD MMSS format Example 7 09
363. nts The format is based on the RW5 raw data specification with the ex ception of angle sets Angle sets are recorded as BD BR FD and FR records to allow reduction of all possible data that can be recorded by Carlson SurvCE using the Set Collection routine Essentially these records are identical to a sideshot record With the exception of the aforementioned angle set records if the RW5 specification is modified to provide enhanced functionality the added or modified data will reside in comment records to avoid incompatibility with ex isting software Backsight Record Record type BK Field headers OP QeCupy Porn ec BP Back Point Bo Backsight BC Back Circle Sample s BR OP LA Be ZyBoo LSU 0007 DC 0 0044 Job Record Record type JB Field headers NM Job Name DT Date TM Time Sample s JB NMSAMPER DEO G 27n 20 03y TMIA rAr p633 Line of Sight Record Record type LS Field headers HI Height of Instrument HR Height of Rod GPS heights may be recorded to phase center or ARP depending on GPS make Sample s Lo Ho 000000 ARG eOUOUO0 LS HR4 000000 Mode Setup Record The mode setup will be recorded at the beginning of the raw data file Record type MO Field headers AD AAMC directron 1 O Tor Noro L TOF South UN Distance unit 0 for feet 1 for meter SE Scale factor EC karta Curvature CO FOr Ofi i for on EO EDM offset inch Sample s MO ADO UNO SF1 00000000 EC1 E
364. nts The information below describes the system requirements and installation instructions for Carlson SurvCE Software e Windows CE version 3 0 or later Handheld PC e Microsoft ActiveSync 3 7 and later p10 RAM and Hard Disk Space Requirements e 64 MB of RAM recommended e 16MB of hard disk space minimum Hardware Required e StrongARM XScale or compatible processor hardware must be supported by the Microsoft operating system being used Hardware Optional e Serial cable for uploading and downloading data Microsoft ActiveSync Microsoft ActiveSync provides support for synchronizing data between a Windows based desktop computer and Microsoft Windows CE based portable devices Microsoft ActiveSync 3 7 1 supports Microsoft Windows 98 including Second Edition Windows NT Workstation 4 0 SP 6 Microsoft Windows ME Windows 2000 Professional Edition and Windows XP You should have a serial cable that was included with your mobile device Attach this cable from your desktop PC to the mobile device Before you can install Carlson SurvCE your desktop PC must have Microsoft ActiveSync installed and running If you have ActiveSync on your desktop PC you should see the ActiveSync icon in your system tray If you do not see this icon in the tray choose the Windows Start button choose Programs and then choose Microsoft ActiveSync If you do not have ActiveSync installed insert the Carlson SurvCE CD ROM and choose
365. o a known point number or to an entered horizontal and zenith angle using Turn Angle When enabled the Search After Turn option searches and locks on a prism after turning the angle potentially changing slightly the computed angle Change Face reverses the face The lower three buttons Turn Left 90 Turn 180 and Turn Right 90 are common angle turns and minimize user entry when needed p204 Turn to Angle Point 200 Horizontal 10 2317 i Turn to Vertical zenith 91 4915 i Search After Turn Change Face Turn Angle Turn Left 90 Turn 180 Turn Right 90 e Settings This button leads to a series of settings screens that allow you to dial in the speed of motion range of motion and other factors governing arrow key driven movement and automatic searching Store Points TS This command is designed for total stations and manual entry It is the principal data collection routine with total stations Store Points interacts with numerous settings including the feature codes that will draw line work All settings in Configure Reading will impact Store Points including the Number of Distance Readings Average Direct amp Reverse Hgt Desc Prompt on Save Angle Only in Reverse Face and Function of Enter Key Foresights The Foresight screen is entered automatically after exiting the Backsight screen In the backsight screen if the green checkmark OK is active you can go directly to the Foresight screen by
366. o auto detect the port setting for data and the port baud Antenna Type The entire list of supported antennas 1s available for selection To select an antenna press the List button and search the list by manufacturer In this dialog the user can also verify the antenna offset values or create custom antenna types Antenna Height Entered as a either vertical or slant height in the current job units The slant height is the distance from the base of the pole or from the hub and tack up to a mark or defined slant measurement point on the edge of the antenna See NGS for more details The vertical height is measured plumb straight down from the base where it screws into the antenna of the antenna to the ground Use Internal Antenna Many GPS units now have internal antennas Select this option if not using an external antenna Elevation Mask This specifies the cutoff vertical angle above the horizon Any satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations Position Update Rate This option allows the user to set the position update rate for the GPS readings 1 Hz will display one reading per second while 5 Hz is 5 times per second p129 RTK Tab The RTK tab is used to configure the GPS RTK communications Current comana Receiver LLS Device Cable or Generic Device f Network RTK Port com2 Baud Parity Stop Bits 4 Message Type RT CM 18 19 Base ID
367. o choose to Import or Ex port Import Export Import Ascii File Export Ascii File Import ASCII File This command converts point data from an ASCII text file into the SurvCE format The source ASCII file can contain any combination of point number northing easting elevation and description You may select any of the predefined formats or create your own custom format Since some of these source file formats like Carlson CRD and TDS CRS are not ASCII but are actually binary Import ASCII file can be used to import points from certain non ASCII type files This next figure shows the Import ASCII dialog box p107 Import Ascii File Type User Defined M Select File CL SurvCEDemoSpecial Data Survce tet Details Enter Select Format P Y Z D M PZD P Pt ID Y Morth East Z Elv D Desc S Skip 6 9912 6050 20115 3680 101 9700 CPACHIS x 68 9954 3820 20098 6350 101 0810 CP CHIS x 1001 9908 6459 20026 3177 91 4084 CP NAIL 1002 9869 1072 20070 4970 99 3703 F2 F1 Header Lines E 4dd to Pt ID s E Ft s to Import W Pt Protect e Source File Format You must choose the format of the source file The choices include User Defined For importing most TXT and ASC files The coordinate order in the Choice field is used Traverse PC For importing Traverse PC TRV files TDS For importing TDS CRS files Note that CR5 files can contain point numbers in excess of 32760 If point IDs exceed that value it 1s
368. o do a hand traverse with SurvCE go to the MAP screen by clicking the icon in the upper right corner labeled MAP While in the map screen select the Map Settings icon to set your Traverse Defaults p500 Al Traverse Steps 1 a fF OQ N 8 To begin you must key in the command for inverse by typing IT This will establish your occupied and backsight points The command prompt will display the following Cmd Inverse Tr Ss Pick point or point No Key in the backsight point number followed by the ENTER key Key in the occupied point number followed by the ENTER key Key T for Traverse or S for Sideshot followed by the ENTER key If you keyed in T for traverse the command prompt will be waiting for an angle code by displaying the following Cmd Traverse eXit I Ss Angle BC 1 7 lt 7 gt If you keyed in S for sideshot the command prompt will also be waiting for an angle code by displaying the following Cmd Sideshot eXit I Tr Angle BC 1 7 lt 7 gt The code choices you can key in are as follows 1 Northeast Bearing 2 Southeast Bearing 3 Southwest Bearing 4 Northwest Bearing 5 Azimuth 6 Angle Left 7 Angle Right Key in the angle code of choice followed by the ENTER key Key in the angular value in the dd mmss format followed by the ENTER key If you selected a vertical prompt under Traverse Defaults then key in the p501 appropriate value followed by
369. o that the new updates can be saved Once the upgrade or additional software is added you can change it back so that the pointer is more toward the Storage Memory around 18 000 KB After changing these settings or updating software it s a good idea to do a Save System Battery Status The black icon that appears at the top of every screen is designed to indicate battery status Full black should indicate full battery As battery levels decrease the black recedes to full white out of battery EE On some CE devices there is no way to detect battery status so the battery icon does not change On some devices such as the Jett CE Carlson Ex plorer a partial indication of battery status is detected as follows p23 e Good 100 Low 50 e Critical 10 Save System After installing SurvCE or making any system level changes e g memory settings its highly recommended that you perform a Save System on the device Examples Carlson Explorer Start gt Programs gt SaveReg Allegro Start gt Programs gt Utilities gt Save System Carlson Technical Support Contact information for tech support for SurvCE is provided below Carlson Software Inc Corporate Headquarters Maysville KY USA Tel 606 564 5028 Fax 606 564 6422 e mail support carlsonsw com Customer Service Technical Support Repair If you need assistance with your Carlson Software products please call by
370. o the Foresight Screen e Occupy Point You can manually enter the occupied point ID occupied setup point or click the List icon and select the point from a list of points You can also choose the point by clicking the Map icon and selecting the point from the map itself by tapping a specific point Finally a third icon offers the p196 ability to occupy a station and offset on a known horizontal alignment without knowing a point number Point Projection El 825 500 Centerline C SurvCEDemo Data Boneta d Select CL Reload CL CivilRoad1 CurvePts CL CivilRoad1 DEMO Beg 0 00 0000 Ditch End 4 36 7773 In the Station Offset method you must load a horizontal alignment centerline file and then specify a station and offset If you click the store to disk icon it will store the station and offset and after clicking OK in this dialog you will be prompted for a description and the next available point will automatically be assigned If you enter a station and offset that 1s equivalent to a known point that point will populate in the Pt ID field And if you enter a point in the Pt ID field it will confirm to you the station and offset In road work this option can be used simply for confirmation of the correct station and offset for any entered point e Instr Height This is the height of the instrument from the center of measurement typically middle of the lens to the tack in the hub or grou
371. ob units The Vertical option is measured from the tip of the pole to the unit s ARP For the Hiper series GPS units this is the bottom of the unit where the pole screws in Vertical is typically used for fixed height poles and tripods For the Hiper series the Slant option is measured from the point on the ground to the bottom edge of the square housing This point is approx imately 30 50mm higher than the ARP and is located at the bottom edge of the receiver s metal housing and is marked by a small arrow For detailed information on antenna heights please see http www ngs noaa gov ANTCAL Elevation Mask This value establishes the cutoff value above the horizon in degrees where satellites will not be considered Configure Base Radio Radio Type There are two options available PDL or Spread Spectrum When using PDL you must define the radio port baud and RTK message p602 type When using Spread Spectrum you only have to define the RTK message type Most of the modern Hiper series units come with Spread Spectrum radios When using PacCrest radios a TX light blinks about every second indicating the radio is transmitting The RX light would blink if you were getting interference Radio Port You must select the radio port This setting on the TOPCON base and rover receiver is usually C Data Port is always A when using a cable and B when using Bluetooth When using Pacific Crest radios TOPCON recommends the new PDL Pa
372. obotic total stations versus conventional total stations If you choose Direct amp Reverse then the reverse measurements count as part of the 20 allowable measurements so the max imum number of reference points becomes 10 As long as you have at least 2 distinct points you can shoot the same point twice or more with a direct or D amp R measurement Configure J X General View Pt Settings Search Resection Read D amp R _ Topography Read D amp R a _ Stakeout Read D amp R Reverse Face Angles Only ri D mannara Larn Ase Torr Set Collection Routine Options lf Review Individual Reading Data Set Order BD FD FR BR 7 No of Sets 1 Elevations can be ignored on any measurement Angle Only Readings can be mixed in as well This is useful when sighting radio towers and church steeples with known coordinates In fact all of your resection points can be measured by angle only in which case 3 or more points are necessary for an accurate calculation Sometimes if the 3 angle only points are in the same quadrant of view p262 a solution won t be found requiring additional points When elevations are used measurements will contribute to the calculation of the setup point elevation After entering the routine the first screen appears as follows Fesection Press Enter to take Reading 1 Pointip vii Configure Ignore Elev Angle Only Read Inst Hgt E ft Target Hat
373. ocalization System TS GPS Points By Helmert Total Station W Curvature amp Refraction Sea Level Correction Calculate Scale Factor C amp R Curvature and Refraction This option applies only to total station configurations and will be unavailable when your instrument is configured to any GPS option This factor causes an adjustment in distance measurement Effects are negligible except over long distances Itis recommended that this toggle be enabled except in those very rare cases where the instrument factors in curvature and refraction Sea Level Correction If the sea level correction toggle is enabled the horizontal distance at the source point s elevation is reduced to the sea level chord using the mean height of the vector Typically this value is negligible unless measuring very long distances Scale Factor TS For most applications the Scale Factor should be set to 1 0 to work on the ground with a total station The scale factor represents the combined grid elevation factor that reduces ground distances to grid Therefore for total stations the scale factor acts as a multiplier All distance measurements taken by a total station will be multiplied by the scale factor Because there are two potential uses of the scale factor to adjust G PS measurements and to adjust total station measurements two distinct scale factors are stored and recalled for any job one for total stations located on the TS ta
374. of crd are displayed Filters such as this can be set up using the Options button To transfer one or more files simply select or highlight the desired files and select the Transfer button More than one file can be transferred from the remote to the PC or from the PC to the remote during the transfer process Standard Windows selection options apply For example selecting one file and then while pressing the shift key on the PC selecting another file deeper on the list will select all the files in between the first and last selected You can also select the first file to transfer and press and hold down the shift key and use the down arrow to specify the range of files to transfer Pressing and holding the control key on the keyboard allows for the selection of multiple files in any selection order by picking the files with the left mouse button p103 5 After the files have been selected press the Transfer button When the transfer is complete the program will display the Transfer Complete message and will then proceed to update the file lists on the PC and the Remote Note The process of importing points to the data collector mimics the process of exporting points to the office computer but in reverse If a point is found to already exist on the data collector options appear to Overwrite All Yes All or Cancel All No All SurvCom Commands These commands are found and can be seen in the SurvCom dialog box shown above e C
375. of a rectangle and specify the starting point direction point Shown in the figure below is a 10x10 layout at 50 interval 10 rows and columns are added to the starting point producing 11x11 grid points The number of cells in the grid ranges from 1x1 to 20x20 and are laid out in a grid beginning at the starting point going towards the direction point p252 Pattern Settings Starting Pt ID 6 Northing 9912 6050 Easting 0115 3680 Direction Pt ID 68 Northing 9954 5620 Easting 20098 635C Grid Interval Number of Cells Sell Alignment 50 000 10 x 10 M Left Side C Right side The program will then show the grid point nearest to your GPS position ELEY DIFF Light Bar Settings This button allows you to specify parameters for enabling the light bar setting the grading tolerance and specifying the COM port The two light bars currently supported are Mikrofyn and Apache SurvCE can actually drive the grading process as shown below where an Apache light bar p253 is used on a motor grader In effect this offers extremely low cost grade indicate machine control Pressing OK from the main Elevation Difference dialog will first prompt the user to load the surface files involved unless elevation method was selected Then when OK is pressed again the ELEV DIFF screen in the following figure will appear This screen provides the user with a plan view of the project When a shot is taken cut
376. off the main loop are allowed and will be adjusted correctly A spur after the BM is allowed The opening dialog is where you set up the level loop If road files are used an additional tab in the leveling measurement screen will be made available for entering station and offset data To use a digital level instead of the current total station click the Select button to the right of the Instrument and choose from the available options which include Manual 3 Wire Manual 1 Wire Manual Digital Level and Sokkia SDL Manual Total Station entry can also be done by choosing Manual Total Station on the EQUIP tab p276 Leveling Instrument Current Total Station Select Level File C Sur emo Data RoadLoop tlh Select Project Operator Loop Date Temp Time Press Use Road Files Select Road Centerline 9 SuryvCEDemo Pata tmpets cl Profile Cy icarlson2uur mA AsCivilkoadiF ore Click the Select button to the right of the Level File to open an existing loop or start a new loop The user will be prompted to enter loop data such as project name and operator when creating a new loop Leveling wx Project Operator Loop Name Temp Date Pressure Get Date and Time Use the Select Road button to choose the horizontal and vertical alignments you p277 wish to associate Click the Use Road Files toggle to enable the use of the selected files If Use Road Files is
377. offset from the second point is along the 3 D vector created by the two GPS points If Left or Right is selected the offset is perpendicular to the 2 D vector created by the two GPS points and the second point s elevation is used as the elevation of the resulting point The distance offset can either be manually entered or input with a laser To use a laser you must first activate it by selecting Settings For more information on laser setup see the Peripherals section of this manual 2 Point x ita Results Method Read Point 1 JN 9870 6196 HRMS 2 943 E 20101 5862 YEMS 2 896 HT 6 56 ft 7 97 408 AUTONOMOUS Read Point 2 HRMS Read Paint 2 E VRMS HT 6 56 ft Zz Offset 0 000 tt Straight M Settings e Offset Under the Offset tab press Read Point 1 to read the first point from GPS Repeat this process for the second point The GPS antenna height used for each GPS read can be adjusted individually by editing the HT fields Now enter the offset of the point you would like to store or press Read Dist to read it from a laser Finally specify the direction of your offset and switch to the RESULTS tab to see your solution e Results After you have two GPS positions and an offset click on the RESULTS tab to view the resulting point If valid data has been entered in the p221 OFFSET tab the result will appear as shown below In this window you can specify a vertical difference for your target
378. og Baseline Data Use Glonass Rover Antenna AT502 Pole Base Antenna Jaxi202 Tripod Measure to Base of 36cm Height Hook Antenna Height Input the rover antenna height The AT501 Tripod AT502 Tripod AT503 Tripod and AT504 Tripod settings will all prompt to Measure to Base of 36cm Height Hook When the height hook is used the Antenna Height is measured down to the hub and tack elevation from the fix ed mounting position of the height hook The measurement is typically in meters so if you are configured to units in feet you can enter the Antenna Height in meters with the m suffix as shown above and the program will do the conversion automatically You can omit the m suffix if you are configured to metric units Other Antenna settings for Leica GPS are AT201 AT202 302 AT202 302GP AT303 ATS01 AT501 Pole AT502 ATS02 Pole AT503 AT504 SR299 399 Internal AX1201 AX201 Pole AX1201 Tripod AX1202 AX1202 Pillar AX1202 Pole AX1202 Tripod and Other In all these cases the antenna height is measured from the ground elevation to the base of the antenna the base is where it would rest if you removed it and placed it on a table the base is the lowest point Elv Mask This specifies the cutoff vertical angle above the horizon Any satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations An elevation mask of 10 degrees is typical It is advisable to use some elevation mask between 5 and
379. oint 5000 5000 100 etc and start a new localization file or use an existing one if it applies Then at your rover you can add more points to the localization as necessary Localization and the Raw File If the scale for GPS is determined from the localization a GPS Scale record of 1 0 and a Localization Scale equal to the calculated scale appearing in the Localization screen will be written to the RWS file Using the Localization File to Improve Base Localizations through Logging Static Data The Localization File dat typically applies to rover based localizations But if you did a Read GPS on your base antenna position and then took GPS shots with no rover localization and logged static data on the base in the meantime it is possible to submit that logged information to the OPUS program and obtain an accurate base position At this point it is still possible to recalculate all the field shots taken earlier from the less accurate base To do so follow the procedure outlined below 1 Store the Base Point Reference Tab in the Monitor screen 2 Adda point to the now empty Localization File For the local point enter the grid system coordinate computed by OPUS or other program For the geodetic Lat Lon point review the raw file and select the point you stored for the base 3 Reprocess the raw file through the localization All CRD points should then be relative to the new calculated eg OPUS generated coordinat
380. oint Logging button The current job the p302 available memory the interval and the antenna height which can be changed by clicking the Change Antenna button are shown Here you will need to enter a site name and choose whether to stop logging the point autom atically or manually Cancel Tag New Site Free Mem on PC Card 1992 kBytes Job fileOO01 Sit Name e Antenna Type AT501 Pole Antenna Height 0 000000 Change Antenna Interval 0 5000 seconds Sip Logging Manually After p J minutes The dialog below will appear to show information about the point being logged It can be exited without stopping the point Recording site site Site Duration O0 00 0 Antenna Height 0 0000 ft Antenna Type ATSO1 Pole Stop Point Logging Exit Continue Logging After exiting the screen you will return to the menu You can choose to end the job log more points or just leave it running while you do other things To end the job click the Close Job button p303 File Manager Go to the SURVEY tab again and click the Log Static Data button Again you will see a screen with four buttons This time click on the File Manager button to see what files are on the receiver s card In the dialog box you see a list of files along with their respecive sizes Jobs on Receiver 11051014 11 05 01 08 13 16 11051017 11 05 01 06 15 54 11051059 11 05 01 08 58 06 11051133 11 05 01 09 32 26 1105121
381. ollowed by equipment specific settings p131 Base Configuration Sa ee From Known Position Read From GPS Enter Lat Lon Enter Grid System Coordinates GPS Base for All RTK GPS Brands For all brands of GPS the GPS Base button is the command that configures the base receiver for broadcasting GPS corrections to the rover You must click the GPS Base button in while you are connected to the base receiver The base needs a set of coordinates to use as its stationary position Given that you are configured for a particular coordinate system there are 2 main types of localizations 1 Enter an Accurate Base Position and work from that point outward on the scale and true north of that system no rover localization 2 Enter an Accurate or Semi Accurate Read from GPS Base Position and then localize to known rover points that transform to the local coordinate system required if the local system is not true GPS north There is also a mixed base rover approach To use the base in the localization you should configure the base with the Use Local Coordinates option under From Known Position Here you configure the base by entering the local point 5000 5000 100 and start a new localization file or use an existing one if it applies Then at your rover you can add more points to the localization as necessary In this case a single rover point within Localization will produce a scale factor and best fit to the local co
382. olylines This is done with the command Reverse Polyline Each time you pick a polyline using this command you reverse its direction and little temporary arrows are displayed along the polyline indicating the current direction If it is not the direction you want reverse again MAP VIEW HE FevPline Select polyline Crd Layer CONC Place Draw GRID DG This command toggles a horizontal and verticle grid display over your drawing allowing you to set the grid resolution in drawing units MAP VIEW E x Q JEE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS nE Layer PR RO ST AM Transform MOV ROT COP SCL MIR This command allows you to reposition polylines in the drawing to new locations based on your point geometry The transformation options are Move Rotate Copy Scale Mirror These work much like they do in AutoCAD with input being the base point and the destination or target point Note This command only moves the graphics and does NOT reposition the corresponding points in the drawing p471 MAP VIEW E x VIEW MAMI coco TOOLS gt PR RD STAM Polyline Circle Erase 2 Laver By Edge Offset Modify Place GRID 6 7 Transform Move Rotate Copy LO Scale alder 5 31 Mirror HE FILE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Cmd Layer PR RO ST All Centerline moved from Pt 4 to Pt 8 p472 The COGO menu is found next to the Draw menu in MAP view Below you will find each feature descri
383. on All further action takes place on the PC side There is no time delay in this handshake SurvCE will wait for the PC program to catch up When you connect the cable from SurvCE to the PC Microsoft ActiveSync may interfere and display Connect to PC If you get this question select No and on your PC disable the Microsoft ActiveSync serial linkage if it is on Execute SurvCom or for Carlson Survey or SurvCADD Carlson Civil us ers July 2001 build or later choose Tools Data Collectors SurvCE SurvStar option If you get Failed to open COM 1 error code 3 the most likely errors are lack of cable connection or interference by Microsoft ActiveSync If connection is automatically established SurvCE will display Connected to PE p102 Fimi Tota Fig 11 E ee yus Pies TE If only the left side of the screen on the PC displays data then you do not have a connection yet Press the Connect button located at the bottom left of the file transfer dialog The transfer program will respond with Retrieving File List Once the file list has been retrieved the left side of the dialog box will show files located in the specified path on the PC and the right side of the dialog will show the files located in the designated path on the remote You can change directories by scrolling to the top of the file list and choosing Up One Level just like in Windows In the above dialog a filter is applied so that only files in the form
384. on allows you to convert slope distances with zenith angles to horizontal distances and vertical differences and vice versa See figure Calculator x Standard Scientific Conversion C M Ft SD ZA HOAWD C Lat Lon SP C Az Br Slope Distance Horizontal Distance 100 99 9906 zenith Angle Vertical Difference 89 12 58 1 23681 Solve SD ZA Solve HD VD e Lat Lon SP This option allows you to convert from Latitude Longitude to grid system coordinates and vice versa If you are configured for U S State p334 Plane Coordinates the routine conveniently displays your zone and you can even change zones for quick calculations without altering your GPS zone settings in Job Settings Otherwise the calculation is based on your Job Settings GPS Zone To solve for northing and easting fill in the latitude and longitude and press Solve N E To solve for latitude and longitude fill in the northing and easting and press Solve Lat Long Y ou can set the state plane zone at the bottom of this dialog Calculator Standard Scientific Other C O M Ft SD ZA HDAVD Lat Lon SP Az Br Latitude N S Northing 30 3025 415950 37 145 Longitude e Wl Easting 83 444 1 64516 46555 Ft IL Solve Lat Lon Save Salve M E MAD 83 KYNorth i sts SP Zone EY Morth After completing a conversion you may enter a point ID and press Save to save the coordinates to the current job Y ou can
385. on the receiver click the File Manager button If a file is open you can now tag sites Otherwise open a file by clicking the Start File button The file name can be chosen from a list of existing file names using the suggested file name or a file name of your choice The antenna height and antenna type can be changed using the Change Antenna button see Changing the Antenna The interval can be selected from the list or you can enter your own in seconds Start New File File Name C New Existing lago7 12a Elevation Mask 10 Antenna Height 0 000000 Change Antenna Antenna Type Manual Interval 15 0 seconds p297 After starting a file you will be returned to the main screen From here you can leave the file recording manage files exit or start tagging sites To tag a site click the Tag Site button Tag New Site x Cancel Free Mem on Receiver 24102792 bytes File Sit Name Antenna Type RegAnt Antenna Height 2 000000 Change Antenna Interval in Seconds 15 st p Logging Manually lt After f minutes The Tag New Site dialog shows the available space on the receiver and gives you the ability to enter a site name change the interval and change the antenna You can choose to have SurvCE stop logging the site automatically after a specified time period or stop it manually Even if you choose to stop logging automatically you will still have the option
386. on to remove the highlighted element Add Returning to the starting dialog you can add elements to get a centerline started Typically you will start with a line or tangent segment but you can also start on a curve or spiral curve element When you select Add you get to choose which element to use These options include Type of Element to Add E Curve Spiral Curve Spiral Spiral Only Add Line A tangent section of the alignment This option allows you to enter a point ID or coordinates to define the end of the tangent or enter the station or distance and the direction To force the element to be tangent to the previous element toggle on the Tangential to the previous elem option This will gray out the direction field and will compute the tangent direction and enter it for you p346 gt Line Tangent Element Start Pt ID Sta 44 08 3272 Nor 5221 6515 Eas 5167 8994 End Pt ID GEL EA End Station Northing 5 08 3272 317 3574 Length Easting 100 0000 2196 595868 North Azimuth 16 51 05 949923 Tangential to the previous elem Add Curve A typical circular curve section of the alignment The first element of the curve defines what the options for the second element can be See Lists Below The RR toggle allows the user to use Railroad definitions The Review button allows you to verify the Tangent In and Tangent Out bearings or azimuths depending on Job Settings Format Angle
387. ond offset point to obtain line to reset the slope stake if it is knocked out The first and second offset stakes provide a direction back to the slope stake When the slope stake is set the program prompts for setting the first offset stake When the first offset stake is set the program prompts for setting the second offset stake Both offset stakes are optional p404 Pai Offset Stake g 09 The storage of the slope stake points is an option turned on by clicking Store Point to CRD File With this clicked off you can simply slope stake and avoid storing any points The Description for the point will default to the station and offset Slope Staking will not respond to settings in Configure Reading for the Height Description prompt screen If you are using a named Slope Stake File set in File Job Settings Stake tab Cutsheets option you can still control at the point of staking whether you choose to append data to the file by clicking on or off Store Data to Report File p405 Slope Staking Store Station C Offset Elevation Pivot Pt 6 00 000 R18 000 945 750 Catch Pt 6 00 000 R36 501 955 001 Stake Pt 5 99 992 R36 478 955 001 Stk CP OUT 0 023 FWD 0 008 Stk PP C9 251 1 997 1 HD 18 478 50 063 Stk CL C6 251 5 836 1 HD 36 478 17 135 M Store Data to Report File voff o Ek 955 001 C Stk PP 9 25 Point ID a M Store Point to CRD File Desc STA5 99 992 CATCH R36 48 Sl
388. one parity Char Length 8 and Stop Bits 1 e Instrument Series Instruments supported are TPS 100 TPS 300 TPS 700 TPS 700 auto Builder TPS 400 TPS 800 TPS 1000 including TC1010 and TC1610 TPS 1100 and TPS 1200 EDM Mode Tracking Target Offset Standard BS Target Offset Fast l Reflector less Laser Pointer User Defined e Read Method The available read methods are Fast Tracking User Defined and Reflectorless The default setting is Fast The Standard option produces a 3 second reading while the Fast setting produces a 1 second reading One application of Reflectorless is to toggle between a 0 prism offset shooting a rock face or brick wall versus shooting a prism with a non zero prism offset When set to Reflectorless the rod height and prism offset automatically change to zero When returned to Standard the previous non zero prism offset is recalled and the original rod height is restored Turn p549 to Point for stakeout and PowerSearch are disabled in Reflectorless mode The Read Method Std Fast Reflectorless will appear in the upper right of the graphic screen for most types of Leica total stations in commands such as Store Points Stakeout Point etc Foresight Backsight Prism Offset Here is the list of standard prism offsets Note that Leica prisms default zero to equate to 34 4 mm So a prism offset of 34 4 equals a zero net offset Whenever a prism constant is changed a note is
389. onfiguration Total Station Pentax Pentax PTS3 Series For Pentax instruments select the PTS3 checkbox if you are using a PTS3 series instrument Instrument Setup Current Comms Elitea Num Distance Readings BO O o M Options vary by firmware Please make sure you have the latest firmware version PTS3 instruments will first send out the last reading before sending the current reading For some users you may wish to choose to record the 3rd reading for the most accuracy Pentax ATS Series The following information outlines the settings for the Pentax ATS Series instruments p565 This information was compiled using an ATS 105 1 Power up the Unit amp Level it up 2 Set the baud rate in the instrument Hold down the Blue S key and press the number 6 key in the upper right This will open the Configuration Menu for Baud Settings 3 Set the baud rate in SurvCE by selecting the Equip tab and then select the Comm Setup button SurvCE defaults to 1200 None 8 1 Match the Baud Parity Char Length amp Stop Bits with whatever the instrument is currently set to 4 Connect the data collector hold down the Blue S key and press the F5 button This puts the Total Station into Remote Mode for use with ex ternal data collectors RM blinks in the upper left corner NOTE SurvCE has advanced options for setting the Read Method Number of Readings amp use of the instrument lights Not all models
390. onnect After selecting Data Transfer from the File menu press this button to connect to the PC Once connection is made the status line on the file transfer utility dialog box will show Connected to the remote machine e Transfer Pressing this button transfers selected files from either the Remote to the PC or the PC to the Remote e Set Path This option allows for the specification of the desired source and destination drives and folders for both the PC and the Remote device For example if you were downloading or copying files from the Remote device to the PC to specify a source path on the remote device select the Remote Machine toggle and then type in the desired path in the path field To specify a destination path on the PC select the Local PC toggle and type in the desired path the path field When a change to either path 1s made the transfer utility will retrieve a new file list from the specified paths e Make Dir This option allows for creation of directories on both the PC and the Remote device Specify the machine to create the directory on and then enter the directory name e Delete This option allows you to delete the tagged files e Rename Select a file and rename it e Options This command allows you to set various options for data transfer The dialog shown in the figure below will appear p104 3 Optons OM Port File Mask Directory Sort Display Special Files
391. op square red and play arrow green icons While the GPS is running or the robotic total station is tracking the stop icon allows you to stop the surveying equipment from taking readings When the button is pressed the GPS or robotic total station stops and the button switches to the play icon which can be pressed to resume the readings e Monitor Skyplot This button can be found on the bottom right of the MAP screen for GPS This binocular icon opens the Monitor Skyplot dialog Note In GPS mode if yourun Auto Points at Interval and points do not store check that your RMS tolerances for storing are not set too low Points will be stored only when your RMS values are less than those specified in tolerances under the EQUIP tab Also note that you may find that the points store at a distance apart exceeding that specified by your interval due to latency and your speed of movement Remote Elevation This command allows you to observe a point that cannot be reached vertically such as a power line building top etc The routine uses two observations one for the base point and one for the vertical angle to the target object The routine then calculates the target point s elevation By placing the prism below or above the desired point Carlson SurvCE stores information about the base point Then you can take a second reading observing only the zenith vertical angle to the true target point Using these two observations SurvCE calc
392. ope Staking Store Station Offset Elevation Pivot Pt 6 00 000 R18 000 945 750 Catch Pt 6 00 000 R38 562 956 031 Stake Pt 5 99 298 R38 562 955 008 Stk CP F1 023 FWD 0 702 CP PP C10 281 2 1 HD 20 562 50 Stk PP C9 258 2 221 1 HD 20 562 45 025 Stk CL C6 258 6 162 1 HD 38 562 16 229 F Store Data to Report File voff o Elw 955 008 C Stk PP 9 26 Point ID 8 I Store Point to CRD File Desc STA5S 99 298 CATCH R38 56 Note that there are two options for the slope stake report Elevation and Offset The standard option is the Elevation method This assumes you were able to survey the actual slope stake point with reasonable accuracy and it reports the actual stake to pivot point results If you were staking a 2 1 cut slope it reports your actual slope as 1 997 1 in this case and you can choose to round the result and write Cut 2 1 9 25 V 18 48 H on the stake But if at the catch point there are boulders in the way you can walk out and away from centerline in cut and in toward centerline in fill and drive the stake where you can In this case you would choose the Offset method In the Offset example above we had to walk past p406 the catch point about 2 units from 36 50 to 38 56 We drive the stake and note that the catch is at 956 03 rather than 955 01 so we measure up 1 02 on the stake and draw a horizontal line there as the catch point An extra line appears in the report that tells us to write Cut 2 1
393. or fill from the current vertical location to the design surface is reported in the lower left portion of the screen The computed design surface elevation for your current location is also reported p254 ELEV DIFF VOff 0 000 ta 1 39 094 R49 641 A CUT 11 335 RD 1995 170 A When Road Design Files are selected there is an ex tra Settings option at the top of the screen that 1s used for setting the location of the Profile position on the template p255 Settings OoOn of x Apply Profile at C Let Right Fix Offset Template ID CENTER C Reference Alignment Vert Off of Profile 0 In road design the position of the profile is sometimes placed on an inside edge of pavement or at some other offset from centerline as defined by a fix ed offset a template ID or even a completely distinct reference horizontal alignment Even when specified the application of the special profile can be turned off and on Note that the Off status is equivalent to the default condition of profile grade at Template ID Center If the Profile positioning is set to On in Settings you will always be promped with the Settings dialog after loading the Roading files so that you are reminded of any unusual active profile offset before continuing by pressing Enter OK or changing a setting If you click the helmet icon in the upper left of the screen and select View Data from the Help options or enter A
394. or the country and click Set Bluetooth Country Code A similar message confirming success will appear e Power Off Receiver Sends a command to power off the receiver e Update Clock from GPS This will update the clock on your CE device based on the time recieved from the GPS satellites GPS Utilities Topcon e Power Cycle Receiver This command is the same as turning the TOPCON receiver off and then on e Restore Factory Defaults This command resets the TOPCON receiver to factory settings and the receiver stops acting as base or rover The baud rate of Port A will be set to 115 200 Reset this to 9600 by turning the receiver off and then on while holding down the FN button Watch the REC light go from orange to green to red and then let up the FN button This method can be used if SurvCE cannot establish communications at any time e Clear Non Volatile Memory This command does everything Restore Factory Defaults does and also clears the almanac data that tells it where to p625 look for the satellites The receiver then downloads a new almanac from the satellites e Send Command to Receiver This command allows experienced users to type in commands using TOPCON GPS receiver commands to set or report internal settings See the TOPCON operations manuals for a complete list of TOPCON GPS receiver commands Set Satellite Status This feature allows the user to disable a satellite if necessary e Initialize to Known Point
395. ordinates There are six methods to set the stationary base position organized into 2 categories From New Position includes Read from GPS Enter Lat Long and Enter Grid System Coordinates The From Known Position tab includes Previously Surveyed Point Use Local Coordinates and Read From File When you are starting a new job no information in the raw RWS file yet always use the options in From New Position p132 From New Position Options Read from GPS This method takes a specified number of GPS readings from the base receiver s autonomous position and uses it as its true position The autonomous position can be off of the actual position by 150 feet The base will calculate corrections based on this autonomous position If you set up the base with this method the rover points must be used for localization since the corrections they are using are based on the approx imate position of the base antenna Read GPS combined with rover based localization 1s one of the most common methods used to start a GPS survey When Read from GPS is used the program will present the current position as shown Average GPS Number of Samples 500 Press OK to read GPS Maximum number of readings 999 p133 Average Results 500 Valid Readings out of 500 Readings Lon Min W 71 09 53 45673 Max W 71 09 53 42803 Lat Min N 42 21 41 78069 Max N 42 21 41 82205 Elv Min 10 8744 Max 7 9236 Lon Avg
396. orks very well with the Hgt Desc Prompt on Save turned on in which case Enter key takes the shot then displays p157 the results and provides an opportunity for editing as in the Store Point dialog shown above Read or Store The first Enter key takes the reading and the second Enter key stores the reading Configure View Pt These settings control the reporting appearance of the stakeout navigation information The Method setting allows you to choose the stakeout inform ation that is most appropriate for your situation and personal preference The options for Method are described in detail below Configure General Sets Method In Out amp Left Right Ref Object l Poit Point m B FAI Directions From lf Use CL for Ref Object when applicable pe Method Options e North South East West When total stations are used the direction to go in stakeout can be North South East West For instance the program might advise North 3 582 East 1 917 This method is better suited to GPS work and is subject to having a sense in the field of the north direction In Out Left Right Nearly all surveyors choose this method If you are staking a point located 100 meters from the instrument and take a measurement at 97 meters the program will respond Out 3 If the In Out Left Right method is selected then the Ref Object and Directions From p158 options become available to further define left
397. ormal crown to flat to reverse crown to full super Normally the rates of transition are consistent Note that super left or right is always entered as a positive percent slope the road centerline curve direction will control the direction of pivot You are now ready to click Add and enter in Curve 1 p380 Add Superelevation Station to begin transition 100 Station to begin super run in 200 Station for super at normal crown in s00 Max slope of super full in percent 3 Station to begin full super B00 Station to end full super 1400 Station for super at normal crown out 1500 Station to end super run off 1700 Station to end transition 1900 When you click OK the first line of the superelevation dialog is filled in Curve 1 is complete Next we enter Curve 2 as follows using similar logic Add Superelevation Station to begin transition 2200 Station to begin super run in 2300 Station for super at normal crown in 2400 Max slope of super full in percent 4 Station to begin full super 2500 Station to end full super 3500 Station for super at normal crown out 3600 Station to end super run off 3700 Station to end transition 3800 When OK is clicked the two curves are complete and the summary dialog appears There is one line or row for each curve Note If any of the columns are too narrow to display all the text you can p381 grip the vertical line separating co
398. ose In this case we will send that value exactly unmodified to the instrument e 360 23 1 Prism offset of 23 1 Leica model e Circle 0 0 Standard Leica round prism e Mini 17 5 Leica mini prism e ReflTape 34 4 Equates to zero offset wall surface e 30mm Other manufactures Sokkia Seco e 40mm Other manufacturers Use ATR When this feature is enabled ATR Auto Target Recognition will be used when configured to standard or fast reading When running the robotic in remote mode with ATR turned on and when performing a Set Angle and Read in the backsight screen a standard measured backsight the ATR connection will be taken into consideration so that the angle set is relative to the center of the prism not necessarily the crosshairs of the instrument The Set Angle and Check Angle functions will still be relative to the crosshairs Laser Pointer Ideal for indoor or dark evening surveying this feature causes p126 the instrument to emit a red beam It is often used when doing reflectorless work and makes a red mark on the wall floor or object being surveyed This is useful for confirming the position prior to the shot The beam should not be directed into someone s vision or eye Power Search Enabled The Power Search option may be available with motorized total stations This option activates the PowerSearch button in the banner line at the top of the survey and stakeout s
399. ot Traverse ee Remote BM Robotics Occupy Point 1197 Instr Height 5 ft Backsight Point 1195 Backsight N Azi 270 00 00 Target Hgt IS ft Use Backsight HT for Foresights Confirm NEZ Configure Backsight After the backsight is confirmed or measured the Auto Store by Interval dialog will appear as shown in the figure below In GPS mode you will see the Auto Store by Interval dialog immediately In the Auto Store by Interval dialog box you set the type of interval distance or time and the value of the interval You also set the starting point number for the data set You can assign a point description for all points acquired with this command During actual data collection you can change the description p288 Auto Store by Interval Interval Type Distance starting Pt ID Description Data is acquired in the standard collection MAP view screen The point ID description and rod height fields can all be changed while the command is active For example to change your point description from td top of ditch to gr ground shot simply type gr over the td in the Desc field without interrupting your collection AUTO INT L Ngee 0929 E 20073 1582 4 97 4005 HRMS 0 041 RM5 0 08 7 HDist 5 738 p289 e Store Pressing the Store icon immediately stores the point at your current location overriding the interval e GPS Start and Stop This button alternates between st
400. ot required Translate On the translate dialog enter in the Delta North Delta East and the Delta Elevation These values represent the change in the original coordinate values and the desired coordinate values When complete select the OK button on the dialog or navigate to the ROTATE or SCALE Tabs for further data input The lower portion of the screen shows an alternate method of defining a translation p329 by comparing an original point to a destination point Data entered here as point ID or directly entered northing easting and elevation will lead to computation and display of the delta N delta E and delta Z in the upper portion of the screen 7 Linear Transformation Highest Point ID 1193 Range of Points 1 1133 Overwite Existing Point IDs C Use New Point IDs Store in New CRD File When OK is pressed a second screen appears which controls the range of points to be translated Assuming you have 55 points in your file you could preserve these 55 points by adding 100 to the point numbers and saving the transformed points as 101 through 155 If you choose Overwrite Existing Point IDs the Add to Point Numbers option is not available If you choose Use New Point Numbers then you will be prompted to enter a new point number for each existing point to be overwritten recommended only when you are overwriting a few points You can even store the transformed points in a completely new CRD file by selecti
401. ote has two types in addition to the standard Cable Bluetooth and Radio options The two additional types support RC Only communication using either Bluetooth or Cable If RC Only is selected use the RC tab described below to specify which type of RC unit is in use p575 Instrument Setup ww x Current Comms ESC Search RC EDM Mode Tracking 10mm Guidelights lon o Track Sensitivity low o o Tracking Speed lsuvey e EDM Mode Choose between Fine 0 1mm Fine 1mm Tracking 1mm and Tracking 10mm EDM settings e Guide Lights Turns on and off the guide lights Current Comms Settings RC Normal Search Pattern Joystick Speed Horizontal Range 30 Vertical Range 30 Wait Time J Lock on Read e Lock on Read For the Topcon 800 8000 remote there is a Lock on Read option which behaves similarly to the Auto Aim for direct mode but is not as p576 precise as Auto Aim e Search Pattern Defines the pattern the instrument will search Joystick Speed This option defines how fast the instrument will turn when using the arrow keys to steer it The RC tab refers to the configuration of the RC unit This tab allows you to specify which type of RC device is being used and whether there is a connection between SurvCE and the RC unit If there is a connection please use the configure button to set communication parameters for the RC unit Note that the RC quick lock functio
402. ou have exited Carlson SurvCE on the handheld Launch WinZip on the PC In WinZip select File Open Archive In the WinZip Open Archive dialog choose Archives and ex e Files from the Files of type drop list and navigate to the location of the downloaded p19 A a ee Carlson SurvCE executable Still in the Open Archive dialog highlight the downloaded Carlson SurvCE executable and select the Open button Highlight the file that has the CAB extension and select the Extract button There should only be one CAB file Close WinZip Remove the memory card and put it into the handheld device Turn on the handheld device Using My Computer on the desktop of the handheld device navigate to the memory card and locate the CAB file Double Click to open the CAB file and answer OK or YES to all of the prompts and dialogs Carlson SurvCE should be installed or updated and the CAB file will remove itself from the memory card Launch Carlson SurvCE and verify the version number and date by selecting Equip About Carlson SurvCE Authorizing SurvCE The first time you start SurvCE you are prompted to register your license of the software If you do not register SurvCE will remain in demo mode limiting each job file to a maximum of 30 points You are currently in DEMO mode Each coordinate file will be limited to a maximum of 30 points Do you wish to register n
403. ou obtain additional input screens e User Entered Dialog Ifthe User Entered method is selected you are first prompted for a centerline and a dialog appears p395 Station for Slope Staking Station 0 00 000 Next Interval 20 Pivot Off 18 000 Pivot Elev 945 750 Read Instrument Use Point ID A CUT At each station you can enter a specific pivot offset pivot elevation and the cut and fill slope ratio that governs Slope ratios can be entered as percent as well is Display As Ratio is clicked off Pivot offsets should be entered as positive numbers even left of centerline since the program will detect which side of centerline you are on from the first total station or GPS reading The program will take the absolute value of the pivot offset entry in any case You can obtain the position to stake from Read Instrument which calculates the station offset and pivot elevation from a measured position Or you can enter a point number to obtain a station offset and pivot elevation Point Defined Alignment Dialog The selection of the Point Defined method leads to the classic alignment selection screen familiar to users of Offset Stakeout and Stake Centerline p396 Stake Slope Vertical 1 Centerline File Use Ref CL 4 Select Ending Station 3 18 310 Cutsheet None Though this is the classic use of the Point Defined option using points slope staking can be conducted from
404. ou receive an error message check connections and the data card If you want to change the groups you already have on the device choose Group Editor It will take up to five seconds for a dialog to appear with group information p295 Recording site 1 Site Duration 00 00 05 Antenna Height 5 0000 ft Antenna Type AT502 Pole Stop Point Logging Exit Continue Logging If the Group Name is NewGroup there are currently no groups on the receiver To add one fill out the information and click the Save button If there are already groups you may add anew one by selecting New filling in the required information and hitting Save To see other groups click Prev or Next To delete a group click on the Del button To edit a group make any changes and click the Save button If a group name is modified it may take slightly longer to make the change In order to change the antenna click the Change Antenna button see Changing the Antenna When you are satisfied with the groups click Close You will be asked if you wish to start logging data If you click yes you will enter the Log Raw Data dialogs Post Processing Logging Static Data for Topcon Go to the Survey Menu and select the Log Static Data button You will see a screen with four buttons p296 Topcon GPS Setup File None Start File If you want to manage the files to see how much memory they are using and to delete files
405. ou set a tighter Station Tolerance in X SCT Settings option Edit than the Rounding Tolerance you will be warned even though the rounding is correct In the screen shown below station 16 70 000 has been added as a special station Clicking the first line 10 00 000 23 00 000 allows you to set the standard interval and the additional stations in the list would be for special stations in addition to the standard interval p416 XSection Settings 10 00 000 23 00 000 100 000 100 000 10 00 000 100 000 100 000 10 11 570 16 70 000 100 000 100 000 23 00 000 100 000 100 000 The below smaller dialog appears when you tap Add Odd Stations shown in the above figure Add odd station MIN Sta 10 00 000 MAX Sta 23 00 000 Station 16 70 000 Left Offset 100 000 Right Offset 100 000 With the first line highlighted selecting Edit leads to the settings options for the full range of stations p417 X SCT Settings MIN Sta 10 00 000 MAX Sta 23 00 000 Range of Stations l Do not use range of stations End Sta 237 00 000 Left Off 100 000 Interval 50 000 Right Off 100 000 Offset from alignment to X Section 0 000 W Add Start and End Stations Add PI PC PT TS SC CS ST Stations With an interval set of 50 and Start End Stations turned on the program will only expect you to capture stations at 50 units intervals starting at 10 00 through to 23 00 b
406. ou want to add an offset at 42 867 called RP click Add You don t have to highlight the correct offset to add above the software will sort and place the new entry appropriately Add Section Offset y x Offset 42 867 Elevation 1143 521 Description RP When you click OK your new entry will be in the list The Edit box leads to the same entry dialog as Add Remove will provide a warning and then delete the highlighted offset and elevation Up and Down should not be used unless a file conversion led to out of order listing of offsets and elevations When you click OK from the station edit dialog you can save the revised cross section file back in the section list dialog Input Edit Superelevation Roads can contain one or more curves and each curve can have its own superelevation data This data includes start station for super transition station for full super percent of full super station for end full super and station for ending the super transition back to normal crown In SurvCE each superelevation data set for each curve would be entered as a line of superelevation data in the sup file p378 Superelevation List SurvCkE end T gt Add Edit Remove Load Save As Clear A If we had two curves both with superelevation then we would do two Adds using this dialog Let s say for simplicity that we have a road with a 2 normal crown which has one curve
407. ow Choose Yes to start the registration process or No to register later p20 Product Registration Serial Number Your registration code is 160 117 Enter Change Key SurvCE registration is done via the Internet at the following address http update carlsonsw com regist_survce php You will be required to enter your company name phone number email address your SurvCE serial number and the registration code that the program will generate After you submit this information your change key will be displayed and emailed to the address that you submit Keep this for your permanent records If you do not have access to the Internet you may fax the above information to 606 564 9525 Your registration information will be faxed back to you within 48 hours During this time you may continue to use the program without restriction After you receive your Change Key enter it and press OK After you register SurvCE you should perform a RAM Backup or a System Save If you do not do this then your authorization code could be lost the nex t time the computer reboots p21 My Computer EUA Accessories Favor ites Rilo Reset d Backup RAM F Command Prompt F Save Registry ap Suspend AJ Windows Explorer Za 701 AM If you cannot find this on your Start menu then open the Control Panel and choose RAM Backup Hardware Notes If SurvCE quits responding you
408. phanumeric format will be necessary for files larger than 32 000 points A comment will be added in the Rw5 file CRD Alphanumeric or CRD Numeric based on the format used e Show Continuous Total Station Angles This allows you to display angles continuously within SurvCE This option is especially useful when using On board versions of SurvCE e No of Readings to Avg TS amp GPS Specifies the number of readings that will be taken and averaged on each observation Values between 1 and 9 are accepted for Total Stations and 1 999 for GPS If the tolerance is ex ceeded between readings a warning screen will appear Note The Num Dist Readings setting does not apply to Manual Total Station mode In this mode you can use the Calculator to average distances When prompted for Slope Distance enter to bring up the calculator Choose the Scientific Tab Follow the tutorial below to average three values p156 141 213 Enter 141 211 Enter 141 220 Enter Now press on the keyboard twice and with the first 141 220 is added to 141 211 to get 282 431 then with the second you get 423 6440 Then enter 3 and type backslash for divide This gives the result 141 2147 Choose the Copy button at the bottom of the screen then Paste at the top Enter Store Icon TS amp RTS GPS Since the Enter key is a convenient and popular way to take shots in the Store Points command SurvCE allows you to specify
409. point or being located SEP is the three dimensional analogue of CEP e Stakeout Tol This specifies the maximum difference between the target location and actual staked point When the staked point is beyond the tolerance SurvCE displays a warning dialog Note CEP tolerance and SEP tolerance are only used by Trimble All others refer to itas HRMS and VRMS Tolerance Note Even if you are fixed if you attempt to store points and your GPS tolerance values are exceeded you will obtain a warning screen Peripherals A Peripheral is a device that must be used in tandem with a GPS receiver or a total station Peripherals can all be configured from the Peripherals menu under the p187 EQUIP tab Lasers Light Bars and Depth Sounders are all supported as peripherals If a peripheral is not currently in use it is strongly recommended that you deactivate it so it does not slow down other operations Lasers such as the Leica Disto can be used for horizontal offsets and can be set to supplement the rod height for data collection at the pole using robotic total stations or GPS for marine or ATV surveys Lasers Currently supported lasers are Laser Atlanta Leica Disto Laser Impulse IP200 Laser Impulse CR400 and Sokkia Contour If you have a different laser contact Carlson Software to discuss adding support for it With GPS enabled a laser can be used to provide an offset from a GPS reading For more information see the GPS Offset s
410. polyline pick inside the area defined by that entity MAP YIEY Editals exityPick lt Select gt Cmd Layer PR RD STAM Only polylines open or closed can be selected This command does not apply to p490 attributes associated with points use List Points to edit point attributes Attributes are associated with points polylines and polygons closed polylines either through use of feature codes or by importing shape files If a polyline is closed you can use the Pick option and simply pick inside its interior This ROAD description included a SURFACE MATERIAL attribute which now can be edited FOAD ka Yes GIS Data Edlit 1180656441 Line M Save Values Char Single Lane Width 12 Char Surface Mat l Offset Settings OF This command allows you to set the type of corner that SurvCE should create when offsetting entities Offset type Type corners for new polyline A A p491 Traverse Defaults TD This sets the elevation prompting none zenith vertical elevation difference within the Traverse and Sideshot commands within the MAP view Also enables a prompt for Instrument and Rod Height Default setting is no instrument or rod heights and no vertical angle prompting so inputs are simplified as angle bearing code angle bearing distance description point number Traverse and Sideshot entries within the MAP screen are stored to the RWS file Note 3D MODE must be
411. pposed to Extrapolate which will project the next reading by your direction of movement and may apply to difficult shots in tree lines Ambiguity Fixing Parameter This determines how tight the ambiguities of the RTK solution must be before a fixed position is achieved It is recommended that High be used for greater accuracy RTK Calculation Mode In Configure Rover the RTK Calculation Mode should be set to Delay which forces a fresh reading as opposed to Extrapolate which will project the next reading by your direction of movement Extrapolate may apply to difficult shots near obstructions such as trees or buildings Receiver Utilities Power Cycle Receiver Use this button to power cycle the receiver At times this may help if communications fail and cannot be restarted by Configure Base or Rover Restore Factory Defaults Use this button to re boot the receiver back to factory default settings Clear Non Volatile Memory Use this option to clear the unit s non volatile memory Send Command to Receiver This button allow the user to send command p604 directly to the receiver if necessary e Set Base Rover Radio Use Set Base Radio and Set Rover Radio to be sure that both radios are on the same channel Recommended settings are base on low digisquelch low sensitivity and rover on medium or high digisquelch e Set Satellite Status This command enables you to turn off particular satellites both U S and Russi
412. pprox imate direction It searches over a fixed range of motion and detects all prism types and locks on to the exact center of the prism Saves dial in time Power Search Enabled The Power Search option can be purchased with all motorized Leica total stations This option activates the PowerSearch button in the banner line at the top of the survey and stakeout screens When Power Search is pressed the total station will typically find the prism in 10 seconds regardless of the direction it is initially pointed If it has found one prism and you hit Power Search again it will leave that prism and find the next one If you have only 2 prisms on the job foresight and backsight it will conveniently rotate from the foresight to the backsight and back again each time it 1s pressed Turn to Point in Stakeout This option should always be enabled with a motorized total station In stakeout with the exception of slope staking the program knows the angle and distance to turn When enabled this feature will automatically rotate to correct horizontal angle for the stake point When on the associated Turn to Vertical Point in Stakeout option will also be made available Turn to Point in Stakeout is disabled when in Reflectorless mode since staking out should require the certainty of a prism placed vertically over p551 the target point e Turn to Vertical in Stakeout When auto turning to stakeout points you have the o
413. pressing Enter or clicking the icon itself And if you turn off Prompt for Total Station Setup within Configure you go directly to the foresight screen if there is already a valid backsight There are two major types of Foresight Screens 1 Standard Total Station 2 Robotic Total Station See the Store Points GPS section of this manual for more information on GPS Only total station screens will be discussed here p205 Standard Total Station Foresight Screen Store Points standard sideshots and traverses can be run in either full graphics mode or full text mode The Text screen is accessed by tapping the helmet in the upper left and selecting Text To go back to graphics click the helmet and select Graph Graphic backgrounds can include linework that you create yourself using commands such as PL and 2DP and O2 offset in the Map view Graphics can also include drawings that you import from DXF using the command IDXF in DXF found in the Map view of SurvCE When you exit SurvCE this linework can be configured to save on exit and stay associated with your point file Note that linework drawn by feature codes or IDXF is on layers which can be frozen hidden or thawed shown by the Layer command under View in the Map screen The Text and Graphic screens are shown below Pt a7 OP Pt 1 BS Pt 21 HI 5 0000 HT 4 6000 HT 4 6 BS Bra 54 53 43 W AR 245 35 11 N 3474 5593 ZA 89 34 07 E 4997 4930 HD 1
414. prietary format amber indicates CMR and red indicates RTCM Troubleshooting Not able to establish connection to receiver p589 If the data collector 1s connected to COM2 and configures COM1 to receive CMR corrections the receiver will no longer recognize commands on COM1 To correct the problem connect the data collector to COM2 go to the Configure Rover window set the correction type to Navcom and press OK Now connect to COM1 go to the Comm Setup window and press OK It will then search through the baud rates to find the right one Unable to update Navcom firmware A common problem people have when updating the firmware on the Navcom is they connect the computer to COM1 on the Navcom instead of COM2 They must connect to COM2 to update the firmware The transfer will go faster if they set COM2 to run at 115200 baud before starting the firmware update utility GPS NMEA This GPS configuration is typically used to pick up the standard commonly output NMEA string from a variety of receivers including Thales MobileMapper CE Magellan the Sokkia GPSO1 Toughbook and some brands of Trimble equipment Thales MobileMapper CE To use the internal GPS of the MobileMapper CE unit from Thales set the following Instrument NMEA GBPS Receiver Communications Port Number COM2 Baud Rate 57600 Parity None Char Length 8 Stop Bits 1 Configure Reading Make sure that you toggle off the option to Store Fixed Only p590
415. ps fast speed Tapping the other direction e g down stops the movement Geodimeter Trimble Press the arrow key once After a small delay the p203 instrument will move an incremental amount Do not rush too many presses as they all will be completed Topcon Holding down the arrow keys on the keypad of the CE data collector allows you to move the base instrument up and down left and right When you release the key the motion stops e Search This button will initiate a search to look for the prism or reflector For Leica Search initiates an ATR search Pressing the Search or Quick Lock buttons will lock the instrument to the prism and put the instrument back into tracking mode e PowerSearch For Leica the PowerSearch option will conduct a fast search typically less than 10 seconds PowerSearch will find the prism regardless of the original direction the instrument is pointing e QuickLock Topcon has an additional search option called Quick Lock which appears when configured for Topcon 800 8000 Remote using RC2 A Quick Lock search will find the prism in less than 15 seconds e Standby This button takes the instrument out of tracking mode This is useful for example in allowing the user to set the prism pole down to drive a stake e Turn to Angle This button opens an additional dialog that prompts you for the angle to turn which can be entered picked from the Map or point based See the figure below You can turn t
416. pt can be enabled in Configure C or ALT C from the Store Pints screen If you don t have the height and description prompt turned on then each shot is a single press of Enter and you must enter antenna height description or point ID changes prior to pressing Enter and taking the shot gt STORE PNTS M 9920 0974 EM00 73 0968 2 97 3942 HRMS 0 043 YRMS 0 064 For GPS coordinates status Fixed Float Autonomous and HRMS and VRMS accuracy estimates are displayed at all times The icons at the left are for zooming and panning From top to bottom they are zoom extents zoom in zoom out zoom window zoom previous and point display control If you prefer to work in a pure text screen without graphics you can tap the helmet icon and select TEXT The following dialog will appear p214 gt SURY PTS GRAFH FIXED Pt 1193 HT 6 562 HRMS N 9993 4894 YREMS E 19982 27 2 197 4057 SATS 5 Desc MONITOR JSEYPLOT OFFSET STORE The Text screen uses a large character size for easy viewing and limits options to Monitor Skyplot Offset and Store You can return to the graph view by tapping the GRAPH button You can also temporarily view your points on the screen by tapping Map then tap Back to return to the text based data collection screen Note that the program will remember which screen you were in last Graph or Text and return to that mode of data collection automatically S S In addition to pressing
417. ption to turn horizontally but not vertically If Turn to Vertical is disabled you would need to manually dial in the vertical position of the prism in stakeout However if rod heights are unchanging this feature can be enabled and will turn the gun to the correct vertical position as well factoring in the current rod height setting For Leica TPS equipment that offers the reflectorless option screens such as Store Points and Stakeout now have a handy icon which when toggled switches from non reflectorless to reflectorless and back The button appears in both the graphics and text modes of these screens Rod heights and prism constants will automatically be adjusted when switching from one mode to the other Leica 1200 Robotic The new Leica robotic total station requires the activation of the Extended GeoCOM option before it will allow the use of third party data collection software i e SurvCE or Carlson Field e Activation Information The following information was provided by Leica in document Sul 1 05G TPS1200 Instruments TCA TCP TCRA TCRP require a special key code to operate in Robotic mode when using an AllegroCE RCS running SurvCE Version 1 5 The following table lists the part number for the code Product Part Number Description TPS1200 734754 GeoCOM Robotics License Note When ordering a TPS1200 Robotic Instrument AllegroCE RCS and SurvCE you must order part number 734754 this is a no charge item
418. r Search again it will leave that prism and find the next one If you have only two prisms on the job foresight and backsight it will conveniently rotate from the foresight to the backsight and back again each time it is pressed p557 e Work Area This will define a limiting area for searching This can speed up both the standard ATR Search and the PowerSearch The Work area angle ranges apply to both searches The Show button will show the two positions of the search window first by moving immediately to Position 1 Y ou will be prompted to press OK to see Position 2 Having defined a window of searching Center will move that window to a new center position Y ou will be prompted to Sight on Centered Position and Press OK The Define button prompts you to shoot the lower left and upper right positions which are then displayed above under Work Area If the Work Area is set to start at 0 0000 horizontal for example searching would send the instrument to the backsight point e Use ATR When this feature is enabled ATR Auto Target Recognition will be used when configured to standard or fast reading When running the robotic in remote mode with ATR turned on and when performing a Set Angle and Read in the backsight screen a standard measured backsight the ATR connection will be taken into consideration so that the angle set is relative to the center of the prism not necessarily the crosshairs of the instrumen
419. r to work with SurvCE Commands will not be accepted for example if you were in the Config screen Note that baud rates on the Sokkia robotic must be set to 9600 The Settings options for the Sokkia robotic are shown below Instrument Setup EDM Mode Target Offset 30 Guide Lights OF Target Type Prism p571 Instrument Se kp Current Comms settings Search On Read Use RC Unit Ww Run Remotely Joystick Speed 6 7 Horizontal Range 200 Vertical Range 90 Joystick speeds are to 6 for arrow key response turning gun For reference 6 is approximately 6 degrees per arrow press Search types are Sight field of view of gun or 1 degree 30 minutes or 10 meters at 100 meters H Wide V Wide and HV Wide The wide views are 6 times field of view Auto Search before Read finds the prism center exactly before taking a measurement useful in Set Collection for example and in Stakeout Run Remotely sets the left and right turning of the gun referenced from the pole and not from the instrument This is distinct from left and right referencing for stakeout which refers to movement of the rod Use RC Unit will enable the RMC search option in SurvCE Total Station Topcon 800 8000 APL1 The following information describes the various options available for the Topcon 800 8000 total stations p572 Carlson SurvCE supports the Topcon 800 s eries 800 802 800A 8000 8200 when runnin
420. rains out of the CE device There are safeguards against this but if it happens follow these steps to restore the icon 1 Select Start lower left on most CE devices Ctrl Esc on the Ranger and choose Windows Explorer under Programs 2 Navigate to the SurvStar directory the directory containing SurvCE which on some devices is Disk SurvStar 3 Look for the SurvCE Shortcut and highlight it 4 Choose the Edit pull down in Windows Explorer and choose Copy 5 Then return to the desktop where the icons are visible and press ALT then tap into blank space on the screen sometimes referred to as ALT Click 6 Choose Paste Shortcut That should restore it If the icon disappears this indicates some problem in the original installation of SurvCE since a process occurs to make the icon permanent You can help ensure that your restored icon is permanent by going to Start Settings Control Panel and choosing Perform Ram Backup Select Backup Now as prompted This should make the SurvCE icon remain even after full loss of battery Can I lose data or get bad data if I Re Boot my CE device If you re boot your Allegro or Carlson Explorer or Ipaq or any other CE device you are using you can lose your antenna height or prism height information because SurvCE does not store to memory changes in antenna height or prism height except in the following scenarios The hard save of antenna prism heights is done when you exit the program when you
421. rc segment e g line spiral are or arc spiral arc p349 Spiral Only Element Spiral In Northing 5221 6515 Spiral In Easting 5167 8994 Spiral In Station 4 08 3272 Spiral Length 0 0000 Spiral Direction Let C Right Element At Spiral Out Line Curve Pick PL This option is only visible if you Clear the dialog With this option you can pick a centerline from any screen polyline including polylines with arcs When you choose Pick PL you are immediately presented with the graphic screen where you can pan by dragging your finger across the screen or zoom using the many zoom options You can choose not to select a polyline maybe there were none to select by pressing OK or Enter When you select a polyline it will highlight as a darkened polyline After selecting a polyline and pressing OK or Enter you will see the polyline elements Note that if you change the start station to 500 all the stationing for the polyline elements will change accordingly This is also true regarding the starting northing and easting If these are changed all element coordinates will change accordingly as can be verified using the Edit option p350 MAP VIEW Sta Ahead a ove 0 00 0000 Remove Save As This saves the file Enter a name Note You can create new points with Input Edit Centerline When you enter and save a centerline it will prompt Do you want to save p351 centerline poin
422. rd i fo p451 Ahas 24 Export SHP ESHP 22 Export SHP o 5 G H u e on Teel Leek D E D CIRES ETES 65 68 SNS S OT TY OO TP Oe OT e OT e OS SSP Command name ins Pobylines set Settings set 2D ayer Manager Ctset 3D olate Points st Elevation st Polyline solate Layers Inverse l 4 6 4 T 30 Import Polylines from DXF Files DXF almos O e 32 Import Triangulation from LandXML TXML lt Field to Finish F2F com Co mm cu ON P OND Oy Oe p452 Command name un vA fo Oy cy z U 3 Preterences SEIT Cuick Export SHF CIES HP Guck Import SHF QISHP RV oide Shot D of So wa liding Side Area SA averse 2 rH raverse Detaults angle Calculator nangulate amp Contour rms Edges Clo settings iew Font Options i Z W iil J oh i m1 ol oh LA A Pr J A l A l A e a Aa EI ee ey BY Be BY ESE Led Oo GOT mJ oa GA Se a Bo ft Sy ey Oo SO Ga a E Quick Save QS Saves the current DXF file without prompting for the file name p453 wi Save As CRD Saves the current coordinate file to the location you choose as a backup copy Do you want to make a copy of the current CRO Tile File name SuryCe crd Location C SurvCEDemoSpecial Data Yes No Exit X This exits the MAP and CAD session and brings you back to the Menu screen Help
423. rdinates OP Occupy Point PN Point Name Sl Slope Distance of Scale Factor TM Local Time HH MM SS UN Distance Unit 0 For feet L for meter 2 fOr US feet VA Vertical Angle ZE zenith ae Note p637 Index A Abbreviations 41 About SurvCE 193 Add Job Notes 113 Areas 315 Authorizing SurvCE 20 Auto By Interval 288 Basics 438 Battery Status 23 er Calculator 332 Carlson Technical Support 24 Centerline Editor 344 Check Level Total Station 184 COGO 472 Color Screens 22 Configure General 153 Configure Sets 159 Configure View Pt 158 _D Data Transfer 101 Delete File 111 DRAW 460 Draw Centerline 352 Draw Profile 356 Draw Template 363 ss p638 Elevation Difference 250 End User License Agreement 7 Exit 113 Feature Code List 89 FILE 442 File Format 633 Gs GPS Allen Osbourne 580 GPS CSI DGPS Max GPS Leica 500 1200 581 GPS Leica GIS System 50 585 GPS Magellan Ashtech 593 GPS Navcom 585 GPS NMEA 590 GPS Novatel 592 GPS Sokkia 597 GPS Topcon 599 GPS Trimble 605 GPS Base 131 GPS Heights 627 GPS Rover 141 GPS Utilities 150 GPS Utilities Leica 500 1200 611 GPS Utilities Magellan Ashtech 620 GPS Utilities Navcom 613 GPS Utilities Sokkia and Novatel 620 GPS Utilities Topcon 625 GPS Utilities Trimble 626 Graphic Mode 25 Grid Face 258 Handheld Hardware 627 Hardware Notes 22 Hot Keys amp Hot List 31 p639 Import Export
424. re available for T1000 with a one row keyboard and T1000 with two row keyboard Choose the appropriate one p563 Manufacturer Leica Ail Older Models H E Model T1000 1 Row B RccableRc Load Save Rename Delete Total Station Nikon Nikon 310 500 Series This configuration covers such instruments as the Nikon 520 521 522 and 552 Although the Nikon total stations have their own configuration they also can be set to Sokkia emulation If set to Sokkia emulation they should be configured as Sokkia Set In this mode you can turn on the 2 way communication mode This enables the Nikons to turn to zero in stakeout set out mode In this setting when you stake point 10 and the angle right to turn is 75 degrees 15 minutes the instrument panel will display 75 degrees 15 minutes and as you turn towards the point the display will count down to zero So without looking at your data collector you watch the screen until you obtain zero degrees this means you are on target In a sense the performance of the Nikon total stations is enhanced in Sokkia emulation mode Nikon 800 Series The 800 Series configuration will also apply to the older 700 series To use that product the user must select SET mode on the instrument and have the connection speed set at 1200 baud then select the Nikon 800 Trimble TS415 Users who own this instrument can use SurvCE by selecting the Nikon 800 Series p564 c
425. re being taken p209 The tracking icon takes the EDM signal on and off With the signal on more power is used but you gain a lot by seeing continuous real time distance readings and by seeing your position on the screen in the form of a triangle Shots are nearly instantaneous but respond to the fast tracking m ode of the EDM typically 10mm If taken out of EDM Tracking you lose your real time movement on the screen but measurements will respond to the accuracy of your Equipment Settings which may call for standard or fine mode Note The response to losing lock when taking foresights with robotic total stations is for the instrument to stop where it is If you have enabled Search when Lost Lock in instrument settings the instrument will start searching immediately on loss of lock Alternately when running remotely you can use the joystick arrow controls to move the instrument towards you and obtain lock again Store Points TS Offsets Making offset points using a total station requires entry of ALT O or selection of the O Offset button within the Store Points Foresight Screen If you are set to the graphical icons in Configure you would select the offset to tree icon This works from both the Graphic and Text screens when foresighting There is no distinct total station Offset command t is an offshoot literally of standard Store Points The total station Offset command must be selected each time it is used It ha
426. reate user defined projections The user may select a predefined or ceate a user defined coordinate projection system Localization TS GPS Points By Helmert Projection Edit Projection List USA NADSS MO Central Projection Transverse_Mercator Datum MADS Ellipsoid GRS 1980 p162 Coordinate Projection Selection List GERMANYVETRS89 JTM zone 32H USA NADSS M0 Central 4 nT gt Delete 4dd Predetined Add User Defined Projection If you click the arrow to the right of the current projection you can select from a list of projections that you have previously created But to select a projection that you haven t previously used choose Edit Projection List Edit Projection List Click this button to select a predefined projection or define a new projection Add Predefined If you click Add Predefined you can set the country projection to use at the top of the dialog then choose the zone within the projection For example in the United States State Plane 83 is a common projection with various grids available covering all states If Austria is selected options for that country appear p163 Coordinate Projection e Country Some of the projections available for selection in the Country category are discussed below NAD 27 When selecting this coordinate system you will also need to specify a state plane zone SurvCE will use data files to perform a NADCON datum shift fro
427. reating points on centerlines Note the program resets the interval at break points like PI s and PC s MAP YIEY Triangle Calculator TC Goes directly from the MAP view to the Triangle calculator See COGO Calculator for detail Curve Calculator CC Shortcut to the curve calculator then returns to MAP See COGO Calculator for detail Area AR This will report the area of any picked polyline If you pick an unclosed polyline the program will draw a temporary line for the closing segment and report the area MAP VIEW He Select polyline Layer D AREA 12000 0000 SF 0 27595 acres Hinged Area HA This command can be used to determine the dimensions of a figure when the area is fixed and three or more sides are known The figure must be defined by a closed polyline After executing the command select the polyline Next select the hinge point the polyline segment clockwise from your hinge point will be the segment to move SurvCE will then ask you if you want to keep the existing polyline If you answer Yes a new polyline with the desired area is created if you answer No the polyline you pick is modified Next the current area of the polyline is shown At this point enter the new area in the units specified under Job Settings If your units are set to feet the area will be specified in square feet See the top figure below p479 MAP VIEW Hingeds Keep existing pline Yes lt No gt p480
428. refix es as in PC EP for start curve rather than EP PC Special Codes should be separated from your actual feature codes by a space However the alias of can go right up against the feature code as in FL The special codes are described below PC amp PT Used to specify the point of curvature PC and point of tangency PT of a curve If you are taking shots on a curve use PC to specify the beginning of the curve and PT to specify the end of the curve The PC special code will activate a 3 point arc automatically so use of the PT code in a 3 point arc is redundant and therefore it is not necessary You can even do a reverse curve by entering the PT instead as PC However if you are picking up a meandering stream or tree line PT is useful to end the curving feature and the program will best fit a curve through all the surveyed points between the PC and PT codes p93 MAP VIEW VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Cmd Layer CLO Use this code to close a figure This tells the software to close from the last point coded as CLO back to the first point of the figure Note that after using a special code such as CLO appended with a space to the description code BLD that the program automatically removes the special code as it defaults the next description to BLD The CLO code also has the effect of ending the line and starting a new line It only works with codes defined as 2D or 3D polylines p94 STORE PTS
429. ress Enter in order to select last created polyline from the drawing The routine displays the Change entities to layer dialog box When the dialog appears on the screen the selection in the layer list will be set to the current layer Clicking the color bar brings up the color palette letting you change the color by picking or ByLayer Change entities to layer BUILDING ZONE CTR CURB FLOW LINE DISTXT EXISTING FENCE FINAL GRADE BREARS Layer BUILDING Color by layer p464 A x iw ByLayer Offset 2D 02 Mimics the AutoCAD Offset command and only works with 2D polylines Enter the offset distance and pick the left or right offset amount Offset 3D 03 This offsets 3D polylines both horizontally and vertically It is great in combination with road utility centerlines to create offset polylines to stake If you do the segment option versus the continuous option it will break the corners and offset the projection of the line This creates vertices that can be turned into points using the command P2P and is useful for building offsets p465 s MAP VIEW Modify Remove Arcs RMA Pick any polyline with an arc specify the offset cutoff spacing and turn the arc into chords Offset cutoff refers to the maximum separation between the chord and the original arc If you enter a small cutoff distance of 0 1 then at no point do the chord segments differ from the arc than 0 1 Be
430. roduce a report of the slope stake information The location of the slope stake is dependent on the position of the pivot point where the slope begins and on the slope itself eg 2 1 3 1 4 1 etc Slope stakes are typically used in highway work to locate the top of slope or top of cut If design file information 1s available for the road template and profile then the slope stake routine will calculate distance and offset information for all break points on the template from the slope stake itself back to the centerline This also applies to slope staking conducted by section files and descriptions associated with the break points on templates and or sections are identified by name in the slope stake report Note Slope Staking can be conducted within the Stake Slope command from the fixed pivot point of the template the end points of cross sections or the centerline points of a horizontal and vertical alignment as for a ditch Slope staking however can also be conducted directly within the command Stake Road p386 from any picked pivot point on the template or cross section One of the advantages of the Stake Slope command is the ability to obtain catch point information real time using the non interval method of walking parallel to centerline Stake Slope will also automatically detect the ditch pivot point in cut scenarios using templates defined by Carlson Civil and Carlson Roads Plus Stake Slope knows which side of
431. rom File El Local Northing S00 Local Easting S000 Local Elevation 105 GPS Coordinates The next dialog presented will be the GPS Coordinates dialog shown below Since the measured locations for each point has already been recorded the user will want to use the option From Raw File in this dialog Select OK to continue p533 GF Coordinates DK Cancel C Read GPS Enter Latitude Longitude From Raw File Surveyed Point Next the user will be presented with the Surveyed Point dialog shown below top image This dialog allows the user to select or enter the GPS measured point that represents the known local point If the user selects the GPS measured point using the list icon they should ignore the current coordinates displayed in the List Points dialog shown below bottom image as they only reflect the non localized position at this point The important thing to remember is that if the local point was 1 and the GPS measured point was 1001 the user must enter 1001 in this dialog p534 Surveyed Point Cancel Please enter a point number fram the current or control job for which raw data exists Point From File List Points 5 1l 7000 0000 5009 0040 1001 J01 900F S007 a95 Save the Localization File p535 Once all of the points have been added to the localization dialog save the localization file before exiting using the Save button Reprocess Raw File and Update
432. rom another file altogether the control file e Use Automatic Descriptions This allows you to have descriptions automatically entered for staked locations based on the settings defined by the Auto Descriptions dialog Stake Offset Desc This allows you to define what the ID is called for each offset location in the Stake Offset routine Default Descriptions kS Lil gt Alias Sam Update Item Auto Descriptions This button allows you to configure the point description when you store points in stakeout The very act of storing a staked point is optional You can stake a point or a station and offset but must click Store Point within the stakeout screens to actually store a point If you do choose to store the point the description is configurable See image below p55 Stake Description Stake Pt ID STK Station On STA Stake Desc ON Offset Left On L B Offset Right GN R Lit Ch CLIT ofall 1 Move Down in Prefix W On Off Update Item x STK1317 CB 22 CUT 2 100 STA1 00 000 CL Li0 000 CUT 2 100 A user in Australia or Great Britain might want to change the STA for Station to CH for Chainage An example of a typical stake description based on your configuration settings is shown at the bottom left of the screen The first line STK1317 CB 22 CUT 2 100 represents a typical Stake Point description where CB 22 is the description you would enter and the rest is governed by
433. rom the outside going in 8 at 4 to TC 0 01 at 1 vertical to EP 12 at 2 to CL The shoulder slope going out 8 at 4 is entered similarly as above The Input Edit Template dialog now appears p360 Input Edit tpl File 12 000 A 000 EF 12 000 2 000 EP 0 010 1 000 TC 0 010 1 000 TC 6 000 ee ee 5 000 4 000 SH Cut Fill ier a You can press Save any time to save your work Here the template has been saved and named curb Now it is time to enter the Cut and Fill slopes which are used in slope staking If the cut slope is 3 1 but the fill slope is 4 1 you would select Cut Fill above and enter as shown Distinct left side and right side cut and fill slopes can be defined After entry of the cut and fill slopes press OK or Enter to return to the main Template Editor dialog and press Save Templates can be drawn using the command Draw Template Cut Fill Grades i Right Side Same as Left C Percent Ratio Left Side CUT Slope FILL Slope J Jimat Sine tk Sie p36l TPL VIEW HE ei Template Sc 5 003 CA Sur ciah Datas Temp tol For highway projects or subdivision roads with cut slopes down to a ditch line four template definitions may be necessary for slope staking 1 Cut Left Fill Right 2 Cut Left Cut Right 3 Fill Left Cut Right 4 Fill Left Fill Right The appropriate template can then be used for any condition Shown below is the Cut Left Fill R
434. rted to several different roading software packages for plotting and computation of volumes The SCT section files can also be used directly for volume calculations with Carlson Roads Leica Site Manager Topcon Topsite and Carlson Civil You can also set the rounding here a rounding of 10 units feet or meters has been selected The station and offset can also be stored as the point description and as a note file if the lower options are clicked on p415 Store Sections Store Data to Section File Select File None X 5CT Settings Station Tolerance 2 000 M Store Comma Separated File Select File C SurvCEDemo Data Macon tet MV Store Point in CRD File I Use Sta Off as De Round Station to the Nearest 10 l Store Station and Offset in Note File Stations Range 19 00 000 to 23 00 000 Note that the rounding is fully automatic If you choose a 5 unit rounding and are targeting station 0 75 but take a shot at 0 77 93 it will round up to 0 80 Before collecting the cross sections it is important to click X SCT Settings near the top of the dialog and set the stations you wish to capture This way if the station rounds per the above screen to a station that doesn t exist in your list you are warned before proceeding with storing This list also includes the left and right tolerances for the offsets which will lead to warnings if you exceed that distance from centerline If y
435. rtical ZE Zenith p42 FILE This chapter provides information on using the commands from the File menu JOB SURVCE File Equip Survey COGO Road 1Job eS 6 Data Transfer E 2 Job Settings ED 7 Import Export 3 Points i 8 Delete Job al 4 Raw Data G 9 write Note P 5 Feature Code List Lid O Exit 4 Job This command allows you to select an existing coordinate file for your job or to create a new coordinate file The standard file selection dialog box appears for choosing a coordinate file as shown in the next figure Buttons for moving up the directory structure creating a new folder listing file names and listing file details appear in the upper right corner of the dialog box p43 Coordinate Files meone eS 57 2c SurvCEDernoSpecialtData E Backup MoDOT crd La 9 cesars NewdJob crd InterGeo crd Pentax crd inverse crd RemoteElevation crd MoDOT cl crd SurvCE crd lt i gt Name Sie ae ae All data points you collect are stored in the coordinate crd file you select or create The crd file extension will automatically be appended to the file name Select Existing Job To select an existing job browse to and select an existing file then select OK the green check icon Create a New Job To create a new job simply enter a new name and select OK You can control where your job is saved by browsing to the desired folder where the job is to be cre
436. rtical difference from the first offset to the second offset A positive entry is interpreted as a curb and a negative downhill entry is interpreted as a ditch p249 e Stake Curb Ditch Offset This is the distance from the first offset to the second outer offset When using a Cutsheet Station and Offset list you must select the List button highlight the offset you wish to use and press Select The routine will stay on this offset as it progresses through the stations until the user selects List again and specifies a new offset The Stake Offset command will store to the Alignment Stakes cutsheet file format if the file is named and made active for storing The data can include station and offsets as formatted Edit CutSheet File subdw CL tkt Staked Off Cut 1 25 00 Right 12 00 Right 12 00 Insert Up Down Special Delete Elevation Difference This routine will report a cut fill in comparison to a design surface at any location within a project The Elevation Difference command will save cutsheet data if cutsheet files are named and made active within Job Settings Stake tab For any surface where a centerline is defined Road Design and Section or Grid Triangulation Elevation with centerline defined the routine will not only report but optionally store cuts fills and centerline position data into an alignment style cutsheet file With no centerline defined the Road Grid and p250 Elevation methods wi
437. rument to prism mode oO gt Stop Go This icon inside of Auto By Interval begins and pauses the action of recording points ALT G z u Monitor SkyPlot This icon will take you to the Monitor SkyPlot screen for GPS status and Coordinate and Lat Long display ALT D Tripod This will take you to the Instrument Setup dialog This dialog contains Backsight Setup Robotics and Remote Benchmark ALT B R Zoom Extents This zooms the entire drawing to fit the screen R Zoom In Zooms in 25 amp p27 Zoom Out Zooms out 25 PJP Zoom Window Zooms into a rectangular area that you pick on the creen z ap Zoom Previous Zooms to the previous view SurvCE remembers up o 50 views aot B View Options Displays the View Options dialog box where you can control aspects of points such as the symbol the style of the plot and the freezing or thawing of attributes such as descriptions and elevations To avoid point clutter you can even set it to show only the last stored point along with setup and BS See the View Options section of this manual Pan You can also pan the screen simply by touching it then holding and dragging your finger or stylus along the screen surface Pan is automatic and needs no prior command View Edit Points by Touch You can edit or delete any point by simply clicking on it graphically Text Mode The Text screen uses a large character size for easy viewing and limi
438. rvCOM from your desktop computer If you are using Carlson X Port select Carlson SurvCE SurvStar G2 from the Tools menu to launch SurvCOM From within SurvCOM and while connected to the handheld computer via a serial cable you should be able to see the contents of the handheld device on the right and the contents of the desktop computer on the left sim ultaneously If you do not see the handheld device on the right you are not connected Select the Geoid icon located at the bottom of the SurvCOM dialog From within the Set Geoid Area dialog verify the path to the geoid files is set to the installed location of these files as defined in step 2 of this document Typically Program Files Carlson X Port Select the desired geoid model to extract an area from Key in the approximate latitude and longitude of the center of the area Define the grid size for the area you want the model to cover Supported sizes are 50 250 miles 80 400 kilometers and 1 5 degrees however keep the s ize 100 miles or smaller for better performance Name the geoid model with any name that you want e g geoid Y ou may want to name this file with a logical name for the location of the area for future reference e g geoid LA Select the OK button to automatically transfer the file to the Survstar directory of the handheld device A copy of the file will also be created on your desktop computer in the currently selected folder On the handhe
439. rvey menu inputting field codes EP EP1 EP2 and so on will draw 3D Polylines between these similar codes in the EOP layer A 3D Polyline will be drawn in real time when collecting data and inputting EP or EP codes in Surveyed points descriptions As mentioned above New Attributes becomes highlighted after inputting all the Line Layer drawing properties GIS prompting information can be added for this field code If no GIS prompting is applicable for this field code simply pick OK and create another field code or exit and store the FCL file Add Code Layer name Code IEP EOP Full Text Edge of pavement Polyline On Folyline is SD New Attributes Defining Field Code GIS Prompting To add GIS prompting to a defined Line Layer code select New Attributes This button can be seen in the above figure at the bottom of the dialog The following GIS Feature pop up box is displayed See the next figure below To define GIS prompting for the EP field code select Add in the Feature dialog shown below The next pop up box that appears titled New attribute is then displayed shown below underneath the Feature dialog The New attribute dialog creates GIS prompting p512 Hew attribute Ces Default Value Set List Values TYPE Char Req No Mame Prompt Load will load any existing Field Code GIS prompting for reuse Edit reviews or revises existing GIS prompting Add creates individ
440. s Road Utilities will also scale up or down centerlines and profiles usually to convert between metric and English units In addition Road Utilities includes a command for entering a superelevation file sup This file can serve as an optional input file and react with templates in commands such as Stake Road Slope Staking and Elevation Difference Finally Road Utilities has an option for a Template Series file tsf file This file will transition from one template to another automatically as long as the templates share identical IDs The Template Series file can be substituted for a standard template file in Slope Staking and p364 Stake Road wherever design files are applied Road Utilities Centerline Transformation Profile Conversion Profile Transformation Section File Conversion InputEdit Section File InputEdit Superelevation File Input Edit Template Series File Conversion and LandXML The LandXML file format is quickly becoming an encouraged standard of many departments of transportation DOTs This standard is also recommended by Autodesk Microstation and several other software companies such as Carlson and Geopak LandXML files have an xml extension and may contain various road design files including centerlines profiles and cross sections The header lines within the x ml file will indicate what design files are included In some cases several files of the same type
441. s A foresight to point 15 from a setup on 14 followed by a backsight from 15 to 14 makes a pair of reciprocal readings The backsight reciprocal reading can be ignored for its impact on recalculating the occupied point or the Elevation component of the reciprocal measurements can be averaged or both the Elevation and Distance can be averaged to recalculate the setup occupied point coordinates The program will calculate reciprocals for backsight direct BD records First set Backsight Reciprocals to Average Elevation Then if you foresight from 2 to 3 for example then occupy 3 and backsight 2 the stored BD record will lead to an averaged delta Z calculation for point 3 within Process No Adjust or any of the other adjustment options If the Tolerances entered above are exceeded then warning screens appear during the processing Note If there are significant redundancies in a traverse reciprocal readings D amp R sets multiple measurements to the same point from different setups multiple tie shots into control then it is recommended that the raw file be processed in a Network Least Squares program back at the office such as SurvNet which is an add on to Carlson Survey or Carlson Civil p71 Process Raw File Cancel Total Station Proj Redundancies Direct Reverse Settings Direct Reverse Vertical Angles Balance Direct Reverse Foresight Backsight measurements Foresight Only 7 Angle Tolerance sec
442. s for all break points all the way into the centerline point Procedure for Slope Staking with Total Stations The procedure is nearly identical for Total Stations except that you must press R for Read or Enter to take shots and allow the program to begin calculating the Slope Stake position Unlike the GPS SurvCE cannot predict the location of the target slope stake point until at least one measurement is taken p409 SLOPE STK AR 329931 19 7A 92934 11 COff 17 570 Elv 952 417 Sta 6 30 903 R12 872 OUT 4 70 CrtF 2 35 Design Fill 2 000 1 from 955 202 Fill 2 765 0 313 1 for 0 672 Note When using either GPS or total stations for slope staking you can obtain more graphics and less screen information by pressing the down arrow key It literally has the effect of bringing the graphic screen down see below Pressing the up arrow key will pull the screen back up and show the full text This works in all modes except GPS Simulation where the up arrow moves the cursor faster down arrow slower SLOPE STK p410 The Slope Stake Report and Writing on the Slope Stake Surveyors doing slope staking have the option to write the information on the stake as each is surveyed or to come back at a later time refer to the slope stake report and write on all the stakes after the surveying is complete The slope stake report file is a comma separated txt file configured in Job Settings Stake Cutsheets which might appear as
443. s note that the segment length between vertices is about 0 05 units p462 Polyline list LAYER BUILDING A 30 Polyline Closed Color bylayer PERIMETER 30 254 7460 ft ay PERIMETER 203 254 6827 ft PROJECTION ARES 2686 84158SO FEET 26960 852650 INT L FEET 299 937 750 YARDS 0 000iSQ MILES 249 616650 METERS U 061 ACRES 0 0250HECT ARES iili 4 av If you select 3D Polyline but pick points that are all at 0 elevation you will create a 2D polyline Circle CR This command draws a circle entity based on diameter defined by two points or based on a center point and a radius Erase E Erases all selected polylines It will not erase points Note that you can erase an entire area by drawing a Window through the polylines picking first a lower left point in blank space then picking an upper right point If you even contact or enclose any polylines with this window selection they will be erased So the window erase procedure mimics the crossing selection method of AutoCAD Delete Layer DL Select from a list one or more layers then the routine will delete all the polylines on those layers p463 Erase by Layer a i Select Layers Clear all From Screen By Name BUILDING CURB _FLOWLINE EXISTING Th irr Layers of Entities to Erase Change Layer CHG This changes the layer of the selected polylines One form of selection is to type L and p
444. s Setup in of out on line of sight In the Intersect mode the first screen always displays the target point on the line or the extension of the line perpendicular to the setup or station point When the first reading is taken the program will display the In Out distance to the line along p239 the line of sight STK LINE aJ 3 AR 165 35 00 ZA 90 00 00 f 0 000 Sta 0 26 504 L18 977 Fill 1 00 Out 19 25 Right 0 00 When staking a line defined by points with zero elevation the cut or fill values will be displayed but should be ignored Notice that the screen ex pands to show more graphics by pressing the down arrow key STK LINE p240 Total Stations GPS Perpendicular to Line When configured for the Perpendicular to Line method the program will show the direction and distance to move to find the nearest point on the line to the measured point The instruction received In Out versus North South or Azimuth Distance will depend on the setting within Configure Reading STK LINE AR 145935 00 ZA 90 00 00 0 000 LO 000 Sta 0 37 302 L2 551 Fill 1 00 Out 23 92 Right 13 67 The Turn to AR advice at the top of the screen refers to the angle to turn to intersect the defined line at 90 degrees from the instrument location For GPS the Point On Line screen instructions are similar p241 STK LINE N 3506 6367 E 4994 2132 0 0012 HRMS 0 050 VRMS 0 09 7 LO 000 Sta 0 627 020 R48 97 Fill 0
445. s a soft reset Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth settings in SurvCE s Bluetooth Manager discussed in Comm Setup do not actually change anything in the receiver itself In order to make changes to the receiver s internal Bluetooth settings it is necessary to go into Receiver Utilities and click on Bluetooth Settings Bluetooth Settings Wax Bluetooth Name zM x 200330006 Set New Bluetooth Name Max Bluetooth Passkey 12345 12345 Set New Bluetooth Passkey Max Bluetooth Country Code C France Other Countries Set Bluetooth Country Code In this dialog the user can change the Bluetooth receiver name Receiver ID in Bluetooth Manager the Bluetooth passkey PIN in Bluetooth Manager or the country code currently the only choices are France and other countries because France has unique Bluetooth specifications To change the name change it in the appropriate text field and click Set New Bluetooth Name A message confirming success will appear p624 Bluetooth Settings Max Bluetooth Name zM x 200330006 _ fMAXA00S50006_ 1 aT Wax AN BT Passkey set successfully 1234 Set Nax France f Other Countries Set Bluetooth Country Code To change the passkey change it in the appropriate text field and click Set New Bluetooth Passkey A similar message confirming success will appear To change the country code click the appropriate radio button f
446. s a full 30 feet or so to find the catch point The program helps find the catch quickly by modeling the surface of the ground with each shot taken Thus by projecting the ground slope outward the program advises the user how far to go to find the anticipated catch point Unless the ground slope changes dramatically the catch point is usually staked within just a few tries With GPS the process is even more automatic since the ground elevation is being computed continuously as you walk toward the catch point No shot has to be taken until you are positioned right on the catch point itself This next figure shows a cut condition slope stake in 3D The catch is located at the top of the cut p388 Four Methods of Slope Staking User Defined This is the most commonly used method of slope staking Here you simply enter the station offset and elevation of the pivot point Do not enter a minus sign for a left offset as in 25 since the program detects whether you are left or right of centerline The only prerequisite is the selection of a centerline file Cut and fill slopes are entered in the field Point Defined Alignments This method is often used for staking the top of cut for a ditch particularly a V ditch You can select the centerline by any of the three classic methods of centerline file a picked polyline on the screen or a sequence of points The vertical alignment can be derived from any picked 3D polyline or from t
447. s button at the top of the screen left of the green checkmark and require that all linework be created with associated points for processing in Geopak Settings Use FCL Path to Store GIS Store GIS Line Data to Vertices F Use FCL Only W Create Points for All Linework Elements The upper 3 items in Settings appear for all feature code list scenarios and are default off when SurvCE 1s shipped e Use FCL Path to Store GIS IfGIS attributing is being used you can store the GIS data directly into any special subdirectory used for the applicable Feature Code List So if you maintain several feature code lists each with attributing specified for certain descriptions the GIS attribute data can be placed in the directory of the associated feature code file e Store GIS Line Data to Vertices When lines are created by field coding points at the vertices are also created except for features created by RECT and OH In addition to associating attribute data with the linework itself you can click this option to store the GIS attribute data to each point on the line that was surveyed e Use FCL Only If this option is selected you will be prompted with a warning screen if you use a field code that is not found in the feature code list This is a more rarely used feature and will lead to a lot of ex tra prompting in the field if field crews choose new codes as they work Reprocessing the Field Codes p100 Using the com
448. s for Leica GPS are AT201 AT202 302 AT202 302GP AT303 AT501 AT501 Pole ATS02 AT502 Pole AT503 AT504 SR299 399 Internal AX1201 AX201 Pole AX1201 Tripod AX1202 AX1202 Pillar AX1202 Pole AX1202 Tripod and Other In all these cases the antenna height is measured from the ground elevation to the base of the antenna the base is where it would rest if you removed it and placed it on a table the base is the lowest point Elv Mask This specifies the cutoff vertical angle above the horizon Any satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations An elevation mask of 10 degrees is typical It is advisable to use some elevation mask between 5 and 15 degrees Satellites low to the horizon can actually degrade the resolving of the GPS position Log Static Data to PC Card This option will log static data in binary form to the PC Card in the GPS receiver whether or not you choose to conduct RTK GPS work The static data can be processed using the Leica SKI Pro program Use Glonass This option will only apply for System 1200 instruments that support Glonass GPS Rover This command is used primarily to set the appropriate antenna height and antenna type for the rover Leica typically offers a 2 meter pole so for antenna height the most common entry is 2m or 6 5617 feet The default antenna is the AT502 Pole p583 Leica GPS Rover Setup eel Utilities Antenna Height Elevation Mask l L
449. s necessary Alternatively you can select a name from the list and accept it by pressing OK or Enter Add The Add button will create a new row at the curser position with 0 entries with the exception of slope which will compute based on the 0 entries If for example you touch line 1 to move the blinking cursor to line 1 the first row the Add command will allow you to insert a new row in the front of your profile This would be necessary if you needed to start the profile at an earlier station To add to the end of your profile just click the down arrow key at the right until a blank line becomes available and make your new entries Remove This button deletes the current line High Low This button can be used to calculate high and low points p355 High Low points PROFILE C SurvCEDemoSpecial Data DEMO pro Low Point STATION 260 0000 EL 1004 2000 e Save As This command will save your profile to a specified file name There is no need to enter a file extension If you want to save the file as Baker pro just enter Baker The Save As command will default to the current profile name If you are entering a new profile it will default to the current coordinate file name Draw Profile The Draw Profile command will draw the selected profile on the screen The profile will be exaggerated typically 10 1 or 20 1 in order to maximize detail You can control the vertical exaggeration by selecting the vertical scale icon
450. s on the screen in that area they will appear as well This p352 command only temporarily displays the centerline for reference and does not draw it on the screen as part of the dxf file associated with the job To actually draw the centerline as a permanent feature unless erased later use Map globe icon Tools Centerline CL to Polyline Centerline C SurvCEDemo Data DEMO cl Profile Editor This routine allows field entry of vertical alignment files for roads sewers and other types of alignments Vertical alignments can also be loaded and edited In addition high and low points can be calculated and the elevations of individual stations can be calculated Vertical alignments are stored as files with a PRO extension Vertical alignments are typically referred to as profiles In Carlson SurvCE the station ranges of the profile and centerline do not need to match As long as they have station ranges in common any profile can be used with any centerline for all advanced Roading commands as well as Survey menu routines such as Offset Stakeout and Elevation Difference by Road Design files Profile Entry Profiles are extremely easy to enter When the command is selected if no prior profile has been entered you will encounter the blank Input Edit Profile dialog You can also obtain a blank screen and start a new profile by tapping the Clear icon eraser at the top of the screen p353 Input Edit Profile EF 6 C carlson2007 W
451. s three options e Distance Angle sometimes referred to as Shoot a Big Tree The Distance Angle method requires two measurements The first measurement is the distance followed by the prompt to read the angle Note that the dialog shown in the next figure prompts you to Read Distance first p210 SEALER Point 2 Point Settings T Record Vertical Angle from Dist Reading Angle Reading Vertical Offset Point 1193 Desc HT 4 70 Prism at angle rdg Read Distance Store In the case of shooting a large tree where the goal is to shoot the center of the tree you would take a shot to the middle side of the tree equivalent to the distance to the center of the tree Then you would take a second shot as prompted to the middle of the tree for horizontal angle only Note that for the elevation of the shot you can use the distance measurement or the angle measurement second reading and apply the vertical offset if any accordingly After both measurements are taken the results are displayed You are then returned to the dialog to take your next offset Point Plus Minus The Point Offset takes a shot and deducts or adds a distance relative to the line of sight in all three directions L R In Out Vertically Up Down using the dialog shown in the next figure p211 Distance Angle 2 Point Settings Relative Point Facing Instrument C Let Right Value Dut value 1 500 Up C
452. s to define the area Individual point numbers can be entered as 142 143 148 149 or each number followed by Enter This will calculate the area from point 142 to 143 to 148 to 149 back to 142 The area is reported at the bottom of the map screen A temporary polyline is also drawn between the points Results are reported in square feet and acres when units are set to feet and square meters when units are set to metric AREA YIEY Area 2666 84165F 0 0617 acres If the polyline is used to solve the area the program will bring up the MAP screen after you pick a polyline When you are certain that you have selected the desired polyline press OK and the graphic screen presents the area Since the point defined area is a straight point inverse the advantage of the pick polyline approach is that the polyline may contain arcs Write result to raw file Wes No At the end of each area calculation you are asked if you would like to Write result to raw file This will write a line in the raw file as Calculate area of polyline 142 143 148 149 Area 1813 6316SF 0 0416 acres For point defined figures in metric the raw file record would read Calculate area of polyline 142 143 148 149 Area 168 4918 SM Intersections This command allows for the calculation and storing of points based upon standard surveying practices of Bearing Bearing Bearing Distance or Distance Distance Intersection calculations Data can be entered
453. s to channel 0 will set the radio selection to an automatic mode GPS Leica 500 1200 Default values in Comm Setup are 9600 Parity None Char Length 8 Stop Bits 1 These can be set by hitting Defaults For the GX1200 series GPS the default baud rate is 115200 Warning For Leica 1200 GPS units only firmware versions 2 12 and higher are supported p581 GPS Base This command opens the Base Configuration dialog e Base Antenna This option allows the user to specify the antenna in use The most common setting for the base antenna is AT502 Tripod type e Antenna Height Input the base antenna height The AT501 Tripod AT502 Tripod AT503 Tripod and AT504 Tripod settings will all prompt to Measure to Base of 36cm Height Hook Leica GPS Base Setup Genel Vtilities Antenna Height 0 000 it Elevation Mask 10 Log Raw GPS to PC Card Use Glonass When the height hook is used the Antenna Height is measured down to the hub and tack elevation from the fixed mounting position of the height hook The measurement is typically in meters so if you are configured to units in feet you can enter the Antenna Height in meters with the m suffix as shown above and the program will do the conversion automatically You can omit the m suffix if you are configured to metric units p582 VO Yortical Offset VR Vertical Height Reading MAP Mechanical Reference Plane Other Antenna setting
454. s toggles the visibility of scale bar on or off The scale bar 1s normally shown at the bottom of the MAP screen List LD This lists the layer 2D or 3D status Closed or Open status perimeter length and area or projected area if not closed DRAW The Draw menu is found next to the View menu in MAP view Below you will find each feature described p460 s MAP VIEW ORLA yy Polyline Circle 2D Road Erase 3D Layer By Edge Offset Modify Place GRID Transform 2D Polyline PL AutoCAD style This command allows you to draw a polyline between points You can pick points from the screen or type in point numbers First pick your starting point then you have several options on the command line The default option is to keep picking points and the other options are described below Cmd Polyline Arc Close Undo lt End gt A Starts an arc segment See below for details C Closes the polyline you must have at least two polyline segments drawn before you can close U Will undo the last segment drawn E Will end the Polyline command Constructing an arc segment After choosing A the command line will change to Cmd Polyline Arc CEn Len Sec lt Rad gt You have various options for constructing an arc as part of your polyline CEn Allows you to specify the center point or radius point for the arc After picking the center point you must specify the arc end point and then the arc direction Len Allows you to specif
455. satellites will not be considered Configure Rover Radio Radio Type There are two options available PDL or Spread Spectrum When using PDL you must define the radio port baud and RTK message type When using Spread Spectrum you only have to define the RTK message type Most of the modern Hiper series units come with Spread Spectrum p603 radios When using PacCrest radios a TX light blinks about every second indicating the radio is transmitting The RX light would blink if you were getting interference Radio Port You must select the radio port This setting on the TOPCON base and rover receiver is usually C Data Port is always A when using a cable and B when using Bluetooth When using Pacific Crest radios TOPCON recommends the new PDL Pacific Crest radios These must be set to 38 400 baud rate TOPCON can also use Spread Spectrum radios which work at 115 200 baud rate The HiperLite GPS uses Spread Spectrum radios running at 57 600 baud The standard Hiper uses Pacific Crest PDL Radio Baud This defines the over the air baud rate that the radio will receive In many cases the user must know what the radio expects this setting to be based on the radio s firmware or pre programming RTK Message Type You must select the RTK message type that you wish to receive Configure Rover Parameters Position Update Rate In Configure Rover the RTK Calculation Mode should be set to Delay which forces a fresh reading as o
456. se this command the user must hold down and move the pointer device on the screen The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the pointer device When the user release the pointer device panning stops FILE DXF File Import DXF IDXF Similar to the AutoCAD DXFIN command will bring in polylines from AutoCAD Microstation and other CAD formats that can ex port data into a DXF file format Points text and blocks such as symbols are not imported However many software packages such as Carlson Civil formerly SurvCADD allow text to be converted into polylines in which case the text will import for reference AutoCAD DXF File moens J 57 Qc SurvCEDemoSpecia patat E Backup MoDOT dxf 9 cseis RemoteElevation bak inverse dxt RemoteElevation dxt MoDOT bak dxt SurvCE bak dxt MoDOT cl dxt SurvCeE dxf 4 Name Siiesaera DXF File Export DXF EDXF The EDXF command similar to AutoCAD s DXFOUT command will export a p442 DXF file It captures not only 2D and 3D polylines and their layer names but also exports all visible layer on points from the CRD file into AutoCAD Point entities form layer PNTS All points and polylines that are visible layers on would be exported not based on the current screen zoom but based on the full extent of the drawing LandXML CRD from Land XML XML2CRD This command allows you to import points from LandXML format to SurvCE LandXML CRD to L
457. selected the appropriate action 1s highlighted below Import to CL or Export to lt type gt When the process is completed the program announces Process Done and you are free to move on to the next command Most formats only convert to SurvCE and not back again and therefore only have one way dialogs These include ASCH Inroads ASCII LDD Geopak Moss TDS and Terramodel Geodimeter Importing TDS RD5 Files Importing TDS RD5 Files If TDS is selected centerlines can be converted one way to SurvCE centerlines centerline files CANNOT be converted back to TDS files It is important to note that the TDS RDS file is a dual centerline and profile file Because the TDS RDS file does not display the starting station an extra dialog will appear requesting starting coordinates which can be recalled p367 from a point and a starting station Starting Station Point From File Starting Northing 0 0000 Starting Easting 0 0000 Verify the Conversion It is recommended that after converting centerlines profiles or cross section files to SurvCE format you go to the Editor and Draw options for these file types and review the data to verify that the correct file was converted and that the conversion was successful So for example after converting a centerline from Inroads format to SurvCE cl format go directly to Centerline Editor in the Roads menu and verify the data Recognizing File Formats For refer
458. set your COM port number manually 9 Click OK to save settings or Cancel to revert back to your old settings Activating a laser for use with a robotic total station follows a similar procedure Attach the laser to the prism pointing towards the ground Every total station read will automatically trigger the laser and the read value will be used as the rod height Using the Laser 1 Once the laser has been properly set up enter the GPS Offset method and press Read Laser Reading From Laser please trigger laser Cancel 2 A progress window should pop up indicating that Carlson SurvCE is ready to read from the laser Aim the laser and fire at a target point Keep firing until your laser returns a valid reading and the progress window disappears 3 To test whether your shot was successful verify that the values on your screen correspond to the values on your laser s internal display Note that not all lasers return azimuth and vertical offset data in which case this information will have to be entered manually Laser Alignment This option is only relevant to lasers with internal compasses The purpose of this option is to allow you to compensate for any discrepancy between the laser s p189 internal compass and the North determined by GPS The alignment factor will be automatically added to all azimuth values returned by the laser The alignment factor can either be entered manual
459. set entered by the user or for both distance and direction where the laser gun includes compass directions The Leica Disto for example provides distance only The Laser Atlanta provides both distance and direction Laser measurements are popular on construction sites and mine sites where it is dangerous to stand beneath highwalls and unstable rock conditions Readings are taken from a safe location to the rock or dirt face They are also useful for utility pole surveying and other forms of windshield surveys The laser devices are often mounted on the pole beneath the GPS antenna Special poles are available that offset around the lasers allowing them to mount vertically in line with the center of the pole If the antenna height is 2 5 meters and the laser is mounted 0 7 meters below the antenna and 1 8 meters above the ground you would enter 1 8 as the laser height Laser types and laser height are set by clicking Settings in the LASER tab within Offset This takes you to the same screen as can be found from the main menu on the EQUIP tab under Peripherals Under the LASER tab offsets are read automatically from the laser attached to the serial port Upon triggering the laser you will see the reading displayed in terms of five parameters Horizontal Offset Vertical Offset Slope Offset Azimuth and Zenith Angle as shown below The azimuth can either be specified with respect to north or with respect to a specified point Current GPS
460. setting specified in Units within Job Settings Vertical or Slant height refers to the method used to measure the height of the base antenna Vertical refers to the distance from the ground point to the antenna disk measured plumb Slant refers to the distance from the edge of the antenna disk down to the ground point directly beneath the center of the antenna Elevation Mask refers to the degrees above the horizon above which satellites will be used for GPS correction calculations and below which satellites will be ignored Keep in mind that it is not always better to lower the elevation mask below 10 or 15 degrees Satellites closer to the horizon than 10 degrees will often degrade the calculation of coordinates The alternative to GPS Base is GPS Rover GPS receivers can usually function as either type but must be configured for the role they will serve You will be warned when you switch receiver configuration from Base to Rover and vice versa to confirm that is what is intended With all RTK GPS Equipment selections except GPS Simulation GPS Base will first bring up settings and then proceed to the 6 option GPS Base screen which locates the base position After completing the GPS communications setup and clicking on the Ok button the Base Configure dialog will be presented These button options locates the base position The 6 button GPS Base options 3 buttons per tab common to all are discussed first f
461. setup point With three or more resection points residuals are presented showing the accuracy of the calculation When you press OK from the Store this Point dialog you will be setup on the calculated point backsighting the first point shot in the resection p265 Store this Point North 10000 0000 Ang RMSfseci 0 East 21000 0000 Dist RMS 0 000 Eley 99 9794 Eley RMS 0 000 StdDev M 0 0000 StdDey E 0 0000 Closure 3424991118 Point ID 1197 Description Ss Set Collection The Set Collection routine allows you to collect and average sets of angles to multiple foresights Setup The opening dialog is the standard setup dialog shown below that allows the user to specify the instrument and backsight information p266 Set Collection Remote Benchmark Occupy Point Instr Height 5 ft Backsight Point 1195 I Backsight N Azi oo Target Hat ft l Use Backsight HT for Foresights Confirm NEZ Configure Backsight Confirm NEZ This button allows you to quickly verify the instrument and backsight coordinate values Configure This button displays the dialog shown below and allows you to specify options available for the way the angle sets are to be collected Set Collection Configuration Number of Sets Num Dist Rdgs 1 Obs Order BD FD FR BR Angle Only in Reverse Face i Review Individual Reading Data p267 For robotic total stations the Roboti
462. ss for a Template Series is as follows Input Edit TSF File rs jili gt Add Edit Remove Draw Template Load Save Save As Click Add and you will obtain the next dialog p384 Template Series Station 0 00 000 Template C SuryCEDemoSpeciah Data DEMO tol Select File Choose Select File and pick the first template demo tpl Click OK Back in the main dialog click Add again and specify the ending station for demo tpl as station 500 Then click Add again and specify the first station for Road tpl as station 600 You do not need to specify an end station as Road tpl will be used for the remainder of the project Input Edit TSF File O 00 000 2 00 000 6 00 000 Road lt i gt Add Edit Remove Load Save Save As Draw Template You then Save the Template Series File When running Stake Road Stake Slope p385 or Elevation Difference by Roading Design Files and recalling a template file you now have the option to recall a Template Series File and process a set of transitioning templates Template File Type TPL TSF Files TCH fy C SurvCEDemoSpecial Data Temp tol a Road tst Name Foad tst Stake Slope The Stake Slope command calculates and stakes out the location of the catch point where fill slopes or cut slopes contact the original ground The command will also set offset stakes to the catch point and will p
463. sting Code e Edit If you wish to edit an existing code double tap on the code or highlight it and tap Edit It will appear in the Edit Code dialog Saving the Feature Code List Save As Select the Save As button to save the file Choose an existing file or enter a new file name to create a new feature code list Remove an Existing Code e Remove To remove a code from the list highlight an existing code and press the Remove button SurvCE will ask you to confirm deletion of the code The Add Code dialog is shown below Below the figure is a description list of the various options and buttons available in the dialog p90 gt Add Code Layer name Code FL FL Full Text Fence Line Polyline On Polyline is 3D YES No F New Attributes Code Enter the name of the Feature Code For example you might use EP for edge of pavement Full Text Enter a description for the code This is only for your information It will not be added to the point description It is particularly helpful when using numeric codes to remind you of what they refer to Polyline ON This setting determines whether points with this code are joined together with linework when the points are plotted Polyline is 3D Choose whether the polyline should be 3D or 2D If you choose YES then each polyline vertex is located at the elevation of the point If you choose NO then the entire polyline is constructed on elevation 0 regardless of eac
464. such as to subgrade and lead to a follow up file selection dialog Set Elevation This option is available when the Elevation method is used for defining the surface model Enter the desired elevation of your surface in this field p251 Elev Difference Select Type of Surface Model Grid C Triangulation Elevation C Road Design f Section Set Elevation 100 000 vertical Offset Use Centerline for Station Offset Light Bar Settings Vertical Offset This is used in conjunction with grid triangulation roading and section files It allows the user to vertically offset the surface as defined in the file by the amount specified in the box Use Centerline for Station Offset This allows the user to specify a horizontal alignment file cl file for reporting station and offset of your current location to the reference alignment With total stations this is reported whenever a shot is taken Using GPS or robotic total stations with tracking on your current position is updated in real time as the rover or prism is moved This option is available with Grid Triangulation and Elevation types of surface models A centerline is required for Road Design and Section type surfaces Stakeout Grid Pattern GPS Only The first prompt asks if you want to use the last stakeout pattern To make a new pattern you specify in effect the lower left corner left side option or the lower right corner right side option
465. t The Set Angle and Check Angle functions will still be relative to the crosshairs Work Area Settings More settings appear when you press the Work Area Settings button from the SEARCH tab p558 Work Area Settings PowerSearch Only Hz Search Eoo Minimum Dist o Y Search 15 00 Maximum Dist 1312 332 Work Area Hz Left 0 00 00 Hz Right 0 00 00 Upper o 00 00 v Lower 0 00 oo Define Center Show The upper left of the screen controls the ATR Search and the upper right controls the PowerSearch The Work area angle ranges apply to both searches The Show button will show the two positions of the search window first by moving immediately to Position 1 You will be prompted to press OK to see Position 2 Having defined a window of searching Center will move that window to a new center position You will be prompted to Sight on Centered Position and Press OK The Define button prompts you to shoot the lower left and upper right positions which are then displayed above under Work Area If the Work Area is set to start at 0 0000 horizontal for example searching would send the instrument to the backsight point Tracking The instrument can also easily switchin between tracking and non tracking mode from the store points screen by toggling the icon of the man in the upper right hand corner In the image below we are in tracking mode p559 STORE PNTS Fed Ei x
466. t Set Angle Uses whatever direction reading is already in the instrument p199 Set Angle and Read This button will set the horizontal angle and read the distance to the backsight The program defaults to the Set Angle and Read option the large lower button on the assumption that in most cases you will be taking a distance measurement to the backsight e Set Angle This button will only set the horizontal angle If you are just backsighting an object or plumb bob without a measurement choose Set Angle You can tap Set Angle on the screen or using the keyboard enter ALT S Note On most buttons the underlined letter in the name is the hotkey which in combination with the ALT key will access the function of the button On this menu for instance ALT A would go to Check Angle e Check This enables the surveyor to determine whether the instrument has drifted off the point Based on what is presented here the surveyor may decide to reset the BS angle or to actually re level and re shoot the BS point More commonly you would do a Check Backsight after taking a large set of foresights You may want to be sure that you haven t bumped the instrument or experienced settlement in the tripod legs e Check Angle This button will simply read the angle currently in the instrument and compare it to the reference angle Choose Check Angle to re sight on the backsight and obtain an angular error report no distance comparisons are made
467. tation The station and offset can be stored into the description field of the points The station itself can be set to automatically round to the nearest 5 10 or other station interval eg a shot at 177 98 23 would round to 180 00 if a rounding of 5 or 10 is used The information can be stored into a tx t ASCII file in addition to the points themselves if Store Comma Separated File is turned on and if point storage is turned on you can save a not file of the station and offset Y ou can save the cross section data to a cross section file in SCT or RAW G eodimeter format Store Sections can also be used simply to verify your current station and offset as you move along a centerline using GPS or taking total station shots This routine 1s often combined with office software to check as built road cross sections against desired grade and to calculate quantities for payment The field crew begins by taking shots along each desired cross section as shown in this figure Toking Left to Right Sections at Break Pis 0 1 25 If for example four sets of cross sections were taken from station 0 75 to 1 50 p412 the points would appear as shown in the plan view below and the 3D view shown below that There is an option to turn off point number storing in which case the shots can still be stored to a cross section sct file and report file tx t mi jem etn O 99e23 g s E s piz A jo Le Pa ow oo
468. ted with the MAP View Icons are described in the figure below p438 Zoom extents Zooms to the extents of the jnap showing all points and objects Soom in A00ms in 25 Toom out Zooms out 75 Zoom window Zooms into a rectangular area that you pick on the map screen Zoom previous Zooms to the previous view SurvCE remembers up to 50 views Opens the View Point Options dialog Executing commands in Carlson MAP The MAP screen defaults to a pull down menu format containing approx imately 60 additional commands virtually doubling the number of commands found in the Menu Screens Many of the commands in MAP offer CAD like features such as layer freeze and thaw predetermined area polyline offsets and even contouring One of the most important commands is Polyline to Points which allows you to create points for stakeout set out from any selected polyline The MAP screen also includes a command line format that can be set using Preferences Several MAP screen pull down menu commands involve fly out options as shown below p439 s MAP VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Laver T CRD From LandsML SHP File CRD to Lands ML DTM Import CHAIN to Land mIL Preferences Command Aliases Quick Save Save As CRO Exit Help Alternatively you can enter the command name or command alias at the command prompt and press ENTER
469. th All other turned angle methods will require a backsight point number The stored descriptions for the occupied point and backsight point will display as shown above TRV MAG and TRV N in this case Occupied points and backsight points can be selected from the list or the map using the appropriate icons You can also enter point defined angles as in 6 7 for the direction from 6 to 7 or 6 7 90 for 90 degrees to the right of the direction of 6 to 7 e Hevation Vertical Angle Method There are many ways to calculate a vertical differential between the occupied point and target point The most common method is zenith angle ZE Manual Traverse also offers vertical p340 angle delta Z elevation difference slope by percent SP slope by ratio SR and known elevation Z To get the slope from point 6 to point 7 switch to SP mode and enter 6 7 for the slope Distance Method There are four methods of distance entry Horizontal Distance in which case the elevation line is inactive Slope Distance Slope Distance No Elevation and Horizontal Distance No Elevation Both Slope Distance methods will prompt for vertical angle zenith angle etc but Slope Distance No Elevation will calculate a zero elevation for the target point number and will reduce the slope distance by the effect of the vertical angle zenith angle You can also enter the distance in the form of 6 7 for the distance from 6 to 7 or as 6 7 2 as half the distance from 6 to
470. the centerline you are on and slopes stakes automatically to that side The main advantage of Stake Road is the ability to slope stake from any picked point going either Left or Right as specified for staged or partial roadwork design or for finding catch points towards the interior of the template eg central median Stake Road also has a cross section view option within the Helmut Help All slope staking is improved if the instruction to the user is In Out from centerline and Forward Back along the axis of the centerline For this reason it is best to set the View Point within FILE Configure to In Out and Left Right but also click on Use Centerline for Reference Object There are rules for slope staking The slope stake is measured from a pivot point which is user entered or starts at the centerline itself in point defined alignments or starts at the last template point before the cut or fills when templates are involved or starts at the left and right end points of sections when using section files Note that in the command Stake Road which works with both sections and templates slope staking can be initiated from any desired point This allows for slope staking of interior central median catch points and slope staking of any side of an eventual divided highway being built in stages Slope staking can be interval based or accomplished based on where you are standing right now independent of station interval Alt
471. the outage there is the possibility of a small position jump when transitioning from RTK Extend back to RTK The coordinate transformation required to convert the local position into an ITRFOO position can be difficult and if not done correctly will cause the RTK Extend position to rapidly diverge from truth As such a GPS receiver capable of navigating in Starfire mode coupled with the ability to output the bias between these two sets of coordinates is the best approach to ensuring seamless operation Q Which Navcom products are capable of RTK Extend A Navcom s SF 2040 and SF 2050 product lines are capable of employing RTK Extend In order to be used in this mode each receiver base and rover must have the RTK option enabled as well as an active Starfire license Q Can a user define whether they want the RTK Extend feature to be active A Yes Each receiver is fully configurable to ignore or accept a variety of correction types As such the user may choose to disable the Starfire navigation ability making the receiver a primary host to RTK or vice versa Q What is Starfire convergence or pull in and why is it necessary to achieve advertised accuracies from Starfire A When positioning with GPS there are two types of error sources that affect the accuracy obtainable 1 the errors generated by the GPS satellite system and 2 errors created by the receiver when processing the GPS signal The Starfire system is designe
472. the range of the horizontal alignment All paths lead on to the navigation or stakeout some call it set out screen The Navigation Stakeout Screen When configured for GPS the navigation screen then appears SLOPE STK Pt 16 Desc 57TA94 19 65 HT N 960391 9451 E 1838222 724 7 955 0013 COff 16 448 HRMS 2522428718733 235 Sta 9 19 650 R10 131 OUT 6 32 FWD 0 35 Design Fill 2 000 1 from 957 225 Fill 2 224 0 841 1 for 1 869 Note that because the GPS reads continuously and models the ground surface the program calculates immediately where the catch point the circle with the X is located You simply walk right to it If the ground goes uphill or downhill as you approach the point then the X will move closer or move away until you are right on it As you get closer to the point within the stake tolerance distance the program will present a bullseye screen p402 SLOPE STK N 960388 0113 E 1838227 063 7 955 00 75 COff 16 435 HRMS 0 043 VRMS 0 090 Sta 9 19 978 R16 436 IN 0 00 FWD 0 02 Design Fill 2 000 1 from 957 225 Fill 2 218 2 000 1 for 4 436 When you are satisfied with the accuracy of the slope stake position you then touch S for Store or press Enter to take the shot In this case its time to drive the stake Interval and Non Interval Methods Impact Stakeout Screen The stakeout screens above are for the interval method In the non interval fluid slope staking where you can drive t
473. the screen you can isolate to only those points you wish to see by entering a distinct point range in the form 1 10 22 25 30 or a certain description This would isolate to points 1 through 10 point 22 and points 25 to 30 and other points are frozen Repeat the ISO command and enter the full point file range or all to restore all points Isolate Layer IL Select any polyline layer and isolate it to keep that layer Other polyline layers are turned off frozen but point layers are retained Use the Layer command to turn p458 layers back on as needed Aperture AP Controls the size of the rectangle area used to select points or polylines from screen Initially the size in pixels is 40 units for points selection and 10 units for polylines selection The routine displays the Aperture size dialog Aperture size D F Dipixelsi box used to select l ta Points fo UCS UCS User Coordinate System Indicator This toggles the visibility of the UCS icon shown in the MAP screen Find Point FND This command allows you to find a point on the MAP screen Enter the point you want to find and a zoom height If you enter a point that is not on the map the dialog will warn you and allow you to enter another point number p459 Find point based on Pt ID Desc zoom center height 50 000 Click Find and the SurvCE zooms to the selected point at the entered scale Scale Bar SB Thi
474. thin Stakeout Line to stake any point along the culvert with the cut fill calculated Although the command Stake Centerline found within Stakeout Line Arc will directly stakeout a particular station and offset to a centerline some users prefer to pre calculate the station and offset and assign a point ID then stake by point ID Station Store permits this pre calculation of points at any station and offset The very first screen within Station Store offers several methods of defining an alignment Station Store Define Line Define Alignment Define Arc 3 Points Define Arc PC PT value p327 The following screen is where you enter the station offset and elevation to compute and store a point location Station Store Starting Sta O 00 000 Ending Sta 0 45 466 Station 00 000 Offset J Elevation Point ID 1194 Store Description 0 00 000 LO 000 Pressing Enter will move through the dialog and store the point leaving the screen up for more entries while defaulting to the previous data and the nex t point ID The description is fixed as the station and offset but can be edited using the command Keyboard Input Transformation This command allows you to translate rotate and or scale points in the current job Any point drawn on the map screen will be updated automatically in addition to updating the coordinates All three transformations can be performed individually or all at once i
475. thod projects any shot onto the alignment perpendicular or radial in curves and prompts for the distance and direction to move to the alignment intersect point However only if you select Define Line as the method to define the alignment and you are set to total stations is there a Find Intersect to Line option which enables line of sight staking of lines This is often used by surveyors who are setting line in tree lines moving to gaps in the trees for readings then moving in out along the line of sight and driving stakes when perfectly on line Itis useful for any line or boundary staking such as property lines right of ways and construction lines For GPS only the Perpendicular method is available Total Stations The Offset to Line option is grayed out when the Find Intersect to Line method is selected and available only when the Perpendicular option is chosen p238 Stake Line Station Offset DULA Find Intersect to Line Find Perpendicular to Line Offset to Line Total Stations Define Line Point On Line Inters ect to Line The Intersect Method is used to set line by moving in or out at the current line of sight A major application is setting line where the line is largely blocked by trees or obstructions and you must set the line in gaps where you do have a line of sight Point On Line Prism Z Intersection Method A J eee ps Backsight Clear shot in a feeling ral Program instruct
476. times in any face You may also use multiple benchmark points any number of times in any face If you turn on Direct and Reverse for Resection in Configuration Sets tab robotic instruments will perform a D amp R automatically for remote elevation readings as well Results y 5 Average Station Elevation 101 9163 6 101 9700 00000 0 03539 101 91 6 101 9700 O 0000 0 0333 101 91 p202 e Results The readings taken on the benchmark are reported in the Results dialog All of the readings taken will determine an average instrument point elevation e Store Click Store to update the instrument point elevation A store point record will be recorded to the raw data file Orientation Robotics The term Robotics applies to Geodimeter Trimble 5600 Leica Sokkia and Topcon robotic instruments The Robotics tab has some variations per equipment type Sideshot Traverse Instrument Setup Remote BM Standby Settings PowerSearch Turn to Angle Status Standby Horizontal 10 23 17 zenith 91 49 03 Battery Low Use Arrow Keys to Turn Instrument Arrow Keys for Joystick ALT J will take you directly to the robotics dialog from elsewhere in the program The arrow key motion is sometimes referred to as the Joystick Speed Leica Tapping once in the direction you want e g up causes the instrument to move slowly two taps medium and 3 ta
477. tion is activated is to enter the Robotics dialog of SurvCE and attempt a power search If the instrument communicates but the power search feature fails the Ex tended GeoCOM option is not activated If you suspect that this is the case you can verify that the feature is on in the instrument using the following steps Power on the instrument Select the User button on the keyboard Select the F3 button for STAT Select list item number 3 for System Information Use the down arrow key to scroll to the bottom of the Instrument page Or OO OO p561 O Verify that Extended GeoCOM is on Defining the Port The Leica 1200 needs to know that you intend to use the GeoCOM interface through the external port The following steps will set the Leica to communicate with SurvCE Power on the instrument Select Config Select menu item 4 for Interfaces Arrow down to GeoCOM Mode and select F3 for Edit Select F5 for DEVCE Select RS232 Geocom Select F3 for Edit and verify the communication settings Baud Rate 19 200 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bit 1 O Select F1 for STORE O Select F1 for CONT and verify the following option on the GeoCOM Mode page Use Interface Yes Port Port 1 Device RS232 GeoCOM m Protocol RS232 GeoCOM O Select F1 for CONT O Verify that the only device active is RS232 GeoCOM and select F1 for CONT
478. tions can be performed using this tab in the calculator Memory functions are also available Calculator Standard Scientific Conversion Other Scientific Calculator Values can be entered on the X register by typing on the keypad The values can be rolled up and down with the up and down arrow keys and the Roll and RollD buttons on the screen The Enter key finishes the entry of a number and pushes the stack The C on the touch screen clears an entry Additional functions on the p332 screen can be obtained through touching the scroll lt and gt area of the screen Calculator Standard Pn ALi e Conversion Other Sumy Suri T 0 0000 0 0000 Y 0 0000 A 0 000 _ sin c tan a t Row ASIN ACOS ATan lt DMIS Roll lt C gt r Conversion Calculator Conversion values can be entered for various unit types and scenarios M to Ft This option provides for conversion between many units Enter a value in any field and press Enter to find the conversion value The following units are available in Feet Meters and International Feet Degrees Minutes Seconds and Gons Grads and Decimal Degrees p333 Calculator 4 Standard Scientific Conversion M Ft SO ZA HDAVD C Lat Lon SP Az Br gt Feet Meters 65 638811 gt Int l Feet 315 350431 DD MMSS Gons Grads 400 Decimal Degrees Solve e Slope Distance to Horizontal Distance This opti
479. to finish work to the more simplified Feature Code List that runs in SurvCE The Feature Code List in SurvCE handles Linework on or off Line Type 2D or 3D Layer Code and Full Text Description e Send Points The command allows for the sending of a range of points e Exit This command will exit the File Transfer Utility Note The following two options appear in the Data Transfer dialog only if detected or available e Infrared Transfer This command leads to a send and receive screen that works with the Window Socket IrDA server client objects only between two CE mobile devices This is a readily available data transfer program It works for example from Ranger to Ranger Please make sure you align your devices so that the infrared transceivers are within one meter of each other and the transceivers are pointing at each other For an easy connection it is preferable to start first the server the device that will receive the data file and after that p106 the client the device from which the data file will be sent e Bluetooth Transfer If the mobile device has a Bluetooth emulated serial COM port the user will be able to select it from the list and transfer data from to another device that has Bluetooth available Import Export This command allows you to import an ASCII file to job data or ex port job data to an ACSII file When you choose this command you will see a secondary dialog in which you will be prompted t
480. to populate if a point ID is selected e Desc Enter the point description e Review Readings This allows you to enable or disable specific readings prior to storing e Robotics Use this to control the robot RI Read Use this icon to take a reading p279 p 2 S 7 Store Use this icon to store the reading Configure Use this icon to setup direct and reverse settings and review options Configure Trig Level Avg Direct amp Reverse BM amp TP 55 STA Ww Review before storing C Store then Read Function of Enter key Read then Store C Read or Store Station Interval s0 Centerline C SurvCEDemoSpecial Data DEMd cl Profile C Sur EDemoSpecial Data DEMO pro Select Road W Use road files e Avg Direct amp Reverse This option will allow you to determine which readings take direct and reverse pairs only applies to Trig Leveling e Review before storing This toggle forces the Review Readings dialog prior to storing This is the same dialog that comes up when the Review Reading button is pressed except the Review Reading dialog has a Store Point button that stores the shown measurements p280 Store Level Data __ ee el Elev ON 91 50 og 7083 107 217 Pt ID 6 Bis Edit Reading ON OFF Results Avg Elev 107 217 Sel Error vert Spread 0 000 Min Elev 107 217 Std Dev 0 000 Max Elev 107 217 Trig Leveling Store Level Data 5 000 20
481. to the left followed by one curve to the right with the following information dine de id Start Super Pivot Sta 100 Sta 2200 ull Super Sta 600 ta 2500 ull Super 3 Left Right Sta 1400 ta 3500 End Super Pivot Sta 1900 Sta 3800 The first curve to the left goes through three stages as it pivots into full super 1 the right side pivots to flat 2 the right side pivots to reverse crown where the slope is the same across the template and 3 both the right and left sides pivot from the hinge point centerline into full super All of these key pivot points are entered in the superelevation dialog p379 Station 600 Station to begin full super Station 500 Station for super at mormal crown bn Station 300 Staton to begin super run in Station 100 Station to Begin Transition You enter all these key stations begin flat outside lane reverse crown full super both going up to full super and transitioning back down to normal crown Recognizing that the normal crown of 2 transitions from station 100 through a slope of 5 the transition is 1 per 100 feet assuming an even rate of transition Therefore a flat outside slope occurs at station 300 reverse crown at station 500 and full super at station 600 as shown You will need to compute these stations in advance These intermediate stations are entered in the superelevation dialog to allow for different rates of transition from n
482. tors The Resection D amp R will also apply to Remote Benchmark Reciprocal Calc The Reciprocal Calculation option has three settings No Prompted and Always It governs the calculation of the elevation of foresight points taken with a total station where a backsight measurement is also taken When set to Always the program will calculate the distance to the foresight point and delta elevation by combining the foresight and backsight measurements When set to Prompted the program will detect the backsight measurement and ask the user if the occupied point should be calculated using both previous foresight and current backsight If set to No the program calculates foresight points based only on the foresight measurement If for example you had a vertical difference of 1 2 going up to the foresight and then when you backsighted the difference was 1 0 the program would calculate the average difference 1 1 and would lower your occupied point by 0 1 on the fly prior to conducting foresights This is useful for multi setup topo work in particular where no further adjustment is anticipated For closed traverse or high precision work it is recommended that you run with Reciprocals off and use the adjustment options found in your office software or within Cogo Process Raw File in SurvCE Reciprocals because they re calculate your occupied point by combining the backsight with the prior foresight information should be used with care be
483. tructions for some of the lasers supported by SurvCE e Laser Atlanta Make sure your Laser Atlanta baud rate and message formats agree with those you specified in SurvCE Also make sure the laser format is set to Laser Atlanta Original LAIKA Consult your Laser Atlanta manual for instructions on how to do this Laser Impulse Make sure your Laser Impulse baud rate and message formats agree with those you specified in SurvCE Supported formats are IP200 and CR400 Consult your Laser Impulse manual for instructions on how to do this e Leica Disto Make sure your Leica Disto s baud rate agrees with those you specified in SurvCE Consult your Laser Impulse manual for instructions Sokkia Contour Make sure your Sokkia Contour s baud rate agrees with those specified in SurvCE Consult your Sokkia Contour manual for instructions e MDL LaserAce Using SurvCE 1 50 008 or higher you can use the LaserAce but should configure your peripherals screen to Impulse CR400 Using the MDL selection will invert the inclination Use 9600 baud rate Use a Topcon Sokkia data cable not a Nikon cable The laser must be configured to the same units as the job since SurvCE does not convert the measurement Depth Sounders Currently supported depth sounders are Horizon Hydrotrac Innerspace and Odom Digitrace If you have a different depth sounder contact Carlson Software to discuss adding support for it You can use a depth sounder with GPS
484. ts You may answer Yes and save point IDs for the start end PI PC radius point PT and any key spiral points found in the file In the same way a centerline that you load can be re saved with new coordinate IDs assigned to all key points as long as you make some change like adding a point number to one of the Pt ID fields for a CL Element If you answer Yes to Save Centerline Points the dialog box below appears If you have entered point IDs of your own choosing in the Input Edit dialogs use the upper option The lower option will auto number from the starting point ID without regard to any numbers you ve entered but will respect and not overwrite used points in the file Points are not stored to the centerline file itself so after loading a stored centerline no point IDs will appear s Save Centerline Points C SurvCEDemoSpecial Data SurvCe crd Manually Uses existing Point IDs and prompt for unknown Point IDs starting Point ID Automatically Uses sequentially unused Point IDs starting Point ID 1211 Station 0 00 0000 Northing 4959 8023 Easting 4942 2812 Starting point Draw Centerline Draw Centerline will draw the selected centerline on the screen All the zooming commands Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Window Zoom Previous and Pan are available to you in the Draw Centerline command The program will automatically zoom to the extent of the centerline when drawn If there are point numbers and polyline
485. ts options to Monitor Skyplot Offset and Store You can return to the Graph view by tapping the Graph button You can also temporarily view your points on the screen by tapping Map then tap Back to return to the text based data collection screen Note that the program will remember which screen you were in last Graph or Text and return to that mode of data collection automatically View Options The graphic view has all of the standard zoom icon as well as a view setting icon This icon allows you to change the way the graphical items will be displayed p28 e Show Only Last Stored Point ALT F This toggle will result in SurvCE only displaying the linework collected the instrument and backsight points and the last point collected This is a popular setting to reduce the clutter of numerous points displayed all at once e Freeze All This toggle will freeze hide from view the point attributes e g Point ID Elevation and Description Each attribute can be toggled off separately as well e Decimal in Point Location This toggle will adjust the text location so that the point location is the decimal point of the elevation e Redraw After adjusting the settings exit and commit your changes by selecting redraw e Set Color Attributes This button will allow users to specify the colors of the point text color units only Quick Calculator From virtually any dialog entry line in the program the command will go to the Calcu
486. ts that were defined by station and offset Update Points al Job Desc 101 970 101 970 0 000 CP CHIS 3 101 971 lt i gt W Use Adjusted Elevations Use Level Descriptions Store STA as Points Skip Existing M Save Report E Update Job Manual 1 Wire Example If you select the 1 Wire method of Leveling the graphic below may be helpful in selecting the options to conduct a simple level loop p284 Point 8 BM 97 00 97 05 You to your backsight and you up to your foresight and you nam e the points as you go You start by referencing a benchmark and you close the loop by referencing the starting point or a second benchmark After entering the example pressing the Edit Levels icon shows all the measurements made All the horizontal distances HD are shown as 100 because 1 wire leveling does not provide a horizontal distance Giving all the segments the same distance causes the level adjustment to give all the segments the same weight p285 Edit Levels Date 06 05 2007 Tirne 11 11 18 Rod 0 000 BM PB 2 97 000 Desc Bi4 BS Pt YON8 000 HO 100 000 Desc BMI FS Ptr YD 2 000 HO 100 000 Desc BS Ptr YD 10 000 HO 100 000 Desc FS Pte YOI12 000 HO 100 000 Desc BS Pt 8 YO 7 0O00 HO 100 000 Desc FS Pt 6 VO 10 950 HO 100 000 Desc BEM EM Pta 2 97 000 Desc BM Pressing the Process icon shows the results Review File Processed i 05 05 2007 11 17 i 14 jLength
487. ual GIS prompting as shown in the figure immediately above New attribute dialog Remove deletes any highlighted GIS attribute Up and Down reorders the sequence of GIS attribute prompting Save stores input or edited GIS prompting and exits to Line Layer drawing properties p513 Defining GIS Prompting Feature Code Name No spaces GIS title for database Codes Special codes e g Date Time Lat Long GIS Prompt Including spaces full name for GIS Default Value Most common GIS value default value Set Lets the operator highlight and select the default value if there is a List of attribute Values Type Offers 4 options CHAR INT REAL and Code Code Type will default to character type corresponding to special Codes Codes can be Char Int or Real automatically Req Requisite required entry Operator cannot leave any GIS prompt empty when this field is set to Yes To add GIS attribute prompting for List Values select the Add button within the New attribute dialog as shown immediately below The figure below that shows the New value pop up box The operator inputs after selecting Add again for each possible material e g macadam concrete brick stone cobbles and so on Hew attribute Name MATERIAL Prompt jRoad Surfaca Default Value List Values P char x Reg Remove p514 Hew value Cancel MATERIAL Macadard The data input for all GIS List Values is shown
488. ulates the intersection of the extended zenith Vvertical angle with a vertical line from the base point to determine the elevation Reporting includes the elevation of the target object as well as the elevation difference between the prism and the target object Steps to take a remote elevation reading are as follows 1 Select Remote Elevation from the SURVEY tab of the main menu 2 Confirm your orientation and re shoot the backsight as necessary 3 Press Enter to observe base point see the figure below Point the instrument toward the target and press Enter p290 Remote Elevation Press Enter to Read Base Point cnc 4 Press Enter to shoot target elevation see the figure below Sight instrument on the desired point such as a wire or top of pole or point on a building and press Enter Remote Elevation Press Enter to Read Target Elevation Cancel Back in the REM ELEV screen your angle zenith and distance are shown along with the remote height and remote elevation REM ELEY AR 270 00 00 74 85 O0 00 SO 100 3820 Rem Hgt 8 7489 Rem Elv 115 7191 e Read Icon This allows the user to take additional shots above or below the previously defined base point Pressing the Enter key will also repeat this p291 command e Store Icon This button stores the current target offset point to the job file e Configure Icon This takes you to the Configure settings
489. ur easily However this can be done as well Collect the GPS Locations with Averaging Using the Survey gt Store Points routine specify your point ID It is good to use something that will relate to the original known point Example if the known point for the first control point is 1 then you may want to collect the measured location as 1001 Use the average reading icon lt A gt to collect several epochs of data at each point Typically when using a 1 Hz receiver 10 to 30 readings will be collected to ensure that the RTK solution is consistently reporting the same position for 10 to 30 seconds On a 5 Hz receiver the user may want to collect 50 or more readings as 50 readings would be 10 seconds Create the Localization File Once the data collector has points that represent the known local coordinates and the measured data for these points the localization file can be created Select Equip gt Localization gt Add to enter each point into the localization file Local Point The first dialog presented to the user will be the Local Point dialog shown below Enter the known local coordinate point ID or coordinates If the point does not exist in the CRD file and coordinates are entered into this dialog do not enter a point ID Select OK when the known local position has been defined p532 Local Point Cancel Please enter local coordinate values You may use a point number from the current or control job Point F
490. usage So the Dist button refers to the selectable mode you will go to not the mode you are currently in In Rapid Tracking mode the store icon will always take a Rapid Tracking shot and pressing enter will take a Rapid Tracking shot if Enter is configured to Store only to mimic the store icon Pressing the read icon will always cause configured reading to be taken as will Enter when set to Read and Store The next figure shows the Rapid Tracking mode which follows the movement of the prism by taking rapid distance measurements much like RTK GPS STORE PNTS Fed Ei x HTO SDO 7 6706 Note that in the above figure we are in Fast read mode for a configured reading and in Rapid Tracking mode for display and quick readings by S Clicking the No Dist icon leads to angle measurement only as shown in this figure p125 STORE PNTS BLO x Pt 1192 Desc HT 0 ARSFOSL 41 24 91958 55 Foresight Backsight Prism Offset This drop down menu provides a list of standard prism offsets Whenever a prism constant is changed a note is written to the raw RWS file When you select one of the prisms from the list Circle Mini etc the value that 1s shown in parenthesis is the actual value sent to the instrument i e 0 0 for Circular 17 5 for Mini If you select 30mm or 40mm we send 4 4 and 5 6 respectively 30 34 4 and 40 34 4 The user may also type in any value they cho
491. ut also including 10 11 57 and 16 70 in this case The Offset from alignment to X Section option lets you in effect use an alternate parallel centerline at a left negative or right offset from the main centerline Unless the Raw Geodimeter method is used a station warning screen is used if the rounded station is not in the list or pre selected stations A capture of station 1075 would round to 1080 but since 1080 is not in the list you will be warned before storing A station of 1667 would round to 1670 which is in the list leading to no warning screen Since the rounding was set to 10 in this example data collected at 45 to 55 would round to 50 station 1053 would not round up to 1055 and therefore only even 10 stations will be collected to begin with So the additional Station Tolerance which rounds the collected station data to the listed stations will not activate When OK green check mark is clicked from the Store Sections dialog the program immediately proceeds to a point collection mode with continuous presentation of station and offset if running GPS or robotic total stations p418 A SCT SURV N 12660 74 363 E 2065013 682 7 304 9944 HRMS 0 037 VRMS 0 101 ta 10 50 42 R31 50 Storing Points using GPS There are two methods for storing points in real time GPS mode Press the S icon at right or pick Alt S or simply press Enter The binoculars icon will bring up the Monitor Skyplot di
492. vey the original geodetic positions or that you set up your base on a known GPS position measured previously using that localization data set Good survey practice would include checking into known positions to verify the quality of your hand entered GPS localization and verifying low residuals in the Localization screen With all data pairs used for both horizontal and vertical control none turned off the resolutions for this data set will appear Add Method 3 From Raw File This allows you to use a point from the raw data file that has been previously collected via GPS This is just like Read from GPS except you are recalling a point previously measured and stored in the raw file For this to work you must have the base p175 antenna in the same position as when the original raw file was collected or you need to set your base antenna over a known coordinate from the original survey and enter those original coordinates and the new base antenna height within the command Configure Base Delete Allows you to delete the selected item from the list Note that it is not necessary to delete a localization point if you simply want to avoid using it You can disable both the horizontal and vertical component of the point but keep it available for use later Edit Allows you to edit the selected item in the list It will display the northing easting and elevation of the localization point which can be changed On Off Allows you to remov
493. w centimeters change very slowly As a result once Starfire is initialized to a known position it will stay within 1 2 cm of truth for many minutes but within an hour or so will begin varying from the true position by a greater amount Testing has determined that once initialized the Starfire position will stay within 1 2 cm of the true position for at least 15 minutes and in many cases even longer depending on the number of satellites visible and their geometry Every time the receiver reestablishes the link to the base station and is able to compute an RTK position the 15 minute period is restarted Thus RTK Extend will coast through several back to back outages as long as none of them are longer than 15 minutes Q Does the base station send more than standard RTK messages to the rover A Yes The RTK Extend base outputs an additional correction which allows the rover to resolve any biases between the Starfire and RTK solutions The rover p618 makes use of this information to seamlessly transition between modes of operation Q Can another manufacturer s receiver or Navcom receiver without Starfire capability be used as a base station A Entering precise ITRFOO Starfire coordinates for the base position will allow the rover to make use of the RTK Extend feature although at a reduced level of performance In this mode of operation RTK Extend may only be able to coast through short outages of a few minutes Depending on the length of
494. wn coordinates a backsight point will be calculated Note that when a zero coordinate backsight point is encountered the program will prompt the user to Enter Coordinates or Use Azimuth This prompt appears only when the Use Azimuth option has been selected If you choose only to Set Angle the backsight point will not be calculated but is still a viable entry in the raw file Some raw file processing programs make use of this backsight point with zero coordinates as a backsight azimuth reference It is recommended that you use distinct new point IDs for all foresight points Don t re use a backsight point ID that served as a dummy point to initiate the set zero backsight unless you plan to re use it for the same backsight again Orientation Remote Benchmark This is a command for total station applications only in which the elevation of one or more remote but known points is used to compute the elevation of the occupied Station The Remote BM tab is the 2nd to the right in the Backsight screen The main screen is shown below p201 Sideshot Traverse Instrument Setup LEMERY Robotics Occupy Point 6 Instr Height 5 0000 fi Results Oc Pt Elev 10197000 ft Store BM Point 6 Target Hgt 47 ft BM Elev ft confirm NEZ Read You have the option to transfer the elevation from a single benchmark by taking a reading on it any number of
495. written to the raw RWS file When you select one of the prisms from the list Circle Mini etc the value that is shown in parenthesis is the actual value sent to the instrument i e 0 0 for Circular 17 5 for Mini If you select 30mm or 40mm 4 4 and 5 6 are sent respectively 30 34 4 and 40 34 4 You may also type in any value you choose In this case we will send that value exactly unmodified to the instrument e 23 1 360 Leica Model e 4 4 Mini 360 e 34 4 0mm e 0 0 circle Standard Leica round prism e 17 5 mini Leica mini prism e 34 4 ReflTape Equates to zero offset wall surface e 4 4 30mm Other manufactures Sokkia Seco e 5 6 40mm Other manufacturers Laser Pointer Ideal for indoor or dark evening surveying this feature causes the instrument to emit a red beam It is often used when doing reflectorless work and makes a red mark on the wall floor or object being surveyed This is usefule for confirming the position prior to the shot The beam should not be directed into someone s vision or eye p550 Power Search Turn to point in stakeout Use ATR Motorized When this option is disabled many other options will also not be available These options are ATR Power Search Turn to Point in Stakeout and Turn to Vertical point in stakeout ATR Auto Target Recognition For the TPS 700 TPS 1000 and TPS 1100 this option will find the prism after you point in the a
496. xit Thales Ashtech File Types amp Logging Static for RTK Points p308 The Thales Ashtech receivers log data into various files on the receiver during Log Static Data These files are all contained in a U file which is what the File Manager will list from the PC Card When these files are decompressed on the computer intended to do post processing using the Ashtech Download program they are split into the following files an almanac file a B file raw data a D file description and antenna information an E file ephemeris data and an S file session information D files are created automatically from the antenna and site information SurvCE creates O files automatically on the data collector from receiver information The O file is named the same as the coordinate file name with an obn extension and placed in the data directory This file is needed for GNSS Studio as it contains vector information However this information can only be added if the point stored has a GPS fixed position To store an RTK point into the O file go into Store Points with the GPS position fixed Enter information for point site 1d description site attribute and antenna height and click the Average button to store an OBEN average For every reading taken by GPS Average an OBEN measurement will be taken to be averaged into the final measurement The final measurement is stored in the crd file and the O file on the data collector as well as the
497. xporting SurvCE GIS Data as ESRI SHP files p529 L MENU wife VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS DAF File Layer p Lands ML File d SHE File F Import SHF File FLT From DF Quick Inport SHP Preferences Export SHP File Command Alases Muick Export SHP QUICK Sare SF OSE Mi Eyit 18 Wd boi hT E d i Help EP taoga E1 StagPe Expor to 5HP Current SHP VA Beach Select New SHP Iv Export All POINTS gt 9 ARCS gt Z POLYGONS gt 1 i Include special attributes Remove Arcs offset cutoff fo 1 IY Include Z Coordinates These final two figures above display the exporting of our VA Beach MAP and GIS data The ESRI SHP file consists of 9 points 2 arcs and 1 polygon closed polyline Only one point point 4 has UP GIS data Two arc polylines and one polygon have EP GIS information attached Note that Include special attributes is checked This adds to polyline arcs and closed polygons the polylines length and area to the GIS data automatically Process with Export All checked stores the p530 VA Beach three SHP files automatically to a user defined subdirectory and a fourth SHP file with 8 points without GIS data Tutorial 5 Standard Procedures for Conducting GPS Localizations This tutorial is intended to assist users with the recommended localization method for SurvCE Other methods can be used and it is up to the individual users to determine which is best for them File Extensions
498. y Difference m Orientation Instrument Setup p195 The instrument setup dialog is displayed upon entering every active survey routine unless Prompt for Total Station Setup is clicked off within Configuration You also go directly to the Orientation screen whenever you click the tripod icon in all survey and stakeout routines So if Prompt for Total Station Setup is clicked off but your occupied point has changed then within the survey routine tap the tripod icon lower right to update the occupied point and other setup information Occupy Point 1 iZ Instr Height 5 15 ft Backsight Point 21 EZA Ell Backsight Brg 54 53 43 W Target Hgt 6 5617 fi M Use Backsight HT for Foresights Confirm NEZ Configure When simply confirming the backsight information if the OK button green checkmark is active you can simply press Enter or click OK to move on to the active survey screen If the OK button is grayed out that means the program has detected a new occupied point or the first one of the survey Then you must click the Backsight screen and take an angle and or distance measurement to the backsight When configured to robotic total stations the Tripod icon takes you first to the robotics control screen for quick adjustments and then back to more foresights From there you can tab to the backsight screen to access all of the backsight functions then easily return when you are finished t
499. y can be followed by rover based localization The known point must be found in the RWS file in a form that includes its Lat Long a previous GPS measurement p137 This Lat Long just as with New Position options is used to establish the base position This method requires that you are working within an existing job that has a raw file including Lat Long positions for the points being used This next figure is an example of the prompting Surveyed Point Please enter a point ID from the current or control job for which raw data exists Point From File 3 al Like the other options this continues on by showing the corresponding Lat Long for the coordinate and allowing the user to save the result in a reference file Use Local Coordinates If you have localized using option 5 Localization within the Equip menu you obtain a dat file This localization file is used to convert any Lat Long reading into a local coordinate By the same token you can take a local coordinate run it back through the dat file and obtain a Lat Long for the base receiver setup That is the procedure used in this option p138 Local Point Please enter local coordinate values You may use a point ID from the current or control job Point From File Local Northing ft Local Easting Po ft Local Elevation PO ft When OK is pressed you will be asked to load the associ
500. y entered coordinates will not be stored in the coordinate file p259 Point Definition Point ID Northing pO Easting pO Elevation PO Read Existing point IDs can be entered into the Point ID field These points must be defined by coordinate data As soon as you enter the point ID press enter and the coordinates will appear in the Northing Easting and Elevation fields Ex isting points can be selected from a points list by selecting the Point List icon Highlight the desired point and press enter or tap OK Point Details EE we x 6 9912 60 20115 37 101 970 CF 668 9954 886 20098 63 101 081 CF 1001 9908 65 20026 32 91 408 CF 1002 9869 11 20070 50 99 370 Fz 1003 9856 99 20043 96 96 610 Fl 1004 9847 63 20023 31 94 688 P1 1005 9840 09 20007 33 93 389 Fi 1006 9830 64 19957 0606 92 8971 FI 5 100f 9847 18 90 340 2 m Existing points can be selected from the map screen by selecting the map icon To p260 select a point tap it on the screen If two or more points are close together on the screen you will be asked to select the intended point from the point list Lastly the points can be taken with the total station by pressing Read After you have specified the two defining points for the building face plane SurvCE will determine the available solution One of the following messages will be displayed in the dialog box e Vertical SurvCE has enough data to fix a vertical plane the v
501. y storing a known position to a reference file Then you can initialize the Starfire system with this position upon returning to the site by performing a QuickStart At the end of the first day verify that you re receiving Dual Frequency Starfire corrections RTG or WCT by entering the Navigation Status utility Enter the QuickStart menu and press Read GPS Be sure to physically mark this position in some way so that the exact position can be returned to later When you have a GPS position click Save to save the position to a reference file When you return to the site first ensure that you re receiving dual frequency Starfire corrections and that you re set up on the position marked the previous day Then enter the QuickStart menu and choose Load to select the previously stored reference file Press Initiate to input the loaded starting position to the receiver To disable an input position press Disable Note that if the input position is inaccurate using the QuickStart routine will slow down the processing of acquiring an accurate position p614 Reset Receiver Use this tool to reset your receiver soft reset e Factory Reset Use this tool to reset your receiver factory reset The buttons available in Receiver Utilities depends on the capabilities of the receiver Ifa Starfire license is not active the QuickStart button is not shown Check RTK is a very useful tool It tells the user why they aren t in RTK fixed and i
502. y the grid to ground multiplier For base or one point rover localizations Read GPS applies After converting the LAT LONG from the GPS to the state plane coordinates and computing the grid and elevation factors the Scale Factor is applied as the final adjustment to the coordinates This adjustment is used on the X and Y coordinates but not Z In GPS the Scale Factor is applied by dividing the distance between the coordinate and a base point by the Scale Factor The coordinate is then set by starting from the base point and moving in the direction to the coordinate for the adjusted distance The base point is the first point appearing in the GPS Localization option If there are no points specified in Localization then 0 0 is used as base point The Scale Factor can be entered directly or calculated using the grid factor and elevation for the current position When using the current position the program will read the LAT LONG from the GPS receiver The scale factor is then calculated as State Plane Grid Factor Elevation Earth Radius A scale factor can be used to make grid to ground conversions between identical points This is useful if you want to adjust the lesser sea level distances of GPS to the ground greater distances measured by total stations whenever you are above sea level The grid to ground scale factor is lower at higher elevations because it acts as a divisor the scale factor is always defined as ground to grid
503. y the arc length First you pick the arc end point and then you can enter the arc length The minimum arc length is given to you Sec Allows you to specify the second point and end point to define the p461 arc Rad Allows you to specify a radius length First you pick the arc end point and then you can enter the radius length The minimum radius length is given to you 2D Polyline Road This command allows you to draw a 2D Polyline This command is similar to the polyline command described above with the following additions The options activate an additional prompt that allows you to plot line segments at a 90 degree deflection angle from the last line is a right deflection and is a left deflection Len This option prompts you for the length of a line segment Enter the length and a line segment will be drawn that length using the same bearing as the previous line segment If the previous segment is an arc then the new segment will be tangent to that arc MAP VIEW Ex DP line ak A n lt End gt cmd Aoki ao 3D Polyline 3DP The 3D Polyline command is similar to the 2D polyline command It will even draw arcs but will create a polyline on the screen with many vertices at different Z elevations which are linearly interpolated around the arc If the start of the arc is point 17 at elevation 100 and the end of the arc is point 9 at elevation 90 then using View List you would see intermediate vertice
504. yors and engineers prefer not to start centerlines at station 0 If the job backs up or needs to start further back along the centerline this method will leave you with negative stationing There are three centerline forms as set in Job Settings Units A starting station of 1500 can be displayed as 1 500 metric US style showing whole kilometers left of the as 1500 000 pure decimal chainage common to Europe and as 15 00 feet US style sometimes also used on metric roads in Canada often referred to as station 15 plus 00 In all cases you would enter it as 1500 but it would display in the correct format after pressing Enter For example you would see 1 500 0000 if configured to kilometers The program will also accept use of the in the entry of the station and will convert to the configured form after you press Enter Northing Easting If the northing and easting are not recalled from a starting point number you will need to enter the northing and easting for the start of p345 the centerline It is not necessary to enter the northing and easting if you use the Pick PL pick polyline option for defining a centerline since the starting coordinates of the selected polyline are automatically used and would overwrite anything previously entered Load This command allows you to load an existing centerline for review or edit Edit Use this button to edit the highlighted element Delete Use this butt
505. you can turn off Auto Load Map and re enter the program Then add polylines use IDXF to import maps polylines then click on Auto Save Map and Auto Load Map and you will store and recall only the new linework Map VIEW HE FILE VIEW DRAW COGO TOOLS Cmd Layer 0 p49 Note The above graphic display is non default In the Map screen the normal display includes pull down menus These can be disabled by selecting Preferences under the Tools menu The screen shown below will appear with display options The pull down menu format is recommended since it contains the same graphic space and also responds identically to keyed in commands such as PL for polyline Preferences Command Bar style Menus ON C Menus OFF ee ee U U FILEVIEW DRAW iCoOmo TOOLS Cmd PL JLayer 0_ _ Graphic Screen style Normal O Reverse ty 000 Start Recall Job Road Files This command only applies to Stakeout Centerline Offset Stakeout and Point Projection in the non roading version of Carlson SurvCE When enabled this option will recall the last roading files centerlines profiles templates superelevation files etc used in road stakeout Routines in the Road menu such as Stake Road and Slope Staking will automatically recall the last used roading files Recall Job Localization Enabling this option is advisable if you are working on the same job with GPS equipment for several days It allows you to set up the base in the s
506. ystem Name Zone 523 Ellipsoid GRS80 a 6378137 tt Mm Scale ppm 1 f lo dx E m rotx o cy E mo roty o j dz o mo rotz o s If the values you have are from WGS84 simply reverse the sign of p166 each value positive becomes negative and vice versa You will need to save the system to a file You may save the system to a sys file or a csl file Sys files contain only one system definition Csl files contain multiple system definitions Both files are ASCII text files using OpenGIS WKT Well Known Text format Coordinate Projection CSL Files 2 57 S Files Mame Load File To load a user defined coordinate system from a file Click under the Edit Projection List button under the SYSTEM tab in Localization Select Add User Defined and then Load File Change the File Type at the top to sys or csl depending on the type of file you are loading A sys file will be associated with each job You can load the projection last used on a survey job by loading its sys file Select your file and hit OK If you have selected a csl file you will be asked to choose from a list of system definitions found in the file For the csl type you may verify that the details of your system have been loaded correctly by clicking the edit option TS Tab The TS tab is where you specify the total station scale and adjustment options p167 L

SurvCE v. 2 Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents